ã€ŠKami-Samaã€‹


 prologue

    I was dreaming. At first there were only erratic images, chaotic and incohesive as only the subconscious mind is capable of creating. But then my vision cleared, my reasoning returned, and I saw I was in a dream. Before me was a large old man, bent and grey. On the man¡¯s head was a heavy iron crown, weighing down on the man oppressively. The man¡¯s face was downturned as if the crown was too great a burden. The crown rested on long grey tangled hair that flowed around like hanging moss, and the crown was plainly ornamented with an inscription I couldn¡¯t understand. He wore a large purple robe, faded and worn. In his right hand, he held a scepter with a sapphire gem on top, and he used it to support himself. His left hand was empty.

    I was puzzled at the sight before me and I wondered who this person might be. Looking around, I saw only blackness surrounding him, a void except the man at the center. I looked back again and noticed he was chained down with foreign characters, and though he struggled, he could not break off the containment. The man was sitting upon a throne of oak and iron, strong and sturdy enough to last for millennia. I was about to question the figure when he started letting let loose a painful moan. It was a dreadful noise, and it shook me, for it was full of pain and despair. Soon, the wail was so intense that I fell down as though struck. I shut my eyes and covered my ears to try to protect myself.

    When the sound suddenly stopped, I looked up trembling and was amazed to see a that great and vast city had appeared before me; the old man was gone. I saw that it was made of gold with walls that rose out of the land like a mighty mountain, miles high. The city ran like the ocean; the towers, palaces, and bulwarks were the waves in an endless sea. Even from where I stood I could not comprehend its size, nor its people who worked and toiled inside the city that never ended. It shone with the glory of the heavens after a refreshing rain, and its brilliance was like that of a star, clear and radiant. In the center of the city, past the many gates and keeps that protected it, was a palace, and it was like a temple. Huge and towering, the palace was practically city unto itself. Its walls had seven layers, each one made with precious stones more valuable than the one before, and the majesty of the temple made me shield my eyes from its brilliance. I wondered at what could ever rival such beauty and power, what alive could compete with this city¡¯s glory and power? But as I lifted my eyes again, I saw a dark and vast shadow in the west.You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.

    The shadow grew and took shape being a great and terrible array of foes, like a many headed dragon, proud and omnipotent, bringing blasts of great heat and frosts of bitter cold. The foe set itself up against the city, and I saw that the previous strong places could not withstand its might and fell. The walls crumbled at the dragon''s touch and the keeps and holdings were shred like leaves in 0he wind.The destruction was great, and the proud towers burned and fell while the dragon did as it pleased. I cried out in despair at the destruction of such a beautiful city and wondered what could be done to save it. Who could stand up to such a creature?

    Then I heard a clear trumpet, then a thousand more ring out, and I thought at last a righteous host was challenging the dragon. I looked to where the sound came from with hope and saw that it emanated from the temple. I thought that surely the god will save its city! But as I continued to look, the sound turned into a shriek. The sound struck me hard, and the inhabitants of the city fell down and wailed at its cry. The shriek continued and I could not bear its noise, but neither could I look away as suddenly the temple split in two from top to bottom, transforming into the jaws of a wolf and revealing layers of sharp fangs. It was from that maw which the snarling and shrieking sound emanated. I looked on in horror as the remnants of the city itself turned into a ferocious beast, with the temple as its head, the houses its scales, the palaces its limbs, and the towers its claws. It came against the mighty dragon and the roars and bellows alone paralyzed me. The vision shook and the sky was distorted as the two creatures fought in wrath. As the two creatures fought, the last small vestitures of the city where wiped away, and I felt the heat of their blazes come to destroy me as well. They came at me with such terror and power that I flung up my arms before me and I knew that I was to die.

 Chapter 1

    Drake awoke startled and sweaty, his hands clenched onto the too warm blanket over himself like he did when he was a child, scared of the imagining his little head was capable of creating out of the dark corners of his room. The course wool blanket Drake had and the tough uncomfortable matt he was on were both unfamiliar to Drake and annoyed him last night as he tried to sleep. Drake paid them no mind now though, as instead he fought a panic the followed him out of his dreams. Even after a decade of these consistent nightmares Drake was still unable to shrug off the feeling of intense horror and gut wrenching fear that always accompanied him when he awoke. His father claimed that his dreams were in some way prophetic and meaningful. He interpreted their consistent nature due to a possible amount of seer blood in Drake rather than any traumatic experience haunting his son¡¯s unconscious mind. Drake¡¯s father bragged to his peers that perhaps his late wife had been distantly related to the prophets of the past and that the talents had coalesced into his third son.

    Drake didn¡¯t care what caused the horrible dreams, seer blood or not. He just wished they would go away. No amount of praise from his father changed that...

    Drake took several deep breaths and resisted the urge to empty his stomach up next to him, as he often did on these sporadic mornings. This morning though, he would be defiling his own tent space. Drake tried to calm down. He used several meditative techniques he had been taught long ago from his tutor, forcing steady breaths, relaxing his muscles, and eventually slowing down the beating of his heart. He worked quickly too. iIt wouldn¡¯t do to be seen by anyone this way.

    Drake stared at the ceiling of his tent, the morning dew laying sweetly on its underside threatening to drip down on him. The tent was a simple, practical tent, bereft of many of the luxuries Drake usually had in his abode. To many of the men outside though, he was already privileged enough to have his quarters to himself. It was standard in their camp for the soldiers to share their space but, as a son of the noble lord in this place, it would have been intolerable to accept that. Through the thin material of his tent he could hear the men already awake and working in this morning, packing, cooking, bathing, and all around preparing themselves for the day. Although Drake was technically a part of the regiment of men, anybody who knew anything would allow Drake the right to sleep in as much as he wanted to. Such was the nature of their standings.

    After calming down and cursing his own weakness and shame, Drake threw off the blanket on top of him, revealing his somewhat flabby body to the cool morning air, the sweat evaporating off him giving him slight chills. The biggest giveaway of Drake¡¯s noble status was in fact his body, it showed off the ability to eat well without working hard. He stretched disgracefully with a soft groan, pushing the dream forcibly from his mind, before standing up in the cozy complete tent. Drake donned his clothing quickly, putting on his leggings and rare red tunic that belonged as a symbol of his family. He hesitated a moment, then decided to don the light chest armor he had been provided with before exiting the tent and greeting the low morning sun.

    ¡°Good morning, Sir.¡± A man stated when Drake exited the tent.

    ¡°Good Morning,¡± Drake replied carelessly, acknowledging the suited soldier standing guard outside his tent, fully equipped out in chain mail, helm, shield and spear. The guards position here was mostly ceremonial, but important nonetheless. Any harm that could have possibly come to the Lord¡¯s son would undoubtedly be avenged on the encampment. Drake took the man¡¯s position for granted, but cheeks flushed slightly, thinking that the guard had probably heard his thrashing in the nightmare from his point here.

    Drake nodded at the man, dismissing him and the guard then moved away without another word. No tiredness showed on his face, but Drake knew he was up all night protecting him. Now that Drake was up his job was done and he disappeared, presumably to his own bed. Drake did not care.

    Drake took a second and looked down upon the sprawling encampment of tents, men, horses and wagon that were displayed before and around him. He had been told by the captain here that never before had such a large group of soldiers gathered for any purpose other than war. It had in fact been over 50 years since any last meaningful skirmish with other noble neighboring lands. After squinting in the early sun, Drake moved forward. Smells and sounds of the morning grew stronger, as if the encampment was a beast slowing rising from its stupor. Sentries switched positions and perimeters shifted over, and Drake could hear the light clanging of the metal ringing in the air. Drake walked down the spiral aisles of the camp seeing men washing, cleaning, and shaving over their small fires. Drake made his way towards to officers tent, near the center of the camp, ignoring all others that passed by.

    The Officer tent was large and open with a patterns and shapes sewn into the fabric of the walls. A couple men stood outside to bar the way of unwanted personal andt he looked up as Drake approached but then looked away quickly, neither affirming nor condemning his presence. Drake likewise ignored them as well, thinking of only the food he knew he would be able to obtain there.

    In the mornings, the tent was set up with tables and seats for the food provided from the mess, but at all other times of the table those were cleared away and the makeshift tables returned to their original purpose of desks and offices. The large tent was mostly empty now, except for three men sat closely with each and conversed as if there was important matters that needed attending to. They looked up as Drake came in and immediately their gazes turned cold. Two returned to their conversation, but the third let a sneer stay on his face for a few seconds before returning as well. After that they did not pay Drake any mind.

    Without hesitation Drake attended to his own stomach, snatching the biscuits and hot gravy from the food line. Soon after he filled his plate though, another character entered the tent and scowled as he saw Drake finishing up his collection. Unlike the others though, he strode forward and said theatrically, ¡°How could the guards let in this common soldier into the officer¡¯s tent? Have they fallen asleep at their posts? And even more so, look at how shamelessly he partakes! One would think that he must have worked hard all night to have such boldness!¡± At the newcomer¡¯s words the three men sitting together looked up, finally giving their attention to Drake. They let their irritation show on their faces.

    Drake scowled, looking back at the man towering over him. The man had long dirty blond hair that was clean and well kept along with a clean face, strong chin, and overall an aesthetically pleasing countenance. It was clear though that the man had been up all night from the dark shadows under his eyes and the grimy nature of his face. Drake replied back stoically, ¡°I have as much right to eat from the food my Father provided as you do, Lieutenant Arent.¡±

    Arent showed mock surprise. ¡°Why, if it isn¡¯t our young master, Drake! I almost did not recognize you with that armor over your red stained clothes! I must apologize for my behavior then, I did not in any way mean to suggest that you were not worthy of eating from the same table as us officers who had to work hard and earn our keep. Your status alone is enough for all to bow low to you and offer up our own shares.¡± Arent dropped his mockery and asked slyly, ¡°Allow me to be the first to offer then, Young Master, can I give you my portion of my meal this morning? I may have been awake all night attending to my duties, but I know that a full belly for your nobleness is far more important than my empty one.¡± Arnet held out his hand earnestly, as if to give away his position.

    Drake hesitated for a moment, unsure, before replying, ¡°That will not be necessary, eat your own food.¡±

    Arent snorted with laughter, ¡°My merciful master, how kind you are. Your benevolence will be worshipped throughout the history, I tell you.¡±

    Drake scowled at Arent, then turned away, taking a table far away from the others. Arent continued to chuckle as he got himself his own food and then languidly moved up to the other three officers, they too smiled and chuckled with him. Drake ate alone, trying to ignore the actions that Arent had displayed.

    Soon, others entered the tent as well and it became bustling as they moved about in the still soft morning. Half of them were actually getting a meal before they were to go to bed while the rest were also breaking their fast in the morning. All of them though ignored and avoided Drake, leaving him unattended to at his table.

    Arent soon finished his plate as we off to go find his own bed, but he stole one more tight glance at Drake at he got up. His eyes narrowed as he witnessed the kid slowly eating his fill without a care. He glanced around quickly before winking at his three companies and then strode up to Drake proudly, sitting down in front of him.

    ¡°Young Master,¡± Arent said, ¡°How has your first week with the troupe been? I imagine it must be very different from your usual Hall with your Father?¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t answer at first, wondering if there was a way out of this without engaging Arent. But after seeing Arent¡¯s attentive gaze, Drake replied shortly, ¡°It fine.¡±

    ¡°I am pleased to hear that,¡± Arent replied mockingly, ¡°I was afraid the shock of such a change would prove too difficult for a man of your stature. While the rest of us are used to clothing and feeding ourselves, since you had never had to do that I had thought you would have starved to death in the first few days.¡±

    Drake¡¯s face flushed and he put his half eaten biscuit down quickly, ¡°I am perfectly capable of taking care of myself.¡± He snapped.

    ¡°You have a good ability to adapt then,¡± Arent nodded, ¡°It is important for a noble to adapt to new environments, ones other than lordly halls, high ceilings, fancy dresses, and fine wine. Being able to adapt to a commoner life is high praise for you.¡±

    Drake¡¯s face turned ugly. ¡°Watch your tongue, it would not do well for you to continue to mock me.¡±

    ¡°Or what?¡± Arent sneered, his face finally turning aggressive, ¡°We both know you were sent out here as punishment. The only benefits you receive now is the ability to eat with the other officers.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s not true,¡± Drake denied forcefully, ¡°My father sent me here to supervise his men a this work on this historic discovery, this has nothing to do with any punishment!¡±

    ¡°Supervise??¡± Arent replied maddeningly, ¡°Supervise us? The only thing you supervise is your own needs and desires. Do you know, we broke through the final layer of the barrier early this morning, that is why many of us stayed up, but what were you doing? Sleeping, no doubt, in your personal tent with your nice warm blanket and comforters. Let me ask you, what tasks have your father given to you in your role here, what reports have you written on your progress to him? You¡¯re not here to supervise, you¡¯re here because your Father needed a babysitter!¡±

    Drake stood quickly, his hands clenched in fury, ¡°You dare insult me! I don¡¯t need my father here to put you in your place. Myself alone will be enough, I¡¯ll have you lashed for this disrespect!¡±

    Arent only laughed, ¡°Did I hit a sore spot? What did you do to embarrass your father so much that he exiled you out here? Oh wait, if i recall correctly there was a certain rumor I heard regarding an event that took place recently at your Father¡¯s estate¡­¡±The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    ¡°SILENCE!¡± Drake roared, pointing his hand out at Arent forcefully, ¡°You are forbidden from speaking to me from this point forward, neither are you to be in my presence!¡±

    Arent rolled his eyes, ¡°What kind of arrogant fool are you to be saying such things now??¡±

    Drake swelled up in rage, but another man, older and more exhausted looking than Arent, stepped forward and put a hand on Arent¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Do not bully our Lord¡¯s son, so, Lieutenant. It isn¡¯t proper.¡±

    Aren¡¯t looked back at the man and immediately cooled. ¡°Yes, Captain,¡± he replied without hesitation. He got up and and moved away, not before giving out one last scowl at Drake before exiting the tent.

    The captain sighed, and then said to the still smoldering, ¡°Please forgive the lieutenant, young master.¡±

    ¡°He is to be punished for his disrespect,¡± Drake replied still standing straight, arrogant and angry.

    ¡°He has had a long and tiring night,¡± the Captain replied soothingly, ¡°pay it no mind. I will give him proper disciplinary action when he wakes up.¡± Drake grumbled but said nothing and took his seat back. He glowered at the table, still red faced and did not touch his food.

    The Captain sighed again and took the same seat Arent had just vacated. ¡°How are you adjusting to life here in the camp?¡±

    Drake¡¯s eyes flashed, ¡°I am not in the mood for bantering, Captain. The sooner I get out of here, the happier you and I will both be. We both know I am to suited for this type of work. It was a mistake for Father to send me here.¡±

    The Captain paused, before continuing, ¡°I do not know, not to contradict you, young master, but i think you should give you and your Father more credit. Your Father is a great man, he does mean the best for you. It would be wrong to think of this as punishment to be out here with us, but rather it would be his encouragement for you to learn and grow with us. He too, had spent time with us as a young kid, and so did both your older brothers. It is a common thing to have happen.¡±

    ¡°My brothers wanted to come out here,¡± Drake responded quickly, ¡°I did not. Only fools believe that value only comes out from being a military officer, fools like my brothers. What they lack, I already have.¡±

    The Captain nodded, ¡°I am sure. However, there are potential benefits to be had, all the same, if you are willing.¡±

    Drake pecked at his food and said, ¡°I don¡¯t have any intention to playing into my father''s ploy. I plan on finishing out my time here without bothering anybody.¡±

    The Captain said suddenly, ¡°Don¡¯t say that, come with me today to the excavation site, you can¡¯t spend your whole time here at your tent or wandering the camp. At least, I can¡¯t have you do that, what would I say to your father if I was so irresponsible to you?¡±

    ¡°Tell him what you want, I don¡¯t care.¡± Drake replied, aggressively, ¡°Tell him that I was weak and cowardly and that I¡¯m not fit to be a soldier. Maybe he¡¯ll stop pushing this on me.¡±

    ¡°Put that is not true,¡± the Captain replied, ¡°You are neither weak nor cowardly.¡± he paused, considering his words carefully before continuing, ¡°you just have different priorities.¡±

    Drake didn''t reply, but stared down at his plate instead, wistfully poking at the biscuit with his utensil.

    The Captain looked arguing with himself for a few moments, before saying quickly, ¡°Lieutenant Arent may have mentioned it, but after three months the mages have finally broken through the last barrier and we are able to get at the main site early this morning. It should be beyond anything we¡¯ve ever seen in our lifetimes, we haven¡¯t had a true excavation in this region for over 50 years, and I know your Father meant for you to bear witness to it, otherwise he would not have sent you to this specific company of men.¡±

    ¡°I do not want to go.¡± Drake said shortly.

    ¡°Don¡¯t be so hasty,¡± the Captain quickly said, ¡°Like i said, this is a once in a lifetime event, you shouldn¡¯t let your stubbornness with your Father stop you from experiencing this.¡±

    Drake replied cooly, ¡°My father does not really have any expectation of me here.¡±

    The Captain remained silent for a moment, the busy men in the background eating and drinking and talking filled the space. The Captain finally spoke, his voice low, ¡°I know what it is like to be young and to search for your meaning in life. Of course, all of us were young at some point. As a noble though the pressure on you is very great, i know that to be true. Your brothers had found their place much easier that you have, but that does not mean that you will not find your place. You are here for a reason Drake, and not just because your Father sent you here. For such a historic event such as this, i do not believe that any of us are here for no reason.  I feel certain something extraordinary will happen for us when we finally get our hands in the ruins.¡±

    Drake looked stoically at the Captain, and the Captain coughed lightly into his hand before pulling out his trump card. ¡°It would be an honor for a representative of the house of Foendell to be present when we enter.¡± He added with strain.

    Drake gave the Captain a knowing look, but, after a moment, Drake reluctantly nodded. ¡°Wonderful,¡± the Captain said dryly. He got up with a smile, ¡°When you are done eating head back to your tent and grab some supplies for the day, I¡¯ll send someone to escort you to the premise. You should find this as an enlightening experience, as we all are expecting to have.¡±

    The Captain saluted the young master and then walked away shaking his head, wondering how Drake could be so different from the rest of his kin whom he had also known personally. After the Captain left no one came to bother Drake anymore as if his bad mood seemed to create a distinct miasma to be avoided. He finished his meal in peace before dumping his plate and exiting the tent. The camp was fully awake now, accept for the men who had gone to bed. Drake thought about what Arent and the Captain had said to him as he walked slowly back to his tent.

    Despite everything, Drake truly did not understand why his Father had sent him out here. It was true that his brothers had done the same, but they wanted it, and relished it as they looked forward to the accomplishments they would be willing to make inside the military. As for Drake, he knew he was not cut out for such a life and he always prefered indoor activities, mostly involving nobody else. He had also made his preferences clear to his Father, telling him there was more to being a man of their house than simply martial prowess. Surely it was fine for Drake, his two older brothers had more than enough ambition to cover him as well.

    But here he was, relegated to a dirty, smelly, and cramped platoon of men his father controlled as if a turn of the moon in the camp would suddenly change Drake into the fit, fiery young man his father wanted him to be. If for no other reason, Drake wanted to resist his Father¡¯s plans for him. Drake¡¯s stubbornness was the only value he shared with his kin.

    Drake reached his tent and hoped that the man the Captain had sent to escort him would never come, but a minute later after Drake relieved himself outside in the disgusting public lavatories, a crisp and eager young soldier stood right next to his tent waiting patiently for him.

    ¡°Young Master!¡± he cried out after seeing him, his eyes so sparkly Drake wondered what was wrong with him. ¡°I am Growan, I was sent to escort you to the ruins!¡±

    Drake eyed him coldly. Grown looked to be about the same age as Drake, but was bright and energetic. Drake begrudgingly picking up the last of his necessities and resigned himself the request the Captain gave him. ¡°What are you so happy about?¡± Drake grumbled softly.

    Not softly enough apparently, because the young man replied, ¡°Because I have been assigned an escort for you I now have a chance to see the ruins first hand!¡± He continued excitedly, ¡°I can hardly believe it, I am just a common militia soldier you see, I am usually assigned to perimeter duty. But luck is with me today, I am actually going to be able to witness the first viewing of the ruins. Do not worry, I will fiercely and properly guide you the entire way.¡±

    Drake snorted, but didn¡¯t reply. He had been escorted places his entire life so it was nothing new. Unlike the normal escorts though, this one was particularly noisome¡­

    ¡°Young master, my family have been farmers on your lands for generations,¡± Growan chatted gaily as he strode ahead of drake evenly among the aisles of the camp. ¡°So it is also a double honor to be with our benefactors. Your father is a great man to have given me in particular the opportunity to join his soldiers, even if only as a common milita. The pay is good and will with the progress the mages have made on the ancient ruins, I will no doubt be released back to our land in time for the harvesting in a few weeks.¡±

    ¡°I certainly hope this will be over quickly.¡± Drake replied with double meaning. He  was not convinced of his Father¡¯s generosity, but understood what Growan was saying. This discovery of the ruins on this edge of the his father¡¯s land was monumental as such ruins as these were bound to have priceless treasures inside of them. But the value needed to be protected until the resources from the ruins could be secured so his father had gathered up a local militia to help support his main troops as they excavated. No outside interference was expected, but with the reinforcement of the militia, such thoughts from his Noble neighbors would be deterred.  Growan was undoubtedly one of these men.

    ¡°What do you think awaits us down in the ruins?¡± Growan whispered conspiratorially to Drake as they continued to pass by rows of tents, circling towards the center of the camp where the excavation was taking place. ¡°Divine artifacts, maybe?¡± Growan hawed. Drake didn¡¯t answer. As it was, the young commoner was breaking social norm to speak directly to Drake in the first place and in the end, so Drake didn¡¯t feel the need anway. Growan answered himself. ¡°Maybe, yeah! Or instead, ancient scrolls, or awesome spells for our magicians? Other ruins have revealed such wondrous things, right?¡±

    ¡°Yes they have.¡± Drake could not help but reply. Such information was standard and the excavation of ruins was the stuff of legends. Most, if not all, of the powerful artifacts held within the royal treasuries or private noble storehouses had come from the ruins left behind by the ancient dwellers of this land. That being said Drake hadn¡¯t given as much hope to the expected exploration and was not nearly as excited as Growan, nor as any other resident of the camp. The last significant discovery was already in the far past from Drake¡¯s perspective and although small discoveries had been made since, he doubted a  legendary discover would happen here. He only hoped that what was gotten out of it merely covered the expenses his father was taking in order to excavate it in the first place. Besides the hiring of the additional militia, the magicians he had gotten to break through the barriers would have not come cheaply. In the first place, they do not take kindly to being ordered around by humans in the first place. No doubt, Drake surmised that his Father must have promised them a portion of the artifacts, if any, that were to be discovered down below.

    At length, they reached the center of the camp, which also served as the entrance to the ruins. several guards stood out front with menacing eyes, and they glared down at Growan as he approached. Growan, immediately stopped chatted and cowered slightly as the guards raised their weapons defensively to block their entrance. Their intentions were clear.

    Growan looked back nervously at Drake for a second before reaching inside his sleeves and pulling out a piece of light parchment. He spoke as he handed it over to the nearest guard, ¡°These are my orders to escort the young master down to the excavation.¡±

    The guard looked that orders belligerently and then slowly handed it back. He eyed Drake before  he made a gesture towards the men behind him. They lighted up their stances. ¡°You¡¯ll need this amulet for protection,¡± the guard replied professionally. He beckoned a subordinate forward who handed him a rough necklace. He looked at it and handed it over to Growan who touched it gingerly. ¡°The Caverns are full of minor enhancements, the annoying kind that will entrap young soldiers like you. These amulets were made for our troop to protect us from them when we work in the ruins. You will give it back to us when you leave.¡±

    ¡°Yeah,¡± another guard said with a mischievous smile, ¡°we wouldn¡¯t want you falling for an illusionary woman in the cave, only to have your life juices sucked out of you, would you?¡±

    Growan paled and quickly put on the necklace over his head, letting it hang openly on his chest. He then looked over at Drake and said, ¡°What about one for the Young Master?¡±

    The first guard laughed loudly. ¡°The Young Master already has the best protection possible, a gift from his father, no doubt.¡±

    With a faint smile, Drake held up his right hand for Growan to see. On it was a small delicate ring made of silver. The house crest was stamped on it and intricate details and characters were carved on it as well. Drake said casually, ¡°Father had to hire Mages from another territory to perform the spell work on this, there were none here who were powerful enough. It can even offer some protection to those near me too, so if we get into any trouble down there, be sure to stick close to me.¡±

    Growan nodded up and down earnestly in a mixture of awe and dread. Drake only laughed to himself.

    ¡°You may proceed,¡± the first guard said, gesturing them forward and Grown hurriedly passed them by, looked back anxiously to see Drake leisurely walk forward. Together, the two descended into the dark mysterious cave.

 Chapter 2

    ¡°By the Grace of His Breath!¡± Growan explained loudly, using a phrase that betrayed his commoner upbringing. Drake did not say anything, but was also impressed by the sights around him as they both entered the cavern that was the entrance to the ruins. The long narrow tunnels they walked in was lit periodically by torches and Growan has also pulled out a torch as he led the way. From the soft light of the fires Drake and Growan were able to see sides of the, only to see that it was not like any cave they had ever seen before.

    The sides of the tunnel were smooth as though polished, and flat, moving downwards and upwards to form perpendicular angles with the ceiling and floor. On the ceiling Drake could vaguely make out figures of men and some symbols along with them but he could not discern their meanings. The floor was decorated too, with subtle carvings as though the floor was not meant to be walked on.

    The two walked forward without pausing, although Growan swung his head left, right, and up with his mouth agape at the sights. He asked loudly, ¡°Do you think that all the ruins are a magnificent as these?¡±

    Drake had no idea, and only with trained restraint was he able to keep from being a slack mouthed fool like Growan was. Still, his eyes wandered around as well, comparing the magnificent skill it must have taken to construct  such a place to the skills he had witnessed during the construction of several of his family¡¯s estates. He doubted this place could be reproduced.

    ¡°All the ruins bear their own kind of majesty.¡± A loud excited voice called out behind them. The two stopped to turn their heads around and saw a small torchlight coming down after them in the tunnel. Soon, the woman who held the torch appeared too, a full gray head of hair and large bright eyes her two most significant features. She carried with her a large bag and around her neck was an amulet similar to the one that Growan wore.

    She stopped to catch her breath with he came up to Drake and Growan, clearly, the old frail woman had down her best to hurry down the path. But she stood stood brightly and nodded solemnly to Drake, ¡°Greetings young Master, I am Kloenoll, I¡¯m from the Royal Tabernacle.¡±

    Drake¡¯s eyes narrowed and he replied quickly, ¡°The Royal Family does not have any rights in this land own by my Father.¡±

    Kloenall laughed and waved her hand, still catching her breath from his journey, ¡°I know, i know, that is why they sent me, only a poor researcher, and not a priest. I am here only to study the history, the Royal Family knows that this territory belongs solely to the house of Foendell.¡±

    Drake kept a frown on his face, but did not press the woman further. Growan stood politely off to the side. ¡°Would you like join us on our trip down?¡± Drake asked reluctantly.

    ¡°Yes please!¡± Kloenall replied eagerly. She added with a laugh, ¡°It would be much better for an old woman like me to be accompanied by you two strong youngsters in case i keel over.¡± she laughed again before finally settling herself. ¡°We should go!¡±

    The three started again, with Kloenell actually in the lead and marching steadily. She did not waste time looking around and move moved with a quick purpose. Drake could see Growan fidgeting as though in some inner struggle. Drake sighed and said to him, ¡°You have the right to speak.¡±

    ¡°Thanks you, young master,¡± Growan replied without hesitation. He asked loudly, ¡°Sir Klownall, may i beg you for some questions regarding these ruins? you said you had been studying them for a while now?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Kloenall replied happily, ¡°This is my third excavation i have been able to witness firsthand, the second whom i¡¯ve had the joy of watching as they progressed. The things we are able to learn about the past form these structures are too incredible, it is my life¡¯s greatest joy to be able to be see this excavation.¡±

    Growan seemed to digest his words with awe and did not speak again. Drake asked after a moment, ¡°What have you learned from this sight so far then? What do those pictures mean out there?¡±

    Klownall looked back at Drake with a mischievous glint in her eyes causing Drake to scowl. ¡°Need I remind you,¡± Drake continued, ¡°The knowledge gleaning from this sight also belongs to our family.¡±

    Kloenall just laughed again, ¡°Indeed you are correct, young master. Then let me tell you what i have learned to answer your question. Nothing!¡±

    Slightly taken aback, Drake replied irritably, ¡°Nothing? What does that mean? Some scholar you are.¡±

    ¡°I have learned nothing, it is true,¡± Kloenall replied happily, ¡°But what it is that I haven¡¯t learned has given me much more knowledge than I ever dreamed of before!¡±

    Drake scowled again, keeping it permanently on his face. The three turned a corner, looking at a deep stair well. Past an impressive arch separating the tunnels and the lower regions. Along the stairs were now intermittent soldiers, each carrying torches and guarding the way. They looked up at the trio but did not hinder them.

    ¡°I am not in the mood for riddles, Sir Kloenall.¡± Drake said in what he thought was a dignified voice.

    ¡°But that is exactly what this place is, a big riddle!¡± Kloenell continued brightly.

    Drake merely ¡°hmphed¡± and looked away, no longer expecting a clear answer.

    Growan seemed to have gained back his voice and bit eagerly on Kloenells bait. ¡°What do you mean, Sir Kloenell?¡±

    ¡°Well, how well do you know your history?¡± Kloenel asked back, briskly turning into teaching mode. Growan was suddenly tongue tied because of course, he had no formal education outside of his brief and regimented militia training. History was not taught there. To Growan, the excavations were nothing more than buried treasures to be found in any open field.

    Drake did know more, but had decided he no longer wanted to play at Kloenel¡¯s game and he did not speak.

    Kloenell, chuckled again and then said, ¡°I see, then listen carefully because this knowledge found from a private tutor,¡± she said looking over at Drake for a moment before turning back, ¡°Or found at our tabernacle would cost you more than your year¡¯s wages.¡±

    Growan¡¯s eyes widened and he sputtered out, ¡°Th- thank you for generosity!¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re welcome,¡± Growan said sincerely, ¡°Here is something you can gnaw on for the rest of your days over the field. And do not be ashamed of that, it is the original riddle that we scholars have been gnawing over ourselves for generations and is the very reason I came here! You see,¡± she added his voice getting husky and low, ¡°On the most simple and basic level, we all ask ourselves this question. Why did the powerful civilization from ages ago that left us these magnificent ruins and wondrous artifacts disappear? Where did they go? If there were so powerful as their breadcrumbs they left us suggest, then how could they simply disappear?¡±

    Kleonell shrugged and turned back to look at Growan who appeared to have never had such a deep thought before in his life as he had on now. After a moment when it seemed like an answer was expected from him, Growan replied unsteadily, ¡°Perhaps a powerful enemy?¡±

    ¡°Perhaps,¡± Kloenall replied appraisingly. Then she turned to Drake. ¡°What do you think, young Master? Surely you have given it some thought before now.¡±

    Drake frowned, but answered appropriately, ¡°Several theories include Growan¡¯s answer, but also the idea of a plague wiping them out, or commercial warfare. Some have even suggested that our god wiped them out directly for some reason or other, but the priests strongly deny that.¡±

    ¡°And to even suggest such a thing would be considered sacrilegious,¡± Kloenell replied very seriously for a change.

    Drake shrugged and added, ¡°As a scholar you should appreciate the need for an open mind. But to move on, one of the more fantastic ideas is that the civilization simply became so powerful that they simply either became gods themselves or ascended to some other form of existence.¡±

    Kloenell laughed raucously at Drake¡¯s last suggestion. ¡°Such an idea could only come from the nobles,¡± she added between chuckles, ¡°to dream of such a thing. The barriers between the mortal and immortal realms are much higher than that i am afraid.¡±

    Drake scowled once again and added, ¡°I did not say these were my theories, only that they are some prevailing theories.¡±

    ¡°I am sure, I am sure.¡± Kloenell added lightly. ¡°but in the end, by careful study of the ruins we have found so far we have been able to determine that none of these theories could have happened! I won¡¯t go into any details but take my word for it here when i say that  although they had superior tools in this ancient past, they were much the same as we are today. There were humans, like us, and magicians and priests, like the magicians and priests we have today. Additionally, they, like us now, are also closely connected with our neighboring territories, through trade and culture, similar to us. Once we understood that to be the case, our academy soon sent people to our neighbors with whom we had traded with before and also currently trade with now to see what they could learn about our past! And do you know what they learned?¡±

    Drake thought it was a rhetorical question, but the silence hung in the air for several septs down the stone staircase. Finally, Growan asked, ¡°What did they find?¡±

    ¡°Nothing, of course!¡± Kloenell replied, throwing her hands in the air wildly. ¡°Their records show the same information that we were able to dig up over centuries of excavating in old ruins! No new information, just that suddenly, for unknown reasons, the ancient civilization we had here just disappeared. No mention of it ever came again, no mention as to what could have happened, no mention of any plague or army, or even, ¡° Kleonell snickered, ¡°Ascension. There isn¡¯t anything saying that they mysteriously disappeared in the first place! It was as if the recorders of that time simply forgot about the existence of our territory.¡±

    Kleonell let that information sit on Drake and Growan. The staircase they had been walking on abruptly ended, ending up on a sudden landing. In front of them was another tunnel and Drake asked, suddenly nervous, ¡°How far does this cavern go?¡±

    ¡°Seems excessive, doesn¡¯t it?¡± Kloenell asked knowingly, ¡°But it is only a little further ahead.¡± Drake looked back at Grown who had pulled out his orders again from his sleeve and nodded back to Drake, confirming Kloenel¡¯s words. ¡°But this brings us back to my riddle that this place gave me.¡± Drake nodded wearily. ¡°Since we could not gain any information from our neighbors, and besides they would not give us free unrestricted access to their records of course, we could only study more closely our own records, the ruins in other words. Hence, we were so excited by this new discovery, we thought we had a chance to learn more about our history.¡±

    Suddenly Kloenell sighed as they continued down the long and now very narrow tunnel. ¡°But things here are outside of my expectations. For my first few weeks here I could hardly believe what my eyes were seeing and the reports I had given back to the tabernacle were met with ridicule. But what could we do? Your father would not allow any additional members of our team here, so i could only continue to report the truth I saw and convince them i hadn¡¯t gone senile.¡±

    ¡°This is your new riddle?¡± Drake asked, interested despite himself.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.

    ¡°Yes,¡± Kloenell replied waving her hands around, ¡°All of this, everything here from the architecture, structure, symbols, paintings, everything here does not match anything we¡¯ve ever come across before. I am proficient in ancient linguistics and this writing is definitely not our language. I do not study the rocks,¡± she said knocking his hand against the stone walls, ¡°But at this point I can only guess that these too does not belong to our territory. I believe that this place is not a ruins excavation as we understand it to be. Whoever made this thing, it wasn¡¯t our ancestors, so far from helping us solve our own riddle it instead poses a completely new one to us. One that is beyond me of course. I have resolved to simply record everything i see, hear and feel in hopes that those better than me can theorize better answers.¡±

    Drake contemplated Kloenells answers before asking, ¡°Is what you say true?¡±

    Kloenell raised her hands in the air again, ¡°I swear on the Holy Shroud, it is all true. I am not so humble as to exaggerate shortcomings.¡± Her voice slipped down sadly.

    ¡°Have you told the Captain of this?¡± Drake asked seriously. ¡°If what you say is true, he should know.¡±

    Kloenell nodded, ¡°I have told him, but I do not think mind does not care to understand the subtleties of the meaning. There is still a good probability of finding the artifacts he is looking for here and that is what he is mostly concerned about. The Mages you have hired are excited too, it is rare to see them so. They would not care to stop to listen either. It does not matter much anyway i am confident we will witness a most extraordinary discovery regardless.¡± They reached the end of that last tunnel, only to have open up into a large open room, almost as large as the ballrooms in Drake¡¯s Father¡¯s palaces. ¡°I certainly will not miss this chance.¡± Kloenell breathed.

    Drae was stunned at the sight, he could not have imagined such a large open space could exist this far below ground.  Hundreds of small torches were used as light for the room, but they could not together even reach the height of the ceiling. The walls were smooth like the wall of the tunnels and they too had wonderful faint pictures but the entire room was a sphere with its walls curving around so that no corner existed.

    But all those details were meaningless before the real treat of the room, the pearl for the excavation. At the far end of the room stood two glorious doors, so tall and majestic as if they alone were able to contain behind them the all the floods of all the oceans. Drake stared dumbly, as so did Growan, almost forgotten behind them. Kloenell¡¯s eyes twinkled.

    Inside the room already were many soldiers, officers and men conversing and waiting, and alternately giving evident looks towards the door. Drake asked wirely, ¡°Somehow, i always imagined that these excavation involved more dirt and digging. This one seems to just present its treasures in the most obvious way.¡±

    Kloenell laughed. ¡°They usually do, but do not say that this is too easy or you might offend the magicians. I understand that the barriers here have been most difficult to cope with.¡± as She talked she casually pointed towards a small group of people who were situated with the officers. They wore distinct purple robes and had beady blue eyes. For the most part they looked human but Drake new that any interaction with a magician made it clear they they were not so. A few turned to look at them when they entered but turned away immediately without care.

    The Captain was also in that group and had looked over to Drake too. When he saw them he hurriedly motioned him to come join them . His eyes were full of weariness and concern and he seemed to be argueing with the mages.

    Drake stepped forward to join the captain and Kloenell and Growan followed nonchalantly. Growarn was Drake¡¯s escort after all and was supposed to be with Drake while Kloene just did as she pleased mostly. When Drake entered within earshot of the group he could hear one of the magicians hissing loudly, ¡°Who do you think it was that put in the effort to get us here in the first place? You pitiful humans? No, it was us, us with our divine blood. Do not pretend to be over us, Captain. The barriers are starting to rise again Captain, I have told you, there are spells on this place we cannot break. At any moment I fear that this whole place will be transported elsewhere and will be lost to us!¡±

    The Captain spoke back angrily, ¡°Perhaps I do. You are being blinded by your desire here, but do not forget that you are under the pay of the house of Fendell and i have been appointed as their representative. You say the barriers are started to erect again, and that is your field of expertise. I am here to safeguard the interests of my Lord.¡±

    Drake pulled up next to the Captain in time to catch a part of the magicians sneer, ¡°And does your lord¡¯s interest include losing this opportunity due to your stupidity? We are not cheap you know, wonder if the house of Fendell can pay for our services after coming home empty handed from this?¡±

    The crack at Drake¡¯s house stirred him and he immediately butted in angrily, ¡°Perhaps you are right magician, perhaps the house of Fendell cannot afford such insubordinate mercenaries.¡±

    The magician looked shocked to hear Drake interrupt the conversion but then immediately turned to rage when he heard the entirety. His brethren seethed in reply, ¡°Who dares insult our order¡­¡±

    The Captain quickly entered in again before Drake could say anything, ¡°This is our Young Master, a member for the house of Fendell and the son of your employer. Please watch your tongue.¡± he turned to Drake and said quietly as the magicians fumed, ¡°We are in a delicate situation right now, please restrain yourself. You should know it is not good to provoke a magician.¡± Drake nodded and stepped back slightly.

    The lead magician stared down at Drake directly, letting his companions argue and rage for him momentarily, his beady blue eyes looking to pierce through Drake. Drake shivered lightly under the gaze and looked away. The angry conversation continued, but Drake distanced himself of the proceeding, staring at the large ornate doors.

    Several minutes later, the Captain detached himself from the group, letting his subordinates sort out the leftover problems. He came up to Drake with a sigh.

    ¡°What is going on?¡± Drake asked curiously, ¡°Why are the magicians so angry?¡±

    ¡°I want to delay opening that door, that¡¯s what.¡± The Captain said flatly, pointing toward it carelessly. ¡°However, the magicians are insisting that the barriers they had pulled down for the last two months are going to start rising again. They don¡¯t like the delay and they really don¡¯t like the idea of having to do all that work again.¡±

    Drake pondered his words and looked at the door again. He asked, ¡°Why do you want to delay opening it. Aren¡¯t all the treasures inside?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s too unexpected,¡± The Captain replied bluntly, ¡°The only information we got about this place was whatever the magicians decided to share with us as they plowed forward through the magical barriers. They knew this place existed with this huge foreboding door, but all they said to us last night was that they broke through to the end.¡±

    Drake looked at the door but reply back simply, ¡°So what?¡±

    The Captain actually chuckled halfheartedly, ¡°Just look at it! It¡¯s a huge ass door in the middle of what supposed to be an ancient ruin! I don¡¯t like it, all my instincts are telling me to hold back.¡±

    ¡°You are saying this only because you feel that way?¡± Drake asked, disapprovingly.

    ¡°As a soldier,¡± the Captain said wisely, ¡°I have learned to listen to my instincts. But also, no, I have brought someone here to help me with me decision.¡± he suddenly winked at Drake he looked back confused before he looked back and called out, ¡°Sir Kloenell, can I speak with you a moment?¡±

    Kloenell had been holding up a parchment up to a near wall and was seemingly tracing the symbols onto it with charcoal. She looked up as she heard her name and then with a sigh, put down her tools and came over to Drake and the Captain.

    ¡°Sir Kloenell,¡± The Captain asked pointedly, ¡°what can you tell me about this door?¡±

    Kloenell shook her head, ¡°Nothing!¡± Drake rolled his eyes while the Captain gave her a sharp glare. ¡°Let me elaborate,¡± Kloenell said quickly, rubbing her thin hands together. ¡°I have never seen anything like this in any of the previous ruins I¡¯ve been to or heard about. These characters,¡± She said, pointing up towards the top half of the doors, ¡°Are not in any language used here ever, or in any of our neighboring territories. There is nothing here that I recognize that could help indicate the reason why these doors are here or what might be behind them.¡±

    The Captain nodded and turned to Drake with a soft smile. He replied, ¡°There you have it. Before this was a simple excavation of ruins that everybody is familiar with, we all know what to expect. But now we have something completely different. Before I decide to charge in I want more information and I¡¯d also like to discuss this with your father before I put his men at risk.¡±

    Drake frowned. He asked, ¡°But there is probably artifacts in that room. And didn''t I hear that magician say that this whole place will disappear soon?¡±

    The Captain glanced over at Kloenell who shrugged. The Captain relied easily, ¡°There could be nothing in there, or worse. And yes, they had mentioned that as a possibility before. That would explain why we hadn''t discovered this place before now. But they cannot give me a timeframe as to when I might actually go away again. It could be later today, it could be next year, it could be a century for all they know. This is simply not a risk I can take right now.¡± Drake didn¡¯t reply, but looked back up at the doors. The Captain snorted, ¡°you look disappointed. Were you not telling me earlier how much you wanted to get out of here, how you were not interested?¡±

    ¡°You were the one who told me this would be a meaningful and extraordinary experience. And now I am here, how can I not be disappointed?¡±

    The Captain smiled ruefully. ¡°That is true.¡±

    Suddenly, the lead magician called out to Drake with a loud voice. ¡°Young master Drake. Tell me young master, tell of the house of Fendell.¡±

    Drake looked back at the magician that called out to him. He stepped forward and cast a glance at the Captain.

    The Captain asked darkly, ¡°What are you doing? What is the meaning of this?¡±

    ¡°¡®tis merely a question for the Young Master,¡± the magician replied back with a sneer, ¡°Can the young Master not even speak for himself?¡±

    On cue a bit of anger came to life inside Drake and he stepped forward and said, ¡°I can speak for myself, what is it you want, magician?¡±

    ¡°Tell me about your house? is it Powerful? Is it feared? Does it have a long and rich history of courageous fighters and men and women of action?¡±

    Drake could hear faint mocking in the magician¡¯s voice and he gripped his fists tightly. He replied back with a steady glare, ¡°Yes. And those who know it, know not to trifle with its members.¡±

    By now, all the conversation in the group had ended and their attention was on Drake and the Magician. The Magician replied back with a tight smile, ¡°I am sure. And I suppose you must consider yourself one of those Men. With your flabby appearance, amature handling, and bloated tongue, as the third son of your Father, I am sure your achievements and merits speak for themselves. I am sure that is why your Father sent you here rather than your two formidable Brothers, your worthiness as a successor to his house.¡±

    Drake felt stunned at the unprovoked and cruel personal attack. Had he not been wearing the ring his Father had given that protected again spells, he might have thought he had been a victim of their sorcery. He dimly felt the Captain¡¯s hand being placed on his shoulder and a soft warning in his ear but he was not able to pay them any heed. He replied back through gritted teeth, ¡°You dare insult me, you thinly veiled mercenaries. What land do you hold to be able to say such things to me? You are far below to be able to say anything, you are simply blind sailors of the lands, going wherever the money takes you. I am from the Noble house of Fendell and we do not suffer disrespect from any person, divine or mortal.¡±

    ¡°Your actions speak for themselves!¡± the magician said with an evil smile, ¡°All mortals, especially the nobility, are like sheep to us, they bleep bleep their words of dignity, honor, and courage. But when when faced with the real opportunity for greatness they stand idly by, unable to recognize the world for what it is.¡±

    Again, Drake felt blindsided by the remarks of the Magician, not so much enraged anymore but dumbfounded. He had literally never before been abused with such words. He could belatedly hear the Captain and other men yell back, defending Drake and the house they had all sworn loyalty to, but he hard a hard time grasping the situation. Dimly, Drake couldn''t help but wonder, ¡°What is this magician getting at?¡±

    The Magician roared out his name in order to be heard over the clamoring, and Drake could tell he had used his magic to amplify his voice and overpower the sounds of the soldiers. As if a spell of dizziness was  broken, Drake suddenly felt his senses zooming in on what he was saying, ¡°Young Master Drake! Right now you have the chance to prove yourself, not only to your Father, your brothers, and your whole house, but most importantly, this is your chance to prove to yourself that you are indeed worthy to be of the Fendell name. Take the courage that you know runs in your veins and wield it like a mighty horse! Let it take you to where your destiny is calling you to. You are part of something greater right here Drake. Do not let this chance escape you or you will be doomed to your mediocrity for the rest of your life!¡±

    There was silence in the air, but Drake saw that it was only the result of the spellwork, he could see soldiers yelling and pointing, but he could not hear the sounds. Drake thought in the back of his mind that while the magician couldn¡¯t perform spellwork on Drake directly, or even on the soldiers directly due to the amulets they wore, they could work their magic on the air surrounding them.

    All Drake could see now was the magician bearing down on his his bright blue eyes looked at if the heavens were with him. When Drake did not reply the magician immediately pointed down his finger at Drake accusingly and began shouting, ¡°Coward! Coward! Mud! Slime! Filth! Bastard Child! Unwanted son! Lowly sheep! Coward!¡±

    Drake could still feel the Captain next to him, speaking to him, but although the Captain was within the sphere of influence that Drake¡¯s ring provided, Drake couldn''t hear him.

    As the string of one sided insults continued to pour down from the magician, Drake finally snapped, his feelings of rage and humiliation catching up to him. He shoved the Captain away from him and screamed back unreasonably at the Magician. ¡°I am NOT a coward!!¡±

    ¡°Then prove it!¡± The Magician screamed back.

    Drake whipped his head around, his face red and his eyes bulging.  The Captain looked back in mild horror, dreading Drake¡¯s next words.

    ¡°OPEN THE DAMNED DOOR!¡±

 Chapter 3

    There was a large fire in the distance that Ashton could see. It was easy to spot, for in the warm dark world where Ashton lived there were no stars, no moon, nor sun from which light could come down and illuminate the land. For Ashton, the only light in his black life were the fires his tribe lit in the village center and the small lanterns used to light the small furtive paths that flowed around the village and then ended abruptly at the village boundary, which squatted at the foot of the mountain. Beyond that, there was only the dark forest that no member of the village had ever dared set foot into and lived, or so the stories told that had been passed down from elder to child for ages back. Only the fresh river stream that flowed down from the mountain, providing them with its life-giving waters, knew what lay beyond the river boundaries. That, and the few occasional traders that passed through at irregular occurrences. Ashton was taught that nothing good existed beyond the mountain.

    From his post in the fields near the base of the mountain, Ashton looked up from his harvesting work and saw to his amazement the strong unnatural flicker of light in the distance, a light that suggested the whole land was ablaze with the eternal fire. He was so amaze he stopped his singing right away and stood up, the light dancing in his eyes. Large dark moths flittered about him in the tall pasture.

    ¡°Why did you stop singing, my son?¡± Ashton¡¯s father spoke from only a short stone¡¯s throw away, still plucking the strings on his instrument to the ongoing melody. Short stoic notes came out, but soon they stopped too. His gruff voice was reproachful as he continued. ¡°You ought to know better by now! We will have to start from the beginning again.¡± He started the tune again, humming the chords and not looking up, tapping out the melody. It would not have mattered if he had looked up anyway, his blindness prevented him from seeing.

    Ashton looked back at his father and at the halfway harvested field where dozens of other men and women also worked, their backs bent and heads down. None of them looked up from their work either to bother with anything beyond what was in front of them. They sang quietly through their work, each family group serenading their field with their own tune.

    A question came to Ashton¡¯s mind and he wondered that he had never asked before. ¡°What lies beyond the trees, at the edge of our village, father?¡±

    The father continued plucking his tune and answered after a moment, ¡°We only know what our songs tell us, son. Do not get distracted by the thoughts of the land outside our village. We are protected by the mountain, Carother, but away from it we would be but naked and vulnerable.¡± His father stopped talking, as if he had said enough.

    ¡°Has it always been so?¡±

    Ashton¡¯s father didn¡¯t answer immediately, but stopped his plucking on his instrument, his thought on something. A satisfied grunt escaped him as he suddenly struck up a new melody and he said to Ashton in a standard village saying, ¡°Listen to the wisdom of our ancestors, Ashton.¡± After a few more beats, he started singing again, a song Ashton had not heard prior.

    The world was new and grey and bright

    all was beautiful in his sight

    He walked the land and life arose

    The plants and trees and all that grows

    He built the lands between his hands

    and formed the sky where birds could fly

    The sun above and east and west

    shined down upon the land as blessed

    Time was still and life was bliss

    Before the world became amiss

    He called on men with him to dwell

    To create a world where all was well

    God and man, hand in hand

    Bliss and sight within his light

    There was a river in the land

    On which a city had its stand

    The gates there were large and strong

    And pain there was all but gone

    The city rose upon new heights

    And beheld a world within new sights

    The god sat upon his wondrous throne

    And the glory of it was world renown

    What strength and power!

    And grace and wisdom

    The men all worshipped

    Him in the kingdom

    Holy, holy, grace and mighty

    Words and peace, and work and feasts

    But all is gone and turned to waste

    For none can come and take his place.

    Ashton was still, waiting for him to continue for Ashton new there were many other verses in that piece. But when it appeared to be the end Ashton pressed, ¡°What do you mean?¡±

    His father sighed and finally stopped playing the instrument. He continued, his voice gravelly with age, ¡°That is one of our oldest songs, but much of its meaning had been lost. Perhaps long ago the land was different than what it is now, but that is no longer of any use to us. Many dangers exist out there, Ashton, not just the wind and the rain, but the savage beasts and even crueler men, so our songs teach us, we must stick its wisdom, the wisdom of our ancestors. Our life is tied to this mountain. Needless to say, there is no light for us beyond our village!¡±

    ¡°But Father,¡± Ashton replied, his voice high and cracking as a boy who had not yet finished growing, ¡°there are pretty lights on the other side of the dark forest! Lots of lights, filling the land, it looks like. What are they, Father?¡±

    ¡°Lights?¡± Ashton¡¯s father replied questioningly.

    ¡°Yes, father. The light is so big and bright! Is it the seraphs, do you think, coming to bless our fields, as some songs speak of?¡±

    Ashton¡¯s father didn¡¯t answer the question, but instead raised his voice in a way Ashton had never heard anybody do before. Quietness was an unspoken rule. ¡°Alishmah!¡± Ashton¡¯s Father shouted back towards his neighbor in the field next to them.

    Alishmah didn¡¯t reply at first, but ignored the call of his neighbor, continuing his song with his family across his field. Compared to Oberion, Alishmah was a young man the prime of his life, tall and sturdy with broad shoulders and stout chest, much like Oberion had once been, Ashton had been told by his mother. Also, just as stubborn.

    Oberion called out angrily again, ¡°ALISHMAH!¡±

    Alishmah stopped his singing and replied, ¡°For what reason do you interrupt our melody Oberion? Could it be that in your old age you-,¡± but he did not finish his sentence when he looked up and saw what Ashton had seen. Ashotn could see his eyes widen even in the dimness of the edge of the village, and a gasp escaped Alishmah¡¯s lips.

    ¡°It is a long line of fire, Oberion,¡± Alishmah said quickly, his voice also high in astonishment ¡°I have never seen such a thing before! It must go on for many leagues and lights up the whole edge! What could it be, Oberion?¡±

    ¡°I have seen it once a long time ago!¡± Oberion replied, his voice now raspy with distress, ¡°It is danger, it is enemies! We must flee, flee to Corith Minor at once, or none of us will be spared! Alishmah!¡±

    Alishmah gaped back at Oberion for a second, but then swiftly heeded his words. He turned quickly and cupped his hands to his mouth, projecting his voice across the hills of the tribe. A strange and unearthly call came from his lips that put Ashton on edge and caused the hair on the back of his neck to stand up and his muscles to quiver hearing it. Upon hearing the call, all the people in the fields ceased their work and looked up in alarm. Those who understood immediately moved, leaving their tools behind and grabbing their families and fleeing, repeating the same alarm as loudly and as often as possible. The others quickly followed and panicked screams also rang in the air.

    Ashton did not understand. ¡°What is happening Father?¡± he shouted, blocking his ears to try to lighten the horrible sounds of distress that spread across the hillside. He was now frightened and stood trembling. ¡°Why are they making that sound?¡±

    ¡°Help me up, son!¡± Oberion said urgently, holding up his arm in need for support. He kept with him his lute. Ashton quickly stooped to assist. ¡°You have not heard it before,¡± Oberion grunted, heaving himself up with Ashton¡¯s support, ¡°but it is our tribe¡¯s all to Dismay! Enemies are coming!¡±

    ¡°But what about our harvest?¡± Ashton asked, pointing down to the fields they were in, ¡°And where is your cane?¡±

    ¡°Leave it!¡± Oberion replied harshly, ¡°Leave it all behind. We cannot not take anything with us now; we must make haste! You will have to lead me, son! We must move now if we are to escape up to Caroth minor!!¡±

    The fields cleared fast as most others obeyed the words of Oberion, dropping their tools and running, shouting and clamoring all the while.

    ¡°Oberion!¡± Alishmah called out, coming up to him quickly as Ashton started to move forward slowly with his Father. ¡°Let me help you!¡±

    ¡°Help your own family!¡± Oberion replied stubbornly, ¡°Who will shelter them if you are not around?¡±

    ¡°My son, Omorah, is leading them,¡± Alishmah replied, undeterred, ¡°and you are also family. What will your wife say if she heard you now, brother? Let me help, my strong arms are made for helping other. You and your son will not make it alone.¡±

    ¡°Bah!¡± Oberion replied angrily, ¡°and what of my dignity?¡±

    ¡°What of it?¡± Alishmah repeated mockingly, pushing Ashton lightly aside and taking the old man himself, ¡°Don¡¯t you know? Enemies are coming and no dignity will save you!¡± With a swift movement, he swept up Oberion and ran ahead with him, ignoring Oberion¡¯s cursing. ¡°Come on little one!¡± he called quickly to Ashton. Ashton followed fast, a deep-seated fear taking hold of him, clouding the dark paths they ran on. He had never seen his father much less the rest of the people so scared before. Alishmah must have sensed fear for he turned and smiled to Ashton.

    ¡°It will be okay, little one.¡± Alishmah said, trotting up the dark narrow paths with Ashton trailing close behind him. Ashton was not consoled. He had never known Alishmah to lie to him before.

    ¡°Extinguish the lamps!¡± Oberion cried to Ashton, pointing towards the small flickering lights that lit their trail at even spaces.

    ¡°Why?¡± Ashton replied, his eyes staring fearfully out at the small lights as if they too were dangerous enemies that would turn his world upside down in an instant. It was an ironclad law that young people should never interfere with the lamps.

    ¡°Just do it!¡± Alishmah replied, breathing heavily with his burden.

    Scared and hesitant, Ashton kicked out at the next passing lamp, knocking it over and seeing the small fragile flame die out. Looking back, he saw the great lights beyond the forest brighter and closer than ever. He still did not know what it meant, but he wondered that he had ever thought they were beautiful. Like great fiery demons they appeared to him now.

    ¡°Who are the enemies, Father?¡± Ashton asked, ¡°What do they come here for?¡± The cry of danger could still be heard easily across the mountain face. Surely by now, surely the entire village was aware of the danger. Oberion, Alishmah, and Ashton were the last ones leaving the fields but Ashton could see many others running ahead of them.

    ¡°The Sorcerers,¡± Oberion rasped out, ¡°and they are coming to steal and to kill! We must run and hide lest they catch us with their light and magic! Only Caroth Minor can protect us now!¡±

    Ashton knew what Caroth Minor was: it was the ancient dwelling place of their ancestors, high and deep in the mountain their village lived on. The ancient stronghold was located near the peak of the holy mountain, where the snow and ice lived continually. Their village songs told of times when only that strength had saved them in the past and sheltered them against the unsung horrors.

    At last they reached the end of the fields and came to the edge of the village houses. Ashton kicked over the last lamp lighting the trails and wondered how they would be lit again. A few paces in frnt of him, Oberion and Alishmah were met by Ashton¡¯s mother, a short thin woman with wispy hair and scared eyes. Ashton rushed to meet up with them too.If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.

    ¡°Oh, Ashton!¡± She cried pulling, him in closely into a tight hug. She turned quickly to her husband and Alishmah, her voice strained but under control, ¡°The Elders have already started the ascension song. We must move quickly to not be left behind. Are you the last of the field workers?¡±

    ¡°We believe so, Numeria,¡± Alishmah panted, still carrying Oberion, ¡°We have been extinguishing the trail lamps as we came up.¡±

    ¡°What of our sons and daughters?¡± Oberion called out, ¡°What of them?¡±

    Alishmah started moving forward again, passing the dozens of small thatched roof houses along the even paths of the village, heading towards the village square where the pilgrimage would begin. Numeria followed closely, holding Ashton to her. From the distance, Ashton could hear the ascension song already starting to form from the mouths of the villagers. Already, the journey was starting!

    Numeria replied to Oberion, ¡°They should be fine. Our sons joined the herders and they should already be with the main group.¡±

    ¡°Should we really be worried about our goat herds, at a time like this?¡± Alishmah panted, ¡°When sorcerers are coming?¡±

    ¡°The elders deemed we could and should,¡± Numeria replied numbly, ¡°as is their position to do so. But we have all been instructed to bring only what we could carry.¡±

    Alishmah grunted, ¡°It is a good thing you are light then, old man.¡±

    ¡°But what of our daughters?¡± Oberion continued, ignoring Alishmah¡¯s comment.

    ¡°Our eldest is with her husband. They were at the square when I left for you. But Elishia and Irisma were not. They were with Oba-Christna on the far side. They will have a separate pilgrimage, but we should meet them in Corinth Minor.¡±

    Oberion grunted in satisfaction at her words, but Ashton¡¯s heart turned as cold as the tops of Mt. Carothers. He knew where his two older sisters had really gone to, and it was not to visit the old lady Christna on the far side of the mountain. No, Oba-Christna was their code for trouble, code for their true mischief down by the end of the river at the edge of the dark forest and down near where the Sorcerers were approaching.

    The group was soon in the village square, close to empty now as only a few family units remained waiting for their loved ones. There were few lights, but Ashton saw the long trail of men and women and beasts evacuating up the mountain. The two eldest sons of Oberion were there with their wives, waiting with their flock of goats as well as Alishmah¡¯s wife and young children. The song of ascension now permeated the village and trail, its words listing clearly their instructions and traditions.

    At the sight of the burning light

    At the sound of the violent voices

    We must flee away from the fight

    Spare no thought on any choices

    Carother¡¯s will take us, and be our shield

    Caroth Minor will hold us from those who wield

    The sword and spear,

    death and fear

    Gather what is needed

    Gather up your family

    Discard what will keep you

    Make it to the rally

    We will fly, we will fly, we will fly

    May mercy find us, before we die

    Alishmah put down Oberion on a cart his sons had prepared for him. ¡°We cannot thank you enough, brother,¡± Numeria said shakily as her sons helped Oberion onto the cart slowly.

    ¡°Do not delay!¡± Alishmah called back, already moving forward to his own family who offered him no rest but ushered him forward urgently, their voice singingly the ascension song the while.

    At no other command, the sons went forward as well, joining the last of the families on the trail up to Corith Minor. They too sang the song of ascension. The goats followed obediently.

    ¡°What of Elishia and Irisma!¡± Ashton cried, looking around, but already knowing the answer. They were not with them; they had not made it the pilgrimage start yet and were now being left behind.

    ¡°They were on the other side!¡± Numeria, replied, breaking her song, ¡°They will already be halfway up by now. Now, come quickly and sing! It will quiet your fears.¡±

    Ashton sang as commanded, but looked back towards the great light again, fear gripping his heart more than ever before. It was so bright now, he wondered that such a fire could exist and yet not consume the world. The dreaded forest was turning to ash and dust as if it was nothing but a puff of wind that disappeared in an instant. Dark smoggy smoke and stink could be seen drifting as its vanguard.

    Ashton made his decision, and moved up towards his eldest brother, leading his family from up front. His eyes were straight and strong, carrying the weight of the family since their father languished in his old age. He sang clearly and confidently without a fear in him. Ashton wished he did not have to say what he was going to say.

    ¡°Elder brother!¡± Ashton whispered fiercely, but his brother ignored him.

    ¡°Brother!¡± Ashton insisted again, this time tugging on his sleeve, refusing to be ignored. It worked, he stopped singing and glared towards at Ashton.

    ¡°Control yourself, little brother!¡± he ordered, his eyes flashing, putting up the front needed of him now, ¡°You are not to interrupt the songs like that or Father will punish you. Why must you break our traditions? You must master your fear!¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s not that! Hear my words! It¡¯s about Elishia and Irisma! They did not go to Oba-Christia as they had said!¡±

    Ashton¡¯s brother¡¯s face immediately faltered and its strength was replaced quickly with fear. He whispered back in horror, ¡°Where did those fools run off to at a time like this! Will they ever learn? Where did they go, Ashton!¡±

    ¡°To the forest¡¯s edge!¡± The Elder brother closed his eyes, as if to block out the words, as if to deny the truth. His shoulders sagged.

    ¡°Say it is not so, Ashton!¡±

    ¡°I will go get them!¡± Ashton continued quickly, ¡°The fire has not reached us yet, but you must tell Mother after I go lest she run off after me. I am fast. Trust me brother, faster than you are, especially now that you carry the weight of fatherhood. Let me go after them. There is no one else! The lights on the trails have been extinguished; they will be lost!¡±

    Ashton¡¯s brother looked at Ashton as if he had not seen him properly before, then swooped down and caressed his hair. ¡°I leave it to you, little brother. Go and fetch our sisters, and when you return I will write a song about you.¡± He stayed as he was, holding Ashton close as if to transfer his strength to him. Ashton felt that it worked.

    He released him suddenly, ¡°Now go!¡± Without another word, Ashton spun around and took off, down back on the path they had trotted on, passing by the remnants of the tribe. He thought he heard some sharp protestations from his Mother, but he ignored them, hearing only the song of ascension and his own footsteps in the dark.

    Soon, there were no other people on the path, and he was alone with only the distant eternal light from the village square to guide his way. Entering the square, he quickly grabbed a spare torch and broke the village rules again, thrusting its end into the sacred flames to light it.

    Having a light, he ran again, toward the place he knew his sisters would come from, following the flow of the stream until it diverged off toward secret paths. Closer and closer he got toward the wall of flames, and he felt he could hardly take his eyes off them, breathtaking and brilliant as they were. The heat buffeted him and his heart pounded, not just from his exercise but from his fear of his unknown assailants. He moved as cautiously as he dared.

    Ashton never found his sisters. He was halfway down the creek when foreign men burst in around him. How strange they looked to him; he almost stopped in his tracks in astonishment! They carried with them a bright white light that blinded him, but Ashton saw it did not extend far, the way a normal light does, but it kept radiance within a small circle. It was sorcery! Ashton had never seen it before but he heard evil tales of the magic. The fire line was still far away, but these people had pushed forward, perhaps for this very reason, to capture unsuspecting fools. There was a sudden yelling and clanging of metal as the soldiers rushed at him. Ashton tuned to flee, but before he could take two steps a voice rang out behind him above the rest, loud and clear.

    ¡°SHUITS!¡± it commanded, and Ashton felt his legs suddenly snap together as if a strong rope had tied them. He fell over with a loud cry and the guards were already over him. He felt their strong hands seize him.

    Ashton bit and struggled, yelling out in terror, ¡°No! Get off me, let go of me!¡± thrashing desperately. A man on a horse appeared in front of him. It was nearly impossible to make out his features in the dark, and Ashton saw the man raise his arm towards him and say softly, ¡°Druzle.¡± A deep terror of sleep and forgetfulness washed over Ashton.

    When Ashton awoke, he found himself already far away from the mountain and his village and even past the dark forest that was their boundary. Still dazed, he gazed around and saw that his own legs were carrying him towards the fire he saw from the village. The fire was spread out in a long line from both his left and his right and was very tall, taller than any of the trees Ashton had ever seen. From where Ashton was, he would few hot wind gushing towards him along with a roar.

    Accompanying Ashton were two other soldiers. Ashton cried out in fear when he realized he had no control over his legs, a spell was making him walk, taking himself as captive. His terror overwhelmed his senses, fear of this mysterious power that held him and the blazing fire he was walking ever closer to. He had never been away from his family or tribe before, and he gawked and yelled in his fright.

    ¡°Let me go! What do you want from me?!¡± he cried out, but neither guard answered or even paid attention to his struggle.

    His captors were strange to see. One carried in his left hand a strange lantern that gave out a strong pale light.. Ashton would have thought it was fire, but there was no flame. They also wore strange clothing with intricate designs and many of them wore metal that shined and reflected red in the light of the fire line they were approaching. Ashton had never seen such things before and looked in fear and as they led him away. Ashton entirely as he struggled in vain against the spell on him, but he legs refused to listen to him and his arms were bound tight around his back. The two soldiers chatted amongst themselves in a language Ashton could not understand and walked unreservedly towards the fire line. Soon, the three of them reached the fire line, and Ashton panicked as they began to obviously intended to walk into it without hesitation. He coughed and gagged in the smoke.

    ¡°Brother! I have failed!¡± Ashton wailed out at last, craning his neck around to dimly see his home disappear from him before the curtain of flames blocked the mountain from view.

    The fire was tall and bright, with great colors of red and orange blazing within the heat. It extended either way for as far as Ashton could see, a great wall of endless flame. Ashton thought the troupe was simply going to walk into it and burn alive for some heathen ritual of theirs. But as the soldiers approached it, the soldier without the lantern raised his hand casually and the flames split apart like a sheet tearing. Ashton saw on the outstretched hand a cloth with a trinket on it, wrapped around cosily so as not to all off.

    Once inside the wall of fire, Ashton would have remained frozen if not for the spell that forced his legs to walk. He gawked at the rippling flames that they passed, the heat and smoke did not touch them. Before them the fire continually split as the group pressed forward, but Ashton could not see beyond it yet. Twenty feet in Ashton, looked behind again and saw that the rip they walked through had closed as well, leaving the company in a sea of flames.

    Even though Ashton was terrified for his mortal well-being, he noticed the exotic beauty that existed inside the fire. From the setting of unnatural fire and sorcery protecting them, a view never meant to be seen by mortals, there was a mesmerizing sight of light, shadow, color, and flowing flames. It was like a river and they were fish swimming in it. Although it lasted only for a few moments before the company passed through, time seems to slow down for Ashton as the soft ripples in the fire reminded him of the ripples made by the wind on the grains in the fields he had only hours before inhabited. But neither soldier paid it any attention.

    Suddenly the fire dissipated around them and the world returned to its rightful place. Ashton gazed back in awe at the wall of fire and wondered that he could still be alive.

    Ashton saw other groups of soldiers appearing out of the flames too, like puffs of sparks exploding from a small campfire. They came marching up behind them and around them, bringing mostly spoils to their destinations. He also saw groups of soldiers coming toward them, passing back through the flames on their own errands. Ashton wondered how large their camp could be to house such a force.

    Ashton¡¯s group was soon joined by others and they plodded along on the scorched earth. The soldiers talked and greeting their fellows when the groups joined each other, yelling loudly in their alien language to be heard over the still roaring flames.

    The group climbed over a small ridge, black and scorched from fire, and suddenly the encampment was before them. Ashton saw it but could not comprehend what it was he was seeing. Could such a thing exist on land? Ashton¡¯s thought was that it was a village, larger than he could have before imagined, appearing in the plains past the forest and wall of flames, a great city of houses and buildings and unearthly beasts and people. It was lit brightly by many strange lights like the oe his captor wa holding, making the city all of it visible in the darkness. How could they not see such a thing from on top of the mountain? Then Ashton saw that it was moving, all of it, slowly but steadily and Ashton gaped in realization that it was not a city at all but a great group of wagons and carts and many other countless things. It was a caravan, a massive caravan, like a great slug crossing the land.

    Upon arrival, their guards handed them over to another group of men, and then broke away. Hooded figures cloaked in shadows used magic and sorcery again that their kind possessed and they appeared and disappeared like the wind around the versatile encampment. One came up to Ashton directly and Asht tried to flinch away with a yell. But the magician moved without disturbance, cutting off the spell on Ashton legs quickly before immediately placing new ones on him, binding Ashton hand and foot. There was nothing physical that held his limbs together; the spell had captured him, and there was no escaping that. The magician disappeared as quickly as he appeared and his captors took him forward and carelessly threw him into a cage that was part of the caravan. Inside the cage were other people already, humans of races Ashton did not recognize but once Ashton looked at them he shuddered uncontrollably. The other captives all had the same dead expression and Ashton believed they were merely a collection corpses..

    The wagon had large wooden wheels that rolled unevenly on the ground; the floor of the wagon was wood with planks to secure it. It was filled with straw and grass to cover and soak up the filth in the cage; terrible stenches diffused from it. The walls were simply wooden bars that Ashton thought would have been easy to break, but either they were sturdier than they looked or some magic held them in place for Ashton could not bend them although he immediately twisted them unreservedly. He gave up quickly and looked up in a panic, only to see that his wagon was connected to another wagon by a long tongue and a similar train was secured to the back. Ashton looked in dismay at the countless wagons and trains and horses and people, filling his vision, many also filled with captives, also looking dead. Ashton wondered briefly that he hadn¡¯t been dropped into hell where the unfortunate humans who made it were tormented in the fiery cages for eternity.

    Ashton looked forward to find out if he could see what could be pulling the wagons, but, as far as he looked, he could not spot what powered the wagons forward. Soldiers on horses often rode past or walked nearby, but he could see none attached to the line of wagons. Ashton imagined a dragon similar to the stories of his youth, with awesome power and flames, was roped at the front of the procession and was pulling it forward with its great muscles. The wagons were traveled at a pace slightly more than a walk and they never paused or stopped for anything.

    Ashton soon discovered to his increasing horror that the other men in the cage with him were actually not dead. But they were silent and unresponsive, regardless of what action Ashton took. Ashton feared that he had been thrown into a cage of the dead but soon realized they were only dead on the inside. What sorcery occurred to make them so lifeless? Would the same magic happen to him too? His body shook and he sobbed against the bars as he contemplated this thought more horrible than a simple clean death.

    However, in Ashton¡¯s cage that was damp and lightless, there was one prisoner was different from the rest. He was dressed in an unusual red color, standing out even in the foreign environment. He was facedown in the corner, shackled with irons and rope; something nobody else had on them. Ashton would have noticed if he wasn¡¯t so troubled.

    Repeating thoughts swirled in Ashton¡¯s mind. What had happened to his village, his families? Did his sisters get caught, or did they make it to Caroth Minor? What was going to happen to him? Was this truey the afterlife and he was to be here forever? Or was this actually just a kidnapping? Either way, what was going to happen to him? He cried out loudly with pleas and begging at the soldiers that passed by, but the only thing he received were blows and harsh unintelligible words. The other prisoners ignored him; as they seemed to ignore everything. They were apathetic and strange, or perhaps some sorcery was twisting their minds. Ashton did not know.

    ¡°Wake up!¡± Ashton shouted to himself. ¡°Wake up! How can such things be? It can only be a dream! Wake up from this nightmare and be with Father and brother in the village! I want to laugh and sing with them in the fields! Was not the harvest to happen soon? Were not the fields ready for reaping and the mills ready for grinding! Enough of this madness, my family is waiting!¡± But despite his continued pounding and cries, Ashton did not wake from the bright unnatural lights or the creaking and clatter of the wagon or the stiff stone look of his prisoners. ¡°Wake up!¡±

    Exhaustion and mental fatigue soon gripped Ashton, either that or the horrific spells were already performing their unholy work on his mind. His tears were left unwashed on his face, and he sagged against the bars of the cage, giving in and his eyes close. Old familiar darkness finally took him, and he swooned.

 Chapter 4

    In Ashton¡¯s world there is no such thing as sunrise; there is no such thing as the sun. This was a symptom of a land without order, a form of chaos that plagued the land.

    Ashton awoke, though, at an unknown time, in the unknown place now far beyond the village boundaries he rightfully should have never left. The caravan was still traveling and it was like it never stopped. Still bleary eyed, Ashton pushed himself up off the dirty straw and saw parties of soldiers break off from the main group and then others return with more spoils, all the while the group plowed ahead like an unstoppable behemoth. Looking back again Ashton saw their trail. The tail end of the caravan was a long ways away, many carriages and wagons separated them, but comparatively, Ashton¡¯s wagon was near the end of the group. He saw the fireline burning, great wildfires and smoke arose from the plains and forests they just crossed like a lasting curse from the traveling troupe. Ashton would have wept again to see this land ravaged so, if he only had more tears. Or water and energy. Even through the heat of the fire and smoke, Ashton realized he was thirsty and hungry. Ashton¡¯s people were used to such hardships though and He gritted his teeth and steeled himself. He doubted food or water would come anytime soon from the heartless captors..

    Now there was time, lots of lonely hours to spend in his confinement. He struggled against the bonds against him again with more rationality now, seemingly nonexistent but horribly real. It was to no avail, whatever sorcery it was had a secure hold on him.

    Ashton recalled the figure that shared the compartment with him, the one different from the others with the red clothes. He looked about and found him, almost buried underneath the muck and men in the the cage. What he wore was filthy and disfigured, but it was still distinctly red, a color Ashton had never seen before in clothing. He wondered at it, and also the shackles that were placed on him. Why did he not have a spell to bind him like Ashton and the others had? What made him different? Ashton inspected him further and saw that he had been severely beaten, another difference between him and the rest of the group. It seems the guards didn¡¯t like him; perhaps it was connected to the shackles he was wearing. Either way, Ashton saw he needed aid and someone to bind his wounds. He wasn¡¯t conscious and Ashton was doubtful he would even survive.

    The wagon bounced and jolted on a bump and the half dead man groaned in pain. Finding new purpose, Ashton quickly ripped off some of his clothing and bound the strange man¡¯s wounds, trying to clean him up. It seemed the guards that walked loosely nearby didn¡¯t care if he actually lived or died. Ashton decided he would look after the man, perhaps he would learn something. At least it was something to do in captivity

    After cleaning up the man¡¯s muddy and bloody face, Ashton saw he was young, probably very similar in age to Ashton. He caressed the man¡¯s head in his lap before looking out once again to the burning plains and meadows.

    ¡°Wake up,¡± Ashton said, pleading to the man. ¡°Wake up or wake me up from this nightmare. It is not fair that you pass the time by in sleep, while the I continue in hardship.¡±

    But the man did not wake up and the time passed slowly as the caravan continued its march towards its unknown end. No attempt at explanation was ever provided to Ashton from his captors as to what they had planned for him. The caravan had long since passed the edges of what Ashton believed to be the end of the world. If he escaped, would he even be able to make it back to his home? He felt in his heart that he would see things unimaginable before he made it back to his village. Already he felt like he had aged from that of a child in the time he has been away.

    After a long time the man Ashton was looking after hadn¡¯t regained consciousness yet, and Ashton doubted he would survive for much longer, even after what little care Ashton could provide. The man had a startling fever and Ashton had nothing to treat it with; the only comfort he really could provide was his presence.

    He kept the man¡¯s head in his lap to soften the bumps the wagon went over and Ashton studied the other occupants with his eyes. His earlier attempts at communicate with them had utterly failed. They only sat and stared with their eyes open, seeing but not seeing and hearing but not understanding or caring. Ashton didn¡¯t recognize their races either. He knew there were other tribes not too far from his tribe. There was sometimes trade and discourse between the them, and often disputes, but Ashton rarely saw them. Where had these people come from? It seemed they came from from far off places Ashton hadn¡¯t believed existed, outside the boundaries of his world. Ashton could not help but pity them, but he wondered if he would soon be affected in the same way. One thought encouraged him though. If they had survived, it must mean that they had been fed.

    Time lapsed and he was hungry. A waterskin was passed around by the soldiers. Or at least Ashton thought it was a waterskin. It wasn¡¯t made of any material Ashton recognized, but at least it held water. After taking a long draught he then tried to share it with the man he was watching. He wasn¡¯t too successful. As with all other things though, the water skin was strange, it didn¡¯t seem large enough to hold all the water that flowed from it. He watched skeptically as it was passed around under the stern eyes of the soldiers and everybody drank their fill of it. It startled Ashton to see his fellow prisoners move for the water, and Ashton got his hope up slightly. But when it was over the prisoners returned to their lifeless selves. Ashton suspected there was more sorcery in it, and he tried not to think about it.

    Soon enough all was quiet again, and dark. The lanterns that traveled with the caravan seemed to brighten and dim at some appointed schedule, and at the moment they had all dimmed to almost nothing. Ashton watched the burning trail the company left, blazing and flickering in the dark. Ashton imagined there was screaming and fighting surrounding all the flames, but from the carriage, Ashton could only see the burnt fields and forests. He thought of his village and wondered what had happened. Surely it wasn¡¯t all destroyed and everybody killed or captured? he hadn''t seen any of his fellow villagers around at all, but he knew the caravan was vast. He hoped the rest made it safely up to their secret fortress on top of the mountain but thought that they probably lost a lot from from what they left behind.His village knew hardship intimately though, he imagined the group lingering on and mourning the loss of their people and belongings but persevering regardless. It was not their custom to mourn too hard; loss was ever present with the group. He knew they would not long be looking for him.

    The wagon rolled on and Ashton sang softly, a song from his village

    All is darkness and all is here,If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.

    But all is lost and all is fear.

    Where does the rain fall from,

    Where does the river go?

    I haven¡¯t known the wind to stop

    Nor the fire to lose its glow.

    Heed not the mysteries around us,

    Keep your head down low

    Our enemies forever chase us,

    Death follows the sound of the bow.

    Run and flee, turn and strive

    Keep close to you the hope of your lives

    Though all my pain be gone,

    You life still there to keep

    But perhaps it is better to find

    Yourself in the eternal sleep

    Looking down at the man under his care, Ashton spoke, ¡°What are you dreaming of? Do you too dream of your household, with the wind and the tassels around you? Or perhaps of your lover; are you in her arms right now, free from the worries of the world, content only at where you lay? Or perhaps you feel what I feel and hear what I hear. Did you hear my song, red man? Our songs are our history and our instruction passed down from our fathers in the long past. But look at me now, look at how I have disobeyed them. Should I have truly ignored by sister¡¯s plight and stayed safe on the mountain? I could not, but the songs tell me that I should have. Perhaps they were right; look at where I am. And now, the songs are all I have left.¡±

    Soon after the lanterns dimmed, Ashton fall asleep, his back leaning up against the side of the carriage and the man¡¯s head still in his lap. He woke up later to the sound of food being distributed; the guards had returned carrying baskets of bread. Ashton felt heartened at the thought of food in his stomach. The other occupants regained life spectacularly for the occasion, yelling and clamoring like animals for the loaves as they were thrown in, scaring Ashton. He didn¡¯t want to move suddenly with the man still on him and was afraid that he would not get food in time, but he was also afraid of the suddenly beast like behavior of the men in the cage with him. There seemed to be an endless supply of the bread too, similar to that of the water. He did eventually get some and ate it gratefully. It was thick and dark, but he was concerned as to how to feed it to his patient. The red man was still unconscious and Ashton knew from experience that he would die soon if the fever did not break. His wounds had been bandaged as best they could, but there was little Ashton could do about the fever but wait.

    The lanterns had brightened considerably again, creating more light around the caravan and Ashton once again wondered at them. Were they magic or some other form of light? Why did they brighten and dim at all, but not maintain a constant light? When the lights were all at their brightest it bothered Ashton considerable and he tried to cover his face to keep the light away.

    The time passed similarly as the period previously, the rolling wagons, the shouts of soldiers and he clanking of the metal. Ashton spent much of it singing softly, as his people did to comfort themselves. But before the singing had always been with his people, and with it the feeling that however terrible things were, there were always people beside you. But in this place he sang alone.

    The lanterns dimmed again and Ashton guessed that it was some form of keeping time. At least it was convenient to sleep when the lanterns were low. But AShton was suddenly startled to see his patient was losing his battle. The man was now sweating and shaking intensely. Ashton felt his temperature and knew he was to die soon. Ashton had been prepared for this eventuality, but the death of his pretend companion still wounded him terribly. He held the man¡¯s hands and he thought of a song of departure from his village. He wiped off the red man¡¯s sweat and Ashton sang,

    The world is harsh and cold and dark

    The lands all groan and sway,

    A man struggles to work and live

    But soon your troubles will go away

    My brother, may you find peace

    Your labors are over and your striving is done

    You leave this land and darkness

    Leave everything to your daughters and sons

    You may have lost your life

    But our loss is greater still

    We will miss your voice and laughter

    We will lose your strength and will

    But be at ease and rest in peace

    For although we know not what lies ahead

    we pity the living who struggle and care

    We do not pity those who are dead

    Ashton finished his song and looked upon the man sadly and wept. The man groaned in his slumber and Ashton put his head in his lap again. His heart was heavy, and Ashton lapsed into fitful dreams.

    He awoke suddenly, however, while the lanterns were yet dim. He noticed something strange; the man now wore a necklace with a beautiful gleaming ring on it. How could he not have noticed it before? The ring was radiant and beautiful, and it shown even in the dim light of the lanterns. He picked it up and looked at it. It was silver with specific markings and a large crest Ashton did not recognize was on it. The thing itself amazed Ashton as no such skill existed in his village to create such a thing. Even as he held it, though, it grew warm and then hot. Too hot to hold. Ashton dropped it quickly with a cry before it burned him. It lay on the man¡¯s chest, shining brightly, and Ashton was afraid it would draw attention of the guards and tried to cover it while watching intently. Then was a sudden bright flash and it was over, as quickly as it began.

    Ashton hesitated for a moment, and then drew closer to the man again. He touched ring tentatively and found it was cool again and no longer shining. He picked it up but even as he held it, it disappeared from his sight, and Ashton ended up holding nothing in his hands. He was astonished and felt around for it before he was convinced it really had disappeared. He contemplated the sorcery and wondered that he saw so much of these strange things lately. Perhaps it was a death call of the man¡¯s people. Ashton did not know.

    The man suddenly breathed deep and opened his eyes, as if waking up from a short nap. Ashton was astonished to see his wounds had healed and his sickness was gone. Ashton gazed in amazement at the man before him, a man on whom he had already given up hope on. The man breathed deep again, opened his eyes, and searched his surroundings.

    His face twisted in a grimace and he groaned miserably, ¡°Dammit, I¡¯m still dreaming.¡±

 Chapter 5

    The strange man sat up and leaned against the wall and closed his eyes as if the regain his composure, Ashton still gawked, not saying anything. Then he reached forward and touched the man, seeing if he was real. ¡°You are awake!¡± Ashton said, astonished, but delighted. The man opened his eyes to look at Ashton and Ashton¡¯s face lit up in a broad smile.

    ¡°You are alive!¡± Ashton exclaimed and then he sang a short verse,

    Though time be dead and on your head

    And death be near and full of fear

    Despite the odds and all the pain

    You stand alive, with all to gain

    Ashton spoke quickly to him, ¡°It is good to have you moving and talking, I thought you would die from lack of food. Now eat, eat, slowly of course¡±. He handed him a loaf of bread he had kept, ¡°You have been asleep for a very long time and I thought you would not wake up. You must be very hungry, though. Eat, eat, you must eat.¡±

    There was not much energy in the man, but he looked at Ashton suspiciously and didn¡¯t move. ¡°Come, you must eat! You are very weak, you have been asleep for a long time!¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m asleep right now, though.¡± The man said stubbornly. He wouldn¡¯t eat.

    ¡°No, you are awake! You were asleep in sickness, but you must believe me that this is the real world.¡±

    The man replied angrily, ¡°Silence! I¡¯m dreaming, I am asleep! If I am awake then why am I still here, trapped in this nightmare? First, I dream of some terrible demon and his sorcery then illusions of madness and then I get beaton! It¡¯s simply a nightmare. Another nightmare, like I have always had. It can only be a nightmare! I will wake up soon and will be back in my Father¡¯s house. This is madness, just madness. Will this never end!?¡± He slumped over, exhausted.

    Ashton paid the man¡¯s rant no mind, but, forcing bread into his hands, said ¡°even if you are dreaming you must eat.¡± The man looked at the bread, then snatched it up and took a bite. He ate the whole thing, but Ashton still looked on him with concern. ¡°I see what the problem is,¡± he said to himself, ¡°he has a sickness of the mind, a terrible one at that. The horror must have damaged him!¡±

    After the man had eaten, Ashton spoke again, ¡°I do not know what to say to assure you that you are awake. What does it mean to be awake? Here you eat and sleep and drink and feel pain and happiness, if you can. Does that mean you are awake? I do not know for all those can probably be felt in a dream. But you cannot be certain right? It might be best to treat everything as reality until you are certain. Now look, I have been able to give you water, so you should not have to worry about that, but there will be no water for you now, you will have to make do without it. Water will come again later when before the lanterns dim. ¡°

    The man looked up, ¡°the lanterns?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Ashton said, pointing out the nearest one next to the wagon. He felt it was a good sign that the man was talking. ¡°These cases with light in them. The light grows and fades on what seems to be at regular times. I do not know how they work or understand them; there is no fire in them. It is some sorcery no doubt, but it is very convenient to have. These people here have powers beyond what I could have imagined. No wonder they simply take what they please!¡±

    The man said nothing, but finished another loaf in silence, looking at the lantern. Ashton asked him, ¡°How are you feeling now? Perhaps you are well rested after such a nice sleep?¡± He tried to bring some amusement to the setting, but the atmosphere squashed it. His words sounded dull and grey.

    The man answered slowly, ¡°Don¡¯t fool with me, I have no interest in joining you in this facade. How can you ask such things here? My wrists and ankles hurt, as does my side. And I am exhausted, despite the long sleep you say I had. I do not feel like it I slept at all.¡±

    ¡°You must not go to sleep yet again. You must rouse yourself to help in the healing. The iron will not come off I am afraid. I have tried already. You were very sick.¡± He looked at the man, though, and saw a pain in his eyes.

    ¡°Come now friend,¡± Ashton said. ¡°Tell me where you are from and how you got here. Your looks and clothing are strange to me, stranger than everything else here. But perhaps it is all normal to you, I have never once left my village before. Did you get taken from your home as well?¡±

    The man didn¡¯t answer, but sat against the wall staring away from Ashton, looking at the fire and the caravan. After moment, the red man added, ¡°Where are we?¡±

    Ashton replied, ¡°I cannot say, we left the lands that I knew long ago. But the wilderness is very large, I have heard it said. I would have never believed it was this large though. We have traveled countless walks since I was captured, and if I did not know better, I would say we were simply traveling in circles. We keep moving, but we never get anywhere!¡±

    The man nodded as if he understood what Ashton said and spoke aloud to himself, ¡°We are still in Feresuil then; we have not traveled to another territory.¡± He looked at Ashton then and spoke directly to him, ¡°Feresuil is the name of this land, what you call the wilderness I believe. It is very large, as you have said. You could probably walk for a year and never see the end. Drfuil was a mighty god, his works would be equally mighty.¡± He suddenly looked confused and his thoughts again distanced themselves. He looked off in the distance. ¡°How do I know that?¡± He whispered.

    Ashton did not understand what he was saying. He asked another question, ¡°I would like to ask, why is it that you have iron shackles instead of these bonds of sorcery like I have? Is it something you know? The soldiers here appear to depend heavily on their sorcery; it would be helpful if we could find a way to overcome that.¡±

    The man didn¡¯t answer at first. He paused and looked at his hands as if trying to remember. When he did speak, it was slowly. ¡°After they had captured me, they tried to put some kind of spell on me, similar to your chains I believe. They spoke with words of power, but their words did not have a hold on me. It is because of this ring I believe.¡± he held up something on his chest but Ashton could not see it, ¡°this ring¡­¡± the man repeated. He looked lost again. He shook his head and said, ¡°It was a gift from my Father, but Drfuil took it, didn¡¯t he? How dare he, he reformed it, setting his curse on it and then locked it on me. I¡¯m not sure anymore. I¡¯m not sure of anything. I¡¯m so confused.¡± He slumped and whispered to himself, ¡°What did he do to me? Who am I, and what have I become?¡±

    ¡°My friend,¡± Ashton started again, ¡°your confusion is understandable; you have just woken up from a long unnatural sleep. Do not let your dark dreams disturb you! Forget them and concentrate on the present. You are here now, with me, and you are alive. Come now and keeping talking to me, this will help you recall who you are, we need to exercise and warm up your mind!¡±

    The man looked as if to stubbornly refuse to acknowledge Ashton¡¯s words but then asked bluntly, ¡°Who are you?¡±

    ¡°Good, very good,¡± Aston answered, ¡°I should have introduced myself earlier. I am Ashton, son of Oberion. I have been taking care of you for a long time in this cage. I was captured some time ago, twenty of these lantern dimmings by my count! I have feared that you wouldn¡¯t wake up; you were very sick. Now, can you tell me who you are? Can you remember?¡±

    The man repeated slowly, ¡°What I remember¡­¡± he looked away again, recalling memories, ¡°I remember a large field, filled with plants and animals. I also remember tall mountains that I once walked in and traveled but are no more now. I remember a great river that flowed unceasingly toward its end.  I also remember a city, huge and towering.  I remember years passing by like seconds and the whole world changing around me. I remember a great joy, and sorrow as well. But I also remember a little boy alone and afraid. I remember my father, how he scolded me and my Mother too, her soft embrace. Who are these people? How are they connected to me? But I see now, I do not understand. I remember being amazed, because we had opened that door. Yes, Yes, that great door. The greed of the magicians pushed us to open it, but when we did it seemed we had stepped into a fantastical tale. We were mistaken about what we were looking for in the ruins though, blast them, it wasn¡¯t what we thought it would be!¡±Stolen story; please report.

    Drake¡¯s face contorted miserably and he choked back a sob, ¡°We made a terrible mistake, and it is my fault! Oh, Kresnuel-sama, what have I done, they are all dead but me!I told them to open the door. But it was a prison, not a treasure! It can¡¯t my fault though, can it! How could we be expected to heed the signs we could not understand? That Drfuil, how could he do this to me? How dare he, try to influence me, a son of the house of Fendell? But he forced into me his memories, seeking to control me.¡± The man started to panic, his eyes were wild and his voice had grown loud. ¡°Will it work? How can I ignore something inside of me, memories in amounts greater than my own? Like a growing seedling sprouting? I do not know, I do not know, I feel lost! I can barely recall who I am, surely, I will lose myself soon. Madness, Madness! I cannot even recall my own name, I have been imprisoned for eons, I-.¡±

    SLAP! Ashton hit the man on the cheek hard. The man was stunned and saw Ashton¡¯s kind face in front of him. Ashton slowly reached up and and gently grabbed his face with both hands and said strongly, ¡°Stop talking, brother! I told you, stop lingering on your dreams; they will only seek to confuse you! Keep your mind here on me; I will not lose you to your wild fantasies. I need you here, don¡¯t go to far off places without me! I do not want to be alone again!¡±

    The man withdrew, angry tears on his cheeks, but didn¡¯t say anything. He glared at Ashton as Ashton dropped his hands back to his lap and he rubbed his cheek where he was hit. A fire was in his eyes, and Ashton was glad to see some life had returned to him. After a moment, the man said, ¡°Your lessons are harsh Ashton, but effective, thank you.  But know this, I am Drake, the son of Lord Aftalla, and I have never suffered such humiliation. I swear, if you ever hit me like that again I will kill you!¡±

    But Ashton laughed; and it was a strange sound to be heard in the caravan. It didn¡¯t travel far among the inmates and wagons; it was a joyful sound that did not fit. ¡°Good, good I see you have come back. Forget your dark deceits; you said your name was Drake son of Aftalla? Do not forget it again, or maybe engrave  upon your hand.  It is strange name, but I like it. It sounds hopeful. Now talk to me, and tell me, where are you from?¡±

    Drake was still frowning; bitterness had crept into him. He answered, ¡°I am from a different world, probably very far from here. Only a little bit ago, I used to be a young master, but look at me now! Curse Drfuil, it doesn¡¯t look like I can return again soon.¡±

    ¡°Oh, so you were kidnapped too. But you mustn¡¯t say that, Drake,¡± Ashton chastised. ¡°You shouldn¡¯t give up on hope, not when there are friends around you and air to breath. Look, you are wearing shackles instead of spells, and haven¡¯t you said that their spells don¡¯t work on you? There is hope in that. If we can figure out how to negate their spells, we might be able to break free. And who knows where this beast of a caravan will take us? Probably to death and madness, but it also might not. Humans cannot see the end, so you shouldn¡¯t pretend you can. Don¡¯t lose hope in returning home, for no other motivation will free you. Recall your home; may your desire to return to it keep you strong!¡±

    Ashton¡¯s words seemed to irritate Drake, but he could not deny what the man said. He replied, ¡°You speak oddly, even for a plebeian, Ashton. Here we are in this slave wagon, but yet you speak of hope!  I do not know. You will have to hope for both of us Ashton, for I cannot. Keep your hope to yourself! I will have determination, instead. And anger. I feel it inside of me even now. Time hasn¡¯t cooled it, I don¡¯t believe it will ever cool. Drfuil took me from my home and people and now thinks he can command me? Curse him a thousand times! I refuse to bow to him!  I am from the house of Foenell, I will make him pay; he tried to give me his power and a strong will, but he only succeeded partway. His failure will be costly, I swear will use his strength against him. How I hate him!¡±

    Ashton looked at Drake and saw that he was filled with a silent wrath. He asked him, ¡°I am surprised that you speak my village''s language, Drake. Where do you come from that you learned our speech?¡±

    Drake only grunted in response at first and then replied, ¡°The ring allows me to communicate. I have no language barriers.¡±

    Ashton tried to absorb what he said, but spoke instead, ¡°I do not pretend to know what is right or wrong, nor do I know of the Drfuil you speak. But we will see in the end whether your vengeance will be ill or not. I see strength in your eyes, and I believe that my best hope of release will be with you. May we find companionship together! But escape does not look to be anytime soon, unless your magic ring can break your shackles along with spells. Do not worry; there will be lots of time for escape planning later. For now, I am glad to have somebody to talk to. They divided the prisoners into cages with people who do not know each other''s language,  and so they couldn¡¯t communicate with each other. I am glad to see that you speak my tongue. I feel I would soon have turned into one of them if not for somebody to speak to.¡± He gestured towards the other prisoners sprawled across the cage.

    ¡°What happened to them?¡± Drake asked. His anger was gone now and he seemed small and shrunken from sickness and hunger. He noticed the other inmates them for the first time and he looked startled to see them so.

    ¡°I do not know.¡± Ashton answered. ¡°I am also simply afraid of them. I have asked the same question, was it the sheer time alone in here without anybody to talk to that made them thus? Or was it something far worse, a force of magic that dulled their minds? Either way, they have not said a word or done anything other than eat sleep drink and relieve themselves. They are in a worse state than animals. I would rather be dead than end up like they are. How I pity them. But they cannot be helped, I have tried.¡± While they were discussing the other prisoners, they suddenly rose in clamor and banged on the side of the cage. Drake was startled and he fell over, but Ashton laughed at him. ¡°It is simply time for the water to be passed around. How they sense the approach of the soldier I do not know, but they are a sure sign of it.¡± Still laughing, Ashton helped Drake into a sitting position again because Drake was still weak and tired.

    The water made it to the pair, and Ashton demonstrated its unlimited supply. Drake was keenly interested in it, but the guards kept a close eye on him, and took the container soon after he drank. After they took it from him, Drake commented to Ashton, ¡°So that was their sorcery. I would have liked to have inspected it more. How can they use such artifacts so carelessly? Who are these people and where are they taking us? They do not even treat me with the dignity deserve, do they not know the ransom my father would pay? They do not even try to converse with me and I do not recognize their sigils.¡± He clenched his fingers in and out.

    Ashton didn¡¯t respond, and there was silence for a bit. Drake still stared out but now gazed upon the world. He looked at the wagons and trains and people running around. ¡°This is real, isn¡¯t it?¡± he asked sadly. Nobody answered him.

    Ashton was sitting down. The excitement of Drake¡¯s awakening had fallen away, and now he respected Drake¡¯s need to come to grips with reality. He felt sorrow for the man, and sorrow again for himself. He sang slowly,

    The world was new and grey and bright

    all was beautiful in his sight

    He walked the land and life arose

    The plants and trees and all that grows

    He built the lands between his hands

    and formed the sky where birds could fly

    Time was still and life was bliss

    Before the world became amiss

    ¡°You sing well,¡± Drake said, turning to Ashton, ¡°When we return to my country I will offer place you with our court minstrels. But what is that you sing?¡±

    ¡°It was an old song from my village.¡± Ashton replied, wondering what a minstrel was. ¡°Not very popular and not well known. Well, that was only a part of it. It is much longer, you see. But it speaks of happier times when the world was said to have been less cruel. My father and the elders say that such words and songs are foolishness; they distract from the present and fill the heart with dangerous thoughts. Perhaps they are right, but the song lingers on. I like to sing it when I can. I don¡¯t think such a time actually existed, but it is nice to think about, no? In any case, it is just a song.¡± After another moment Ashton added softly. ¡°Actually, it was the last song I heard Father sing.¡±

    Drake listened to what Ashton had said, but hadn¡¯t really paid attention. He said after a bit, ¡°I don¡¯t know Ashton; it seems I spoke too quickly. I do not see us getting out of here anytime soon. Whatever advantage my ring gave me was overcome with these irons. Look at all the people out there. How can we hope to overcome that? Escape from this cage is unlikely enough; escape from these people even more so.¡±

    ¡°Do not lose hope,¡± Ashton answered without looking up, ¡°We are still alive, and we have each other.¡±

    ¡°Hope for what, though?¡± Drake asked. Ashton did not reply. Just at that time the lanterns started dimming. His question was left in the darkness, along with everything else.

 Chapter 6

    Ashton and Drake continued to live inside the cage, despite the relentless dimmings and lightings of the lanterns and the pressure of death and sickness around them.  What can be said about the time that had passed? The whole thing seemed purposeless to Ashton and Drake, and they often thought that there was never an end to it. Drake had told Ashton to stick close to him so that whatever spell existed that was contorting the minds of the other prisoners would be warded off by his ring. But, was their fate then simply to die and rot in these cages, slowly being digested inside the giant beast that was the caravan? Not knowing the purpose for their imprisonment added torture to their captivity. All attempts to communicate with the guards ended in failure. The guards were surprised and afraid of Drake, the man who somehow voided the magic of their mages and could also speak their tongue. They struck out at him when he hollered at them in frustration, yelling out curses and obscenities at any soldier close by when his spirit was hot.

    ¡°I do not think that yelling at them will help,¡± Ashton said calmly. He was used to this situation by now, if one could get used to such a life. It was soon after the brightening of the lanterns that the guards had fed the captives that morning and Drake had taken another stab at communicating with the soldiers, but it ended as it always did with Drake receiving a sharp jab with the butt end of a spear. ¡°They are avoiding you now, and you are disturbing this peaceful time.¡±

    ¡°Fool, there is no peace here.¡± Drake growled, rubbing his shoulder where he had been hit. ¡°Peace is a quiet morning besides the pool of lilies and a meal prepared by the servants. If only they would listen they would understand my value and get me out of here, but those ignorant savages rebuff everything I say.  Surely, they know of the house of Foendell from my territory? But all that is here is the sound of wagons, soldiers, and fire. If nothing else, yelling at them makes me feel better.¡± Drake said huffily and he sat down in a plot and grabbed a piece of bread. He bit into it angrily, as if he resented being fed. ¡°You should try it sometime, too. I would love to see some hot blood flowing through you for once. Maybe they will let us out if here if we make enough noise.¡± Ashton snorted but didn¡¯t say anything.

    Despite the differences between the two humans, they had become close friends. They often irritated each other, but endless time with another person of at least an agreeable nature could only produce such result. Even more so, they each depended on the other for sanity and companionship.

    ¡°How can you be so cool and calm, accepting this all?¡± Drake demanded. If my Father new I was here he would send all his men to come rescue me.¡± He pounded on the cage walls again to emphasize his points.

    Ashton replied, not looking up, ¡°Your Father is not here, Drake. It is taught in my village that what comes will come, whether we struggle against it or not. Our songs speak about life as an unwavering flow of movement toward an end we do not know, but to an end nonetheless. Therefore, it is sung that what has happened must have happened, inevitably must have happened.¡±

    ¡°So you are a bunch of fatalists, then?¡±

    Ashton shook his head, ¡°It goes even further than that actually. We sing of the necessity of tragedies.¡±

    Drake grimaced, ¡°How can you live with yourselves? It was taught to my brothers and I that we need to have a strong burning fire in each of us in order to continue the dynasty our forefathers had built. We are told to face problems boldly and use our strength and resources to conquer adversaries, that is how my Father subdued our neighboring country, forcing it to pay tribute after they had treacherously tried to annex some of our land. I¡¯m surprised you all haven¡¯t committed some sort of ritual suicide yet.¡±

    Ashton glared at Drake, ¡°On the contrary, this allows us to find what little good remains in every situation, to find meaning.¡±

    ¡°Those are two foundational and contradictory beliefs.¡± Drake accused. Ashton only shrugged, ¡°What? So basically, you live by two beliefs, one is that even when there was nothing else good around to rely on, you could always say you were alive and that was good. The other one is that even if you couldn¡¯t rely on living for long, you could say that death would be a relief and that was good as well.¡±

    Ashton smiled and replied, ¡°I wish I could take you to meet my village elders. I¡¯m sure you would understand.¡±

    Drake shook his head and closed his eyes. ¡°Who am I to talk though? I can¡¯t even tell what goes on inside my own mind, where two contradictory memories exist. How much of each person yet exists inside of me and how much have they blended?¡±

    Ashton looked up questioningly. ¡°I don¡¯t understand what you are talking about.¡± Drake didn¡¯t respond.

    Eventually, Drake had lost track of how many days he and Ashton had been with the caravan, but he estimated about a month, a month of nothing but the rolling plains and forests that the wagons traveled through. Once, Drake asked Ashton when the sun was going to rise.

    ¡°The sun?¡± replied Ashton as if he had not heard that word before.

    ¡°Yeah, the sun. It¡¯s been like two days and the sun hasn¡¯t come up yet. I may have lost track of time completely, but I feel the sun should have come up by now. Or the moon at least. Maybe the days and nights are just longer here.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry Drake,¡± Ashton responded, ¡°but I don¡¯t understand what you are saying. I do not know what your sun is or what you mean by day or night. Describe them to me; maybe we just have different words.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re fooling me,¡± Drake said, exasperated. He waved his hands up high in illustration, ¡°You know, the sun, the big yellow thing in the sky. Gives of light and heat, rises in the east, sets in the west, all that stuff. The sun, we call it the sun where I am from. Please tell you have seen such a thing.¡± He had said sarcastically but Ashton simply give him a blank look. ¡°What!¡± he exclaimed, ¡°you do not have a sun here? That¡¯s crazy! How do the plants grow without the light from the sun? How does the atmosphere stay warm? How can anything exist with the sun?¡±

    A moment passed and Ashton considered his questions. ¡°The plants grow because they are alive,¡± Ashton replied calmly, giving Drake a puzzled look. ¡°And it is warm because it is warm, except when it gets cold. I do not understand what you are asking. Things exist because they exist.¡±

    ¡°But the sun is essential for life,¡± Drake insisted, ¡°It provides the light and heat of the day. It¡¯s impossible to live without it.¡± Drake paused and regained his composure. ¡°Okay, let me ask this then.¡± He said, ¡°You are right, we are probably just having a translation issue. I will be as general as possible, okay?¡± he asked slowly, ¡°What brings times of general light and then general darkness at regular intervals?¡±

    Ashton studied Drake for a moment and then said simply, ¡°Well, these lanterns here do.¡± Drake couldn¡¯t respond but gaped in astonishment at Ashton. Ashton felt peeved at being treated like a dolt. He said angrily, ¡°Do not look at me like that, it is obvious that what you are talking about are these lanterns. They do just what you said, periods of light and then darkness at regular times. What more are you looking for? But I take from your reaction that that was not what you meant. Then I must tell you that these lanterns are the only thing here that resembles what you speak of, and before I was captured, I had never seen such a thing either. You say that this sun gives off light, lots of light if it is similar to these lanterns. But I tell you the truth; I have always lived in darkness, except for the light we create from fire. I was amazed to see such things when I was first captured, and even now I still find it difficult to believe that so much light could be produced. Even without fire! My eyes still hurt from their brightness; I wish they would dim down a little bit. But that is not something I can control.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond but simply sat there saying softly, ¡°How can there not be a sun, that¡¯s crazy. It¡¯s preposterous.¡±

    ¡°Oh, come on, it can¡¯t be that bad.¡± Ashton said, ¡°Think of all the new things I have seen. Sorcery, light, lands, and people strange and unreal. We live in an unfamiliar world for both of us now. Is it so far of a stretch for there to be no ¡°sun¡± either?¡±

    Drake did not look convinced. He looked at Ashton directly and stated defiantly, ¡°Yes, it is.¡± Then he childishly folded his arms and pouted. Ashton rolled his eyes and thought, ¡°how can he act this way? This ¡°sun¡± couldn¡¯t be that big of a deal.¡±

    ¡°Alright, then¡± Ashton said raising his arms in a gesture, giving in to him. He asked scathingly, ¡°If it is so important to you why don¡¯t you tell me about this ¡°sun?¡±  Maybe you will feel better after talking about it. And while you are at it, tell me about where you are from. We haven¡¯t really talked about that yet.¡±

    Drake sighed and shook his head, but started talking anyway. ¡°I shouldn¡¯t have to talk about the sun. It¡¯s simply there, everybody knows about the sun.¡± Ashton raised his eyebrow at Drake and he said, ¡°Forget it, if it doesn¡¯t exist here than it doesn¡¯t matter. This place has been absurd so far,¡± he added sarcastically, ¡°Why shouldn¡¯t it simply break all rules for existence as well? Even for magic, this is just too much.¡±

    Ashton almost pointed out that he already said that but decided against it. He let it go. Perhaps it was an important enough thing to cause such a reaction. After a moment he softened and said instead, ¡°I would still like to hear more about where you are from, though, if you want to talk about it.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond, so Aston didn¡¯t press it. ¡°He still needs some time,¡± he thought. And he let the matter be, but pondered what he heard in his heart. Just who was Drake to speak of such things? Where was he from to have this place be so foreign to him? Of all the strange things Ashton had encountered, Drake was the strangest. He defied the rules and common knowledge of this world.

    Nothing new transpired for weeks and Drake and Ashton somehow got used to life, or at least as used to it as could possibly be. They filled their time as they could, talking, sitting, and singing, as if there was anything else they could do. But they kept their sanity, and both promised each other not to give into despair.

    ¡°The songs my people sing are part of who we are.¡± Ashton would repeat, ¡°How else are we to pass down knowledge and traditions through the generations? It has always been a part of me. I understand that other people do not share our same ¡­ regard for music. Are there songs from where you are from?¡±

    ¡°Yes, there are, actually. Lots of songs.¡± Drake admitted, ¡°But I was never a good singer and, I don¡¯t know. The court bards knew many songs, but no songs likes yours.¡±

    ¡°What a shame. I tell you the truth, there is nothing like music in the world! It cleans and purifies the soul. When the many voices of our tribe all sing together, it is like a great warmth enters us. How it is moves the heart! Words have meaning in themselves, but somehow when put to song, feelings are able to be transferred as well. If you think that you cannot sing now, I will have much to teach you. I will have us sing together before too long!¡±

    ¡°Unlikely,¡± Drake said, ¡°I don¡¯t sing. I was once told my voice sounded like a dying cow.¡±

    ¡°Oh, I won¡¯t accept that.¡± Ashton replied in good humor, ¡°Besides, while it is true that a beautiful voice enhances the song, truly beautiful music comes from the heart, not the mouth. You will learn to enjoy music like I have. Why would I sing alone when there is a perfectly good person here to sing with me? As you know, or I guess, maybe you don¡¯t know, music is better with more people. It¡¯s meant to be shared with lots of people, not alone.¡±The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement.

    ¡°Why is this so important to you?¡± Drake asked.

    Ashton thought for a moment and said, ¡°As a general rule, the tribe I am from has minimal contact with other people. The tribes like to keep to themselves, and identity in the tribe defines us. I didn¡¯t know that other tribes did not sing as we did until  I was already half grown. It was strange for me to learn that too, since song is such a foundational feature in our culture; I could not believe that everybody was not similar. I guess you could say our songs are what define me as part of my tribe.¡±

    ¡°As such,¡± Ashton continued, growing sentimental and looked out across the lands, ¡°singing now helps me identify myself with my tribe. I feel connected with my people even though we are far apart; do you know what I mean? I know they are singing similar songs at Carothos. They will keep singing in the future too.¡±

    Ashton turned back to Drake with a smile, ¡°We have song for just about everything we do too, whether before a meal, while working, or while traveling. We do not have songs for being in captivity, though, what a pity. I only sing what I feel like now, which is quite rebellious I must say. Children are punished for singing songs out of context inside the village. The elders are strict about it, if you know what I mean. But I had always believed that the songs should be sang as felt in our hearts. So, as you can imagine, I was considered somewhat of a problem-child growing up. I even made up some of my own songs as well, something really unheard of at my village.¡± Ashton smiled mischievously, ¡°I was always getting scolded. I remember one time when I was small and the adults had left for herding. The village was mostly deserted, so I sang loudly one of my favorite songs, while skipping about the well at the center of the village. But Caily-Oba had stayed behind due to her age. She heard me singing and rushed out with her cane to me. She whacked me with it, and I fell into the cistern next to the well and almost drowned.¡± Ashton shook his head laughing, ¡°That goes to show how important it was to the elders. ¡®Our songs are part of a long and distinguished tradition that has kept our people alive for generations!¡¯ they would say. ¡®To disrespect the song is to disrespect everything our village stands for!¡¯ Perhaps they were right, as I grew older I understood what they meant better. But still,¡± Ashton smiled devilishly at Drake, ¡°None of the elders are here now. Now I can sing what I want, when I want.¡± He grinned like a child indulging in some secret pleasure incorrigibly.

    Drake simply snorted and said, ¡°Yeah what great luck for you. You have been captured and now can sing all you want. Congratulations.¡± But Ashton merely laughed at Drake and started singing another song, probably one he had made up himself and one that the elders would have been aghast at as well. He sang with a mischievous glint in his eye,

    Odillaly, odilally,

    I like the taste of bread and honey

    Budgafall, budgafall

    I¡¯m so selfish to eat it all!

    I found a bee around a tree

    And smelled the sweet and thought the treat

    Up up high above a branch

    I saw the hive, I saw my chance!

    Odillaly, odilally,

    I like the taste of bread and honey

    Budgafall, budgafall

    I¡¯m so selfish to eat it all!

    I fetched the skin from the bin of my kin

    And wrapped myself for times of stealth

    For I wanted the nest all alone

    And not take it back to the people at home.

    Odillaly, odilally,

    I like the taste of bread and honey

    Budgafall, budgafall

    I¡¯m so selfish to eat it all!

    With the skin as my protection

    My plan worked out in its perfection!

    I got to the nest

    My climb at its best

    The honey I secured

    Despite what I feared!

    Odillaly, odilally,

    I like the taste of bread and honey

    Budgafall, budgafall

    I¡¯m so selfish to eat it all!

    But foolish me, not to see

    The cost of being alone

    I climbed my way down

    but it slipped to the ground!

    destroyed upon a stone

    Odillaly, odilally,

    I like the taste of bread and honey

    Budgafall, budgafall

    I should¡¯ve had help to save it all!

    Ashton sang this merrily and afterwards insisted Drake join in. Drake resisted stubbornly though and refused. In protest Ashton sang as loudly as possible within their cage. but it was  fun. They laughed at themselves and they laughed at the guards who eyed them warily, two people defying their prison. They continued to sing until the lanterns dimmed again, forgetting for a moment the horror of their captivity. Ashton sang to Drake many other songs, some silly some more serious, but all inappropriate for the setting. It was as if they had gotten merry off wine.

    The guards by nature were never too concerned about the captivity of their prisoners. They trusted completely in the spells that held them. Drake was simply an oddity to them, and rather than dealing directly with the problem, they generally avoided and ignored his presence. Because of that, Drake was eventually able to get the shackles off his hands. After playing around with them for days; he had managed to pry them off.

    ¡°See that?¡± he said proudly, holding up the shackles for Ashton to see, ¡°Already halfway there.¡± Unfortunately, his hopes didn¡¯t last, his feet were much more secure than his hands, and try as he might, he could not unlock them. The shackles were also connected to the wagon securely; he suspected there was magic involved.

    Drake¡¯s wide range of curses amused Ashton. ¡°How can my hands come off so easily and not my feet?¡± Drake raged, ¡°It is like they are trying to torment me on purpose, giving me a little hope, but then crushing it. My hands are free but it¡¯s useless! And how come the spell connecting me to that cage works but not the others?¡±

    ¡°Really?¡± Ashton would reply, ¡°Your hands come off? I would like to see that trick.¡±

    ¡°Maybe not so useless after all.¡± Drake would respond, throwing a pile of straw at Ashton.

    But having the extra piece of iron around proved enlightening. After trying to break their way out of the wagon with it, they saw that a spell also surrounded the cage making it impossible even if they broke through the wood. ¡°What don¡¯t they use magic for?¡± Drake exclaimed. ¡°How can they expend this kind of energy? they must have thousands of mages here to keep this operation running! There¡¯s not even a need for a cage at this rate. Might as well just have a roof over our heads. Why do they even put us in here? In the end, I guess this ring is not as helpful as we thought.¡±

    But Ashton replied, ¡°Don¡¯t belittle it too much! It may not get us out of here, but it seems to protect us from the wagon curse. I would rather keep my sanity and remain in prison than escape with madness. But still, it is a pity that your ring won¡¯t break that spell as well.¡±

    ¡°We will need to be freed from the outside then.¡± Drake said, but then he was silent. What hope was there in that?

    The iron shackles useful in other ways though. Hours without end was wearisome and they spent it however they could without going crazy. With the sharp piece of metal they started to carve and create what little they could inside the cage. They covered the wagon with images; the iron was unwieldy, but effective. Drake wrote on the side in letters.

    ¡°What did you write?¡± Ashton asked, after having writing explained to him.

    ¡°It says, Ashton is a jackle.¡± Drake replied. ¡°I wanted to write out my feelings.¡±

    ¡°Oh,¡± Ashton said mockingly, ¡°What strong feelings you have for me. However, I am afraid you are doomed to sorrow for I cannot reciprocate your feelings.¡±

    The iron also had another purpose as well. When the walls were filled completely, they had to look again for something to do. ¡°Hey,¡± Ashton said suddenly, ¡°help me pry this piece of wood off.¡±

    ¡°Are you sure?¡± Drake asked looking at the art he was pointing at. ¡°You spent a while carving this picture into it.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, I¡¯m going to make a flute out of it.¡±

    ¡°You know how to make a flute?¡± Drake asked, reaching for the slab of wood pointed out.

    ¡°Well, no.¡± Ashton replied, ¡°But I know how to play one.¡± They wrenched it free and Ashton felt the weight with his hands. ¡°Yeah, I think this will work.¡±

    Ashton picked up the sharp iron and held it over the wood. He appeared uncertain as to what was next. ¡°Are you sure you can do this?¡± Drake asked.

    Ashton smiled and lowered his hands. ¡°Let me tell you another thing about our culture Drake. Flutes carry a special meaning for my people, more so than for other people I have met.  All the males are taught how to play the flute from an early age, and it is an important part of our music. I could play the flute in my sleep.¡± He chuckled a bit, ¡°Maybe I will once I finish it. I¡¯ll fill the guards¡¯ heads with lonely sounds for lonely thoughts. Maybe they will let us go, no?¡± Ashton laughed. ¡°In our tribe, when a man decides to take a wife, part of the initiation process is the ability to make a flute. The father will generally teach his son how to do it, but only at that time. The success of the son is very important part of the ceremony, so it is not to be treated lightly. After it is completed, the flute is a sign of the start of a new family. In other words, every household has a flute in it. The beauty and quality of the flute is important as well and a sign of respect for the household. However, conversely is also true. I have seen marriages broken off because the man couldn¡¯t make a satisfactory flute. It is a curse to us, as well as a blessing. I guess that is what it means to have a tradition.¡± He laughed again at himself and looked at the pieces in his hands again.

    ¡°You are not to be married, though?¡± Drake asked, ¡°Aren¡¯t you breaking your tradition?¡±

    ¡°Yes I am. But it will be okay.¡± He said sadly. ¡°It doesn¡¯t look like I will be getting married anytime soon and I much desire to play it again. I was the best at playing the flute within our family too; Father always let me play it during the festivals. Anyway,¡± his face brightened, ¡°if I do manage to produce a flute, without any instruction mind you, everybody will be very impressed when I return, and I will have the pick of the ladies.¡± He held out the wood like a pointer stick and said, ¡°I¡¯ll just line them up and say, ¡°hmm, you pass, you pass, no not you¡­¡±

    They both laughed, and from then Ashton worked on creating his flute. He wasn¡¯t successful and used op much of the wood in the cage. ¡°We will just strip the whole thing, and eventually and be left without a roof!¡± Ashton would joke.

    So the two ate and slept, and Ashton carved and sang and Drake eventually sang as he could. Ashton generally slept soundly and did get used to the light and the schedule. ¡°Such a strange thing,¡± he said about it, ¡°and you say that where you are from there is also such light? It is remarkable. You will have to tell me about it when you feel up to it.¡± Drake didn¡¯t respond.

    But Drake did not sleep as well as Ashton, and he often had dreams and nightmares. Ashton would hear him at night, shaking and shivering from the distress. ¡°Shut up!¡± Ashton would hear him growl, ¡°Stop looking at me like that! I won¡¯t do it! I will do what I want; I don¡¯t have to obey you!¡± Ashton never said anything. It seemed Drake had his own demons to fight.

    The nightmare happened again, late one night and Drake awoke sick. He leaned over as far to the side of the cage as he could to empty his rebelling stomach.  It always amazed him that while a hand could not pass the barrier, his stomach fluids could. He laid back down and breathed heavily, holding his hand to his head.

    It was dark and silent, and a rain had started falling. The fires behind the wagons never faltered, though, even during the rainstorms, but the rain did make everything darker and wet. Drake was glad that there was yet a roof to their wagon to keep them dry. He stayed awake and watched the rain; he doubted he would have been able to fall asleep again that night. Then Drake noticed something odd. Something was different. He saw the wagons had suddenly started to become more active with people and beasts. He sat up and looked out from his cage, trying to understand what was happening. Then shouts came and there was also the sound of clinking metal and rushing soldiers. Horns started blowing and there was much commotion within the camp. The lanterns then suddenly lit up, much earlier than their due time.

    ¡°Ashton, Ashton,¡± Drake called shaking him roughly, ¡°Wake up!¡±

    ¡°What, what. What do you want?¡± Ashton responded irritably.

    But Drake didn¡¯t respond and instead kept his gaze on the activity of the camp. Ashton looked up too and then sat up quickly. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± he asked.

    Loud bells and horns were ringing out and the soldiers were running around, men shouted orders and armor clad people whisked by.  Drake listened carefully, and then responded, ¡°I think we are being attacked.¡±

 Chapter 7

    ¡°Attacked? What makes you think that?¡± Ashton questioned Drake, but he paid close attention to what was happening.

    ¡°Why else would they be running around like that?¡± Drake said, pointing out the people running around as if Ashton couldn¡¯t see them, ¡°Also, I can catch pieces of what they are saying. I wish it wasn¡¯t raining right now, so I would be able to hear more clearly!¡±

    Ashton and Drake listened carefully and observed what was happening. Soldiers were gathering into groups and then marching off to the left of the caravan in companies. The officers, or what Drake called officers, coordinated the groups and were the ones yelling loudly. Soldiers on horses were riding back and forth in a crazed fury, intent on whatever mission they were on. It was difficult to see in the rain, however, even with the lanterns lit.

    ¡°Do you think we are in danger?¡± Ashton asked nervously.

    ¡°We are trapped inside a cage. I think it¡¯s part of the deal that nothing gets in.¡± Ashton gave him a look. ¡°It looks like they are sending a lot of troops over there,¡± he said seriously. ¡°It must be a large force to threaten this group. They are emptying the whole caravan. Can you see them?¡± Drake pointed toward the embarking columns of soldiers. ¡°I can hardly see anything in the rain.¡±

    ¡°No, I cannot see anything either.¡± Ashton moaned, gripping the cage bars. ¡°The most interesting thing that ever happened here is being covered up by the rain. And it¡¯s only raining harder!¡±

    Ashton was right,. Eventually a downpour had started, and the two captives couldn¡¯t see ten feet past their wagon. They gave up straining to see with a sigh, and instead pondered the possibilities. Eventually there wasn¡¯t a soldier to see within the camp.

    ¡°You know,¡± Drake said thoughtfully after a bit, ¡°This could be our chance to escape.¡±

    There was a pause before Ashton responded. ¡°I¡¯ve thought of that too, but, as you said, we are still trapped in this wagon despite what is happening out there. Even if the soldiers never come back, there still isn¡¯t anything we can do.¡±

    ¡°True, but what if something big happened? What if this caravan started to get overrun and defeated or something? The spell could break!¡± Drake ended, snapping his fingers.

    Ashton considered it, ¡°it is unlikely that this attack, or whatever it is, is a rescue attempt. There are no tribes around that could match this army in strength, or even pose a threat.¡±

    ¡°Well sorry for being optimistic,¡± Drake said with a pout. ¡°Let¡¯s just sit here, instead, like we¡¯ve been doing for the last who knows how long.¡±

    ¡°No, you are right, something could happen.¡± Ashton continued ignoring what Drake said, ¡°Depending on what it is, it could help us or not. The new force could win and just as easily come here and slaughter all of us. We cannot tell from here. And first of all, we can¡¯t do anything until the sorcery is defeated. Maybe if the people who are creating these spells fall, the cage will become unlocked. Or maybe it won¡¯t. We don¡¯t know how these spells work. It seems like we can only wait and see.¡±

    ¡°But we should be prepared in case it does happen.¡± Drake said and he took hold of their piece of iron and considered its strength. Would they need a weapon if they did break out? he thought. ¡°I feel that it¡¯s going to happen; I doubt anything like this will occur again soon.¡±

    ¡°We will see,¡± Ashton said simply. They waited expectantly, but it only rained harder and louder. Water found its way into the wagon and soaked the occupants. The space became wet and cold for them and with the discomfort also came a loss of their hope.  Time passed and Drake became increasing frustrated and miserable. Suddenly, he cursed loudly and threw his weapon across the wagon. It clanged upon the bars and hit the spell¡¯s barrier with a loud unnatural sound. the iron shackles fell to the floor harmlessly. Ashton didn¡¯t react; he had gotten used to Drake¡¯s temper by then.

    ¡°There should have been some news by now, either good or bad.¡± Drake commented, as if trying to explain why he threw the iron across the cage.

    ¡°It seems to me that everything here happens in bigger proportions then what we are used to.¡± Ashton replied, ¡°This caravan is bigger than I could have imagined, the soldiers are more numerous than I could have imagined. Maybe the fight will also last longer than we could have imagined.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond, and instead repositioned himself out of the way of a new flow of water. How come that water could get in and out but they couldn¡¯t? It didn¡¯t seem right.

    ¡°What would we do, if we did get free?¡± Ashton asked. Actually, this question had been on his mind for a while. He wondered what Drake would say; he doubted Drake had even given it thought. ¡°Successfully that is. We get food and water here; what will we do outside of the care of these people?¡±

    Drake looked up at Ashton and said stubbornly, ¡°I¡¯m sure we''ll figure it out.¡± The water especially had put him in a bad mood.

    ¡°Okay then,¡± Ashton said sarcastically, ¡°I¡¯m glad that issue is resolved. But what about our destination? I do not know these lands, and I am sure you do not either. There might be a village of people nearby, but if we did find them, there would be no way to know if they are friendly to strangers. Of course, we could try to travel back to my village. It should be simple enough to follow the tracks and find Carothos. That would be what I would like to do. It will take a long time though, much longer than it took to get here. Plus, finding food and water along the trail of burnt ashes this thing left behind would only increase the time. But what about you, you would want to go to your home, wouldn¡¯t you? In what direction does that lay?¡± Drake didn¡¯t respond to his question so Ashton tried again, ¡°Drake?¡±

    Drake burst out, ¡°Look, I don¡¯t have all the answers; I¡¯ve just been trying to get out of here. Who knows where they are taking us or what plans they have for us? Isn¡¯t escape our top priority? Don¡¯t you want to get out of here? Getting out of here will be hard enough; we can worry about the other details later!¡±

    Ashton had suspected that Drake was sometimes reckless and stupid, but finally he had proof of it. ¡°Well, it is a good thing you have me here with you. In any case, while you might not have given any thought to survival after escape, I have. It seemed important to me, for some reason.¡± Drake merely huffed. Ashton continued, ¡°Actually, while I do not know these particular lands, I have recognized the plants and animals we have come across. That probably means that there are the same wilderness features here as at my home. If that is the case, I¡¯m confident we could at least survive if we managed to escape; I at least know how to live in the wilderness.  Anybody who grew up here would be able to do the same, I¡¯m sure.¡± He paused and then asked, ¡°But where are you from not to know these things?¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t answer and Ashton felt a sudden annoyance that Drake wouldn¡¯t share. It had been bothering him for a while, and Ashton vowed to get it out of him someday, even if he died while trying. ¡°Not talking today, huh, Drake?¡± he said, ¡°Well, this isn¡¯t the end-.¡± Ashton¡¯s word were cut short by a loud crashing sound.

    Ashton was thrown to the floor. ¡°By the horn of the goat!¡± he yelled, ¡°the roof has caved in!¡± Apparently, whatever wood was still in place was weakened by the rain and it collapsed on top of him in soggy mess. Drake jumped up and helped him quickly, but was laughing while doing so.

    ¡°Are you okay, Ashton!¡± he called, pulling pieces of wood off him.

    ¡°Yeah. I think I soiled my trousers, though.¡± He responded dolefully, pushing the wood off himself.

    ¡°That will quickly wash off in the rain, don¡¯t worry.¡± Drake said happily. His earlier moodiness had vanished already. Ashton wondered about the man¡¯s emotional stability. ¡°At least you are not hurt. Nothing like a cave-in to stir the spirits, aye? What will the soldiers do when they see this, I wonder?¡± Drake asked. ¡°Maybe they will give us a new wagon to sit in.¡± he joked.

    ¡°Wait Drake,¡± Ashton said suddenly, ¡°if the roof has fallen in that means¡­¡± he checked his hand and feet, he was able to move them freely. ¡°The spell has been broken! It must have been the only thing that was holding up the roof at this point.¡±

    Drake stood still, stunned for a second. Then in one swift movement he snatched the iron and smashed his shackles that no longer were spellbound closed. They came apart in a quick flash and heavy sound. He struggled out of them desperately, and when he was free of them, he jumped up and looked around wildly. ¡°This is our chance! Let¡¯s get out of here!¡± He kicked the soggy and weaken wall, and it came down as well and fell to the ground in a splash of mud and water.

    ¡°Look,¡± Ashton said, standing up slowly and pointing out, ¡°The whole Caravan has stopped moving. It must have happened when the roof fell in for us not to notice. What could have happened? Even the fire trail has been extinguished.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know and I don¡¯t care!¡± Drake said excitedly. He tried to jump down, but merely flopped to the side and rolled over upon impact. He stood up shakily, wet and muddy. ¡°I guess I will have to get used to walking again.¡±

    ¡°Curses, my legs are like jelly. Be careful, Ashton, I can hardly stand.¡± He gestured for Ashton to come down as well, but he hadn¡¯t moved, ¡°What are you waiting for!¡± he called frantically.

    ¡°What about the rest of the people here?¡± Ashton called.

    ¡°What other people?¡± Drake asked incredulously.

    Ashton pointed toward the other occupants of their wagon and Drake looked at them. The roof and the wall had collapsed upon them half burying them. They did not struggle to remove the wood and metal off them and as always they seemed dead to the world with blank faces and personality. They frightened Drake terribly, and the idea of becoming like them haunted his dreams. He tried to ignore them the best as could, and hadn¡¯t given them much thought lately. ¡°What about them?¡± he yelled over the sound of the rain. He knew what Ashton was about to say and he didn¡¯t like it. ¡°There is nothing we can do for them. We can¡¯t take them with us, it¡¯s impractical! Just leave them, they can¡¯t be saved.¡±

    Still, Ashton didn¡¯t move. ¡°Ashton!¡± Drake yelled angrily now, ¡°We don¡¯t have time for this! Get down now! We have to go while we have the chance, while the guards are away!¡±

    ¡°We can¡¯t just leave them!¡± Ashton yelled back.

    ¡°What can you possibly do for them?¡± Drake retorted, ¡°They are already dead, in spirit if not body. There is nothing you can do for them! You think that there can be a good ending for everything, but you are just being naive. This will be our only chance to escape; don¡¯t blow it up on some juvenile fantasy!¡±

    Ashton¡¯s countenance darkened, and he spoke out angrily to Drake, ¡°Don¡¯t lecture me on the naivety of optimism. I know full well the decrepidness of life. Hasn¡¯t my village always lived in darkness and fear? Haven¡¯t I lost my everything to the dangers of the wild? Hasn¡¯t my village existed in the hardships beyond our strength to endure? Haven¡¯t despair and death followed me closely throughout my life? I have no fantasies about this life, make no mistake! But it is you that has fallen under the delusions of this place. My experience with struggle has let me not lose sight of what is right and good, while you have lost sight of both. I understand our situation, but we must do what we can to help people around us, now during times of stress especially as well as during times of peace. Come up here, we can¡¯t do much for them, but we can at least make sure they do not drown and suffocate under this fallen roof!¡±

    Drake was astonished to hear such a violent outburst from the usually calm Ashton. After a moment, he climbed up again, but said bitterly, ¡°This is a huge waste of time. The soldiers could come back any second but here we are, helping dead men.¡± Ashton didn¡¯t respond, and Drake soon lost his real anger. The two worked together and cleared away the rubbish in the wagon, unburying the residents therein. None of them had actually died, and Drake and Ashton were able to thatch together some spare planks to create a temporary roof for them.

    ¡°A pity they have no will left.¡± Ashton said sadly. ¡°If they did they could escape with us in the confusion. I wish I could help them more.¡±

    ¡°We have helped them enough, perhaps too much already. Let¡¯s go now!¡± Drake said. He jumped down from the wagon once again, this time more steadily. He helped Ashton down as well, into the mud and tracks on the ground. They had given up trying to remain dry. Both were soaked to the marrow. The caravan had stopped in the middle of a wide and grassy plain with tall plants all around them. Although neither of them could see far in any direction, they knew that behind them was the wide trail of ashes that led toward Ashton¡¯s home, Carothers. They agreed for the time being that would be where they would head.

    ¡°But first we must grab some something.¡± Ashton said shortly, and he quickly darted away toward a different carriage.

    ¡°What could you possibly want now?!¡± hissed Drake speeding after him, ¡°we¡¯ve spent too much time already.¡±

    ¡°How about you start thinking before acting so rashly?¡± Ashton called back, ¡°You will get yourself killed at this rate.¡± Ashton threw a look over his shoulder. ¡°I¡¯m getting a water skin from the wagon that I see our captors use. It should prove useful, no?¡±

    They arrived at the wagon and Ashton started inspecting it for an opening. ¡°Well Mr. know everything,¡± Drake said, although understanding that the subtleties of the language didn¡¯t translate well, ¡°Since all the spells in the camp have stopped functioning, while having a container with an unlimited supply of water would be nice to possess, it is unlikely that will actually happen.¡±

    ¡°Still,¡± Ashton said, unperturbed by Drake¡¯s remark, probably not understanding the sarcasm, ¡°having a container we can at least fill up with water would still be valuable to have on the trip.¡± He had found the opening to the wagon and was crawling in.

    ¡°I suppose so,¡± Drake said grudgingly. He turned around to keep a lookout for any soldiers. But all was quiet except for the rain. Quiet and unnerving. It looked strange to him that there could be so much light while yet there was lots of rain. In Drake¡¯s homeland, the rain clouds would have blotted out the sun, but here, the lanterns were still brightly lit. He wondered what was happening in the battle. It must be far off for no noise to reach them. And now that he was taking time to think, questions plagued him. Why had the spells come off anyway? Were the spell casters simply distracted, or had something else happened? If the opponents were winning the fight and had defeated the sorcerers, why wasn¡¯t there a sign of them? Drake felt uneasy about the situation and wanted to get away quickly. Ashton appeared to be taking his time, though.Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.

    ¡°Ashton!¡± he called out again, ¡°What in the blazes is taking you so long? If you can¡¯t find it, then just get out of there!¡± Ashton didn¡¯t respond so Drake stuck his head into the carriage. ¡°Oi! What are you doing?¡±

    Ashton was simply standing there, not moving a muscle. He was as straight as a board and his arms were held closely to his sides. ¡°Ashton?¡±

    ¡°I can¡¯t move, Drake.¡± Ashton said plainly.

    Drake hauled himself into the wagon, ¡°what do you mean you can¡¯t move? Just because you can¡¯t find the water skin doesn¡¯t mean that-.¡°

    Ashton cut him off, ¡°no, Drake, listen.  I can¡¯t move anything, not a muscle.¡±

    Drake paused for a second. ¡°What?¡± he asked, not comprehending what was said.

    Ashton continued, ¡°It¡¯s not just me either, all the prisoners are similar. It is like a lock.¡±

    Drake looked around at the other people in the wagons the wagons around them. ¡°They look the same to me.¡± He said simply.

    ¡°No, Drake, listen to me! Another spell has been placed on us. All of us, I can feel it. I don¡¯t think that the spells on the cage came off without a purpose; they had something else planned all along. I knew something was wrong.¡±

    Drake was having trouble believing what Ashton said. He acted calm but inside of him a terrible feeling was rooting itself in, like a tall tree scraping up his insides. ¡°Come on,¡± he said calmly but shakily. He reached for Ashton and grabbed him by the arm. He couldn¡¯t move it an inch. He tried harder but the spell refused to budge. He cursed.

    ¡°Drake¡­¡± Ashton said weakly.

    ¡°Shut up!¡± Drake snarled, suddenly furious, ¡°Don¡¯t mess with me! We are almost free; I won¡¯t let this end now! Not when we are so close! I¡¯ll pick you up and carry you out of range of the spell if I have to!¡± He tried to carry Ashton but he remained planted in his spot. No force could move him.

    ¡°Shit, shit, shit, Shit!¡± Drake was now saying, desperate now and panicking. Ashton tried to speak, but Drake kept interrupting him, ¡°SILENCE! I will get us out of here, just be quiet. I don¡¯t want to hear it.¡± In desperation, he grabbed the invisible ring and tried to press it against Ashton to break the spell.

    ¡°You know that won¡¯t work,¡± Ashton murmured.

    ¡°God Damn it!¡± Drake said, giving up for a moment and breathing heavily and staring down upon Ashton. He studied Ashton, thinking hard.

    Without warning Ashton started moving, like a sudden gust of wind blowing leaves around. ¡°Stop! What are you doing?¡± Drake cried out, startled.

    Ashton didn¡¯t answer but instead, climbed down the wagon in a fluid motion and started walking away fast. Drake jumped down after him, wondering what on earth was going on. Then Ashton turned his head to look at Drake. His eyes were wide and full of fear and he said softly as someone begging pitifully for hope, ¡°Drake!¡±

    Drake felt horror cascade upon him like an avalanche, and he realized what was happening. He saw the other prisoners, all of them, moving as well. They beat down the weak walls of the cages and walked out, like an army, grim and silent. And other than the banging of the walls, there was no sound other than the quiet sloshing of men in the rain. It was a quiet march of the dead, through the mud and the grit, to whatever end the unholy pilgrimage would lead to. Drake was frozen at the sight of it. People who had not walked in months were striding along at a fast pace, an unstoppable will moved them toward its dark end. A sudden impulse clutched at Drake to flee from the horror he was witnessing, but he fought it off, barely.

    He had lost sight of Ashton momentarily, but caught up to him swiftly. ¡°Don¡¯t worry friend,¡± he said shakily, ¡°don¡¯t worry, I will get us out of this. You¡¯ll see. I¡¯m not going to let them take you.¡±

    ¡°But what can you do, Drake?¡± Ashton asked. He had regained some of his composure but his face was still a sheet of white. ¡°Your ring can¡¯t break the spell, we both know that.¡±

    ¡°I know, I know. Be quiet, I¡¯ll think of something. God damn it!¡± he yelled, shoving a man who had come close to them, ¡°Don¡¯t come close to me!¡± he screamed unreasonably. The man stumbled a bit, but was otherwise unconcerned with what Drake did to him. Drake was deeply unnerved, however, and he shook, either from fear or cold.

    They walked some more together. Neither said anything. Drake¡¯s mind worked furiously, but nothing of promise presented itself to him.  Wherever they were going, it appeared to be some distance away, at least. The group showed no sign of slacking its pace and the group continued on without hesitation. Finally, Ashton spoke, ¡°Drake, run away!¡±

    ¡°What?¡± He responded incredulously.

    ¡°Go, there¡¯s nothing you can do here. Run back to the camp and get the water skin. I did see one and almost grabbed it before the spell came over me. Then escape! There is nothing for you here!¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t say that!¡± Drake snapped, ¡°I¡¯m not leaving you here alone. You want to turn into a ghoul like them, Huh? You want to turn into a lifeless creature without hope or will? We can still get out of here. Don¡¯t give up yet!¡±

    ¡°Drake,¡± Ashton said desperately, ¡°There was never any chance of escape for me, not when the enemy is this powerful. Look at what they are doing; they are controlling thousands of men like this at once! Do you think they will let even one man out of their grasp? They are too strong! Only you can resist them, you and that ring! This is the chance you were waiting for! Run back home, to your wonderful home I never got to hear about. Go! Get out of here! Leave me and go!¡±

    ¡°No, I can¡¯t do that! I can¡¯t abandon you!¡±

    ¡°DRAKE!¡± Ashton screamed, ¡°Shut up! There is nothing you can do! You accused me before of blinding optimism, but now it is my turn. There is no way this can turn out well; there is no happy ending here. Wake up and look around you! This is not something we can oppose; we are all just powerless against this foe. It has always been like this and always will! Only you can get away. So do it, do what you can!¡±

    Something stirred inside Drake, a powerful mixture of hate, stubbornness, fear and pride. The two parts of Drake collided and blended in an incompatible mess.  He shook and clenched his hands, drawing blood from the pressure and he breathed irregularly. What he said next was not screamed at Ashton, yet it still had the force to startle him. Ashton wondered at the strange transformation that took place in the man. He looked like a man beyond his mortality in the night and the rain.

    Drake said darkly, yet queerly calm, ¡°No, I will not. Do you think you can tell me what to do? Do you think they can force my hand? I am a Noble of the house of Foendell, I will do as I see fit. I will not leave you here to die. Who are these people to control us so? What controls this army and moves it to do such things? How can such power exist here to plunder and steal and kill and rape? Is that what power means? Curse it! It is not right; it is not how it is supposed to be. Where is the justice of this land?¡±

    Drake was silent for a moment and Ashton wondered if he was going to turn and leave him. Truth be told, the Drake beside him frightened Ashton a little. But when Drake spoke again it was much more normal, ¡°I¡¯m not leaving Ashton. Even if there is no other chance for me to escape, I will not go. I already escaped once from death, all of my companions were left to die. I can¡¯t do that again! I do not know how to survive here anyway; I would most likely die before anything good could happen. You are right, though, I do not see a good ending here for both us, I will stop looking for one. We have made it through so far together as well as could be we will have to trust that together we can still overcome obstacles. Besides, in the end I still don¡¯t know how to get back to my home. It is different from your home; it is not something that can be walked to. I do not even think it is possible anymore. You said you wanted to hear about my home, but I didn¡¯t want to talk about for fear of what it means, for me and for you. I will tell you now though, but perhaps you will despise me afterwards. I do not know! But you are right, you do deserve to know.¡±

    It was getting darker, substantially darker as the group continued to move away from the lit up camp. Drake had pulled up right next to Ashton, and the two were walking together now, as if Drake was caught up in the spell as well. They were moving at a fast pace and although Ashton was very wet, he was getting hot under the strain of the march. He wondered that the spell could make these men march so strongly on muscles that surely deteriorated significantly over the months in the cages. Every so often one would stumble and fall, but he would pick himself back up again and continue on undeterred.

    ¡°The world I come from is separate from this world,¡± Drake began. ¡°It like the shore on the other side of a large river, I had been taught. It is very similar to this world, though. There are plants and animals and ground and trees and people that inhabit it. In that respect, it¡¯s practically the same. But it is so different as well! The sun, the sun! I wish I could see it again! I wish I would be able to see its light before I die here, to feel its warmth in the day! The sun is an entity that exists in the sky above us. It rises in the east and sets in the west giving the inhabitants of the land day and night, darkness and light, on a similar schedule to the lanterns here. If I didn¡¯t know better, I would say that they are based on our sun. We call the land Learoth, and there is so much land there that you couldn¡¯t see everything unless you spent your whole life trying. And there is more water than land! Oceans with fish and whales in it, countless living organisms. But I lived in a place called Seamond the great capital of our country. There I was a son of an Noble Lord, a pox upon that old fool!¡± he added savagely, ¡°My biggest worry was my status among my brothers and other nobles sons. How silly, how trifling. I see it now! We didn¡¯t think about death and prison, and I never wondered where my next meal was going to come from. That is the sort of place I came from, a place without worries. It is strange to think of it now, though. If I could, I would like to take you there sometime.¡±

    ¡°How did I end up here though? I was told it was pure, unfortunate chance! We were digging up a newly discovered ruin, but it wasn¡¯t what we had thought it would be in our camp. It was an entrance to an ancient prison and its guardians massacred out our men, soldiers and magicians alike! I remember seeing our Captain die, and even young Growan too, cut in half by the powerful golems that guarded the prison. I was prepared to die as well for my folly, you see, it was I who choose to open the doors in the end, despite the warnings of my Captain. It was all my fault, I let the magicians words get to me. I would curse him now, but he too is dead. But I fell. Literally. Pulled into the very presence of a god, called out of that dark room before the sharp edges of the guardians weapons could skew me. Do you know, Ashton, this place we are in now has a name? It¡¯s called Feresuil, not the wilderness, although everybody calls it that. And there are many other territories besides it, each with their own names and lands. It¡¯s like a village with many houses. Right now, we are in but one single house. I believe these soldiers to be from another. Do you understand what I mean? And each territory has a god that formed it and rules over it. Even my home territory had its god and my father rules under his influence. You said before that things exist simply because they exist, but you are wrong. Things exist because they are created by something! This wilderness, Feresuil, has a god as well. You do not know him, but his name is Drfuil and he cares greatly about the well-being of his land and people!¡±

    Ashton listened carefully to Drake, not saying a word. Drake continued, ¡°Long ago, before the memories of your elders, and even beyond the memories of your songs, Drfuil lived and worked within this territory and there was peace and happiness. But then he waged war against the other countless territories, and as punishment, he was sealed away forever from his territory to watch it in torment for eternity. And so it has been since. That is the legacy of your people; it is the meaning of your existence. You only serve as punishment for a god you do not even know anymore. The other territories come and take what they please. You are right. They have the power to do so; there is no power here to stop them.¡±

    ¡°So I fell into the presence of Drfuil, by accident of probabilities, it seemed, during the chaos of our unintentional intrusion. Drfuil he called it fate. He told me his misfortune and took my ring that my father had given me. He then asked me to save his people, to save this land in his stead. This is where you must hate me, Ashton. I said no. But how could I say yes, when the price was so terrible? He asked for my life, but more than that he asked for my soul. How could I give that up, especially after understanding the loss of identity that was the cost? This ring here, you cannot see it you say, but I see it clearly, and it is a constant reminder about the horror of the god. You see, this is his instrument of choice, his weapon of doom for m. It is my own family crest, but he imprinted his divinity on for me to accept when I choose to. If I put on this ring I will gain his power as god, but I will cease to exist and instead will become Drfuil, or at least an extension of him. I don¡¯t want that. I don¡¯t want to die. So I said no to his command, I said I wouldn¡¯t be the savior for his land. I wanted to go back home, to my own people! There was so little probability of success anyway. As punishment, he banished me here and in my confusion, I was caught up in this caravan and made a prisoner. That is how I got here. Do you understand? This is why I didn¡¯t tell you before. If nothing else, that magician was right when he called me a coward. I was afraid you might see who i really was too, a coward. But is it wrong for me to not offer my life for Drfuil? A holy sacrifice for the greater good? I do not know. I only know that I cannot, not willingly. I¡¯m sorry Ashton, but I can¡¯t do what he asked me to do. I cannot save these people. I am so sorry.¡±

    Drake let the last words fall from his mouth and linger on in the silence that followed. The only sounds then were the heavy breathing of all the men, the heavy rain, and the heavy footfalls of feet marching to their end. After a while Ashton answered him, sounding grieved, ¡°My life is not my own, it belongs to the people I care about. I would give my life for my family. I would even give my life for my village if they needed me to. That is the bond that holds us all together, the trust and need and fellowship of my tribe. But would I give my life for a different tribe, for people of strangers and foreign thoughts and feelings? I do not know; I doubt it. I cannot blame you for your choice, Drake. Who would sacrifice himself for strangers? Do not worry. I do not hate you. And do not degrade yourself either. You are a good person whether you believe it or not. You have given me much to think about, though. Stories of god¡¯s and territories; mortals and tragedies. Now there are new ways to know sorrow, but also new ways to know joy, no? This song has new meaning for me now. Let me sing part of it and ponder its meaning. We have lots of time, no?¡± He sang a song; one he had sung once earlier, but hadn¡¯t sung it in its entirety.

    The world was new and grey and bright

    all was beautiful in his sight

    He walked the land and life arose

    The plants and trees and all that grows

    He built the lands between his hands

    and formed the sky where birds could fly

    Time was still and life was bliss

    Before the world became amiss

    He called on men with him to dwell

    To create a world where all was well

    God and man, hand in hand

    Bliss and sight within his light

    There was a river in the land

    On which a city had its stand

    The gates there were large and strong

    And pain there was all but gone

    The city rose upon new heights

    And beheld a world within new sights

    The god sat upon his wondrous throne

    And the glory of it was world renown

    What strength and power!

    And grace and wisdom

    The men all worshipped

    Him in the kingdom

    Holy, holy, grace and mighty

    Words and peace, and work and feasts

    But all is gone and turned to waste

    For none can come and take his place.

    Ashton spoke again after the song reached its conclusion, ¡°Perhaps the song has new meaning for me now. I will ponder it some more. We will have time for that soon, no? Unless they have taken us out here simply to dispose of us, I have no idea. Either way, I am glad you are still with me, Drake. I do not think I could have taken the horror of this much longer without your company. You may live to regret that you didn¡¯t escape while you had the chance, though.¡±

    ¡°Maybe,¡± Drake said, ¡°But I choose not to regret this decision whatever the outcome. Regret can be a choice, can it not?¡±

    ¡°We are likely to die of a sickness, simply standing out here in the rain, though,¡± Ashton said sadly.

    But Drake hadn¡¯t heard what Ashton said. Something else had caught his attention. ¡°Shh!¡± he said suddenly, ¡°Someone is coming!¡±

 Chapter 8

    Captain Leihold strode through tall grass that reached up to his waist. The grass was irritating, both mentally and physically for the captain. With him were six soldiers who followed closely behind, keeping within the trail he created. They were clad in the dark grey heavy armor and similar colored cloaks, but only Liehold¡¯s armor was stained with blood. Marching in the tall grass was bothersome and annoying, just like the entire wilderness was. It was also raining, hard. At first it was inconceivable to him that people could actually live in this land, but he and his forces had captured enough natives to convince him otherwise.

    ¡°How many troops have been left to guard the caravan?¡± he asked sub-commander Jawa close to him.

    ¡°Sir, not many. I did not have enough to create an effective perimeter; I had to ration them out to guard the supply wagons. Even then my forces were stretched thinly. General-Commander Soul did not leave us enough forces to effectively guard the caravan. How could he leave the caravan so undefended? If the scouting force was a distraction and another force appeared, the whole caravan would have been destroyed. It could still be the case yet!¡±¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m sure the general-commander had good reasons to believe that would not be the case.¡± The captain replied gruffly, ¡°I trust his decision, now we simply must do with what orders we have. Again, I ask, how many troops have been left with the caravan?¡±

    ¡°Yes sir,¡± The woman replied quickly, ¡°the caravan has been left with two armored battalions, the 167th and the 2056th, as well as a single light legion and a single mounted Battalion. I estimate the number to be at three thousand soldiers, plus an extra two thousand wagon personal. The wagon personnel had been gathered with the supply wagons for their own safety.

    ¡°You said you left the holding wagons unguarded?¡±

    ¡°Yes sir, we did not have enough troops, so I prioritized the supply carts.¡± The sub-commander added uncomfortably, ¡°I didn¡¯t have a choice, I didn¡¯t have enough men. Besides, the prisoners should be relatively safe due to the spells cast on them.¡±

    ¡°No one is blaming you for the actions you took, Sub-Commander. And speaking of the spell casters, you did not mention them among your troops. Where are they and what are they doing? The general-commander left them with the caravan, did he not?¡±

    The sub-commander gritted her teeth, ¡°He did indeed leave them here sir, but they were not inclined to stay. They left soon after Commander Soul did. I do not know what they are doing presently.¡±

    Captain Liehold halted suddenly and turned towards the sub-commander, ¡°You let the spell casters leave, unguarded and unsupervised?¡± he growled, ¡°You left them alone?¡±

    The sub-commander flinched, but held her ground. ¡°There was nothing I could do about that either, sir. They would not listen to my orders. You know how they are! They view us all as inferior beings, and it is only with great reluctance that they even obey General-Commander Soul. There was no way they were going to listen to me. They left at the first chance they had for some unknown purpose and sneered at me when I confronted them. I did not have the manpower to detain them and even if I did, the men are all scared of them. They would not have been able to hold them effectively.¡±

    Captain Liehold turned and swore loudly. He started toward the caravan again, at double the pace than before. Unfortunately, the sub-commander was right. The spell casters always felt superior to the humans they worked with and they never hid their contempt for them. It was only due to the general-commander¡¯s influence that the caravan operated smoothly, but once he was out of the picture, the whole group collapsed. Captain Leihold spoke again to the sub-commander, ¡°Once we get back, I want a team created and sent out to find the spell casters. Take whatever forces you believe are necessary, I want to know where they are and what they have been spending their time doing!¡±

    ¡°Yes sir,¡± came the reply. The sub-commander signaled the soldiers behind them and two of them broke off to the left. The spell casters have always been trouble for the caravan. They were arrogant, conceited, and spoiled brats who disrupted the unity of the whole company. If not for the necessity of their magic, Captain Liehold would have court-martialed and executed the whole lot of them a long time ago.

    The rain was falling down harder and Captain Liehold once again felt disgusted at the abnormalities the wilderness revealed. What kind of place rains unexpectedly and grows wild the way it does here? The more time he spent here, the more he hated the wilderness.

    ¡°Captain, if I may ask, how is the battle going?¡± one of the soldiers behind him asked. It was probably a simple unseated soldier. He must have really wanted to know if he asked a captain so boldly.

    The captain couldn¡¯t blame him. He pointed to his own head and asked, ¡°What do you think?¡± Captain Liehold¡¯s head was covered in a bandage, but one side was soaked red from blood, it was clear he had suffered a severe blow. ¡°If I hadn¡¯t been wearing my helmet, my brains would have been scattered across the grass in this forsaken wilderness.¡± He felt the uneasiness of the soldiers around him and decided to stop playing with them. ¡°It wasn¡¯t a battle, not really. There was only one ending for the fight from the start. The enemy forces we saw were just part of a scouting legion. They posed no threat to us physically. Still, we could not let them report back to their main force; otherwise within days a whole barbarian company would have had us surrounded. I was with of the 1098th mounted battalion and our orders were to arrest and delay the fleeing forces until our main army could catch up to the group. That was the only real fighting, 200 horsemen against an entire scouting legion. We completed our orders; we delayed them until General-Commander Soul arrived. But we lost half of the 1098th mounted battalion in the process. I tell you the truth; I did not think I would survive. But praise be to Kami-sama, I yet breath. May I see The Endless City again before I die.¡±

    The soldiers behind responded automatically, ¡°Praise be to Kami, the Eternal. He will find victory before the end.¡± The captain nodded in agreement to himself. Kami would find victory before the end. Whether or not he lived to see it was a different matter though. He could only hope he would.

    After pushing through the last line of the grassy plain, the group finally made it to the caravan. A squad of soldiers was nearby and they were talking excitedly using loud gestures and it was clear they were arguing about something. The two soldiers who were sent from the group earlier had returned, and they spoke to the captain quietly. The sub-commander strode ahead and approached the group, ¡°Lieutenant, report.¡±

    The group stiffened to attention. ¡°Sub-Commander Jawa.¡± They said. But none of them said anything more.

    ¡°I said report!¡± Jawa repeated angrily, ¡°What is going on! Why are you three standing here like lost buffoons and not at your posts?¡±

    ¡°Sir,¡± one of them replied unsteadily, ¡°I do not know how this could have happened, I don¡¯t understand. It¡¯s true that we didn¡¯t leave a guard with them, but for such a thing to happen; we never suspected it could be¡ª¡±.

    ¡°Stop babbling and tell me what happened! Are you soldiers or not! Where is Lieutenant Fallow? I left him in charge.¡±

    ¡°Sir, he is with the Mounted Legion. He is tracking the ¨C¡±.

    ¡°What in the blazes is going on here!¡± the captain shouted, coming up and he interrupting the soldier. ¡°I just got word that the Mounted Legion is not here. Where in Kami¡¯s golden plains is it? The spell casters are in some unknown location and now the whole mounted battalion is missing. Somebody had better explain this to me and quickly!¡±

    The sub-commander responded, ¡°Sir, Lieutenant Fallow disobeyed my orders and took the Mounted Legion for some unknown purpose.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s not unknown,¡± put in the lieutenant defensively, ¡°and Lieutenant Fallow is operating with clear purpose. How dare you assume that-¡±

    ¡°Enough,¡± bellowed Captain Liehold, ¡°I don¡¯t care about your petty rivalries. I¡¯ve got an entire Caravan to secure and a third of my force is missing.¡± He grabbed the lieutenant and brought him closer. ¡°Now, tell me exactly where my mounted legion went and why they left,¡± he growled.

    The lieutenant swallowed, ¡°yes, sir.¡± The captain let go of him, and he straightened his uniform quickly. ¡°Sir, Lieutenant Fallow took the Mounted Legion east about two hours ago. He was tracking down the trail of the prisoners and he needed the speed of the mounted battalion.¡±

    ¡°What prisoners are you talking about!¡± the captain spat out.

    ¡°Sir, the ones in the wagons.¡±

    ¡°What!¡± the sub-commander exclaimed, ¡°That¡¯s impossible! The spells put up should-.¡±

    The captain held up his hand in interruption. ¡°The prisoners escaped? How is that possible, how did this happen?¡±

    ¡°I do not know sir. The spells holding the prisoners were taken off them. That is all we know.¡±

    ¡°How many of them escaped?¡±

    ¡°All of them sir.¡±

    ¡°All of them!¡± he shouted. He paused and closed his eyes to regain his composure. Life just got more difficult for him. ¡°Does anybody know anything about the spell casters?¡±

    ¡°No sir. They are missing as well.¡±

    ¡°I refuse to believe the two are unrelated¡± the captain spat. He turned quickly to Sub-Commander Jawa, ¡°Get ready five horses; I do not care if you have to take them off the wagons! I will be taking the lieutenant and three other men and will be following Lieutenant Fallow. We will be leaving as soon as possible. Hopefully, Lieutenant Fallow has had some success and the prisoners and the spell casters are found. In the meantime, I leave you in charge, Sub-Commander Jawa.¡±

    Jawa sprung to attention, ¡°Yes, Sir.¡±

    A soldier said, ¡°But sir, your wounds. You should not be riding anytime soon-.¡±This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.

    ¡°I DON¡¯T CARE ABOUT THESE WOUNDS!¡± the captain exploded, ¡°I WANT THE SPELL CASTERS, THE PRISONERS, AND THE MOUNTED LEGION BACK HERE WHERE THEY BELONG! GET THE HORSES READY AND QUIT WASTING MY TIME!¡±

    The men saluted and then left quickly to their appointed tasks.

    Captain Liehold left as well, stripping off his heavy armor and muttering, ¡°Kami, can this day get any worse? We only had four more days until we reached the city. Perhaps that was why our guard was down.¡± He let anger course through him, ¡°No matter, I will not let the spell casters get away with this. They will be punished for all the trouble they caused this time. General-Commander Soul will see to that. They will learn not to disobey us.¡±

    He made it to his wagon tent and changed out of his wet clothing. It was still raining and he knew that his new clothing would become just as wet soon after he started riding, but it felt good to change into something dry and warm for a change. Besides, he wouldn¡¯t be able to ride fast in the heavy armor and clothing he had on presently. His head hurt; it felt like someone was beating a heavy drum on the side of his head with every heartbeat. ¡°Kami, give me strength.¡± He said.

    It wasn¡¯t just due to his undying allegiance to his god that made Captain Liehold work so hard at his job and sacrifice so much. Although, it was true that his entire being belonged to Kami, there was something more to efforts for perfection and order. That something was General-Commander Soul. Kami may have the Captain''s Soul, but the general-commander had his heart. Was there ever a man who could do the things he did, win battles against unbelievable odds, inspire men and beasts to potentials unimaginable, and secure Kami¡¯s favor against the countless and powerful demi-gods that formed the aristocracy in the The Endless City? And also, there was the Battle of Crushing Snake where General-Commander Soul gloriously defeated the overwhelming forces of the enemy. All other attempts had proved in vain against the blockade of the enemy, but for the first time in 500 years, General-Commander Soul was able to break through and create an opening. It was through that success that adventures such as this caravan were now doable. The general-commander was more than a man, he was a legend. It was the captain¡¯s greatest joy and honor to be placed under him five years ago, and he believed that when the war was finally won, it would be through the Will of Kami and the direction of General-Commander Soul. Captain Liehold would rather die than underperform his duties in front of his General-Commander.

    The captain had finished gearing up for his ride when a soldier appeared in front of his wagon. ¡°Report.¡± He stated while jumping down and landing in a puddle. It splashed the soldier, but he was either well trained or else apathetic about getting more wet because he didn¡¯t flinch.

    He saluted and said, ¡°Sir, we have a messenger from Lieutenant Fallow. He says that the lieutenant succeeded in locating the escaped prisoners. However, the power of the spell casters is needed in order to return them to the holding cells. He has secured the prisoners and also has search parties out looking for the spell casters.¡±

    ¡°Well, one of my problems is solved. Inform the messenger that he will be guiding me to Lieutenant Fallow. He should be given a fresh horse as well. Are the other horses prepared yet?¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir, I will take you to them right away.¡±

    The rain had gotten harder again, and the captain was already soaked when he reached the horses. The ground all around the caravan had turned into mud, at some places making it a foot deep. It made it difficult move and the captain was losing patience. He reached the meeting point and found the five horses and the men prepared. Sub-Commander Jawa was there as well and they were talking amongst themselves.

    ¡°I hate this place,¡± the sub-commander was saying. ¡°The wilderness is no place for any civilized people. There is no light, there is no food, the plant life is out of control, and the weather is unpredictable. It has been raining nonstop for over twelve hours! How can anybody live in this kind of environment?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know about that, but I do know that this mud is no joke!¡± another spoke. ¡°We have a hard enough time moving around in it ourselves. How is the caravan supposed to get moving again! And if it does, it¡¯ll be twice as slow. Who knows how long it could rain here? I have heard it said that it can rain for weeks without end here.¡±

    ¡°I have even heard it said that the very land here fights against people!¡± the second man said. ¡°Do you remember the incident four months ago, when the entire ground shook? Several of the wagons were damaged from it, and we thought it was an enemy attack. We never figured out what that was, I think it was. The land itself shaking. Even the plants and trees seem to always be against us!¡±

    ¡°If You¡¯ve heard one story about the wilderness, you¡¯ve heard them all,¡± the lieutenant said with authority. ¡°Each one more outrageous than the last. But at least we know the truth about one thing: this is a dark and evil place, and the sooner we get out of here the better. What else could we expect from this godless land? This was supposed to be a four month assignment, but we have already been out here for six months. Who knows how much longer we will be out here? I have a home in the city and my wife is waiting. How much longer do we have to stay here?¡±

    ¡°We will stay here for as long as necessary to complete Kami¡¯s will,¡± stated the captain mercilessly. The captain arrived in the group, startling the soldiers and they stood at attention immediately. But then his tone softened, ¡°But I understand your feelings; I too have a family back home. Be at ease. Our destination for the return to the city is only a few days away. General-Commander Soul will have everything wrapped up and we will be on our way by the morning. In the meantime, we have work to complete.¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir!¡± the group responded with noticeable heart. They would be home within the week! The thought of The Endless City filled them with energy and conviction.

    ¡°Gear up!¡± the captain said, and he swung onto his horse with grace. The whole group did the same and Sub-Commander Jawa approached the captain.

    ¡°Sub-Commander, I leave you in charge. Expect us to return within three hours, but don¡¯t be surprised if it is longer. Who knows how long it will take to locate the spell casters in this weather? In the meantime, prepare for the arrival of General-Commander Soul. The enemy forces should have been vanquished by now. He will be returning within the next four to five hours. If all goes well, we will have the prisoners and spell casters here before then. If not, tell him exactly what happened. He will know what to do.¡± The sub-commander saluted, and the captain turned toward his mounted men. ¡°Alright, lead me.¡±

    With a ¡°Hiya!¡± the group started forward and soon left the light radius around the caravan and they disappeared into the rain and night.

    *************************************************************************************

    Lieutenant Fallow was a dejected man, and his horse, Carla, was dejected also. Neither of them appreciated the long, wet, cold, and muddy goose chase that they had been led on. It was rainy and dark, and he sat still at the moment on his horse. The sweat he had created during the ride was doing its job too well, and now he shivered in the dim mist and fog. During his haste upon leaving camp with the mounted battalion, the troops had neglected to bring enough lanterns. The lanterns available had to be spread thinly across the perimeter, and some had to be given to the scouting parties still searching for the incorrigible spell casters. This left little light for basic operations and created a gloomy atmosphere.

    Despite the muck and weeds that created frustrating barriers, the mounted battalion had found the escaped prisoners easily enough. The path the prisoners had created could only have been missed if his entire battalion was blindfolded. At first the lieutenant could not understand how the prisoners could have escaped, and in the panic and haste of their departure he did not have time to dwell on the thought. But upon actually seeing them, he understood immediately what had happened. This wasn¡¯t a jailbreak, it was a forced march.

    The lieutenant immediately recognized the work of magic on the prisoners. They all stood absolutely and unnaturally still and silent. For some unknown and inconceivable reason, the spell casters decided to break the spells holding the cages and then spun their magic to make them walk three leagues east of the caravan. In this god forsaken territory. He knew the spell casters were up to no good when they rebuffed his orders and disappeared, but he never imagined they would do something like this.

    A horseman rode up to him noisily in the gloom and halted in front of him. The man looked tired. ¡°Report,¡± Lieutenant Fallow said, straightening up and trying to look somewhat dignified.

    ¡°Sir, squads 5 and 6 have completed their search and they conclude that these are all the prisoners within three miles. Would you like them to expand their range of search?¡±

    The lieutenant shook his head and said, ¡°Don¡¯t bother; all the prisoners are probably right here. And if they aren¡¯t, it is unlikely we would be able to find them in this rain and dark. Have them secure the southern perimeter as best as they can instead. What of the other squads?¡±

    ¡°Sir, I am afraid that none of them have located anything useful. There is no sign of the spell casters.¡±

    ¡°Kami, give me strength!¡± he gritten softly. The prisoners were still encased in some form of magic and without the spell casters they could not even attempt a relocation of them. And looking at the prisoners, it didn¡¯t seem that they would even be able to survive the trip. ¡°Where in Kami¡¯s name, are they?¡± he hissed.

    ¡°Should I keep them on the search, sir?¡± the soldier asked.

    ¡°Yes, by all means! We must find them. Most likely the searchers won¡¯t see anything, though. We are not prepared or equipped for something like this. Those blasted spell casters! The general-commander won¡¯t tolerate this! Tell them to keep searching!¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir!¡± the man said and he took off again, leaving the lieutenant alone. Besides being tired, the man was young and inexperienced too. fallow knew he shouldn¡¯t have been so harsh with him. All the men here were tired and young as well and he knew shouldn¡¯t expect so much from them. The spell casters were like annoying spirits; they came and went as they pleased with little regard for human affairs. They would not be found easily, even if the light of Kami was here and he had a dozen mounted battalions on the search.

    Lieutenant Fallow was just taking out his anxiousness and uneasiness on them. Having a sudden fight take the caravan was enough to make all the soldiers uncomfortable, but then losing all the prisoners as well had a way of upsetting a man. But what he felt at the moment was more than that. This new feeling came from the pit of his soul and it gave him the feeling of sickness and chills. It put him on edge. At first, he couldn¡¯t understand where this feeling was coming from, but soon enough he looked closely at the prisoners. It was from their dead eyes that the terrible feeling came. They were still and silent as stone, standing there like statues with eyes that reflected in the fell light. The other soldiers were not affected as much, but to the lieutenant, it was something out of a half-remembered nightmare.

    Perhaps it was because Lieutenant Fallow was once in the same exact position as these men. Unlike most of the soldiers in the caravan, he was not native born in The Endless City. In a different lifetime he barely recalled, he too, was from the wilderness. He had been captured and de-willed, exactly in the same manner as these men were. Then he was taken to The Endless City and was given a new purpose and life. A life of serving Kami-sama and the glorious city of gold.

    These men will have the same thing happen to them, if they ever make it back. And they too will feel alive and free under the benevolent will of Kami-sama. And they will not give another thought to the life they once had in the wilderness. But now, under the multitude of unseeing eyes of the will-less in front of him, Lieutenant Fallow felt a terrible sickness, like a taunt and twisted rope, squeezing his insides. How he wished they would look away or, at least, that he could look away.

    He shook his head and tried to ignore the feeling inside of him. Life was good under the mercy of Kami-sama. And when Kami won the war he would be able to get away from the madness in the wilderness and return to his home. He had enough worries at the moment to be lingering on those feelings anyway. His forces were stretched too thin and the caravan was left with minimal protection. if there was another barbarian force nearby, everything would come apart. Not even the much-vaunted spell casters would be able to do much against a company of the enemy. That much had been proven repeatedly in the previous battles.

    Another messenger appeared, ¡°Sir, Captain Liehold has arrived on the scene. An escort is bringing him here presently.¡±

    ¡°Good.¡± He said without sounding like it was. ¡°Does he bring any good news with him?¡±

    ¡°He didn¡¯t say,¡± the man said flatly.

    ¡°It¡¯s doubtful he would.¡± The lieutenant looked at the man. He looked terrible. ¡°Alright, return to your post, son¡± he said. The man departed without a word. By the Pillar in the Sanctuary, what was the wilderness turning his soldiers into? They hardly resembled the proud and energetic soldiers who departed from The Endless City with enthusiasm six months ago. Every single one of them deserved at least a month of rest when they got back. He knew that was unlikely to happen, though. His horse snorted loudly, ¡°Easy girl. I¡¯m sure you will get some rest as well. Everything will end well. You will see.¡± He patted and stroked his horse and looked again at the prisoners. He felt terribly uneasy again, ¡°Everything will end well,¡± he repeated, trying to convince himself. It was all silent, except for the soft patter of wind and rain.

 Chapter 9

    Captain Liehold and his officers had made it to the destination. The trip was long, wet and muddy, and the captain spent his time silently cursing the spell casters for the trouble they were giving him. Now, again, he was just simply cold, wet, and miserable. He was sure all his troops felt the same as him, but nobody had said anything. He was proud of their self-discipline, but he also never knew anything to silence his usually talkative men like this before. They must be especially disheartened.

    During the ride, the weather had turned from rain to mist, but that only made his vision worse. The lanterns only exposed about twenty feet before them; thus, when they suddenly came upon the mass of men, it was a surprise to everybody. They halted before them.

    ¡°Holy Kami, what a sight!¡± exclaimed the lieutenant, and Captain Liehold could not agree more. All the prisoners were lined up like a battalion of men, but instead squished together and standing completely still. They did not react to the sound of the group or to the lieutenant when he moved forward and poked one with the butt of his sword. The prisoner simply swayed little bit. ¡°How eerie is that?¡± the lieutenant said, ¡°Lieutenant Fallow was right; we are going to need the spell casters to move them again.¡±

    ¡°Lieutenant, let¡¯s keep moving.¡± The captain said. They rode off again and the group trotted alongside the statues, each person keenly avoiding looking at them, except for the lieutenant who gawked and exclaimed as they rode past. To them, the wilderness had never looked so dangerous before.

    When they reached Lieutenant Fallow, they allowed the guide to take a short rest. He bowed and departed with a tired haste. The remaining men faced each other in a tense circle, still on their horses. None of them were too inclined to speak. Lieutenant Fallow broke the silence. ¡°Captain, how did the battle fair? Did General-Commander Soul clean up those filthy barbarians?¡±

    ¡°Yes he did, Lieutenant. It was a clear victory on that front. None will be left alive to report our position to the enemy.¡±

    ¡°Kami be praised.¡± The lieutenant said. He paused and then asked, ¡°Do you have any word on the spell casters?¡±

    The captain sighed, ¡°No, I was hoping you would be able to answer that question. They had not made any contact with the caravan when I had left.¡±

    Lieutenant Fallow swore. ¡°For such a thing to happen, this is a disaster.¡±

    The other soldiers broke in, revealing their thoughts and anger about the situation. They spoke in turn, ¡°Those spell casters have been nothing but trouble from the start, we shouldn¡¯t have brought them with us in the first place.¡±

    ¡°But we needed them for the visual deception of the caravan; otherwise, we would be seen from afar by our enemies.¡±

    ¡°What enemies?¡± another officer piped in, ¡°We are in the middle of this godless wilderness! The natives are hard to find as it is, much less the enemy.¡±

    ¡°Have you lost your eyes, fool?¡± Lieutenant Fallow said angrily, ¡°Didn¡¯t we just get attacked by the enemy?¡±

    ¡°We didn¡¯t get attacked; they simply stumbled upon us and then ran away!¡±

    ¡°Regardless,¡± another soldier added, ¡°we had a confrontation with the enemy here, and if we hadn¡¯t had the visual deception, the whole encounter could have been worse!¡±

    ¡°Maybe if your scouting groups were doing a better job, they would not have been able to walk up right next to us.¡±

    ¡°How dare you blame this on me?! You and I both know that we didn¡¯t have the resources to create effective scouting groups. We have been out here for six months and all the men are exhausted!¡±

    ¡°Still, it flows that if we had appropriate scouting squads in full effectiveness, we would not have the need for the visual deceptions for the enemy! It was a rare chance we ran into them, the first time in six months! If this assignment had been over in the assigned four months, it wouldn¡¯t have been an issue, and we could have done this without their help!¡±

    ¡°But you are forgetting all the other things the spell casters do; how can we secure the prisoners without their help?¡± the man was jabbing his fingers at the words recipient as if he was wielding a knife. ¡°Or all the other small things they do around camp? Your naivety is due to your ignorance and laziness around the caravan!¡±

    The insulted officer suddenly leapt from his horse with a bellow and tackled the officer who was yelling at him. The man fell off with a curse and the two started wrestling and fighting in the mud beneath them.

    ¡°Officers!¡± exclaimed Lieutenant Fallow, ¡°Are you men or are you swine? Stop fighting this instant or you will both be court-martialed. NOW!¡±

    The two men stopped fighting and glared at each other instead. They climbed on their respective steeds dolefully, sporting new bruises and covered in mud. Captain Liehold spoke, ¡°Men, I understand that you are all on edge. Everybody is frustrated; the wilderness has taken its toll on all of us, and today has been especially stressful . Right now, though, we need to dig down and get the job done that is in front of us. Lieutenant Fallow, I want you and the men you have searching for the spell casters to continue. It is unlikely they will find them, but we can¡¯t give up looking for them. The rest of you will be looking into any other possible way of transporting these prisoners back. Understood?¡±

    The group responded with an affirmative, and before they broke, Captain Liehold added, ¡°And you two,¡± he said pointing to the officers who had fought, ¡°clean yourselves up first, if you can. When all this is over, you two are to put yourselves on probation. Dismissed,¡± he ended with disgust. The group split according to their different functions, discussing possibilities and issues. Lieutenant Fallow watched them leave and then rode up to the captain and spoke to him.

    ¡°You know that all of this is pointless. If the spell casters don¡¯t want to be found then they won¡¯t be found. They will probably appear at the least convenient moment.¡±

    The captain sighed again and responded, ¡°I have got to have them do something other than sit around sucking their thumbs. Kami¡¯s Chair, this whole thing is ridiculous. How can we be at the mercy of these people like this? They make us look like such fools with their wizardry. I wish I could wring their scrawny little necks.¡± He got off his horse and the lieutenant did the same. They started walking them toward the operations tent not far off. The captain let out a big sigh.

    ¡°Sighing will let the happiness inside you escape, Captain.¡± Fallow commented idly.

    That Captain just laughed and asked, ¡°Where did you hear that jewel?¡±

    ¡°Its common knowledge. Everybody knows that.¡±

    ¡°Lieutenant, I have never heard anybody say that before.¡±

    ¡°Lies! Next person we see we will ask and you will come to understand your own ignorance in this matter.¡±

    The captain merely chuckled. They continued walking toward the command tent. ¡°Will things be all right at the caravan?¡± the lieutenant asked, ¡°Even when they had the mounted legion with them, the defense was stretched thin.¡±

    The captain waved the point away with his hand, ¡°There isn¡¯t any real threat to it. No natives have ever tried to confront us and the scouting legion should be the only enemies for days. It is not in any real trouble. I left Sub-Commander Jawa in charge.¡±

    They walked in silence for a bit, but then Lieutenant Fallow asked the question that was on his mind. ¡°Why do you think the spell casters did this? They must have a reason, of all the things they are, they are not without reasoning. But what could have been the purpose of them breaking the containment spell and sending the prisoners all out here? I know the spell casters hate us, but they wouldn¡¯t do something this drastic just to upset us, right?¡±

    ¡°I honestly do not have a clue.¡± The captain replied with a tired expression, ¡°I stopped trying to understand them a long time ago and now just accept their actions as they come. But you are right; they probably have a reason for doing this, a crazy and stupid reason, but a reason nonetheless. Kami-sama, give me patience. They will probably just show up randomly and spitefully. I wish the general-commander was here. He would straighten them out in a moment.¡±

    Lieutenant Fallow would have smiled at the thought of the general-commander yelling at the spell casters if he wasn¡¯t so exhausted and cold. They reached the command tent, which was really only a small shelter that¡¯s only purpose was to keep the rain out. It wasn¡¯t doing a good job at it anyway. In front of the lieutenant again was the horde of dead eyed prisoners. The shivers he felt were not just from the cold and wetness. He wished he had set up the tent on the other side so that the prisoners stared away from him. They bothered him endlessly.

    ¡°What do you think of the prisoners?¡± the lieutenant asked, trying to be nonchalant.

    The captain gave them a quick appraisal then returned to securing his horse, ¡°If they all don¡¯t die from this, there will be a fair amount of them. About two-thirds more than was expected on this trip. Of course,¡± he added half-jokingly, ¡°this trip is taking about two-thirds longer than was expected to.¡±

    The lieutenant laughed along with him but continued, ¡°That¡¯s not what I meant. I mean, do you think it is a good idea to do this. Will they become good soldiers; will they be able to fit in inside The Endless City? And do we really need more soldiers?¡±

    The captain gave the group a serious look this time and then responded, ¡°Far be it from me to question the Will of Kami, but you ask excellent questions. I shudder to think that these wildmen could ever become part of the greyhoods defense force. It is truly due to the miraculous power of Kami that they can be transformed into usable men, but I wouldn¡¯t trust them further. We should be using them as simple foot soldiers or guard duty, nothing more. I wouldn¡¯t let one onto my staff if I could help it. I do not see the need to do this kind of work either, but orders are orders, and the Will of Kami is reality. I will see to it that it is completed, even if I die trying.¡±A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    Lieutenant Fallow was not surprised at the captain¡¯s response. Most of the native citizens of The Endless City felt similar. There was a lot of controversy within the city when the program was started 20 years ago, after the battle of Crushed Snake. The Will of Kami may be reality, but the hearts of men are as well. Still many people believe that it is a mistake to infuse The Endless City with the indoctrinated beings, and they also do not see the need for it. For this reason, Lieutenant Fallow has kept his origins a secret. It was due to his intelligence as an officer and his perseverance that he secured the rank of lieutenant. He would not jeopardize that for anything.

    Fallow decided to change the subject, ¡°The officers might have expressed their ideas carelessly, but I think they brought up some valid points as well. Especially concerning this incident, I believe that the spell casters are more trouble than they are worth.¡±

    Captain Liehold paused a moment before answering. ¡°It is true that it seems like that right now, but I think they have more value than you realize. The tasks they perform are many and varied... and powerful. In many areas, they simply cannot be replaced. The most prominent being, of course, their ability to get us back to the city. Kami knows we can¡¯t create a portal.¡±

    ¡°But that can be bypassed, can¡¯t it?¡± protested the lieutenant, ¡°We don¡¯t need to carry them around with us the whole time. Why don¡¯t we just station them at the destination zones and they can transport us accordingly?¡±

    ¡°You are not the first or only person who thinks this way. There have been a lot of complaints lately, and the issue has already been brought up to the Commander-General. He promised to look into it. I believe that eventually we will be able to operate independently of the spell casters. A good riddance I say.¡±

    ¡°The words of the naive and foolish,¡± a voice hissed from nearby. It came from a small person completely covered in a black cloak and hood standing in the doorway of the tent. ¡°Your ignorance offends me Captain¡± the voice continued.

    ¡°Vorash!¡± the lieutenant exclaimed. The captain¡¯s eyes simply narrowed, ¡°You brazen spellcaster. How dare you betray the caravan like this! You have gone too far this time. The manpower and resources it has taken to confront your madness this time is intolerable!¡±

    Fallow was practically spitting in agner. ¡°And you simply walk on in here like you own the place? You magicians are nothing but trouble. When the general-commander gets here he will-.¡±

    Vorash interrupted him menacingly, ¡°Captain, silence this idiot before I do.¡±

    Fallow swelled in rage and looked like he was going to physically assault Vorash when Captain Liehold said, ¡°Enough, Lieutenant, calm yourself. You are an officer; behave like one.¡± Abashed, the lieutenant quieted down, but he did not stop glaring at the spell caster.

    ¡°Now, Vorash,¡± the captain said, with eyes flashing, ¡°Explain to me, why you and your spell casters have undone the containment spells and brought the prisoners out here.¡± Vorash did not speak. ¡°ANSWER ME, VORASH!¡±

    ¡°I do not owe you any explanation, Captain.¡± Vorash sneered. ¡°I do not report to you. The deeds of the highland priestly order are our own.¡±

    ¡°Do you betray the Will of Kami, Vorash? Surely you know that your spell casters have been assigned for support under General-Commander Soul. Surely, you also know the penalties for disobeying the Will of Kami, perhaps more so than the rest of us even!¡±

    ¡°I know well the penalties for betraying Kami-sama!¡± Vorash spat. ¡°Do not presume to talk to me about such matters. It is I and my spell casters who perform the executions. And let me tell you,¡± he continued with a horrifying smile, ¡°I do enjoy a good execution.¡±

    Those words sent a chill up Fallow¡¯s spine, but the captain did not appear affected. Vorash added somewhat reluctantly, ¡°I report to the General-Commander, not to one of his many Captains.¡±

    ¡°You also report to me, Vorash,¡± a new voice chimed. The figure stepped into the tent and fit in nicely along with the other spell caster. He was wearing similar garments as Vorash, but he also had a blue sash that had an ornate gold pin attached. On it was an engraving of a circle with a dot and line through it.

    Vorash made a sucking sound, and when he spoke, it with much more politeness. ¡°Sir, I did not know that you had returned. I thought that you were with the General-Commander.¡±

    ¡°I still am,¡± the figure responded, ¡°he is outside with the mounted legion at the moment. He will be here soon.¡±

    ¡°The general-commander is here, Gatal?¡± the captain said with surprise. ¡°I must go out and report to him.¡± He took a quick step outside.

    ¡°Don¡¯t bother, Captain. He is spending time with his men. He will come here soon enough.¡± The captain stepped back inside hesitantly.

    ¡°Now, Vorash, I would like to hear the captain¡¯s questions answered as well,¡± commented Gatal.

    Vorash appeared to struggle for a moment, but eventually he spoke. ¡°Our orders come directly from Kami-sama. When the general-commander is not present, we must interpret and follow those orders according to how we see fit.¡±

    ¡°That is absurd,¡± Lieutenant Fallow objected, ¡°Just because the general-commander is not present doesn¡¯t mean that his authority is not. He invests it in the people he appoints to command in his absence. Their orders are therefore the same as the orders from the general-commander himself. There is no way you do not understand that. your explanation is simply an excuse to avoid and circumvent the orders of the officers here!¡±

    Vorash gave the lieutenant and terrible glare, and he suddenly decided he wasn¡¯t going to say anything again soon. The captain took over, ¡°The lieutenant brings up an excellent point, Vorash. The general-commander will teach you the meaning of that later, though. For now, I want to know exactly why you brought these prisoners out here.¡±

    Vorash didn¡¯t look like he was going to cooperate, but when Gatal insisted, he broke. He responded with a hiss, ¡°Our primary orders from Kami-sama are to secure and protect the prisoners until they reach The Endless City. All of you seemed to have forgotten that. I felt that the security was compromised at the caravan during the enemy attack. Sub-commander Jawa consolidated her forces around the supply wagons and did not provide any protection for the prisoners. And even if she did try to stretch her forces to cover the holding wagons as well as the supply ones, I would not have felt it was safe enough. Our esteemed General-Commander apparently did not think the caravan was worth protection and did not leave enough forces to secure it properly.¡± He paused and straightened himself, ¡°I decided to take matters into my own hands and bring the prisoners to a safe location until I deemed it safe for their return.¡±

    ¡°You did not have the authority to break the spells on the holding wagons.¡± The captain said with anger.

    ¡°I was given the authority the moment the general-commander and Gatal left the caravan!¡± Vorash spat. ¡°I will recreate the confinement spell when I bring the prisoners back. Do not worry about that.¡±

    ¡°Sure, we can recreate the confinement spells again,¡± Gatal added, ¡°but we will not be able to recreate the mind binding spell. That took the combined efforts of an entire dynast while we were at the city. We will not be able to create that now.¡±

    ¡°It was a necessary sacrifice for the safety of the prisoners,¡± Vorash stated, ¡°besides, we are near the destination point. It should not matter now.¡±

    ¡°I fear, that will not be enough.¡± Gatal observed, ¡°You compromised the integrity of the prisoners. The indoctrination will not proceed smoothly anymore. I am afraid that this will have far reaching consequences. Have more faith in the general-commanders¡¯ abilities next time.¡±

    Vorash was adamant, though, ¡°I did what was necessary, and the damage from the loss of the mind-bending spell will be minimal. Do not overreact, Gatal.¡±

    ¡°We will see.¡± Gatal said simply. ¡°Please wait outside until the general-commander arrives, Vorash.¡±

    Vorash hesitated for a moment, but followed Gatal¡¯s orders. He left and Lieutenant Fallow felt much better for it. ¡°Now, tell me Captain,¡± Gatal said. ¡°How are your wounds doing?¡±

    ¡°Well enough,¡± the captain responded. ¡°I will not die from them.¡±

    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t be too sure, Captain. You almost died on the field today. It would have been a severe loss for us if you had.¡±

    ¡°It would be an honor to die for Kami-sama.¡± He responded flatly.

    ¡°Oh, I¡¯m sure it would be,¡± Gatal said sarcastically, ¡°Honor for dead people is very important. I keep telling everybody, but they never listen. You shouldn¡¯t die for Kami, you should live for him. Is that so difficult of a concept? Did you at least get this checked out by a medic?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Liehold admitted, ¡°there wasn¡¯t enough time for that.¡±

    ¡°Tssk. All you soldiers are the same. You care more about your duty than your ability to carry out your duty.¡± He stepped closer to the captain. ¡°Please let me look at it now at least.¡±

    The captain hesitated, but sat down so Gatal could get closer to it. He started to unwrap the bandages. ¡°Sir,¡± Lieutenant Fallow said, ¡°How did you and the general-commander get here so fast? How did you even know we were here? We had a hard time finding this place, and we had a guide who had already been here.¡±

    ¡°You forget who you are talking to, Lieutenant,¡± Gatal responded without pausing in his work, ¡°I am Gatal and I am better than a guide.¡±

    Fallow was still confused but he decided not to pursue it. He asked instead, ¡°How did the battle turn out? I only heard as much as the captain knew. If the general-commander is here, then that means it was successful, correct?¡±

    ¡°You assume correctly, although it was trickier than we first expected. The enemy force we had first spotted was only half of the real force. The other half was nearby and joined into the fight halfway through it. Fortunately, the general-commander had seen through their plan already and had a force prepared to ambush them. Casualties were light on our side, except for the esteemed 1098th mounted Battalion, in which our brave Captain here almost got himself killed. Casualties there reached 40%. That was expected though; they did their job well and will be greatly honored when we return to The Endless City.¡± He turned his attention to the captain, ¡°Alright Captain, it seems you will not die today. I have cleaned and dressed the wound again for you and I can tell you that it is not life threatening. However please take it easy over the next few days so it can heal properly.¡±

    ¡°Thank you Gatal,¡± the captain said, bowing to him, ¡°You bring sanity to this world. Has anybody ever told you that?¡±

    Gatal laughed, ¡°Actually I have been told that, but thank you.¡±

    ¡°And in the meantime, I have a question myself,¡± the captain added, standing up again.

    ¡°By all means.¡± Gatal responded politely.

    ¡°My lieutenant here tells me that it is common knowledge that the action of ¡°sighing¡± lets happiness escape. I told him I had never heard of such a saying before. I would like your input on the matter.¡±

    ¡°It is true,¡± Lieutenant Fallow insisted, ¡°I have known that saying my whole life.¡±

    Gatal smiled and gave the lieutenant a queer look. Fallow didn¡¯t like it. ¡°Actually,¡± Gatal responded, ¡°I have heard that saying before. But it does not originate in The Endless City. I am not surprised the captain has not heard of it before.¡±

    ¡°Well, it seems like we will need a truce between us, Lieutenant.¡± The captain said heartily. Fallow merely nodded, a cold dread seeping into him. How could he make such a mistake? He was lucky the captain did not read any more into the communication, but how much did Gatal know or guess about him? Another unpleasant feeling stuck itself into his stomach. Today was not a good day for Lieutenant Fallow.

    Before anybody else could speak again, though, there was a gust of wind. It blew the door flap open and the gust flew around the tent in a swirl. It brought an unpleasant cold mist with it as well. When everything settled, a new figure was in the doorway. The two officers snapped to attention and even the tent itself seemed to straighten up before this man.

    ¡°Welcome to the 967th Mounted Battalion Company headquarters, General-Commander Soul.¡± The captain said stately as part of the greyhoods formal response in this situation.

    The general-commander merely nodded in affirmation and said, ¡°Report.¡±

 Chapter 10

    The man that stood in the doorway of the tent seemed to suck all attention toward him as if he was a well of gravity. He was tall and grey with years of wisdom and intelligence settled upon him like a crown. His hair was obviously once full and dark, but now was mixed with streaks of grey and white. His uniform was not the usual grey and black cloak and armor that the officers worn, but rather was white with a deep purple and red strips with gold lining. At the moment, the uniform was spotless and impeccable, as was the man¡¯s stance before the officers. His aura was regal and absolute but his eyes exuded grace and humanity. The small tent in the outlandish part of the wilderness did not seem like the correct setting for such a man. He deserved to be housed in palaces of marble and gold with the Glory of Kami around him. But he stood in the tent without hesitation or concern. The man¡¯s greatness was only equaled by his humility.

    ¡°Sir,¡± Captain Liehold said, ¡°As you ordered, I left the 1098th mounted battalion and preceded to the caravan to relieve Sub-Commander Jawa. When I arrived, I learned that both the Highland Priestly Order and the prisoners had disappeared and that Lieutenant Fallow here had gathered the 697th mounted battalion and pursued the escaped prisoners. After we arrived, a messenger came from the lieutenant stating that he had located the prisoners and was currently searching for the Highland Priests. He said he believed that it was the work of the priests that made the prisoners leave and gather out here. I departed as soon as I received the message and left Sub-Commander Jawa in charge at the caravan again. Upon arrival, it was confirmed that this was the work of the priests and that it would also take their efforts to return them. Minutes ago, Vorash appeared, he is waiting outside presently.¡±

    ¡°Did he offer an explanation for his actions?¡± the general-commander asked calmly.

    ¡°Sir, he said that he did not feel that the caravan offered the prisoners enough protection from the possible threats. On his own authority, he broke the confinement spells and brought the prisoners here. He did this all without authorization, consent, or even notification. He unreasonably wasted resources and man hours on his escapade into the dark and offers intolerable excuses and explanations for his actions. He-.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s good enough Captain, thank you.¡± The captain nodded and stepped back. The general-commander continued with a sigh, ¡°I should have foreseen this event. The priests are somewhat unpredictable creatures, and they do not understand some of our more human tendencies and regulations. They perceive themselves superior to humans and will always believe that their own choices and views are correct. They only take orders from Kami-sama, and they value those orders above and beyond the orders of humans. He should cooperate now that I am here, though. Gatal,¡± he said, signaling him, ¡°please call Vorash in.¡±

    Gatal bowed and left, and a moment later Vorash appeared. He did not notice the general-commander at first. ¡°Do not tell me to come and go, Captain.¡± He snarled. ¡°I have important work to do. I know what you want, but know this, I will not have the prisoners sent back to the caravan until it is deemed safe.¡±

    ¡°Then send them back now,¡± ordered Captain Liehold, ¡°the caravan is safe.¡±

    ¡°It is safe you say,¡± Vorash sneered, ¡°on what authority do you make that claim?¡±

    ¡°My authority.¡± The general-commander added serenely, stepping forward into better view.

    Vorash jumped at the voice, ¡°General-Commander,¡± he said quickly, ¡°I did not realize you were here. If I would have known-.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m sure you would have shown the captain the proper respect due to him,¡± Soul said dryly, ¡°or even had obeyed his orders. As it was, you have done neither.¡±

    ¡°General-Commander,¡± Vorash said, sounding wounded, ¡°I have only done what was necessary according to the Will of Kami. You know the burden that is placed upon all the spell casters; I did not have a choice. It was your own actions have threatened his Will! Why did you not leave enough troops to guard the caravan? You put this whole sacred mission at risk with your inadequacies. You did not leave enough forces to properly guard the prisoners, a clear act against our primary mission! I would like you to note-.¡±

    ¡°Yes, Vorash,¡± Soul interjected, ¡°your objection has been noted and will be brought up at the next council session when we return. The council will be provided a full and detailed report about this incident, including your own failures. Tell me, Vorash, you have brought the prisoners out of, your perceived, harm¡¯s way. But what condition are the prisoners in now?¡±

    ¡°Sir, all of them are present and accounted for.¡± Vorash said somewhat proudly.

    ¡°You misunderstand me,¡± the general-commander said, ¡°I meant, what is the physical condition of the prisoners standing outside?¡±

    Vorash didn¡¯t appear to understand what the general-commander was asking, ¡°Sir?¡±

    ¡°You see, Vorash, you are dealing with mortals, not demi-gods. They have been caged up in the wagons for months, creating muscle decay and other physical ailments. Then they have been forced to walk three leagues, something their body could not accomplish if not for the spell forcing them. And lastly, they have been standing outside in the cold and the rain for hours without any kind of protection. Any prisoner who was not sick before is certainly sick now. Please tell me how your actions improved the welfare of the prisoners.¡± The general-commanders voice had lost its serenity and had become stern. ¡°Tell me how much better off they are now.¡± Vorash flinched under the weight of his words.

    Vorash licked his lips nervously and responded, ¡°I knew there was a risk for the captives, that some of them would probably die from this. But I also decided that the risk at the caravan was greater. It was worth losing a few humans to save the many. Anybody would agree to that. Today was simply a day of ill-fortune for everybody.¡±

    ¡°Your logic is impeccable, Vorash. But only if the caravan had a real threat to it, and unfortunately for you, there were never any issues with the security of the caravan. Otherwise, I would have left it with more guard.¡± Soul¡¯s voice became cold and deadly and although he never actually moved his body, he seemed to oppress Vorash with his presence. ¡°As it turns out, it was the priests that were the greatest threat to the prisoners. Vorash,¡± he said menacingly, ¡°Let me make this clear to you. You are to obey the officers I have put in command in my absence as if they were my own orders. There was no threat to the caravan today, and the only ill-fortune to be found here is your own. If even one prisoner dies from this, you will be arrested under the charges of disobedience, cowardice, disrupter of the forces, and a gross incompetence in your ability to understand and follow Kami¡¯s will.¡±

    Vorash stepped back unsteadily, aghast, ¡°You cannot do that, I have only-.¡±

    ¡°Vorash!¡± Soul said hotly, ¡°You have violated several important military regulations, ignored direct orders from your superiors, and dissolved the mind-bending spell without authorization. That is enough to get you arrested and tried in any situation. I am saying that I will forgive your insolence if you manage to deliver back the prisoners in the same condition in which you took them. I am even offering to deal with the consequences to the dissolution of the mind-bending spell, something of which I am sure you are not able to do. Do you understand me?¡±

    Vorash swallowed hard and struggled for a moment. ¡°It is impossible to get the soldiers back unharmed.¡±

    ¡°No, it is not impossible,¡± Soul said, patronizingly, ¡°do not lie to me. It is merely difficult. It will require the combined efforts of all your priests and it will certainly exhaust you completely. Healing and repairing are part of your spell work, are they not? Although I understand that you do not use those skills often. Those are my conditions. Will you accept them?¡±If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.

    Vorash looked afraid. He tried to protest again but Gatal stopped him. Vorash muttered to himself quickly and incoherently, and shook his head as if warding off flies. But in the end, he agreed, ¡°I will deliver back your filthy humans.¡± he said as if the words hurt his throat, ¡°but just remember to hold up your end.¡± He left the tent without another word.

    After the flap closed, Gatal commented, ¡°It is never easy with them, is it? They always make such a terrible fuss over everything.¡±

    ¡°You say that, but are you not also a priest?¡± the general-commander said dryly. Lieutenant Fallow offered him a seat and he took it.

    ¡°Ha! do not compare me with those fools.¡± Gatal said, ¡°I come from a much more excellent source.¡±

    ¡°I am sure. And what source would that be, Gatal?¡± Soul asked carelessly.

    ¡°Now, now, General-Commander,¡± he answered playfully, ¡°You know better than to ask those kinds of questions.¡±

    Soul just shook his head and relaxed a little in the seat. He closed his eyes. ¡°Sir,¡± Lieutenant Fallow asked, ¡°Is it true that the priests can do what you asked? I did not know that they had the ability to heal.¡±

    ¡°Yes, it is true,¡± Soul responded without opening his eyes, ¡°they try to keep those abilities secret, though; they believe it beneath them to help humans. They much prefer control, manipulation and intimidation. Still, it will not be an easy task for them. it is a blow to their pride and their stamina. I believe that it is appropriate punishment for them for their disobedience. They will never learn, though, or change. If they do manage to get all the prisoners back without trouble, the only thing we have lost from this fiasco is time.¡±

    ¡°What about the mind-bending spell?¡± asked the captain, ¡°We will have lost that too.¡±

    Soul opened his eyes and sat up, ¡°Yes, that is true and that will require a little more delicacy when we reach the city. I will have to figure out a way to save the prisoners¡¯ lives when we get back.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡± asked the captain.

    Gatal answered, ¡°Because the spell was interrupted, some of the prisoners will not take to the indoctrination well. Generally, when that happens, the irregulars are simply killed.¡±

    ¡°There will be a large number of irregulars this time,¡± Soul added sadly. ¡°I will not have them die simply because of the ineptitude of our priests. I will have to talk with the Highland order council when I return. It won¡¯t be too difficult I think. They will be much more easily swayed when they learn that it was one of their own priests that messed things up. They will also owe me for taking care of the matter quietly and without formal punishment.¡±

    ¡°Is it really that big of a deal that the spell was broken only a few days before we return?¡± The captain was getting lots of answers right now; he was going to get as much information as possible.

    ¡°Sadly yes,¡± Gatal replied, ¡°I don¡¯t want to explain the intricacies of it right now, but during the last few days of the spell, several important closing subparts go into effect and help secure the minds of the captives.¡±

    ¡°It is true that we will be returning soon, then?¡± Lieutenant Fallow burst in excitedly.

    The general-commander smiled, ¡°I see that rumors have spread around camp. You will be happy to know that it is true. Depending on how well the priests do their job, we will be back within the week. And actually,¡± he said standing up again, ¡°we should be leaving this place soon as well. Rests are nice but I do not have the luxury to take long ones. Come Gatal, let us see if our priests are working hard yet or not. Captain,¡± he said, turning to the man, ¡°The priests should be ready within the hour, I will make sure of it. Make sure the troops are ready as well.¡± Gatal bowed to the officers and the two left command tent.

    ¡°Thank Kami this is over.¡± Fallow said after they left, ¡°I¡¯ve had enough mess for one day.¡±

    ¡°Do not jinx it!¡± the captain responded, ¡°The prisoners are not back safely in the holding wagons yet. Plenty of things may go wrong yet.¡±

    ¡°But they won¡¯t! Not when the general-commander is around. Everything turns out well when he is around. Did you see how he handled Vorash? He got him to do exactly what he wanted without lifting a finger. That man is godlike!¡±

    ¡°Do not say such things!¡± the captain said, suddenly harsh. ¡°I know well his praiseworthiness, but do not go too far with it. Kami-sama, you know, is a jealous god. Do not say such things even in jest! They could be misunderstood.¡±

    ¡°You are right. I was careless.¡± Fallow replied, admonished, ¡°But still, we are lucky to serve under such a man. There is no one like him in all the lands.¡±

    The captain nodded in agreement.  ¡°We should get ready as well. Gather your officers and get the battalion prepared to depart.¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir,¡± Fallow was all smiles and he added enthusiastically, ¡°We are going home soon, sir!¡±

    The captain laughed, ¡°Yes indeed, and the sooner home will be when we get the mounted battalion back on its feet. You heard the General-Commander, we will be departing within the hour.¡± Lieutenant Fallow saluted and then left with a rush. The captain lingered a second and left as well. He took the lantern from the tent with him.

    Lieutenant Fallow did not have to go far to find his officers. They were in a close circle not far away, talking. When they saw him, the marshal strode out: ¡°Sir, we have tried everything we could think of, but it is hopeless. We have not found anything that will effectively move these prisoners. It simply cannot be done without the aid of the spell casters.¡±

    The lieutenant smiled at him, ¡°That is okay; thank you for your efforts. The spell casters have been found.¡± A noticeable relief fell over the men like a soft blanket.

    ¡°As for now, Marshal!¡± the lieutenant said, ¡°gather your squad leaders and tell them meet us at the Headquarters for instructions in ten minutes. Corporal-Adjunct,¡± he said to another, ¡°call in the perimeter line.¡±

    ¡°Sir,¡± the Corporal-Adjunct asked, ¡°You want to dissolve the perimeter line?¡±

    ¡°Yes, the battle is over and the threat is gone. With the help of the general-commander, we have secured the help of the spell casters and we will be departing within the hour. In an orderly fashion this time.¡± He added with a smile.

    ¡°Sir, so is it true that the general-commander was here?¡± one of his men asked.

    ¡°Is here.¡± He corrected, ¡°He and his bodyguards are with the spell casters, I believe. I spoke with him myself, and he assured me of a just resolution to this mess. He also confirmed the rumors of our departure. We will be home within a week!¡± The men cheered at this.

    ¡°It¡¯s about time,¡± the marshal said.

    ¡°Ah, to be home again,¡± another reminisced.

    ¡°Forget, home. I¡¯d be glad to simply be out of this wilderness,¡± the lieutenant said. They all laughed. ¡°Alright, you have your orders Marshal and Corporal. Get to it!¡±

    The two officers left with much more spirit in them than the lieutenant had seen in weeks. ¡°What should we do sir?¡± the remaining men asked.

    ¡°You should find the captain. He will have work for you to do, I am sure.¡±

    ¡°Yes, but before that, you said you spoke with the general-commander sir?¡± The lieutenant nodded. ¡°What was it like?¡± one of the en inquired.

    Fallow thought for a moment and then replied, ¡°It is hard to describe. It is like he is from a different world, one greater than ours. The way he carries himself and the way he commands. He has absolute confidence in himself and his men. He knows things beyond my imagination. I do not think I am describing this right. It is like he has broken the walls between mortal and immortal and has become something greater. He is an enlightened man.¡± He shook his head, ¡°You should ask the captain; he has a better way with words than I do.¡±

    ¡°Will do sir,¡± they responded. Then they left, all but one at least. He was staring at something in the mass of prisoners.

    ¡°Something on your mind?¡± the lieutenant asked.

    The officer shook his head, ¡°I do not know. I thought I saw movement in there. But I do not see it now¡­¡±

    Fallow studied the prisoners as well. They looked the same as before. ¡°I do not think the priests have started their work yet. They shouldn¡¯t be moving.¡±

    ¡°I know, but I am sure I saw movement in there. Somebody was moving around.¡±

    Fallow studied the men again. ¡°It is dark, and you are tired. You might have just been seeing things. But if you believe it, I will let you gather some men and investigate.¡±

    The officer thought for a moment, but concluded, ¡°No, you are probably right. I am pretty tired. I will report to the captain.¡±

    ¡°Take it easy.¡± The lieutenant said as the officer left. He saluted back and then was gone. Fallow was left alone with the prisoners again. They still gave him the creeps. He looked at them again and then turned away. Of the many reasons to get back home soon, getting away from these prisoners was most important to the lieutenant. He pulled his cloak closer to him. It had stopped raining, but it was still wet, cold, and windy. ¡°Kami-sama,¡± he said, ¡°when I get back, I am never going to leave The Endless City again.¡±

 Chapter 11

    ¡°I am telling you, my whole body is feeling funny.¡± Ashton exclaimed to Drake, ¡°I used to be all cold and wet, but now I feel warm and tingly. It¡¯s not normal!¡±

    ¡°There is nothing normal about this situation.¡± Drake said, ¡°We¡¯ve been standing out here for hours and it was only thanks to the closeness of the other bodies we managed to not die of the cold. You are probably just losing your sense of feeling now.¡±

    ¡°No I am not! I can feel just fine. I feel the people next to me, I feel the mist in the air, and I feel the wind freezing my face off. But I also feel some kind of heat radiating inside my body. It¡¯s real!¡±

    ¡°Alright, calm down, I believe you. Your body is feeling all tingly. I get it.¡±

    Ashton growled, ¡°Argh, I hate this. There is nothing worse than the feeling of having your body outside of your control. I preferred the cage to this! I can¡¯t move a finger and now they are putting some other form of misery on us I bet. Why don¡¯t they just kill us and get it over with!¡±

    ¡°You said you feel warm now.¡± Drake said, ¡°Isn¡¯t that a good thing? Stop complaining.¡±

    If Ashton could have, he would have whipped his head around and glared at Drake who was behind him. As it was he could only shout ahead, ¡°How about you stop telling me what to do and go and get yourself almost caught by the soldiers again. I think that¡¯s a great idea.¡±

    ¡°Oh, please Ashton.¡± Drake replied, ¡°I didn¡¯t actually get caught by them. It was just a close call. Besides, I got valuable information from it. How could I pass up the opportunity to listen in on the group of officers? You need to calm down, everything is going to be all right. Remember? They said that they would be bringing back the prisoners to the caravan soon.¡±

    ¡°Congratulations,¡± Ashton replied sarcastically, ¡°we get to be trapped in the wagon again. Hurray.¡±

    ¡°At least it¡¯s better than out here. We are in danger of dying out here. And you can¡¯t even move. At least in the cage you had freedom of movement. Just stay calm and we will get back safely.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve got an idea, how about you be constrained with these spells and forced to endure their sorcery,¡± Ashton snapped, ¡°while I sneak around and act happy? Huh? That sounds like a good exchange to me.¡±

    ¡°Oh, come on, what happened to the calm and collected Ashton who endured hardship with grace?¡±

    ¡°Hmph, you don¡¯t understand. You don¡¯t know what it is like, feeling your body move on its own. It¡¯s violation, a rape. I can¡¯t stand it.¡±

    ¡°Alright, Alright. Listen, I¡¯ll see what I can do. I¡¯ll give you a back rub or something. Where does this new sorcery hurt?¡±

    Ashton thought for a moment and then said, ¡°Actually it feels kind of good. My whole body feels light and warm, like all my pain is going away.¡±

    ¡°Then why are you complaining?!¡± Drake burst.

    ¡°It¡¯s a matter of principle Drake! There is no way will I ever condone the use of sorcery against me, even if it is for my own good.¡±

    ¡°Fine, then. Just stand there and be angry about your good feelings. I am still cold you know. I do not feel this warmth you speak of. I doubt it is actually real anyway.¡± He folded his arms and hugged his body to stay warm. He leaned against Ashton.

    They were silent for a bit. Luck had put Ashton near an edge of the prisoners and had brought them near a lantern that had been placed there when the Calvary showed up. It was an interesting sight for Drake. It looked like the Cavalry had been looking for them, as if they did not know that the prisoners had been brought out here. What kind of disunity was in the caravan to have let all the prisoners out unnoticed? Even more interesting, it appeared the soldiers were just as helpless against the magic as they were. They were not the masters of it; it must have come from a different source. Somehow, Drake found that encouraging. When a group of officers parked nearby and proceeded to experiment with ways of transporting the prisoners, Drake couldn¡¯t pass up the opportunity to get closer to them.

    ¡°No, you shouldn¡¯t go,¡± Ashton had said, ¡°You¡¯ll get caught, and who knows what they would do to you! Likely kill you on the spot.¡±

    ¡°We agreed to stay in this for the long haul, didn¡¯t we?¡± Drake responded, ¡°If we are giving up on escaping and accepting what comes together, it is best that we learn something from our capturers.¡±

    ¡°Drake, I am serious; you shouldn¡¯t go. It is too risky.¡±

    ¡°I am serious too, Ashton. There has to be some rationale behind this. They simply can¡¯t keep us locked up forever. If they wanted to kill us, they could have easily already. We need answers if we are going to prepare ourselves. Maybe I will learn something useful. It¡¯s not that risky, anyway. It is dark, as always, and they will not be expecting any movement within the prisoners.¡±

    Drake proceeded to sneak away, but not before Ashton could add in, worriedly, ¡°Be careful!¡± Crouching, Drake responded with a thumbs up. Then he doubted Ashton understood what that meant. Whatever.

    Drake decided the best way to be stealthy was to crawl on the ground towards the officers until he was close enough to understand him. He got on fours and proceeded, but immediately he regretted that decision. The ground was muddy and cold, and although most of the weeds were trampled, they still scratched and irritated his skin. But even worse, most of the prisoners were not clothed properly. Crawling through their legs proved difficult and gross, and halfway to his destination, he gave up and stealthily walked instead. It may have been riskier, but to him, it was worth it.

    He reached the position he was aiming for without too much of an issue. Once there he was within excellent range to hear the soldiers. They were loud and uninhibited. From them he learned many things, most of which was not useful. The soldiers bickered like kids.

    They all appeared to be low ranking officers and were under orders to somehow figure out a way to move the prisoners. Unfortunately for them, they were already tired, miserable, and frustrated, and then they were also given an impossible task. They squabbled and snapped at each other, all the while producing zero results. Still, Drake was able to learn a few important things from their wild and angry talk.

    The first thing he learned was that they were part of an organized and powerful army that was from a place they referred to as The Endless City. Drake had suspected that these people were from another territory, but now those suspicions were confirmed. And from their professional complaining, Drake also learning that this group of people had been out in the wilderness for six months, when they were only supposed to have been out here for four. They also hated the wilderness, but only because they feared it in a na?ve way.

    From all of their cursing, he also learned the name of their land god, something Drake found surprising. He would have thought it was a bigger secret, but the use of their god¡¯s name was a normal and a regular part of their vocabulary. The god¡¯s name was Kami, and they held him in great reverence even if they used his name a lot. It looked like they believed in the absolute power and authority of their god.

    This lead to the third important piece of information for Drake. This army and The Endless City itself was at war with some ¡°Barbarians.¡± They believed in their army¡¯s absolute victory though, compounded by their recent victory over the enemy forces spotted earlier that day. ¡°That was where the soldiers from the caravan went,¡± thought Drake. ¡°There was an enemy force. Although, apparently not a strong one.¡±

    After many attempts at the removal of the prisoners, all failing, some spectacularly so, the officers gave up and regrouped nearby to discuss other options. They had moved out of Drake¡¯s hearing though. After a quick debate with himself and imaginary Ashton, Drake went even closer in order to hear them. Fortunately, these people were blabber mouths; they openly discussed the problems in the caravan and their own worries. Drake felt he could learn much more from them.

    However, another officer soon appeared before the group, and it looked like he was their superior. From this short conversation, Drake learned what he believed most important. The spell casters who did this to the prisoners were found, and the whole group would be returning to the caravan soon. Also, the caravan would be returning to their territory within the week. Whatever doom came for Drake and Ashton in The Endless City, at least the wait would be over soon. The officers then scattered and Drake shivered from the cold. He moved closer to the other bodies for warmth. An officer spotted him and Drake froze.You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.

    ¡°Something on your mind?¡± the senior officer asked.

    The young officer shook his head, ¡°I do not know. I thought I saw movement in there. But I do not see it now¡­¡±

    The senior studied the prisoners as well. Drake felt his eyes on him, but then pass over him. ¡°I do not think the priests have started their work yet. They shouldn¡¯t be moving.¡± He said.

    ¡°I know, but I am sure I saw movement in there. Somebody was moving around.¡±

    He studied the men again. ¡°It is dark, and you are tired. You might have just been seeing things. But if you believe it, I will let you gather some men and investigate.¡± Drake felt a terrible dread wash over him. He could keep still, but if the men knew what they were looking for, they would find him quickly.

    The officer thought for a moment, and Drake felt his heart would stop. But he concluded, ¡°No, you are probably right. I am pretty tired. I will report to the captain.¡±

    ¡°Take it easy.¡± The Senior said as the officer left. He saluted back and then was gone. Drake felt his insides turn to jelly. It was a close call, too close for his comfort. He watched the remaining officer look at the prisoners again and then turn away. He waited until he was out of sight before he headed back. All in all, he thought, the trip was a success. He learned more than he could have expected. Wouldn¡¯t Ashton be happy!

    Ashton was not happy. ¡°Do know how long you were gone?¡± he had hissed at him.

    Drake was in a good mood though, ¡°What? I needed to stay to hear the important stuff. And guess what? I hit the gold mine!¡±

    ¡°Congratulations! You found a mine of gold!¡± Ashton said sarcastically, ¡°I found out just how terrible life was in the meantime.¡±

    ¡°What are you so angry about? You knew I would be gone for a while.¡±

    ¡°Something is happening, I can feel it. Those magicians are using their sorcery!¡±

    ¡°I know. I heard that the magicians were found and that they would be sending the prisoners back to the wagons soon. Isn¡¯t that great?¡±

    Ashton merely swore loudly. Drake shook his head, ¡°You go ahead and be grumpy. But be a listening grump, I need to tell you what I heard.¡± Drake then explained what he had learned and even included his close call. He told that part dramatically hoping to instill some good feelings in Ashton about the adventure. Ashton merely yelled at him for his stupidity.

    ¡°You could have been killed right there if the wind turned against you,¡± he had said. ¡°You could have been disemboweled, stabbed or any other unsightly kind of death. If I could move, I would strangle the stupidity out of you myself.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re a scary guy,¡± Drake had responded, ¡°I never knew this side of you.¡±

    Ashton felt the spell¡¯s effects become stronger and stronger, and he became more upset in proportion to the feeling. Drake thought he was just being paranoid, or worse, losing his mind. But he was soon convinced otherwise.

    ¡°Hey, Ashton¡±, he said touching Ashton, ¡°Your body is becoming hot. Are you feeling okay? Do you have a fever?¡±

    ¡°Have you been listening at all to what I have been saying the last ten minutes?¡± Ashton snapped back, ¡°I told you. It¡¯s the sorcery. I bet the other prisoners are the same.¡±

    Drake touched the one closest to him, ¡°You are right! They all are hot.¡± He proceeded to touch all the other ones near him. ¡°Ugh, and sweaty too.¡±

    ¡°Are you convinced now that I am not just being paranoid?¡± Ashton asked voice heavy with sarcasm.

    Drake ignored him, ¡°I wonder what the meaning of this is. This didn¡¯t happen to you earlier, did it?¡±

    Ashton calmed down and became serious. ¡°No, you are right. It didn¡¯t.¡±

    ¡°Hmm¡± Drake said. It wasn¡¯t like they could actually do anything about it. ¡°You are sure you are not in pain?¡± he asked.

    ¡°Yeah.¡± Ashton replied. They were silent. It was getting hot inside the mass of prisoners; even Drake was no longer feeling cold. They watched the steam float up from the group, reflecting in the distant lantern light.

    ¡°What kind of place do you think this ¡°endless city¡± is that we are heading to?¡± Ashton asked, ¡°You said we were arriving within the week.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, I don¡¯t know. It¡¯s another god¡¯s territory, so it could be anything he wanted. A land of water or mountains. It¡¯s probably a lot different from this place, though, judging from the soldier¡¯s displeasure at this wilderness. And judging from the name, there is probably a lot of city in it. A lot of people.¡±

    ¡°You seem to understand what that means. What is a city? Could you describe it too me.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know what they mean by a city, but it probably follows the basic definition of the city from my place.¡± Drake explained, ¡°A city is a location where a lot of people gather in mass to live. Imagine your little village, and then imagine how many buildings it would take to house a hundred thousand people. A million people even.¡±

    Ashton thought about it but responded, ¡°I don¡¯t think I can.¡±

    Drake thought for a moment, ¡°Then think of this,¡± Drake replied. ¡°Imagine a building, a house, made out of stone. See how strong and stable that stone would be.¡±

    ¡°It would take a lot of work to make a stone house, but I think I can see what you mean.¡±

    ¡°Now imagine this, a house that is a hundred feet tall and a hundred feet wide, with multiple stories and rooms inside of it. Because the stone is strong it can hold the weight of multiple levels.¡±

    Ashton said carelessly, ¡°Such a thing isn¡¯t probable, carving with stone is difficult and slow work, there is no way one could make a house out of it, or even lift up a stone on top of another house and build with that.¡±

    ¡°But think if you could! Where I come from we can do that. We create tall buildings, taller than the tallest trees here, with as many rooms as people in your village. But that is not all. The streets are made from stone too and there are hundreds of these tall buildings with people living and working in them. To me that is what a city is like, hundreds of buildings with thousands of people all close together.¡±

    Ashton was passive, though. ¡°You will have to see it to believe it, I guess,¡± Drake said. ¡°If I can, I will bring you with me to see a city, and then you will understand.¡±

    ¡°I appreciate the offer, Drake, but I think we will see another city before then, the ¡°endless city.¡± Perhaps it will be similar. What do you think they will do with us when we get there?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know, maybe sell us as slaves. That¡¯s all I can think of.¡±

    ¡°But if that is the case, why the crazy spell work?¡± Ashton asked, ¡°Why would they take out the spirit of these people if they wanted us to work? They literally can¡¯t do anything other than follow their basic instincts without spells to guide them.¡±

    ¡°Maybe they will keep them under the spells when we get there.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t think so; those spells work easily enough on me. If they wanted dead eyed servants so badly, they could just work their spell work on dead people and get them to serve them.¡±

    ¡°I said I don¡¯t know Ashton,¡± Drake replied angrily, ¡°It was just an idea.¡±

    Ashton sighed. He said sadly, ¡°Yeah, I guess. In the end we don¡¯t know. Such is the nature of this whole thing. Too many unknowns. How are we supposed to guess the whims of a god?¡±

    There was more movement along the side of the group. Soldiers on horses were riding around, and officers were yelling things. It looked like the Battalion was ready for departure. Then Drake noticed a curious group of people. They were short and hooded and they blended well in the shadows.

    ¡°Hey, Ashton.¡± Drake said, poking him in the back.

    ¡°What is it?¡±

    ¡°Do you see those people over there, next to the group of horses? Are those the Spell casters?¡±

    Ashton¡¯s body was not pointed that direction, so he had to strain to see. But he said, ¡°Yeah I think so. Small and hooded. They have difficulty riding horses, I believe. Be careful of them; their words become reality.¡±

    ¡°What do you think they are dancing for?¡± Drake asked.

    ¡°How should I know!? Maybe it is some part of their ritual. You are the one with all the secret knowledge. You tell me.¡±

    ¡°Actually, I think that is it. If all the soldiers are ready, it means they are only waiting on the prisoners. We should be leaving in moment.¡±

    Ashton snorted, ¡°You prepare yourself. It¡¯s not like I would be left behind.¡±

    ¡°How do you feel; do you think you could make it back? It is a long march.¡±

    Ashton considered it, ¡°Actually, I feel really good. I feel like I could march all the way home now. Maybe the spell is giving me energy. How about you?¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about me,¡± Drake joked, ¡°if I get tired I¡¯ll just hop on your back and you can carry me.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t you dare!¡± Ashton snarled, but Drake just laughed.

    ¡°Oops,¡± Ashton said suddenly. ¡°Here we go.¡± And with that the whole group of prisoners started moving again unexpectedly. Drake found himself squashed between the gross and sweaty prisoners, but he extricated himself and made it to Ashton again.

    ¡°Phew, I thought I was going to get crushed.¡±

    ¡°I told you to prepare yourself,¡± Ashton snarled. He was upset again at the spell work on him.

    Drake ignored him. The ground was muddy and full of weeds, but strangely, Drake was happy to be moving again. ¡°Ah, back to the cage again.¡± He said, ¡°Never thought I would be happy to return.¡±

    ¡°Oh, yeah, our small broken down cage filled with stench and horror and topped with dead eyed prisoners. Not to mention, our roof and walls collapsed. I wonder what the guards will do about that. I doubt they will give us another wagon.¡±

    ¡°Ha, I forgot about that. That¡¯s funny. Maybe they will let us sit with them up front instead.¡±

    ¡°More likely they will just make us walk.¡±

    ¡°Oh come on,¡± Drake pleaded, half joking. ¡°Have a little more optimism. We are travelling to our doom anyway. We can¡¯t have so many bad things happen in a row. Something will happen soon.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know,¡± Ashton responded, ¡°In my experience, one ill turn deserves another. Things will only get worse from now on, I fear. There is still a chance to escape for you; you should go while you can.¡±

    Drake put his hand on Ashton¡¯s shoulder, ¡°I¡¯ve already told you, I¡¯m not leaving you to face this alone. I wouldn¡¯t survive a week alone out there any way. Whatever this doom will be, we will challenge it together. I swear.¡±

    Ashton shook his head but then said, ¡°I¡¯m glad you are here with me Drake. I wouldn¡¯t be able to stay strong without you. Life is good, when you are with your friend.¡± Drake nodded. The prisoners marched on, towards the light of the lanterns that grew brighter with each mile.

 Chapter 12

    ¡°Yes, it is true,¡± General-Commander Soul told Vorash the day after the battle. ¡°Please inform your order that we will be returning to The Endless City in six days. They will have that amount of time to rest and prepare themselves for the return. As I am sure you are aware, we will need them in top shape to create the portal.¡±

    The exhaustion Vorash and his priests felt from transporting and healing the prisoners was terrible, but it had not made Vorash more agreeable by any means. He lashed out in frustration, ¡°The Highland Order is not something you can simply order around on your whims; we are not part of your military!¡±

    ¡°On the contrary Vorash,¡± Soul responded calmly. He, Vorash, and Gatal were together in the command tent, a temporary structure for use until the Caravan could get moving again. ¡°You and your priestly order had been placed with the caravan under my authority, and I will use the priests as I see fit. We will be returning to The Endless City in six days, and we will need the efforts of your spell casters to create the portal. Please, let your men rest for the next four days so that they can regain their strength from their exhaustion.¡±

    ¡°An exhaustion you forced upon them,¡± Vorash accused.

    The general-commander merely nodded, ¡°Quite so. What they did was a necessary action. But the portal is also necessary.¡±

    Vorash made some unique sounds, probably illustrations of his anger and frustration; it was difficult to tell when his face was completely hidden by his cloak. He had been angry before, but after the humiliation he and his spell casters were forced into last night, nothing was going to make him happy. ¡°This is an eight-month excursion,¡± he said at last, his voice laced with disgust, ¡°and we are only six months into it. You cannot decide on your own to leave months early. It would be disobeying orders, direct orders from the Council.¡±

    ¡°I am well aware of my orders, Vorash. To begin with, though, this excursion was supposed to only last four months,¡± General-Commander Soul explained. ¡°These people were not equipped for a longer mission. When we got orders for an extra four months, I told the council that it wasn¡¯t a good idea. I told them that if problems arose we would be returning early.¡±

    ¡°To which they said specifically not to do.¡± Vorash replied, pointing his finger in the general-commander¡¯s face.

    Soul brushed the finger aside without comment, ¡°It is true, but I must think about the welfare of the caravan before those orders.¡± Soul got up from his seat and opened the tent door so the three people could get a clear view outside. The whole Caravan was spread before them. Soldiers were working hard, and animals were makings their noises, but the caravan was not moving. ¡°Last night had severely diminished our Caravan¡¯s ability to do its mission. Morale had been falling significantly throughout the last month, decreasing their efficiency. Last night was a finishing blow; the three different factors reduced our ability to complete the mission to zero.¡±

    ¡°Your men are just tired and lazy, General-Commander,¡± Vorash sneered, looking out at all the men around the wagons. ¡°If you let me, I will get them motivated to do the job.¡±

    Soul looked down at Vorash, ¡°Your offer is appreciated, but I do not think it will be as helpful as you imagine,¡± he said. Vorash merely grunted. Soul continued, ¡°And also, you were part of the problem yourself. The wind and the rain created terrible conditions for everybody, eventually trapping the caravan in the muck and mud, but the Confinement spell would have held most of the wagons in safety. After you broke the support, many of the wagons broke as well. It took hundreds of man hours to repair the damaged holding wagons alone.¡±

    ¡°That is irrelevant,¡± Vorash stated, turning back into the tent. Soul let the door flap down and returned to his seat as well, ¡°You and this Caravan have a duty to follow the will of Kami, which flows through the word of the Council. Did you not lecture me on the delegation of authority only last night? You must bow to their wishes. There is another month left for this Caravan. To leave now would be traitorous.¡±

    ¡°Vorash, let me make this clear.¡± Soul replied sternly, ¡°My men are sick and weary. Their morale as at an all-time low. We will not be able to get the caravan moving again, much less carry out the extra months of duty here, without a major morale boost. These men cannot operate in the wilderness for such long periods of time. It is simply to foreign to them. Sickness and disease are major problems, especially after the wind, rain, and battle last night. I told the council this already and of the possibility of us returning home. Without the hope of The Endless City on these men¡¯s mind, I fear we would not even move the caravan again. Now, let your men rest as much as they can. They only need to handle the confinement spell for now; we will go without the other ones until we reach the portal.¡±

    Vorash seethed inside his cloak, but ultimately he had to bow before the orders of the General-Commander. ¡°I have tried to make you see reason General-Commander,¡± he said. ¡°Do not blame me for the consequences. The council will not take this as well as you might think. Do not think your favor from the past will save you every time you act against their wishes.¡±

    ¡°You had better hope I will fare well with the council this time,¡± Soul said with a threatening tone. ¡°I am not the only one who is in trouble with them right now.¡± Vorash stiffened but didn¡¯t say a word. He bowed to Gatal and then left the tent.

    ¡°I¡¯m surprised you had kept silent, Gatal,¡± Soul said as soon as Vorash¡¯s figure disappeared. ¡°You usually enjoy a good fight with Vorash.¡±

    ¡°Sir,¡± Gatal responded, pretending to sound hurt. ¡°I have never enjoyed violence.¡± Soul snorted at him. ¡°And besides,¡± he continued, ¡°you seemed to have everything under control.¡±

    ¡°Hmph, barely,¡± Soul replied. ¡°Even for a man in my position it is difficult to get the cooperation of the Highland Order. There is something broken within the system, Gatal. As the war continues Kami relies more and more upon the strength of mortal men. You would think the aristocracy would understand and work with that.¡±

    ¡°Actually, sir,¡± Gatal replied, ¡°I believe that it is just because of that fact that tensions keep getting worse between the highlanders and the humans. The highlanders think little of humans and they hate relying upon them, perhaps even more than they hate the enemy. Before they could simply ignore the humans; now they are forced to work with them.

    Soul shook his head, ¡°I fear you are right ,Gatal. As always you provide a clear insight into the working of the world. Tell me then, how is the progress with the caravan?¡±

    ¡°I believe that the caravan will be dug out and we will be able to attempt to move it within the hour.¡±

    ¡°Good,¡± Soul replied, ¡°And has news of our departure been spread throughout the camp?¡±

    ¡°Yes sir, even down to the last ponyboy. It wasn¡¯t that difficult, really. The news spread incredibly fast. If the prisoners could understand our language, then all of them too would be aware of our departure. Although I doubt they would be as happy as the rest of us.¡±

    ¡°Oh, I don¡¯t know about that,¡± Soul said, ¡°The Endless City for them means great things as well. They get to leave their old wilderness habits behind and start a new life secure in the Will and grace of Kami. They would probably be rejoicing as well.¡±

    Gatal didn¡¯t respond. Whenever Gatal remained quiet, Soul could not figure out what he thinking. As much as Gatal did for him, there were still parts of him that remained a mystery. Gatal said instead, ¡°What of the council, General-Commander? How Vorash said it may have been inappropriate, but what he said for the most part was true. The extra four months was a direct order from them and they did reject your appeal. To leave now would bring great trouble for you. How will you deal with it?¡±

    ¡°As I have always dealt with the council, Gatal, with cleverness and subtly. I did not get to General-Commander without learning how to deal with power.¡±

    ¡°Still, I am worried for you.¡± Gatal continued, ¡°I believe you are making the right decision, but I do not believe that it will go as well for you this time. Every time you appear in front of them, your victory at the battle of Crushed Snake is further behind in history. Eventually, their disgust for humans will override whatever sense of honor they owe to you, and soon.¡±

    ¡°Thank you for your concern, Gatal, but I think it will be groundless. Please, brighten up. We will be returning home soon, despite whatever words of doom you priests spout. The whole camp is in high spirits now. You should be too.¡±

    ¡°You forget, Sir,¡± Gatal replied as they walked out of the tent together, ¡°I am not a native to The Endless City. I am perfectly all right in foreign territories, even this godless wilderness.¡±

    *************************************************************************************

    It was two days after the battle and the caravan was moving again. In the end, the wagons were repaired, the sick men were being tended to, and the caravan was on its way again, but Lieutenant Fallow was not a happy lieutenant. Moving the caravan required an enormous amount of effort on the part of everybody. For the mounted legions like the 697th, it meant harnessing their horses and working themselves, something that greatly displeased the legions.

    Sure, the caravan was heading home soon, but they were traveling through the tall itchy grass. Walking through It bothered the horses and the lieutenant and his mounted battalion had to endure the discomfort. But perhaps the most aggravating aspect of these last few days before the portal was the absence of the priests¡¯ magic. If the soldiers resented the priests before, they repented deeply before the first day was over. The only magic the priests performed during this time was the confinement spell; everything else had to handled manually. Many simple things like access to food and water suddenly became a chore for the soldiers and they realized how much they took for granted. Even back in The Endless City, such conveniences were readily available. But for most of the soldiers, all these issues simply increased their desire and motivation to get home.

    Lieutenant Fallow was not one of those soldiers; a bonus of torment was added onto him to increase his misery level above that of his motivation level. General-Commander Soul had given him a special commendation for his hard work during the prisoner fiasco, and while Soul had intended to reward him and his men, for Fallow, it was a terrible punishment. The 697th mounted battalion was given orders to stay and guard the section of the caravan holding the prisoners. Now Fallow was forced to ride with the creepy prisoners, without even the relief of scouting rides. His men seemed not to share his dread of them, and he wasn¡¯t going to reject the gift to his men due to his own discomfort, but these last few days were going to be rough on him.

    ¡°Lieutenant Fallow,¡± one of his men called out to him during the fourth day. ¡°What are you looking forward to the most when we get back to the city?¡± It was a popular question around the camp. Fallow had given it a lot of thought lately, but he wasn¡¯t going to tell them that it was simply to get away from the prisoners. This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it

    ¡°I think I am looking forward to re-joining the men on the walls. I always enjoyed the position on the wall.¡±

    ¡°But you¡¯re part of the mounted legion,¡± the men laughed and protested, ¡°You don¡¯t have to have a position on the wall.¡±

    ¡°But I like it there.¡± Fallow said with smile, ¡°I like the security and safety of being on the wall. Feeling its strength with every step and every block. And being on top of it, there is no such experience. Up there the wind is always strong and fresh, and the view is always fair. Did you know that on clear days you can see all the way to the old ruins on the river? It is so beautiful.¡±

    ¡°But those ruins are held by the enemy,¡± his marshal responded. ¡°It hasn¡¯t been in Kami¡¯s control for over a hundred years. It¡¯s like it is not even part of the territory anymore.¡±

    ¡°It was once, though. But still, it is a beautiful sight. To think that someday soon, when we win the war, we will have all that land again. I would love to explore the ruins there.¡±

    ¡°You didn¡¯t answer our question, though,¡± they responded, ¡°There is going to be a week of rest between postings. Aren¡¯t you looking forward to being with your wife?¡±

    Fallow responded easily, ¡°I do not have a wife or even a family, really. I have my home and the unit I have been posted with, but I will see them no matter where I am posted in the city.¡±

    ¡°You are not married?¡± his corporal asked, astonished ¡°Didn¡¯t you pass the requirements a long time ago? You should be certified for marriage now.¡±

    ¡°It is true,¡± Fallow said, ¡°But I didn¡¯t find a woman for me. I haven¡¯t given up though, I believe that the right woman will appear someday.¡±

    The corporal shook his head in disbelief, ¡°Lieutenant, if you wait too long, all the good women will get taken and you will be left with only the old grannies. What would you do then?¡±

    ¡°Then I will have to live out my life in loneliness and pain, right?¡±

    The men laughed, but then he explained seriously, ¡°I don¡¯t think that taking a wife is the only action of meaning in a life. I am serving Kami-sama in whatever I do; I find plenty of joy in that.¡±

    ¡°But what will you do with your extra week sir? You haven¡¯t answered that question yet.¡±

    Fallow thought about it for a moment, ¡°Probably spend it in the library. I don¡¯t get many chances to visit there.¡±

    ¡°The library!¡± His Marshal exclaimed, ¡°What would you want to do there? It only full of old people and old books. Of what use is that?¡±

    ¡°I did not know we even had a library!¡± the Sub-Corporal added.

    ¡°And that is why,¡± Fallow said pointing at the sub-corporal, ¡°You are a sub-corporal and I am a lieutenant. There is a lot of good information there; I would suggest a visit for all of you. You can learn a lot in the Library, especially about the history. The old monks keep it treasured, and it really is fascinating stuff. I enjoy reading and listening to the works of history of The Endless City. There are none who are alive who remember those times any more, except for Kami-sama of course.¡±

    His men thought the idea was strange and unnatural, and they dismissed his suggestion quickly. As they further discussed the appropriate way to spend free time, Fallow withdrew himself from the conversation and let his thoughts drift off as well. The Endless City, the very thought of it filled him with joy. Buildings and palaces and keeps and walls, every part was secure and beautiful. And how he missed the wall! His first posting was at the wall, before he had been assigned to a mounted battalion. He would request another station there when he got back. Not many soldiers appreciated the wall as he did, the greatness and majesty it had. To Fallow, it was the wall itself that defined what the city was for him, although he had never seen it from the outside.

    It was from his stay at the wall that he learned curiosity. In the training, they only ever told the soldiers what they needed to know, to survive and work properly in the city to serve Kami. They did not care about the history or the arts. But on the wall, it was different. You could see the history in front of you, the old towns and rivers could be seen from up high. In the distance, mountains stood and on clear days, one could see even further into the haze of history. When his curiosity was aroused to the point of irritation, only the library had answers for him, and even the library was a relic of the past. It was kept in place by old priests who only cared about its keeping. In all the time he spent there, he rarely saw another human.

    He still clearly recalled his first time visiting the library. It was an old and beautiful building, filled with paintings and art and supported by majestic towering buttresses. The air was different there, filled with an atmosphere completely alien to him, but somehow nostalgic. Much of it was underground and filled with shelves of books. Thousands of them. Fallow had never seen the temple to Kami-sama but when he imagined it, it looked like the library. When he first stepped in, he was overwhelmed at the sights and was frozen in place. A priest saw him and said, ¡°A young officer? I cannot remember the last time a human came willingly to this place. What brings you here, young one?¡±

    Fallow had met many priests of the highland order while working on the wall before. He had never thought them as nice beings, and he avoided them when he could. But these priests were from a different order, the Wordlock Order. They were nice and helpful, even eager to share. Fallow was taken aback by them almost as much as he was by the glory of the place.

    ¡°I was told this was the place where the histories are kept,¡± Fallow had replied uncertainly.

    ¡°You heard correctly, but what do you want with the history? I doubt your superior asked you about them.¡± Unlike the highland order, the priests did not wear cloaks that covered their faces. He peered at Fallow his with gold curious eyes.

    ¡°Actually, it was I who asked him about it. He didn¡¯t know anything, though, and suggested I come here.¡± Fallow felt uncomfortable before the priest.

    ¡°Hmmm, so there is some life within the military it seems. I wouldn¡¯t have guessed. The only reason humans usually come here is to learn something of war tactics or to find a private place to speak. Tell me first, though, do you even know how to read?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Fallow admitted.

    ¡°Then how did you expect to learn anything here? Do you expect me to use up my valuable time and just tell you everything?¡±

    Deeply ashamed, Fallow fidgeted and didn¡¯t say anything. That was exactly what he had expected exactly.

    ¡°If you want to learn anything here, you must be able to read. All the information is in books, you know.¡± Fallow suddenly felt foolish for even coming to this place. He was an outsider, he was stupid to even consider being in the library. He should just leave quickly and repent for intruding upon this sacred place. But the priest continued, ¡°Come again tomorrow on the 6th hour. Can you do that?¡±

    ¡°Yes¡­?¡± Fallow said, confused.

    ¡°Good, we will start by teaching you how to read and then you can learn all you want from this place with no restrictions. It will be good to teach someone again. I haven¡¯t had the pleasure to do so in a very long time.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t think I can learn that,¡± Fallow stammered.

    ¡°Nonsense,¡± The priest said easily. ¡°Everybody can learn. I¡¯m not going to let a young scholar like you get away from me. Not just anybody has the gift of curiosity these days, and I can¡¯t let it go to waste.¡±

    The next day Fallow started his reading lessons. The priest¡¯s name was Havign and he was gentle, instructive, smart, and witty. He soon became more than Fallow¡¯s reading instructor, but also a mentor and then a friend. Reading did not come easy to Fallow, and he almost gave up many times in frustration. Every time, though, Havign would encourage and calm him. He would say, ¡°Fallow, things of worth will never be obtained easily. Even I did not learn to read without much effort. But it is because it is so difficult to get that we know it is worth it. You will understand that someday. Come now, let us try again. You are learning well, even if you are not feeling it.¡±

    Between his posting and his housing Fallow did not get much time to visit the library. But when he did, Havign was always patient and thoughtful. He taught him much more than just to read. He also challenged Fallow in many ways. Havign was the first and only person Fallow had told that he was not native to the Endless city, and Havign accepted it without issue.

    ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter where you are from Lieutenant,¡± he had said. ¡°It only matters what you are doing now and what you are planning to do in the future. ¡°

    Recently, Havign started teaching Fallow how to write as well. ¡°It¡¯s not just about putting words together on a piece of paper,¡± he had explained to him. ¡°It¡¯s about putting into words your thoughts and ideas, being able to structure an expression correctly so that it makes sense. In some ways, writing is more difficult than reading, but I have the utmost confidence in you, Lieutenant.¡± He said with a wink of his golden eyes, ¡°Be sure to practice what you have learned when you are away.¡±

    Fallow did practice, often during the first few months. But as the time in the caravan wore on, he lost the drive to continue. He hadn¡¯t written in over three weeks. Havign would surely chastise him for it. Seeing the priest again was Fallow¡¯s greatest motivation for returning to the library.

    But that return would have to wait a few more days. Right now, he had to deal with his own demons, the prisoners he trotted next to. The more time he spent with them, the worse he felt. Strange thoughts and ideas came to him when he was in their midst, questions without answers and feelings of loss. Sometimes a great inexplicable rage would come over him when he was around them, but he always managed to control himself. Kami-sama, something was wrong with him and he felt it. He couldn¡¯t wait to get back; he did not like these feelings of emptiness and pain. He wanted to get back into the warmth and security of The Endless City. He would discuss his feelings with Havign, somebody Fallow could always talk to.

    The lanterns were lit again after the darkness they brought. It was feeding time for the prisoners and they were making a horrible racket like they always did. Some of the soldiers enjoyed the feeding time and laughing at the prisoners. Fallow did not; he hoped the noise would die down soon. Kami, the horrible sounds they make, he wished they would stop! It was going to be a long three days until the portal for Lieutenant Fallow.

    That night, Fallow had a curious urge to write. He had always viewed writing as a chore before, but this night he felt something different toward it. So startled was he by this feeling. that he contemplated his own desire before he actually did it. He wanted to write down his thoughts, to somehow get them out of him. He felt that if his confusion was somehow expressed, it would resolve itself. Anyway, he felt if he didn¡¯t do anything, he would burst. He sat down in his crowded wagon that served as his quarters and reached for his luggage. He pulled out the parchment and ink the priest had given him and recalled again his words, ¡°Be careful with these,¡± Havign had told him. ¡°They are precious tools. Not in just the material sense either, although they are very valuable in and of themselves. But the ability to write is a powerful tool that must be mastered if it is to be used properly. It has the incredible power that rivals that of the gods¡¯. Just like the Kami creates with his words, so also can you create with your words.¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t understand what he meant, and as he gazed upon the parchment in front of him, he didn¡¯t know how to start. After a moment, he simply wrote what was on his mind.

    I hope to see you soon Havign. The more time I spend here the worse I feel. This is especially true these last few days. My battalion has been put in charge of escorting and guarding the prisoners in their wagons. I do not like looking at them. I do not like being around them. My men don¡¯t care though. What is so different about me? Do you remember when I told you that I wasn¡¯t native to The Endless City? That means that I have gone through the same experiences these prisoners have. I remember it clearly these days. But that was when I was different person. That man had different values and different hopes. I do not understand him. He was a confused and unguided man but I am neither any more. It had been a long time since I thought about my past. What is it about this place that brings it back to me? I do not like it and I wish I could forget it entirely I wish I could cut it off like an infected limb. But I cannot and it feels lately that its sickness is spreading. I said before that I wasn¡¯t confused, but I am now. Strange feelings well up inside of me. I am moody and angry lately. I wish I was back in The Endless City now. I am sure that there in the security of the city I would feel at ease again. It is just the wilderness puts me outside of myself. Home is only a few days away! I am afraid I have not practiced as much as you would have wanted. You will chastise me when I get back, but I hope you can understand. The wilderness is not a place for intelligence. You will probably never come out here, but as the name implies it is wild and dangerous. I will give you a full report when I get back. Maybe you will write a book on it? Until then, Havign. May Kami fill you with peace and light.

    Lieutenant Fallow

    Fallow put down his pen and studied his work. It was crude and somewhat illiterate. It would take more work, undoubtedly, to reach the skill level of the priests, but he was proud he could have written so much. He let it dry while he put the tools away. The wagon was not made to support such efforts, and he was sore and exhausted. When the ink finished drying, he also put the parchment away, but with great care. He had been getting strange dreams lately and although he had difficulty remembering their contents exactly, they gave him sleeplessness and fear. As he prepared for his slumber, he hoped he would be able to sleep in peace. But yet again, strange figures and settings appeared in his dreams and he felt something he cared for get torn away. When he woke up again, he wished he was already back inside The Endless City. He never had fearful dreams there.

 Chapter 13

    I was dreaming. In my dream, I saw a dark and open space. High before me was an oaken throne and upon that throne was a man. I saw his face, grave and old, and his blue eyes appeared luminescent as they gazed down on me. They burned me, and although I shut my eyes, I still felt his intense gaze with every nerve in my body. Around my neck a noose appeared in the form of a silver necklace, and it choked and strangled me. I grabbed hold of it in desperation, but suddenly I was only holding a naked sword in my hands and it cut them with its open blade. I let go and the sword fell to the ground. The room was gold and all around me and it glinted brightly in its brilliance. I gazed around in wonder and I squinted and shielded my eyes with my hand. There was a large window in the room, and I looked outside and saw people, thousands of them. Suffering held them all in his arms and his skeletal face looked down upon them mercilessly. When Suffering saw me, he dropped them all and they fell screaming and yelling into the emptiness below them, and I cried out for them. But then the room I was in fell suddenly as well, and I felt weightlessness in the descent. I struggled to climb out but there was no door and the window had grown too small to fit through. It kept shrinking and it changed color to silver and suddenly it was on my hand as a ring. A bright light like an explosion took place and suddenly, I awoke.

    Drake woke up suddenly with a loud cry. It was quiet and dark out and the only response to his outburst was the loud beating of his heart. He listened to its sound, as well as the others in the night, the creaking of his wagon and the breathing of his roommates. He felt sick and dizzy, and he leaned over to the side of the holding wagon to throw up. He was chilled and shaking with beads of sweat all over his body. He lay back down and tried to breathe evenly to calm himself down.

    He hadn¡¯t had a dream like that since before the battle, but they seemed to have increased in intensity even since he last had them in his father¡¯s lands . He hated them. They gave him physical pain, but the new factor that Drake especially feared was the feeling that Drfuil was still there, waiting, watching and commanding him, using his dreams to influence him. Ashton suddenly spoke to Drake out of the dark, ¡°You haven¡¯t had a nightmare for a while.¡± It was an observation, but it started the conversation.

    Drake sighed and sat up. Lying down made him woozy, but so did everything else at the moment. ¡°You never mentioned it before.¡± He said.

    In the dark, Drake could barely see Ashton shrug, ¡°I didn¡¯t really know who you were before. I didn¡¯t want to bother you about it until I knew you wanted to talk.¡±

    ¡°What makes you think that I want to talk about it now?¡± Drake responded without any real aggression.

    ¡°Well, you have already told me all your other dirty secrets. You might as well tell me this one too. Besides,¡± he added, turning to his side to face Drake, ¡°everybody knows that talking about nightmares makes people feel better. And you owe me for disturbing my peaceful rest.¡±

    Drake looked away into the wilderness. He responded anyway, ¡°I¡¯ve had dreams like this for a long time. Even before this whole mess started. Back when I was home, I had dreams I didn¡¯t understand. Once I had asked our court soothsayer about it, but he didn¡¯t say anything meaningful. But that¡¯s normal, isn¡¯t it?¡± he said suddenly, turning back to Ashton, ¡°All dreams are weird; they are just the subconscious mind going crazy. My father claimed I had some residual seer blood in me, but that was just his propaganda. The dreams don¡¯t mean anything, no matter how intense they might be.¡± He suddenly gagged and threw up again over the side again. ¡°Before I was here, though, they never made me so sick like this.¡± He said wiping his mouth.

    ¡°What do you usually dream about?¡±

    Drake waved his hand as if it didn¡¯t matter. ¡°Random stuff mainly. The dreams don¡¯t sense, Like I said, it doesn¡¯t matter.¡±

    ¡°Drake,¡± Ashton said sternly, ¡°Don¡¯t lie to me. You can¡¯t ignore them, especially if they keep getting worse. Especially if they are connected to the god, Drfuil.¡±

    They stared each other down for a moment, Ashton willing Drake to speak. Drake broke. ¡°Fine, I¡¯ll tell you.¡± He ran his hands through his messy and dirty hair, ¡°I see Drfuil in my dreams. He¡¯s still there, I can feel him watching me and waiting for me. I know he hasn¡¯t given up. I know that he won¡¯t give up.  I see other things too, strange visions and things that I don¡¯t understand. A city of gold is usually there.¡±

    Ashton sat up as well, giving serious thought to Drake. ¡°When did these dreams start? After you met Drfuil?¡±

    Drake shook his head, ¡°No, before that, long before that. As far as I know, I have always had these dreams. They never made me this sick before. I just brushed them off.¡± Drake chuckled halfheartedly, ¡°When I first met Drfuil, I thought that I was dead or simply seeing things. Or even still dreaming.¡±

    Ashton considered what he said, ¡°I have heard of people who can see the future. There are none in my village, but I have heard of oracles existing in other places. They see things and interpret what they see for the benefit of the people who hear them. Maybe you are like the oracles and experience visions of the future.¡±

    ¡°No.¡± Drake said firmly, ¡°I don¡¯t believe in oracles. It¡¯s just the universe playing tricks on me, nothing more.¡±

    ¡°Maybe the universe has an unusual sense of humor. But let me ask this,¡± Ashton said, bringing up something he had thought of a while ago, ¡°you said that it was completely random that you came into the presence of Drfuil, right?¡± Drake nodded. ¡°So, you would say that it was an incredibly remote occurrence, especially to you.¡±

    ¡°That is correct; it was an improbability that we would find the entrance in the first place as it moves around constantly. We also mistook it for a set of ruins filled with treasure, ignoring all the obvious signs that it was something else. Even Drfuil said that in all his years of existing, it had never happened before.¡±

    ¡°So then,¡± Ashton concluded, ¡°How could you have visions of an event that was virtually impossible to happen? Could it be anything other than Fate when two points of impossibility align?¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t like Ashton¡¯s words, ¡°It could be a lot of things, Ashton; they could be unrelated events.¡±

    ¡°No, seriously,¡± Ashton persisted, ¡°Let¡¯s think about this. If you have the ability to see the future, we might be able to control it and-.¡°

    ¡°Ashton, we are not talking about this.¡±

    ¡°It would be really useful if we could know what destiny has for us.¡±

    ¡°THERE IS NO SUCH THING AS DESTINY, ASHTON, SO SHUT UP. I¡¯M NOT TALKING ABOUT THIS!¡±

    The Ashton did as he was told after Drake¡¯s outburst. But, after a moment, Drake turned around and faced the other way, Ashton spoke again, ¡°What is your problem? Why can¡¯t you see this clearly? Visions of the future are not that unusual, why are you so against it?¡± Ashton waited for an answer but Drake didn¡¯t give it to him, ¡°Is it something with your visions?¡± he prodded, ¡°did you see something that upset you?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s not the visions, Ashton. They re not even visions anyway, they are just dreams.¡±

    ¡°Then what is it?¡± Ashton asked. ¡°Why does this upset you so?¡±

    Drake gnawed thoughtfully on his finger. Then he spoke, ¡°It¡¯s something Drfuil said. He told me that I would eventually put on the ring and embrace his power. That I would give up my life as a human. He said he had seen it happen, that it was my destiny. I can¡¯t believe it. I will not believe it. I will never give up my belief that I am in control of my future.¡±

    Ashton replied glumly, ¡°Strong words for somebody stuck in a cage.¡±

    Drake snorted, ¡°I still have choices I could make! To eat or not to eat. To sit here or over there. To put on this ring,¡± he grabbed it and held it up for Ashton not to see, ¡°or not put it on. I will not be a puppet for Drfuil.¡± He dropped the ring and let it dangle loosely. ¡°I will not do it.¡± He looked outside to the wilderness again.

    ¡°I understand.¡± Ashton said quietly. The nights in the wilderness were all the same to them. The lanterns were all dimly lit and they only cast vague shadows everywhere. Still, they looked outside as if new scenes continually unfolded before them. They didn¡¯t talk about it but instead watched the night.

    ¡°Tell me something of your world, Drake.¡± Ashton asked. The wagon jumped a bit as it rolled over a rock. The repairs to the wagonn after the battle did not have a fantastic quality and Drake worried the wagon would simply fall apart soon.

    Ashton often asked Drake about Leasdon, his native land, it gave them something to talk about in the long hours. In the darkness, outside of the caravan there was no light, so Drake spoke about the stars and moon while they waited for the new day to begin.

    It was the sixth day after the battle and even in the sleeplessness of the night, the caravan still felt tense and excited. Drake and Ashton felt a similar tension within themselves. On one hand, they looked forward to a change in their circumstances. The cages and prisoners had gotten old already, maddingly so. But they were also uncertain and slightly fearful about what would happen when they did reach the ¡°endless city.¡± What will be their position inside the city? Will they still prisoners there? Will they be sold as slaves? Will something more terrible beyond their imagination happen to them? Drake and Ashton secretly thought that to be the most likely scenario. They tried not to think about it, but the moment of departure was soon approaching.

    Both Ashton and Drake knew there was nothing they could do about it at this point. They had lost their chance at escaping already. Drake had resigned himself to whatever might await him in The Endless City when he gave up on escaping. Ashton had resigned himself long ago. He was simply glad Drake would be there with him. Truly, Ashton and Drake gained great comfort from one another.

    ¡°I find that hard to believe, Drake.¡± Ashton said, responding to Drake¡¯s explanations about the sky. ¡°What holds up the stars in the sky? Should they not fall down into the ground?¡±

    ¡°No, listen to me,¡± Drake pleaded somewhat frustrated and waving his hands exaggeratedly, ¡°the lights are so far away that the gravity of the land does not pull them toward us.¡±

    Ashton thought about it carefully. ¡°If it is so far away then how come you can see it?¡±

    Drake let out a sound like a wind tunnel running through the village. ¡°Forget it; I guess you will just have to see it.¡±

    ¡°You say that about a lot of the things you describe,¡± Ashton observed.

    ¡°Well that¡¯s because it is true! There is nothing to compare it to here, so you have no common ground to base the imagination on.¡±

    ¡°I think you are simply making these things up. There is no way these can be real, and you cannot even explain it properly.¡± Ashton did not actually believe that, but he enjoyed the reaction he got out of Drake when he said it. Drake practically strangled Ashton with his glare but Ashton just laughed at him. Some of the stuff he said was too fantastic to have been simply made up.

    ¡°Let me tell you,¡± Drake continued, ¡°when I get back to my world, I will take you with me, and I will show you everything we have talked about. You will understand then, and you will be amazed. Even I will gain a new appreciation for the beauty of my world after I leave this place.¡±

    ¡°I appreciate the offer, Drake. But I would like to return permanently to my home before I die. I am sure Leanoth is as great as you say it is, but you understand my desire don¡¯t you?¡±

    ¡°Of course, Ashton. After all, you need to show me around your village too, right? But I will not let you return without you seeing the wonders of my world. It¡¯s a matter of honor now.¡± The lanterns were almost at full brightness now and Drake could clearly see Ashton nod his head. They both knew that the possibilities of getting back home were small, but they didn¡¯t say it. There was no need. Another day had started in the wilderness, the last day for the caravan. The camp started stirring in the morning and Ashton sang a song to pass the time, a slow and tragic one, the kind he enjoyed the most.

    My struggles have not helped me as I warred against life

    The wind changes flows and brings only strife

    I heard the wind say as it passed me on by

    That god is not dead, he was only a lie

    My heart is a fire that never gets cool

    But my hands cannot work, I am only a fool

    Around the caravan, Drake noticed a different feeling in the air. Anxiousness. Ashton sang his song, but Drake watched the soldiers and wagon personal move around him. No longer were they the joyful soldiers who had practically paraded around the caravan the last few days. They spoke quietly with one another and they walked everywhere quickly with their heads down. The whole camp was subdued, like the calm before the storm.

    A little way away from the wagon Drake and Ashton occupied, Lieutenant Fallow trotted on his grey horse, and he was a tired man. Sound sleep continued to elude him, and now that the day of departure was here, he was not well rested. If he was jumpy and tired before, he was having anxiety issues now. His men were similar to him; they all feared what was coming next.  The portal was not a spell for mere mortals.The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.

    They had come to the wilderness through the portal, but it was a horror they were forced to endure. Fallow remembered what it was like, the dark chasm had opened up before the caravan and had swallowed it whole. He thought that he would die and that the whole Caravan would perish into its unknown depths. The spell casters had said it was perfectly safe and that the spell had been proven useful over millennia of trials, but none of the men in the caravan were comforted. If not for General-Commander Soul leading them through it, Lieutenant Fallow doubted anybody would have gone through it. Its horror was absolute.

    The last few days for the men of the caravan were filled with the thought of home, family and The Endless City. But underneath their joy was a hidden fear they tried to ignore. The day had finally come, though. They were departing from the wilderness, and they were going to pass through the portal again. Lieutenant Fallow felt sick just thinking about it.

    He rode with his men alongside the prisoners. Even his horse looked woeful as it plodded along with its head down. If Lieutenant Fallow didn¡¯t know better, he would have said that they were marching to their graves, not their homes. He looked at the prisoners. and envied them a little. With their minds gone, they would not have to witness the true terror of the portal. He took a deep breath and tried to relax. The caravan was the quietest he had ever heard it.

    His marshal rode up to him and pulled alongside. ¡°Are the men ready, Marshal?¡±

    ¡°Yes sir, they are prepared. Or at least as prepared as they are going to be. They are all scared. I hardly recognize them as the same men who laughed and joked yesterday.¡±

    ¡°We are all frightened. Kami-sama be praised that we are going home, but how I wish it wasn¡¯t through the portal.¡±

    They continued to ride together, not speaking. The portal wouldn¡¯t be so difficult if there was something for them to actually do or even work on, but the portal was purely the job of the spell casters. Inside the caravan there wasn¡¯t anything to do. They didn¡¯t need to tighten down the wagons, they didn¡¯t need to secure their belonging, and they didn¡¯t need to do anything to prepare the caravan. The scariest part about the portal was that they simply walked through it.

    ¡°Tell the men to make sure their amour is polished and that they look professional. We are returning home with pride as soldiers, not as beaten dogs. Understand?¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir¡± the Marshel said quickly. He turned and left on his urgent business. It was true that it was for the battalion¡¯s dignity that Fallow wanted the armor and uniforms wore proudly. But he was really just giving his men something to do. The anticipation for the portal was often worse than the portal itself. Or at least that was what Fallow wanted to believe. ¡°Truly,¡± he muttered to himself, ¡°A thing for our nightmares.¡±

    <hr>

    ¡°Have the priests start the portal, Gatal.¡± Soul commanded. Both Soul and Gatal stood in front and off to the side of the caravan so they could have a good viewpoint on the happenings. Around them was a small company of body guards in their ceremonial black and dark grey uniforms. As they stood there, the caravan slowly approached them. It was curious for General-Commander to see the caravan without the spreading wildfire trailing behind it. The priests had been otherwise occupied recently.

    Gatal sent Vorash the message, but General-Soul didn¡¯t understand how he could. Gatal was at his side but Vorash was a mile away with the other priests setting up for the spell. Some sorcery of theirs allowed them to communicate over long distances, no doubt. The technique proved to be very useful for the general-commander in the past, and he had come to rely on it. He trusted Gatal completely.

    ¡°They are starting it now, sir.¡± Gatal said, straining as if looking at something far off.

    ¡°Good, how long before it becomes corporeal?¡±

    Gatal said nothing for a second as if he was waiting for something. ¡°He estimates ten minutes before it will become visible and an hour until it reaches maximum diameter, Sir.¡±

    The general-commander nodded, satisfied. ¡°How are Vorash and his spell casters doing?¡±

    Gatal smiled, ¡°He says they will do their job without any fault and without any assistance.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Soul replied easily. The wind blew softly around them and fluttered their cloaks. Some of the guard shifted uncomfortably.

    ¡°Your guards are nervous, General-Commander,¡± Gatal observed, his attention still fixed elsewhere.

    ¡°All my men are nervous, Gatal.¡± Soul explained, ¡°They have lots of experience with spells, but they do not really understand them. The portal brings to physical being their worst fears about it, and we force them to march into it. It would make any man uneasy, even me.¡±

    Gatal smiled again and said, ¡°Even the great General-Commander fears it, eh? I will have to remember that weakness in the future.¡±

    Soul looked down upon Gatal and stated clearly, ¡°I only said it made me uneasy, not that it compromised my judgment.¡±

    Gatal laughed at him, ¡°It really is a weakness if I can get that reaction from you. Come now General-Commander, our sorcery is not that scary. It is just using power to create. In essence, it is practically the same power as Kami-sama, just on a smaller scale. Well, it makes sense because that is where they get their power.¡±

    ¡°The ability to create with words rests solely with the divine.¡± Soul said staring off to where the spell casters were. ¡°We mortals are forced to operate within the laws of nature in place. It would be unnatural for a human to be completely unaffected by such power. We fear it, and we worship it. That does not mean we like it.¡±

    ¡°Well, for a man who dislikes our sorcery, you sure use it a lot,¡± Gatal observed.

    ¡°I do what is necessary and what is best for my men and my god. If using the convenient abilities of the priests further progresses the Will of Kami, then so be it. I will serve as best I can. There was a time when I was afraid of the priests, but I am no longer. Now I only fear their power and what great and terrible things they are capable of doing. Transporting an entire army from location to location? I am glad that we both serve Kami-sama.¡±

    ¡°You are very wise to fear the power, General-Commander. It is healthy even. You truly are a man among mortals.¡± Soul took the compliment without comment. ¡°The portal should become visible any second now, sir.¡±

    Nobody spoke after Gatal did and it seemed like the whole unit held its collective breath. They looked off to where the spell casters would be and imagined the portal there already, half hoping it wouldn¡¯t appear. Then it was there, a black dot existing in the distance, somehow visible despite the darkness. It was only about as big as a single wagon at the moment, but they all knew it would grow to engulf the entire caravan.

    ¡°Tell me, General-Commander,¡± Gatal said casually after the portal became visible, ¡°How do you balance your devotion to Kami-sama, who has even greater and more terrible power than the highland order, with your repulsion of the priests.¡±

    ¡°You know the answer to that, Gatal,¡± Soul said, staring at the black sphere. ¡°Kami-sama is god; the priests are just creatures with extraordinary powers.¡±

    ¡°Yes, but isn¡¯t a land god simply a creature with extraordinary power as well?¡±

    The general-commander tore his eyes away from the supernatural phenomenon and looked at Gatal curiously. ¡°I don¡¯t understand what you are trying to say. Kami-sama is god; I don¡¯t understand how you could compare him with the highland order. We all live to serve him, and we find purpose and joy in doing so. The priests and Kami-sama are completely different.¡±

    A shadow passed over Gatal¡¯s face for a moment, ¡°You are right. Forget I asked.¡± Soul nodded and looked back at the portal that was still forming. Gatal secretly berated himself. Soul was right; Gatal did know he was going to say that. He was stupid to think otherwise, even for a second.

    <hr>

    Ashton looked outside of the wagon with crazy eyes. He peeked every few moments, and it was starting to get on Drake¡¯s nerves. Ashton was losing it. ¡°Will you cut that out? You don¡¯t need to look every second; nothing is going to change that quickly.¡±  Ashton turned away and sat down, but there was still fear in him. ¡°Stop acting like a little girl. It¡¯s just a portal, I already told you that. It is what is used to travel between the territories.¡±

    They had noticed the spot about a half of an hour earlier and they had tracked its growth. What at first appeared to be a small black dot had grown to the size of a hill. It was spooky, Drake had to admit. It had all the appearance of a black hole to him, a drain in space time. It seemed to suck in everything around it with its dark tendrils that spread out and grew. It interacted with the atmosphere in the wilderness, causing disruptions. Sparks and lightning shot out from it and around it often as the matter lost and gained electrons. A dull roar had started as well, like a waterfall in the distance. But it wasn¡¯t like Ashton could understand that. To him, it was all just a terrible phenomenon of horror and sorcery.

    It wasn¡¯t just Ashton either; Drake had noticed the entire caravan was afraid of it. The men acted in different ways, some seemed to offer continued prayers to their god, some mumbled silently to themselves, some stared at it transfixed, but most endured the terror in silence. Drake could not understand why they were so frightened by it. He did think it was spooky, but it wasn¡¯t enough to cause such terror as he was witnessing.

    ¡°How do you know it is a portal?¡± Ashton said nervously.

    ¡°For the tenth time, I just know!¡± Drake said with frustration, ¡°I¡¯ve been through one before.¡±

    ¡°And it looked like that?¡± Ashton said, pointing towards the portal.

    ¡°No, I didn¡¯t really see it-.¡±

    ¡°Then how do you know it really is a portal then?¡± he asked aggressively. ¡°It could be something completely different. It could be a huge abyss-.¡±

    ¡°No, they wouldn¡¯t go through it themselves then-,¡± Drake said reasonably.

    ¡°It could simply be a hole in space that we will simply fall down through forever-,¡±

    ¡°No, again for the same reason, and that¡¯s not how the universe works-.¡±

    ¡°Or it could even be a large mouth of their god, just there to eat us.¡±

    ¡°Gods don¡¯t consume humans, they don¡¯t even eat, they-.¡±

    ¡°HOW DO YOU KNOW THAT?¡± Ashton yelled, turning towards Drake, ¡°How can you possibly know that! How can you be so calm?¡± He then peered back outside and said insanely, ¡°We are getting closer and closer to it.¡±

    Drake was worried for his friend, ¡°Look, you are panicking and not thinking straight. You need to calm down, take a few breathes, and trust me on this. I just know these things. The portal is safe, and it has been in use for thousands of years. Please, calm down. It will be okay.¡±

    Ashton stopped yelling, but he leaned up against the side of the wagon and stared at the growing and encroaching portal. It was clear he was not convinced. It couldn¡¯t be helped, Drake figured. Ashton just didn¡¯t see it.

    After a few moments, Ashton said, ¡°The front of the caravan just entered.¡± Drake was startled at the man¡¯s voice. It was calm, but unnaturally so. At this point, Ashton was much scarier than the portal.

    ¡°See ,everything will be okay.¡±

    Ashton shook his head, ¡°We don¡¯t even know what they will do with us on the other side. We have no idea¡­¡±

    Drake looked at Ashton and was surprised to see tears on his face. Unsure of what to do, he tried to comfort him saying, ¡°Hey, we will be together, though. You know. We knew all along this was going to happen, especially after the night of the battle. I promise, I will stay with you, no matter what.¡±

    Ashton suddenly started weeping. ¡°I know,¡± Ashton said, sniffling and crying and babbling, ¡°I knew this was going to happen; I knew it from the moment I was captured on the side of Carothos. But I always hoped I would somehow get back home, you know? But now, look at that. It is a monster. It may not kill us, but it is a killer nonetheless. Do you think we will be able to get back home after we go through that? I tell you, that is the end for us!¡± He then said softly, ¡°I want to go home, Drake.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t know what to say. Perhaps Ashton was right, that portal was the end for them. Home. Drake had thought about it a lot lately, but somehow his feelings had changed about it. Being away didn¡¯t hurt anymore, not like it used to at least. The loneliness and fear used to be like a physical pain, but something had changed in him. The thought scared him. What was different inside of him? He knew that he wasn¡¯t the same.

    Ashton seemed to answer his question as if he heard what he was thinking. He looked at Drake with a strange glint, ¡°You said that you had put on the ring before, right? And that Drfuil inserted his knowledge and thoughts into you that way? Maybe that is why you are not scared. Mortals would be frightened of the portal, but you are part god now, right? That would explain why you act the way you do. It would also explain why you know the things you do. You¡¯ve lost your humanity!¡±

    Drake was frozen, finding it difficult to deny Ashton¡¯s words. He wanted to deny them, to say that he was still the same. He broke out in a cold sweat and felt his insides constrict. His visions from the night before erupted in his mind and he thought he felt the ring on his chest grow suddenly hot. He grabbed at it but it slid through his fingers. He was afraid now and he thought he heard the words of Drfuil repeated inside him, cold and hard. They told him that he had left humanity a long time ago.

    ¡°No, it¡¯s not true,¡± Drake whispered to himself. He stood up suddenly and hit his head on the side of the wagon, creating a loud resonating thud. Ashton jumped in surprise. Drake felt dizzy and flopped down again, but the voice stopped.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡± Ashton hissed at him, coming up to him and feeling his forehead, ¡°You¡¯ve gone and cut yourself here. What were you thinking?¡±

    ¡°I am the master of my soul, I am not a puppet for Drfuil,¡± Drake said, still a little dazed. ¡°I will do what I want.¡±

    ¡°Great,¡± muttered Ashton angrily, ¡°next time you feel the urge of freedom come upon you, try not to hurt yourself.¡±

    Drake chuckled, ¡°Ashton, you¡¯re a funny man.¡± Then he said solemnly, ¡°I am still human, Ashton, I¡¯m not going to give that up. Please do not give up on me either.¡±

    Ashton bandaged Drake¡¯s head and said, ¡°This reminds me of when I first met you, beaten, bloody and sick. You didn¡¯t give nearly as much trouble then.¡±

    Drake chuckled again, ¡°Thanks for helping me out then, by the way.¡±

    ¡°Shut up.¡±

    Ashton completed the bandage. The portal¡¯s dull roar had grown considerably louder, and as they got closer to the portal, it also became more and more distinct. To Drake, it sounded like a waterfall. ¡°It¡¯s the air getting sucked into the portal,¡± Drake said loudly.

    They sat and listened to its sound. Soon, it blotted out most all the other sounds. ¡°I am sorry for what I said earlier. I didn¡¯t mean it; you are the most human thing I have met since I left Mt. Carothers!¡± Ashton yelled.

    Drake shook his head, ¡°No you are right. It¡¯s okay! I¡¯m not going to stop being me, though! Whatever awaits us beyond that portal,¡± Drake shouted pointing at it, ¡°I am not going to change! Please, don¡¯t you either!¡±

    The caravan was halfway through the portal now. Each soldier, horse, and wagon disappeared the moment it went in, despite the prevalent fear. ¡°I promise, Drake!¡± Ashton yelled again, his fear gone now. Drake couldn¡¯t hear him, but he understood. Their wagon approached the portal and then was swallowed by it. They had left the wilderness.

 Chapter 14

    The Council of the Divine. This collection of aristocrats was created thousands of years ago, when the territory of Kami was vast and complicated. The previous policy of letting the humans grow and expand unchecked had been made obsolete as the chaos and overpopulation threatened to usurp the balance of the territory. More order and governance was needed if the land was to be taken care of properly. It was during the construction of The Endless City that Kami created the council in order to better govern the principalities of Kami¡¯s territory. The seven seats on the council were filled by the powerful and wise aristocrats in the city, and they were trusted with supporting Kami-sama and fulfilling his Will in his absence. The authority of the council came directly from Kami-sama, and while its initial objectives were simply the support of Kami in matters of local city governance, it soon grew and evolved with time.  Now that Kami-sama no longer took an active part of governance in his territory. The Council of the Divine was the center of authority and power within the city.

    Commander Soul had been summoned to attend a meeting of the Council the moment he appeared from the portal. He stood before the council, tall and proud. The extravagance and majesty of the Council room no longer fazed him, nor did the council. The table they sat at curved so that each member could see and respond to one another and over the years, extra seats had opened up to make room for other important offices of the city. Currently, there were 15 occupants facing the general-commander on several tables, each representing different offices of the state. The Council on High, however, occupied the foremost spot. Like a man on trial, Soul faced the council alone. Gatal was not allowed inside, so he waited impatiently in the hall.

    The general-commander had been in the council for a long time, much longer than a normal mission report should take. With every hour that passed, Gatal¡¯s irritation grew. Gatal feared for the man. The council was not known for forgiveness, especially toward humans. It wouldn¡¯t surprise Gatal if they decided to allow their grudge against the human to overcome their sense of duty toward the city.

    The lobby outside the council room was silent as the dead. Tall majestic pillars and fantastic frescos decorated the hall. Tables and offices were set up within it as well. Like a quiet library, all the attendants and workers busied themselves with whatever tasks were assigned to them, ignoring everything else. Also in the lobby with Gatal were the assistants and support faculty of the aristocrats in the council room. Despite the company, nobody spoke at all, or even looked at one another.

    There was a loud crack from inside the room and the large ornate doors were opened from the inside. The council was dismissed and Gatal headed straight for the General-Commander, walking tall above the heights of the aristocrats. Despite how tired Soul looked, he walked at a brisk pace. ¡°Sir, how did it go?¡± Gatal asked anxiously.

    ¡°Things went mostly as we expected,¡± he said. He did not stop walking and Gatal had to increase his pace to keep up. Gatal looked behind and saw the other members of the lobby find their respective attendees as they filed out of the room. It reminded Gatal of swarming ants. Soul continued, ¡°Except there were a few things for me to learn as well.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡± hissed Gatal. Soul irritated him when he acted like this; he knew Gatal was not in the mood for riddles. ¡°What happened? You were in there for a long time.  Has something important happened in our absence?¡±

    ¡°First, I have something for you personally,¡± He said casually. They reached the doors of the council house, huge iron doors that Gatal had never seen closed. He never gave them much attention either. As they turned onto the streets, Soul took a document out of his cloak and handed it to Gatal, ¡°I want you to go down and take responsibility of the irregularities within the prisoners. You¡¯ll be seeing personally their their individual indoctrinations.¡±

    ¡°What!¡± Gatal snapped unsealing the document and reading it, ¡°How can you possibly think that that is a good idea? There are hundreds of better things for me to do, thousands even.¡±

    ¡°Like waiting outside the council for four hours?¡± Soul asked dryly.

    Gatal glared at him. ¡°We do not have time to waste on this.¡± He tried to hand back the document to Soul,  ¡°This is not a task for me.¡±

    ¡°You are right of course,¡± Soul continued, ignoring Gatal¡¯s outstretched arm, ¡°But that was their condition for my request.¡±

    ¡°Who¡¯s condition? The Council¡¯s? But sir, that is absurd!¡± Gatal protested. ¡°Why would they want that? It would only require a novice level priest to handle the irregularities! Or just have them killed like they usually are. There must be something else behind this, probably just a form of punishment for you.¡±

    ¡°I fear you are right,¡± Soul agreed, ¡°but I think there is a deeper meaning to it than even what you think.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡± Gatal asked, ¡°What else happened in the meeting?¡±

    ¡°A full investigation of the factors in my insubordination is now in process,¡± he said calmly, ¡°and until the matter is resolved, one way or another, I have been demoted to the rank of Captain and have been given a post on the ground level, southern wall.¡±

    Gatal stopped in his tracks. He said gravely, ¡°Sir, please do not joke right now, today has been a stressful day and-.¡±

    ¡°Gatal.¡± The general-commander stopped as well and faced Gatal sternly, ¡°I am telling you the truth. I am now Captain Soul and my post on the wall begins tomorrow when I dismiss Captain Highling.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Gatal asked, aghast. ¡°They, can¡¯t do that. The city needs you at full command!¡± He added angrily, ¡°Has any commander ever had as much success as you against the enemy? Who do they think is keeping the city safe?¡±

    ¡°Kami-sama keeps the city safe Gatal,¡± Soul replied. ¡°And he will use whatever tools he wants to accomplish victory. If he feels it is better for another person to be given charge of defense for the city, then so be it. He knows best.¡±

    ¡°But it isn¡¯t Kami who is relieving you of your duty,¡± Gatal shouted. He thrust his arm toward the council room, ¡°It is the Council! Are they even aware of the threat against them!?¡±

    ¡°Please calm down Gatal,¡± Soul said putting his hand on Gatal¡¯s shoulder. He dropped his arm. ¡°Indeed,¡± he continued, ¡°they do know. Part of the meeting was a report on the activities of the enemy.¡± He turned and started walking briskly again. ¡°They are growing. Activity around the perimeter has never been higher; all defenses have been on alert for the last month. The enemy scouting legions have also been increasing in their function, as we had witnessed in the wilderness. They believe that something big is happening soon and they are preparing accordingly.¡±

    ¡°All the more reason for you to be leading the men!¡± Gatal protested, race walking again to keep up with Soul. ¡°Instead they are going to leave in charge some incompetent general who spends more time in the palace than in the field! The reasons for their actions are simply to get you out of their way. They separate us, and then send you to some corner of the city to stay out of trouble. How can they do that when the city is threatened like never before? They don¡¯t care about the defense of the city? You can¡¯t let them do that. You are the only hope for the city!¡± Pedestrians they passed turned their heads at the commotion, but Gatal didn¡¯t care

    ¡°You praise me too much,¡± Captain Soul said calmly, ¡°You forget, Gatal, victory will come to Kami-sama, regardless of what tools he chooses to use. This city has withstood the forces of the enemy for over 500 years. It will withstand more. Everyone must simply do their appropriate function according to His Will.¡±

    ¡°That is priest talk!¡± Gatal spat. ¡°We talk about the realities of the city and its defenses. How many men are stationed at the critical points? What kind of armaments does the enemy have? Where are they most likely to attack and how? What are the probable variables and how can they be used in our favor? Do the other commanders have any idea how to actually use men on the battlefield?¡±

    ¡°The other commanders come from long lines of military service and aristocracy.¡± Soul replied, ¡°They are the elite of the city and they can serve Kami-sama in a way that no human can understand. Of course, they will do an excellent job in their part of the Will of Kami.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re blind,¡± Gatal said with a deadly conviction. ¡°You are all blind! You are all so secure in your belief in your city¡¯s invincibility that your considerations are trivial rather than the essential defense of the city!¡±

    ¡°Have some faith Gatal.¡± Soul said without breaking stride, ¡°Everything will end as Kami-sama wills it.¡±

    ¡°My faith was in you.¡± Gatal retorted illustrating each statement with a vigorous gesture, ¡°Not in the other generals, not in this city¡¯s walls, and not in its dying god!¡±

    ¡°Gatal,¡± Soul said suddenly and angrily, ¡°You have gone too far. I will not allow such talk, even from you.¡±

    Gatal paused. He added with heat, ¡°You are all just fools. You add to your own destruction.¡± He turned around and walked away.

    ¡°Where are you heading?¡±

    ¡°To the prisoners,¡± Gatal yelled back, waving the assignment document in the air, ¡°Where Kami-sama believes my abilities are used best!¡±

    Captain Soul watched Gatal walk away, toward the deep places where the prisoners were held. He was upset that Gatal acted like that from time to time. He wished Gatal could understand what it meant to serve Kami-sama; maybe he wouldn¡¯t be so distraught then. ¡°But I guess I shouldn¡¯t expect so much from him,¡± he thought turning again toward his destination. ¡°He wasn¡¯t born here and has been influenced by foreign ideas. He will see, though, thast in the end Kami-sama will attain victory.¡±

    ¡°Praise be to Kami.¡± He said out loud. The people who heard him as they passed by responded in unison, ¡°Praise be to Kami.¡±

    <hr>

    Fair Jewel, The Endless City, The City of Gold, for all the majestic names for the city, Drake and Ashton had to say that what they had seen so far had not been that impressive. All around them, dark stone and cold bricks filled their space. After making it through the portal without injury, only disorientation, the prisoners had been whisked away before Drake or Ashton could see anything of value. All the prisoners had been placed inside a large room, deep beneath the city. Unexpectedly. the room was beautiful. Lanterns were placed inside and they lit it up so that Drake and Ashton could see its richly decorated, if neglected, walls. Strong and graceful pillars lined the edges and a tall dome served as the ceiling. The floor was worn and faded, as if a lot of traffic had worn it away with time. It was clear to Ashton and Drake that the room¡¯s original purpose was not to house prisoners, but was simply being used for it.

    For Ashton and Drake, the hall was a weird contrast from dark gritty stone paths to awe inspiring and splendorous facades. Drake gazed upon its magnificence, comparing the room to the fair palaces his father had and forgot already their pains. Ashton had never seen such work before and he mostly stared excitedly at the walls. Unfortunately, there was nobody else in the room who could appreciate what they saw, only the dead eyed prisoners kept them company. Drake and Ashton walked around gazing at and admiring the works around them.

    ¡°Look at this piece,¡± Ashton exclaimed pointing towards a magnificent painting that filled an entire wall. ¡°How can they create such a huge picture? How long it must have taken¡­¡±

    Drake came up next to Ashton and looked at it as well. It was faded and worn a little but its scene was still legible and breathtaking. The picture showed scores of men were laboring under large loads. Tall machines and structures were visible and dignified men were seen overseeing, discussing, and evaluating the works being created. In it, tall walls were half completed and buildings were under construction. Though tragically faded, the whole painting displayed a scene in motion.

    ¡°What are they building?¡± Ashton wondered aloud. Drake wondered that as well. For the scope and size of the painting, whatever it depicted was surely beyond the limits of their imagination.

    ¡°The Endless City¡­¡± Drake murmured and he held up his hand to touch it. He didn¡¯t reach the painting before something new and dreadful entered the room.

    It was clear from the moment Drake became aware of it that it was not human. Its presence was huge and suffocating, dark and alien, but they could not identify a physical body to it. Like a fog, it enveloped the whole room. A loud and unnatural sound came with it as well, filling their senses with an instinctual fright. Drake felt that it was trying to force its way into their minds.

    ¡°We have to get out of here!¡± Drake said, instinctively ducking down as if avoiding smoke.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.

    ¡°We need to blend in with the other prisoners though!¡± Ashton said, but he too looked frightened and confused.

    ¡°This¡­ whatever this is,¡± Drake said, waving his hand in the air above him, ¡°It¡¯s dangerous. I fear the consequences of staying here will be worse than trying to find an escape!¡±

    Ashton looked around reluctantly for a second, but was easily convinced. The presence made his mind fuzzy and weak; it gave Ashton and Drake nausea. They quickly looked for an escape from the hall. To their surprise, there were several doorways leading out and none of them were locked.

    ¡°They probably didn¡¯t expect their prisoners to be able to move around,¡± Drake said, opening one of the doors. The doors they tried all led to similar looking hallways, some were completely dark, others filled with rubble. They found one that had lanterns, and they quickly followed it. They did not want to linger inside the hall any longer than was necessary.

    Only fifty meters into the hallway, though, they turned a corner and ran into a soldier. He was clad in dark grey armor and a cloak, but it was the sharp and dangerous looking spear the man had that quickly gained their attention. His face showed mild surprise, and upon seeing Drake and Ashton he immediately leveled the spear at them. Drake darted forward, brushing the spear to the side, and delivered an upper jab into the man¡¯s chin. But Drake was weak and slow. Despite the surprise, the guard was not fazed by the blow but looked down at Drake in disdain. He was obviously trained well; he didn¡¯t flinch from the hit and instead slammed Drake against the wall. Drake hit it with a loud crunch, and he felt the breath get knocked out of him. He slumped to the floor, but Ashton came up and caught him before he hit the ground. Another guard appeared suddenly behind them blocking their escape. Ashton shrank in fear; both spears were poised to kill.

    Instead of striking, one guard said to the other, ¡°These two don¡¯t look like they have been indoctrinated at all! Those blasted spell casters; I wonder how many more are like these.¡± He poked his spear at Drake and Ashton, driving them into a corner. ¡°This one even tried to get a shot in on me. It was incredibly weak though.¡±

    ¡°Ha!¡± the other said, stepping forward, ¡°shows just how useless you are if you let one of these freaks get a hit on you. There are always some with every bunch, though, that don¡¯t get indoctrinated right. Hurry up and kill them already.¡±

    Drake braced himself for the worst, preparing to fight to the death, but the other guard spoke first, ¡°Are you stupid? If I could have, I would have skewered these dogs immediately! Have you forgotten our orders already?¡± He got up close and sneered at Drake, ¡°We are not supposed to kill them. Somebody else will judge that.¡±

    ¡°What are they saying?¡± Ashton whispered to Drake, his voice shaking.

    ¡°Shh! We are not going to get killed just yet!¡± Drake breathed out. He didn¡¯t think anything was broken.

    ¡°Great,¡± the other guard said gloomily, ¡°more work for us. It was easier when we just killed them. What do we hope to gain from wilderness people who are not even indoctrinated? The indoctrinated ones are bad enough.¡±

    ¡°Whatever. Just help me get these prisoners to their rooms. You,¡± he said directly to Drake as if he couldn¡¯t understand him. He made a universal gesture for a threat and then poked them with his spear again. With little reluctance, Drake and Ashton allowed the pointy end of the spear to guide them. They were led to a room and shut in. The guards then walked away, muttering about the inconsistent orders they often got. Drake and Ashton were left alone.

    ¡°I thought they were going to kill us.¡± Ashton said, sounding relieved once the guards had left. ¡°What were they saying?¡±

    Drake was testing the door, but it appeared to be locked. ¡°They said that they were under orders not to kill us, which is good because usually they just kill people like us, apparently.¡±

    There was a lantern in the room with them, for which they were grateful. Without it, they feared that there would be no light at all. ¡°What now, then?¡± Ashton asked.

    ¡°This door won¡¯t budge, and I don¡¯t see any other exits.¡± Drake stopped trying to force the door and turned around and slumped down, ¡°I guess we just wait now.¡±

    ¡°For them to kill us?¡± Ashton asked.

    ¡°No,¡± Drake responded, turning to face Ashton. ¡°We will not wait for that. It is obvious that our earlier luck with the ring is rebounding. They would simply kill us rather than let us cause any trouble.¡± He brushed his messy hair out of his eyes. He said sadly, ¡°I shouldn¡¯t have led us out of the room with the other prisoners; we are going to get killed because of it.¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Ashton responded, ¡°do not blame yourself. We both felt that horrible presence in the room. I wanted to get out of there just as badly as you. We don¡¯t know what terrible thing that creature is doing now. And we don¡¯t know yet if we are going to die. Do not regret your choice already.¡±

    Drake said only, ¡°If I feel that they are going to kill you or me, I will not hesitate to act.¡±

    ¡°And do what?¡± Ashton wondered aloud, ¡°Your earlier antics only got you pounded.¡±

    Drake did not answer. He slammed his fist against the door, ¡°Why am I so weak?¡±

    Only the silence answered him. The room they were in was small compared to the hall they were in earlier; it was more like a cell. it contained an empty table and a few chairs. The only other item there was the lantern which provided light. It flickered and danced merrily, oblivious to the tortured souls it gave light to. The walls were smooth and red, as if carved out of the stone itself. It connected to the ceiling seamlessly by way of a curve and the whole room was graceful and light. The atmosphere was damp and pleasantly cool. Outside of immediate danger, Drake and Ashton relaxed as much as they could on the chairs.

    They discussed the possibilities of what might be happening in the large hall, the presence of the creature and the security of it, but came to no conclusion. Ashton was convinced it was an arcane ritual of some sort and that their escape was a good thing. ¡°Do not think that you are so weak. That ring of yours has saved us from whatever terrible event was happening,¡± He said. ¡°I am eternally thankful.¡±

    But Drake wasn¡¯t convinced, ¡°It¡¯s worse than useless. It only brings false hope if I can¡¯t actually do anything with it.¡± He murmured, ¡°Indoctrination¡­ what did they mean by that?¡±

    Ashton merely shrugged; ¡°You can understand them, not I.¡±

    There was no action for the next few hours, and soon both became bored. At least in the caravan there was always a landscape to look at, trees and meadows and plants. But in this land, all they saw were bare walls and emptiness. There weren¡¯t even any noises to dwell on. It unnerved Ashton, and he wouldn¡¯t sing.  There was one pleasant thing for him, though. For the first time in a long time; he did not have any restraints on him.

    Drake found interest in the lantern hanging from the wall. He nw had an opportunity to study it closely. It was shaped like an egg and was transparent as if made of glass. But upon touching it, Drake found that the surface flexed when force was applied. Inside it looked like a flame was burning, but there was no heat to be felt, fuel to be seen, nor air to be found.

    He attempted to pry the lantern off the wall to get a better look at it, but he failed. He stood and studied it and then prepared himself for another attempt. Before he could though, the door opened behind him in a loud sound of rusty hinges and air pressure.

    The man at the door short, very short. He came up to only Drake¡¯s chest. He wore a black cloak that covered all of his features. He also had on a blue sash with a gold pin on it. Just behind hind him were two guards, different from the ones they had met earlier and somehow meaner looking but they were difficult to make out in the darkness of the hallway. With a wave the figure dismissed the guards outside and they shut the door loudly. Despite the hood over the man¡¯s head, it was clear the figure was in a bad mood.

    The figure grumbled to himself, ¡°I hate doing this.¡± He reached inside his tunic and pulled out what appeared to be a piece of paper. Before Drake could recognize it he lifted it up into the air and it suddenly lightly disintegrated, flowing up and around like smoke. The figure spoke again with his arm still raised and said loudly, but not to Drake or Ashton, ¡°I have been granted authority over the tongues. These prisoners will hear and understand the will of Kami.¡± He lowered his arm and stepped further into the room. Ashton and Drake stood up defensively and fearfully. The man smiled unpleasantly, ¡°Do not be frightened,¡± he held his hands up for them to see; ¡°I am unarmed.¡±

    ¡°Drake,¡± Ashton whispered, ¡°I can understand him!¡±

    Drake replied back to the man, ¡°We know that it does not necessarily take weapons to hurt us. Words and spells can as well.¡±

    They could not see his face, but both Ashton and Drake were startled by the menacing aura that suddenly came from the man. He said, ¡°You are wiser than you look, perhaps you will last longer than others.¡±

    ¡°What do you want from us?¡± Drake asked stronger than he felt, ¡°I do not know why you came unarmed, but know that that will not stop me from attacking you.¡±

    The figure studied Drake and said, ¡°You think that since you have managed to elude the indoctrination that you actually have a chance at resisting? Fool, your struggles have only made your circumstances worse.¡± He spoke flatly, as if reading a speech, ¡°Resistance is futile, and effort only delays the inevitable. As always, powers beyond your imagination are in control of your destiny. There is no hope.¡± Despite the figure¡¯s size, Drake and Ashton felt far more threatened by him than anything they met previously. The figure stepped closer to them and continued, suddenly in a soothing voice, ¡°Stop your struggling and let the power of Kami wash over you. You will be given a new life and purpose. Let go of your false ideas of freedom and give it up for the security and bliss of being a soldier of Kami. Both of you have had painful lives, let Kami clear away your doubt and confusion.¡± Despite the cool and calm words, Drake felt the hairs on his neck stand on end. He watched the man with fear. The figure pointed at them both, ¡°To continue to resist will only bring you more pain and misery. Like this!¡±

    The figure held up his hand and commanded, ¡°Restrain!¡± and Ashton felt himself bounded again by a spell. As the invisible cords tightened around him he lost balance and fell over with a cry. The figure only meant to intimidate them both with a display of power, but Drake wasn¡¯t affected and he perceived the spell as a direct threat towards them both. The figure paused slightly in wonder as he saw Drake rush him and bring a weapon to his throat. It was the iron dagger he had created in the wagon. ¡°How can you be moving?¡± the creature asked aloud, as though the threat to his life was insignificant to the mystery in front of him.

    Drake ignored the question and pressed the iron dagger closer to the creature¡¯s neck. ¡°I command my own destiny.¡± He said, ¡°Release him. Now!¡± he commanded.

    The figure lowered his hand and Ashton felt the spell disappear from him. He stood up shakily, ¡°Drake!¡± he cried, ¡°What do you think you¡¯re doing?¡±

    ¡°They would not have let us live if they knew I was immune to their spells,¡± he yelled back at Ashton, ¡°they depend upon it too much; I would be a terrible threat to them.¡± He turned his attention back toward the figure he was restraining; ¡°now you are going to help us get out of here.¡±

    ¡°Where do you plan on going?¡± the figure responded. Drake was surprised at how calm he it sounded.

    ¡°Out of here, out of this city.¡±

    ¡°I am afraid that is impossible, no matter how much you threaten me.¡± It responded. It irritated Drake how in control the voice sounded, ¡°The city gate is shut. They have been shut for hundreds of years. And beyond the gate is an enemy force that surrounds the city. I believe they will simply kill you on sight.¡±

    Drake shifted uneasily. ¡°Then return us the way we came.¡± Drake responded trying to sound more threatening.

    But the figure just laughed, ¡°What? To the wilderness? You will need a portal to do that.¡±

    ¡°Then make one!¡± Drake ordered, ¡°I know that your kind can do it.¡±

    The creature shook his head simply. ¡°Again, you ask for the impossible. It takes a full complement of priests and lots of preparation on our part. It is not something that can be done suddenly and with only me. And even if I could do it, you would surely get caught and killed before we even reached the location to create the portal. I think you have underestimated this city.¡±

    Drake swore and pressed the blade closer to the figure¡¯s neck, ¡°You are not being very helpful to us. At this rate, I am simply going to have to kill you.¡±

    ¡°That will not help you either, and you know that.¡±

    ¡°Well,¡± Drake said menacingly, ¡°it doesn¡¯t seem like anything will help me at this point, one way or another. But surely, you value your life?¡±

    The creature didn¡¯t respond. Drake¡¯s palm was getting sweaty and he readjusted his grip on the dagger. In an instant, Drake found himself thrown backwards with the wind knocked out of him and his dagger flying across the room. For the second time that day, his vision swam and he couldn¡¯t breathe. He felt weak and unable to move properly, but he could still see the figure standing over him with a long steel knife.

    ¡°Drake!¡± Ashton cried out and he got up suddenly to help.

    Almost lazily, the figure said, ¡°Restrain.¡± And Ashton fell to the floor again. Ashton swore loudly before the spell shut his mouth.

    Drake prepared to struggle again but the figure said casually, ¡°Don¡¯t move, or I will kill your friend.¡± Drake froze for a moment, and then relaxed himself into submission. He glared at the figure from the floor. ¡°You are a very foolish human.¡± The figure said. It brought the knife up to Drake¡¯s neck. ¡°But a pitiful human, nonetheless, I understand your desperation. You are trapped, confused, and with an entirely unknown future before you. But take comfort, human,¡± it said with a horrifying calm, ¡°soon all your fears will be washed away. Accept the Joy of Kami.¡±

    ¡°What do you want?¡± Drake cried out desperately, but it ignored him. Instead it crouched down and started bringing its hand to his face, ¡°Don¡¯t touch me!¡±

    The hand stopped suddenly and withdrew. ¡°What have we here¡­¡±¡± it asked curiously. With the tip of the knife the figure lifted Drake¡¯s necklace. He lifted back his hood, revealing large golden eyes and an old withered face. In it was wisdom and sorrow, but Drake thought he glimpsed something bright. The figure inspected the ring that dangled from the necklace and then spoke softly in wonder, ¡°Perhaps destiny isn¡¯t always as she seems, even when I feel I have finally figured her out.¡±

    He looked down at Drake, staring him down with his golden eyes as if reading into his very heart. In his hands was still the threat to Drake and Ashton¡¯s lives, but in his face was a considering and gentle look. He bent close to Drake and said quietly in his ear, ¡°Why is somebody like you here? What doom do you bring to this place? Your fate is not to become a mindless and unknown soldier in a vast and careless army.¡± He leaned back and studied Drake¡¯s face, looking at both of his eyes in turn. ¡°Prepare yourself,¡± the figure said finally, ¡°Your own survival will depend on how adaptive you will be able to be. Be flexible and blend in! Remember my name, it is Gatal! I will come and see you again when the time comes.¡±

    Then the figure got up suddenly. With a swift and fluid movement, he hid his knife in his cloak again. He started walking away. ¡°Wait! Where are you going?¡± Drake he cried out, confused. ¡°What are you talking about?¡±  The figure ignored him and instead lifted his hand towards Ashton. The spell released its hold on him he gasped and breathed hard in relief. He raised his head to see the figure open the door. Gatal spoke to the two guards outside. ¡°I finished indoctrinating them.¡± He pulled the cover over his head again, ¡°They are all yours.¡±

    ¡°With pleasure,¡± the man replied. He stepped into the cell and into the light, on his face was a cruel hate. Drake recognized him as the guard he had struck earlier and it was clear from the look in his eyes that he had not forgiven Drake for the humiliation he had received. Without hesitation, the guard came straight for Drake, his spear wielded to hurt. Before Drake could stand up properly he hit Drake in the stomach with the spear shaft and then struck him on the head, knocking him back onto the floor. Drake groaned in pain but little lights appeared to him and then his vision blacked out. The last thing he heard was Ashton shouting his name¡­

 Chapter 15

    The Endless City was a towering and colossal piece of human and divine ingenuity. It''s mighty structures and impressive heights were only rivaled by the sheer size of it. Around the city stood a huge wall, hundreds of feet across and a mile high that demanded submission and awe from any foe that dared come up to it. It was more like a building than a wall though; its architects had created it also to house and support the massive defense engines, army quarters, and commercial and residential structures. The wall was a part of the city like the siding to a house is, the outside was sheer and impossible to climb. Tall and immense structures filled the city itself; keeps, halls, markets, and palaces filled the city to the brim. What little available land that was actually exposed to the soil was filled with gardens and parks, but mostly, the city was one large structure onto itself, interconnected and welded together. It supported millions of inhabitants and in Kami¡¯s light it shone with brilliance and majesty. The people who lived there worked and moved in the anonymity of the masses, each performing their own small part, contributing to the whole, all of which was for the glory of Kami.

    Beneath the city though, far below in the old and decayed remnants of an even older city, Ashton was struggling for survival. Drake had been severely wounded by the guard¡¯s vicious attack and was unconscious, bleeding badly. The guards beat Ashton lightly as well, as though it was a matter of principle rather than a need for it. As Ashton carried Drake he wasn¡¯t able to wipe his eyes when the blood from the wound on his forehead slipped into them. The blood only added to his problems. The guards were escorting Drake and Ashton to some other terrible place through what looked like to Ashton long, interconnecting tunnels forming a Labyrinth. Weak and bloody himself, Ashton stumbled many times during the long walk as it continued, each step threatening to give out under him as he carried the weight of Drake on his back. Additionally, now that Ashton could understand the language of the guards thanks to Gatal¡¯s spells he could also hear every cruel word they said. Ashton decided liked it better before he was bilingual.

    In these tunnels no lanterns were permanently places in on the walls; the guards carried one with them and it barely lit the path before them. It was dark and dreadful and only dark and dreadful thoughts occupied Ashton¡¯s mind.

    Ashton was truly thankful when they reached their destination, only because he wouldn¡¯t have to carry Drake much farther. They reached a large space that had three doors and a path clear through, like a waiting room outside of three offices. One of the gourds pounded on a door and a slot opened. ¡°I have two irregulars here,¡± the guard said. ¡°The priest indoctrinated them, and they are ready to join the others.¡±

    ¡°Bring them in,¡± a cool voice on the other side of the door replied. The slot closed sharply and the door open up in its place, a bright pale light emanating from it. Ashton¡¯s vision was getting worse and he couldn¡¯t see the figure clearly at the door. From inside the room though, he heard a loud noise of many men. There was yelling and chaos and Ashton could not make out the nature of it. Ashton imagined a great torture within. With great fear, Ashton was forced into the room with the spears and he braced himself for whatever horror awaited him.

    Ashton was ushered into a bright light and after his eyes adjusted he almost cried out in astonishment. The noises he had heard were the was singing and yelling and drinking and eating in the room, as though a great celebration was taking place. It was well lit and thousands of people filled the room, all dressed in similar tunics of varying shades of grey and white, some running and skipping around, others in merry groups of conversation. Ashton looked around and felt like he had stepped into a tale from his childhoods, a story full of strange lands, of fairies, and of unending revelry. Three long tables supported an over abundance of food and it such an assortment as if to satisfy the most capricious diner. It was piled with dishes and dinners and breads and wine, a glorious feast for the noble man. The noise he had heard was the crowd of people inhabiting the room; they were laughing, and moving around with great freedom.

    The guards shut the door and at the sound the men close to Ashton turned and saw him and Drake. They also looked amazed, but quickly stepped forward with helpful hands and concerned voices.

    ¡°What happened to you?¡± they all asked. They tried to help take Drake from him but Ashton held on defensively.

    ¡°What?¡± Ashton could only respond, ¡°What¡¯s going on? Do not touch me!¡±

    ¡°My friend!¡± a man replied next him, ¡°Relax, you are among comrades, we bear you no ill will. Indeed, we wish only for you and your friend¡¯s health!¡± The man talking was short and almost bald. What hair he had left on his head was bright red and he had an impressive mustache. He was neat and clean. ¡°Let us help you! No doubt you have traveled through terrible perils to reach The Endless City. But now relax and enjoy your destination. We are celebrating this wondrous day. The first day of our new lives serving Kami-sama! Praise Kami!¡± he cried and everybody near him responded in kind. ¡°Praise Kami!¡± and they laughed and ate and drank. They were joyful and merry as if they were celebrating life itself.

    With reluctance, Ashton let them take Drake off him. They were gentle and caring, inspecting his wounds and preparing a bed. Ashton looked back at the red-haired man. ¡°I don¡¯t understand,¡± Ashton said simply.

    ¡°Oh, come now. Where have you been? Clearly not to the baths!¡± the red-haired man joked and they all laughed. ¡°We have already washed, you should as well!¡± He starting pushing Ashton away, to the far side of the room. The man was laughing joyfully, ¡°Make way! Make Way! Our man here needs a bath!¡± The crowd parted gleefully, laughing and slapping Ashton on the back as he passed, in good humor.

    ¡°Wait,¡± Ashton pleaded, ¡°My friend¡­¡±

    ¡°Do not worry,¡± the man said. ¡°He is in good hands. We are all comrades here, No? Kami has forgiven us of our disobedience and has ushered us into his holy kingdom! Be more cheerful! The future only holds bright things for all of us!¡±

    Ashton saw that they were approaching another door in the side of the room. Men were going in and out of it. ¡°Make way!¡± the man yelled again. ¡°This man needs a bath!¡±

    They entered the door and inside was a large pool of steaming water. Around the outside of it half naked men were lounging and relaxing with their legs in the water, enjoying the location. Several lanterns lit the place and gave it a wholesome glow. ¡°Now, it is time for you to bathe! Cast off your foreign clothes, they represent the darkness you once clad yourself in, and then jump in and clean yourself. The water of Kami will not only wash away your smell, but also clear away your connection to your past life!¡±

    Ashton was hesitant to do as the man said, he was still confused and in wonder at the circumstances around him. He wanted to stop and clearly ask the man what was going on, but the words of the priest from earlier came back to him. ¡°Be flexible and blend in!¡± Sensing the expectations around him he stripped and said halfheartedly, ¡°Praise be to Kami!¡± The others responded alike, with cheers and drinking. He saw his old and dirty clothing get taken away and he felt a moment of lament at the loss.

    ¡°What are you waiting for, get in!¡± the red-haired man said joyfully. He jumped in himself and then stood up in it; the water was only waist high. He beckoned at Ashton and, with only another moment of hesitation, Ashton slipped in as well. The water felt wonderful, warm and clean. Getting this amount of water this hot back at his village required tremendous effort and was a luxury he had not experienced. The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.

    Ashton was very filthy though, and it took more than a single dip to clean him. The red-haired man helped him wash, he introduced himself to Ashton as Horebrou. He talked gleefully with Ashton, with a childlike words. ¡°What a pleasure to bath in the waters of Kami again.¡± He had said. ¡°Of course, I enjoyed it the first time, but after I was clean, the food seduced me away. But I feel as though I could stay in his water all day!¡± Ashton agreed as well, it was soothing against his large bruises.

    ¡°You and your friend are late to the feast,¡± Horebrou observed. ¡°But the grace of Kami is deep. All those who are earnest in their faith will be let in. We had started nearly two hours ago. Where you not part of our pilgrimage?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Ashton responded, understanding little of what was going on, but trying to play along. ¡°My friend and I came upon a different trip. It has been long and difficult. We feared many times that we would not make it, but look how our efforts have rewarded us. We have made it by the grace of Kami.¡±

    ¡°And into the Grace of Kami,¡± Horebrou added excitedly. He seemed to become very excited at the very mention of Kami, and he was not alone in doing so. Everybody seemed to hold a similar mood. ¡°Kami-sama accepts the lost from all corners of the world. Like lost children, he gathers them under his care and provides then with a home.¡±

    The bathing lasted a half of an hour, but in the end, Ashton was clean as he had never remembered being before. He had been scrubbed and scraped, clipped and dressed. He was provided clean linen to dress himself in and they were grey and green tunics, simple and comfortable. Part of the cleaning process also involved shaving his face of all the access hair as well as cutting his head hair to a respectable length. ¡°What long hair you have,¡± Horebrou exclaimed. ¡°We must present ourselves proper in this city,¡± He had said cheerfully, cutting off long locks of hair. Ashton looked at the cut hair mournfully, what hair they left him was like that of a newborn.

    The bath revealed to Ashton exactly how famished he was. Horebrou sensed it and brought him quickly to the tables, loaded with all kinds of foods and tastes. The men had been devouring the food for the last two hours, but here was still plenty of food to consume. He wanted to stuff his face in the food, but felt it was better to eat conservatively and slowly. He kept reminding himself, ¡°Blend in, blend in, blend in.¡± Unabashedly, Horebrou joined his meal as well. All around them men talked and sometimes sang, songs of gibberish more often than not. Ashton had never seen such merry behavior before.

    Horebrou never seemed to stop talking and from him Ashton learned much. He talked as if he was simply reciting something in his mind. ¡°My years of living have all led me to this point,¡± he was saying. ¡°To me, they are simply the darkness of my past. It is not for me to dwell on those thoughts but to instead look to the future and see how I may best serve Kami. This city is a paradise and all who come here with pure intentions will be saved. Outside is darkness and despair, a living death for those who dwell outside the invincible walls of this city. None may enter here without permission; there is no trespass within these walls. Here we are secure from all hardships and troubles. We are the fortunate who have made it here, may I serve Kami-sama as faithfully as he has served me.¡±

    ¡°How do you know all this?¡± Ashton asked curiously. He surprises that the men in this room with him were actually the same dead eyed prisoners he had left in the Hall, hours ago. He felt he now understood the meaning of the word, indoctrination, but could hardly believe his eyes at the change. As for Horebrou¡¯s words, the contradictions between the reality and what Horebrou believed fascinated Ashton and he wanted to test it.

    ¡°It is what everybody knows, Ashton,¡± The man said, as if explaining the simplest idea. ¡°Inside of all of us this truth is known from birth. Those who do not accept the will of Kami are condemned already as they are choosing to ignore what is foundational to what it means to be human.¡± Horebrou eyed Ashton curiously and Ashton quickly decided to not ask any more questions about what ¡°everybody knows¡±.

    Ashton checked up on Drake frequently, but he hadn¡¯t regained consciousness yet. He was getting good treatment from the people here, though. They had been filled with the hearts of compassionate and kind people, comradeship and concern were a few of the many knew traits they all shared. They had taken Drake and bathed and cleaned him with care. He was left on a comfortable looking mattress they had made and his wounds had been bandaged. They looked upon him with worried looks, but they had faith that merciful Kami would save him.

    ¡°Thank you for all your help,¡± Ashton said truthfully, returning once again to Drake¡¯s side.

    ¡°We are all one under Kami, we are brothers here,¡± They said. ¡°To help those less fortunate is an important part of what it means to be a citizen of The Endless City.¡±

    Ashton dismissed them with gratitude and took up care of Drake himself. Ashton still didn¡¯t trust them despite their excellent care and friendliness, but he did not let that show. They left with a bow and rejoined the festivities that didn¡¯t seem to end. For a while he had been caught up in their happiness and joy too. Then he looked down on Drake¡¯s face, hardly recognizable after the beating it received and he remembered the reality they were in.

    Horebour came to join them after a while. ¡°How is your friend doing?¡± he asked, sitting down next to Ashton. He had with him a bowl of fruit and he was eating again.

    ¡°I do not think he will die from this, but he hasn¡¯t woken up yet. I fear internal injuries.¡±

    Horebour put his hand and on Ashton¡¯s shoulder to comfort him but Ashton could help but feel repulsed by it. Horebour said, ¡°Have some faith Ashton. Kami-sama will not abandon those who have worked hard to attain his salvation. I am sure your friend will fine. He is missing such a great feast, though!¡±

    Ashton nodded solemnly. He did not believe the ravings of this man, but he did have hope for Drake¡¯s recovery. He had overcome a deadly sickness before, right? He would survive this injury as well. Sensing Ashton¡¯s distress, Horebour condemned the evilness of the enemies and mocked their destructive ways. He assumed that it was this enemy that had waylaid and hurt them on their pilgrimage to the city.

    Ashton felt he should act as though he knew everything as well, but he couldn¡¯t refrain from a little more interrogation. ¡°Tell me about these enemies,¡± he said, ¡°I am afraid Drake and I know little about them.¡±

    ¡°I am surprised you do not know about them already,¡± he said picking at the fruit and spitting out the seeds carelessly. ¡°They are undoubtedly the people who interfered with your pilgrimage here.¡± Ashton nodded but still asked for more. Horebour gave it to him, ¡°The enemy has been the bitter foe of Kami-sama for many long years. There was a time of great prosperity for Kami and his territory, but this god was jealous of its goodness. He waged war against Kami out of spite and envy, but now the only emotion he has is hate. He circles the city, ever seeking ways to hurt and destroy the goodness of Kami and ever seeking to waylay or hurt those who make their way to The Endless City. But the walls of The Endless City are impenetrable and Kami-sama retains the upper hand in all the fights. And soon,¡± he added with a dramatic whisper. ¡°Kami-sama will gather his full strength and place judgment and wrath upon the enemy. That is what we are here for! We all have received the call from our dark and destructive lives and have come to fulfill his will. To be part of Kami¡¯s glorious triumph over the black foe!¡± He leaned back and smiled as if speaking the very name of Kami was the greatest joy he could ever feel.

    Ashton considered what the man said. How much was true, and how much was part of the lie? He watched the people in the room, how could all of these people be the prisoners he remembered from the wagons? The same people who were forced to march with him in the cold and rain, falling and tripping but getting up again as the spell forced them carry on even after their bodies gave out on them? He remembered what the priest had said back in the room, how the enemy circles the city. What was the purpose of these lies told to these men? Despite the joy and revelry of the room, Ashton sat and brooded. He and Drake had promised to survive inside the city. How much would they have to sacrifice to accomplish that?

    ¡°How long will the feast last?¡± Ashton asked Horebour. Unfortunately, he had run out of food again and was heading for the table that very moment.

    ¡°The feast of Kami never ends!¡± he called back. He left and Ashton was alone with Drake again, feeling like an alien and yet the only sane person within the place.

    It seemed to Ashton that Horebour¡¯s words were true; the feast did not end anytime soon. Ashton felt exhaustion take hold of him, the stress and labor of the day. Horebour did not return either and Ashton fell asleep in the corner next to his friend, amidst the insane joy and celebration of the indoctrinated beings.

 Chapter 16

    Despite what Horebour had said, the feast must have ended for when Ashton woke up to a loud commotion of men in transit, there was nothing of the feast left to be seen. As if by unanimous consent, the former prisoners suddenly stopped eating, drinking, and their occasional brawling in good humor. Somehow, the tables and food had disappeared and what was left was a wide-open space with men standing around in groups and talking excitedly about whatever was coming next. The doors were open and priests and soldiers were working around and about the men, organizing them and directing their movements. Horebour had joined Ashton again earlier and now a dark soldier approached their section and glared down at them in disdain. He then ushered that group, a total of about a hundred people, towards one of the four exit doors and instructed them to follow that path until further notice. Hundreds of other prisoners were already crowding around their assigned doors, but eventually all the prisoners made it out under the careful supervision of soldiers wearing dark grey and black uniforms.

    The captives themselves took everything in stride, excited to be put to use in whatever way Kami had seen fit. Horebour had said to Ashton as they walked down brightly lit hallways stuffed with walking men, ¡°We did not come here feast every day. The purpose of Kami will be fulfilled by the faithful, like us. But,¡± he said, stretching and yawning. ¡°I wouldn¡¯t mind if they showed me to my quarters.¡±

    Drake was still weak, but he had regained consciousness in the commotion. The men with them were relieved by it as if he was already family to them and they praised Kami¡¯s mercy at his recovery. But poor Drake was not only sore and wounded yet, he was utterly baffled at the events and setting. He was being carried by Gethroe, a large and intimidating man who had helped without asking. Ashton was next to Drake when he woke up and although Drake was very weak, Ashton managed to stop whatever panic motivated crisis Drake would have produced.

    ¡°We are among friends, Drake.¡± Ashton said reassuringly. ¡°These men have taken good care of us.¡±

    ¡°We were very worried about you, my friend. Although not that worried,¡± Horebour was saying with a wink. ¡°Kami was with you and we knew he would not let sickness and death take away a man who had struggled and persevered to come to him.¡±

    Ashton had become familiar already with the men around him. Friendly and earnest themselves, it was not difficult for Ashton to form relationships. They were curious and somewhat in awe of the two ¡°pilgrims¡± who had not come with their caravan but had taken a separate¡°dark and dangerous path¡± as was necessary to reach The Endless City. Ashton introduced them to Drake while subtly communicating the story he had made in order to be accepted in with these people. Some in the group had heard the story before but others had not and they insisted on its retelling now that Drake was awake. Ashton agreed and retold a story of daring and bravery as an experienced bard could produce. Even Drake was impressed by how awesome he was in the story.

    ¡°As you know,¡± Ashton was saying now, with drama. ¡°A small group is the best way to travel stealthily. Drake and I were able to hide within the enemy¡¯s own caravan for the last quarter of the trip, dressed as one of their own.¡± The men were captivated by the story and a boy named Heath practically squealed at their audacity. ¡°Among the luggage or around the camp, their own darkness and deceit helped us through. But we knew the time would come when we would have to break from the group and that we would be revealed as ourselves. When the moment came, Drake was able to set off one of their lanterns, cleverly creating a blinding flash to hide our escape. It worked well, but we had underestimated the enemy and their hatred for us.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s true!¡± Vayne responded with energy. He was a tall and thin dark haired man who constantly stooped a little to become level with his companions. He was a serious and intelligent and he continued saying, ¡°their dark and mysterious ways will never be fully understood by anybody. Their minds have been warped and deceived and work in ways different from us. They are beyond salvation; their only thoughts are those of hate and malice. I would not be surprised if they pursued you to the ends of the world.¡±

    ¡°They almost did,¡± Ashton added. ¡°The pack that hunted us was relentless. Through trickery we managed to dissuade most of their approaches, but eventually one soldier found us. The soldier was tall and ugly, as the sorcery of the enemy corrupts all that it touches. His hands wielded a great spear though and his face wielded savagery. I saw the hate in his eyes and I despaired that we would survive to make it to the city.¡±

    ¡°How did you make it then?¡± Horebour asked, for once listening more than talking.

    ¡°We had run as fast as we could during the chase, but we had lost track of the distance. Little did we know that The Endless City was nearly at our backs! The enemy soldier was bearing down on us and was yelling with his harsh cries, but I looked and saw the city at the near distance. I said to Drake, ¡®look, our salvation is near! Do not despair yet, not when we are so close.¡¯  Drake looked as well and hope filled him with energy. ¡®But that alone will not save us!¡¯ he cried, ¡®it is time for action!¡¯¡±

    The crowd laughed and slapped Drake on the back in good humor. Drake smiled at the story lazily.

    ¡°Emboldened with the power of hope of The Endless City, Drake turned and attacked the foe with great courage, despite being unarmed and disadvantaged. He caught the soldier off guard and managed to wrest the spear from him. But it was a terrible fight and Drake was inflicted with many wounds. I joined as well when I could and we managed to beat down the enemy. Seeing the turn of fortune against him, he turned and fled, howling in rage and humiliation.¡±

    ¡°Cowards!¡± Heath burst in. ¡°All of them are cowards and run at the first sign of death. They have no concept of loyalty or sacrifice.¡±

    ¡°Indeed,¡± Vanyer added. ¡°They do not even know what it means to have comrades to support and empower. Kami¡¯s victory is secure, if only due to our connections and faith with each other.¡±

    ¡°Yes, he was a coward,¡± Ashton responded, ¡°But I think they are more friendly with each other than you might believe. The soldier had escaped alive and I knew he would be back soon with reinforcements. ¡®Come Drake,¡¯ I said, for he had become strangely silent, ¡®we must go now! They will be back soon but we can yet make it to our holy destination.¡¯ But Darke responded only by displaying a grave wound to me. He had been injured by the foe without my knowledge and Drake said to me, ¡®Ashton, run away!¡¯¡±

    ¡°But I was desperate and replied saying, ¡®No! I will not abandon you.¡¯¡±

    ¡°¡®Go!¡¯ he yelled back, ¡®there is nothing for you here. Out here is only death and darkness. I cannot be saved, but there is still a chance for you. May you find the peace of Kami for me. Go!¡¯¡±

    ¡°He said this passionately, but inside I knew that he was hurting, and much more from a simple wound. I rebuked him saying, ¡®haven¡¯t we vowed to make it to The Endless City together? Hadn¡¯t we sworn to not give in to despair and to never lose hope that we both can survive? I will not leave here without you.¡¯¡±

    ¡°And with that, I felt some unknown strength flow into me, and I knew what I had to do. I picked him up and carried Drake back to The Endless City, even as the hounds of the enemy howled at our heels.¡±

    The group was amazed at the story and Gethroe even gave Ashton an appraisal and an approving nod.  ¡°It was the strength of Kami, undoubtedly,¡± Horebour was saying excitedly. ¡°He is ever faithful to the pure hearted!¡±

    ¡°But he was outside the walls and in the enemy territory. How could the strength of Kami reach him?¡± Heath responded in wonder.

    ¡°You fool,¡± Vanyer said with passion. ¡°The enemy cannot completely block the sight and will of Kami, he is everywhere and sees even the most desperate humans in the farthest territories. How else could he have called us all here, from the wide corners of the universe?¡±

    They continued to discuss the marvels of the story and the richness of Kami¡¯s grace, but Drake and Ashton were looking at each other, remembering the truth. Drake said to Gethroe, ¡°Please let me down, I must learn to walk again soon.¡± Gethtroe did so and Drake was gently put to the ground. At first, he was unsteady and Ashton came and supported his steps. Drake said quietly to him, ¡°I said I would not regret my choice, that night in the field. And I still do not. I will remember and uphold our promise, if you do as well. We are going to survive here, regardless of what happens to us. And look how successful we have been so far. Right?¡±

    Ashton smiled and said, ¡°Yes, it is true. I will not abandon you either.¡±

    Drake nodded serenely. ¡°Now can you please tell me,¡± he asked. ¡°What the hell is going on?¡± Drake suddenly displayed irritation and panic he was hiding. ¡°Who are these people and where are we? I thought we were going to get put with all the other prisoners, not tossed in with the happy guild.¡±

    Ashton shushed him but said, ¡°These are the other prisoners, all of the ones on the wagons with us. I think that this is what it really means to get indoctrinated, they have either lost their memories or they have simply been skewed, I do not know. But they are now filled with the thoughts and feelings that this city wants them to feel. Right now, we are inside the city. I will tell you everything else later, but understand, we are no longer prisoners, but like everybody else, we are happy and excited new citizens of The Endless City. As long as we do as we are told and expected, we will not be in any danger.¡±

    Drake looked around at the men around him still talking and laughing. ¡°Yeah, I will remember that.¡±

    As with all the traveling done in The Endless City it seemed, they walked a long time, on sore feet and well-trodden paths, guided by the creepy priests and bored guards. Everywhere they traveled looked like endless tunnels and rooms, some looked like had been worked upon recently were nice in the architecture and design, But many of them were simply carved out rocks, simple and inelegant. Drake was amazed at the networks of tunnels and the fact that there was no outside or end to be seen.

    ¡°We are either in one giant building,¡± Drake said, ¡°or deep underground. We have been both ascending and descending but I have no idea where the top is or the bottom, or if either of them exist.¡±

    ¡°We could be in a giant building underground,¡± Horebour had responded, but he and the rest did not seem as interested in it as Drake and Ashton were. Their thoughts were rather with the men with them and the perspective opportunities available to them in The Endless City.

    The huge crowd of people Ashton and Drake were walking with down the tunnels and hallways got continually smaller as they continued. Groups of men had been splitting off from the front according to their directions, even as the group continued to move. In many ways, it reminded Drake of the caravan that never stopped moving. Soldiers and priests were directing the movement.

    Eventually, Drake¡¯s group had become near to the front where the coordination took place. At the head of the procession was what looked like a high-ranking priest and a similar looking soldier was next to him. It was they who were splitting up the men and assigning them to their respective locations, giving orders to their underlings and glaring at each group personally.

    As Drake¡¯s group approached the front all the members became excited again. ¡°This is where they assign our duties and quarters, isn¡¯t it?¡± asked Heath nervously, ¡°I wonder what they will assign us to.¡±

    ¡°They will probably assign you to some support squad whose tasks mainly include cleaning and cooking,¡± Vayne replied, causing Heath to retort angrily.

    ¡°It looks like they are simply assigning groups according to who we are standing next to.¡± Ashton observed curiously. ¡°Don¡¯t they want a more complete assessment of us before deciding that?¡±

    ¡°I am not surprised,¡± Hourbore responded, ¡°We are all the same, aren¡¯t we?¡± Ashton started at the comment but he continued. ¡°We all are the lost soldiers of Kami. We have already been called for a specific purpose by Kami and, undoubtedly, our assigned tasks were predetermined before we even arrived.¡±

    Ashton didn¡¯t buy the argument, but he didn¡¯t say so to Horebour. He looked ahead at the priest and head soldier again, trying to understand what they are doing. Drake saw understood Ashton¡¯s confusion and he said to him, ¡°In a way, I believe Horebour is right.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡± Ashton asked quietly, stepping closer to him. Drake had regained much of his strength and was able to walk slowly on his own now.

    ¡°The soldiers didn¡¯t kidnap everybody they met; they kidnapped only what resources they wanted. Young men. We are all meant to be soldiers in the first place, and, thanks to the indoctrination, there is no dissent or real issues with that process. For them I imagine, it really is a simple matter of dividing the material they have proportionally where they need them.¡±

    Ashton stepped back and considered what Drake had said. He believed him when he said that they were all meant from the start to be soldiers, but it didn¡¯t look to Ashton that they were that picky about what men they had gotten. As he observed at the feast, not all of the men were soldier material. Why wouldn¡¯t they want to put stricter limitations on who was able to enter their armed forces? Ashton¡¯s thoughts were interrupted by Heath¡¯s loud exclamation.

    ¡°We need to stick together, so that we can be in the same squad with each other!¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not sure I want you in the same group as me though,¡± Vanyer responded dryly.

    Heath gave him a glare. ¡°I don¡¯t care whether you get into my group anyway. I just want to be with these three people,¡± He said, pointing at Drake, Ashton, and Gethroe.

    ¡°Why us?¡± Ashton asked.

    ¡°Because,¡± he responded as though it was obvious. ¡°I want to get in a fighting group.¡±

    ¡°What does that have to do with it?¡±

    ¡°Come on. You and Drake have already seen combat, and Gethroe is, I mean, look at him.¡± Ashton looked at him, and Gethroe looked back.

    ¡°You are sure to get into a fighting group.¡± Heath insisted.

    Ashton had to agree with one point; Gethroe did look like the ¡®rip somebody¡¯s head off¡¯ material, despite his calm and cautious nature. He wasn¡¯t about to tell Heath that he and Drake hadn¡¯t actually seen any action, though. He asked instead, ¡°Why do you want to fight the enemy so badly?¡±This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.

    ¡°It¡¯s what I am here for,¡± Heath said with intensity. ¡°I can feel the fate. I came here to fight the enemy directly with a sword or something and I knew that I would be able to receive the training necessary to do that. I do not know if I could bear it if I was not put in an action group.¡±

    ¡°All is the will of Kami,¡± Vanyer said importantly. ¡°And do not forget the enemy within you. We are only acolytes now, but part of the training will include the subjugation and control over ourselves. I am sure, however, that whatever job you get you will do your work with annoying vigor whether it be chopping people¡¯s heads off or scrubbing the lavatory. As a citizen of The Endless City, you must be prepared to do what is required of you.¡±

    ¡°Of course, you are right,¡± Horebour said, intervening as Heath tried to headlock the man who was significantly taller than him. ¡°But I must say that I feel the same way as Heath. Evil in our lives has always been either an abstract and immaterial entity or else a foe beyond all of our power. To be able to fight it head on would be very rewarding. The glory is in the fight, isn¡¯t that right, Ashton? You understand what we mean, right?¡±

    As a matter of fact, Ashton did not understand. If he had a choice, he would prefer to be assigned to cooking duty in The Endless City rather than put on the front lines. He responded neutrally, ¡°The will of Kami will be uplifted.¡± The others responded in kind and Ashton felt like he had gotten the hang of the lingo.

    They had made it to the very front of the line and the soldier in charge appraised them with a mean look. He was tall and old, with a full head of graying hair and a large brown mustache. His uniform was the usual grey and black but he had extra ornaments attached to it making it clear that he was somebody important. He had in his hands documents and papers that he often consulted.

    Next to him, dressed in usual dark robes covering his entire body, was the priest. The priests were impossible to tell them apart from Drake¡¯s perspective, but they seemed to have no difficulty with it themselves. the priest appraised them as well and then said something to the soldier and who then nodded. After another look at the nervous group he snapped his fingers and another soldier appeared from the sidelines. He handed the soldier a folded document and said, ¡°These men are yours, Junior-Marshal. Take them to Newmeag level.¡±

    The soldier snapped a salute and said, ¡°Yes, Sir.¡± He gestured quickly to the group and they followed him with little hesitation and much anxiety. Ashton surveyed the group and saw that the six of them actually had managed to stick together despite Vanyer¡¯s and Heath¡¯s bickering. As a total, the whole group contained about fifteen people, and they walked excitedly, following their leader and wondering what awaited them on Newmeag level.

    ¡°I think we were put on the fighting squad,¡± Heath was saying. ¡°Newmeag level sounds intense.¡±

    ¡°You are thinking only what you want to think, Heath,¡± Vanyar said. They were ascending several levels on their trip, through rock and light. ¡°There is no basis for that theory.¡±

    Ashton wondered why they did not simply ask the soldier guiding them where they were going and what type of unit they were assigned to, but they seemed to hold him in a reverence. Nobody approached him. The soldier himself looked to be in his late twenties. He was dressed in the grey and black cloaks as well, but he was missing the chest and back armor that most of the soldiers had. He simply had forearm and shin armor that glinted in the lantern lights that lined the hallways. On his side was a short sword. He looked impressive, walking confidently before them.

    Horebour was talking again, ¡°As I had said earlier, I would prefer to be in a fighting unit, but I will follow whatever directives these holy men give us.¡± He was touching his mustache as if remembering the intimidating one the officer had earlier. ¡°This does seem like a good group of men we are with, I will enjoy getting to know them. And I am glad I was able to stay within your¡¯s and Drake¡¯s company as well.¡±

    Despite himself, Ashton felt grateful too. Within the warm and comfortable feelings that had been imprinted on these people, he could almost forget the reality of their situation. At the very least, he was glad to have been able to make friends he could understand and trust to an extent.

    Gethroe was now helping Drake move along again, Drake had grown tired of marching up the staircases quickly, but he refused to be carried. He fended off Gethroe¡¯s attempts to help him further but relented by letting him use Gethroe as a support. Ashton worried that Drake would be able to handle whatever task was assigned to them. If it was fighting, he would need to recover very soon if he was going to be useful. However these men might feel about the city, Ashton knew that if Drake proved to be worthless, they would simply dispose of him.

    They had stopped ascending the high and incalculable staircase, and exited onto a floor. The group quickly became quiet as it beheld a large and noble arch supporting the entrance. It was like a gate for the entire floor at the exit off the stairwell and carved into the top of the Arch where symbols Ashton did not recognize. Big blue lanterns stand like sentinels. The soldier with them turned and spoke for the first time.

    His voice was gravely and deep, contrasting with the youthful face he had. He said, ¡°Welcome to your new home for the next four months. I am Junior-Marshal Kean and I have been given responsibility for you until you have completed your training here.¡± He reached inside his cloak and withdrew the document that had been given to him by the officer. ¡°This document states that you all are to be trained on level Newmeag as light infantry for the 2356th battalion. Forget any past notions of ease and comfort! Here you will learn what it means to be a soldier of The Endless City and what Kami-sama desires from you.¡±

    He then dramatically crushed the document with one hand and it shattered like glass and blew away as glittery dust. He looked at them all and spoke again. ¡°You will be sharing this floor with ten other squads and with ten other Junior-Marshels, and all of you are training to be light infantry men.¡±

    He clasped his hands behind his back and spoke proudly, ¡°level Newmeag has a long and reliable history of producing the best light infantrymen in this district. That is due to the hard work, intense training, and increased expectations that I, and the other Marshals, will have for you. Gather your friends around you and support each other in need, for before the end, each of you will be exhausted to your limit and only the comfort of your allies will be there for you. You and the other ten squads will be training in rivalry and competition, but in many cases, you will find the need to work together. As your Marshal though, I expect top performance from my men, besting the other squads in practice and in instruction.¡±

    ¡°This floor will become your new home, your new training ground, and your new life. You will not leave here until you have completed your training. I tell you the truth, all of you will drop dead before I let even one of you out of here without achieving my expectations!¡±

    ¡°Never forget who you are over these next four months! But as Kami is the God of the city, so I am god of your lives! I tell you truth, I have the power to build you and make you into something you had never imagined possible. But I also have the ability to destroy you and end your miserable lives if, for whatever reason, you choose to not put forth your entire effort into mastering my, or the other marshals¡¯, principles.¡± He paced a bit, checking out his material. ¡°I understand many of you are intimidated and frightened by what I have said. I am afraid you are correct to do so, for those who underestimate the training here will find themselves lost and abandoned, even inside this Holy City. But put your faith in your comrades, put your faith in yourselves, and most importantly, put your faith in Kami. You are here under his Will and purpose, and you have been put into Newmeag level for no other reason than the belief and expectation of Kami that you will succeed. In the end, it is here that the powerful and transforming hand of Kami works most directly in each of your lives. Am I understood?!¡±

    ¡°As your will, sir!¡± everybody other than Drake and Ashton responded in unison, startling the due. The words of the man were powerful and inspiring and Ashton had gotten himself lost in them. At the sudden and loud chorus of voices, Ashton was surprised. Where had they learned to do that?

    The Junior-Marshal Kean looked at the group with an approving glance. He walked around inspecting them. Then he spotted Drake and said, astonished, ¡°What the are you doing?¡±

    Drake looked just as astonished as the marshal to be singled out.

    Horebour answered for him. ¡°He was wounded badly and will need rest.¡±

    Kean gave Drake a disappointing glance and then spotted Ashton too, bruised and beaten as well, but at least able to stand up properly.  The marshal continued to look at the two as if they were aliens, but he said, ¡°Wounds and injuries will be a normal part of you from now on. You will soon learn to cope with them. I will not let any excuses prevent me from working you hard.¡±

    He turned back and walked to the entrance to Newmeag again. He said, ¡°The full training schedule will begin tomorrow morning. I will not tell you when specifically, but anybody who is not up and ready by the time I arrive will be expelled from my unit and from The Endless City.¡± Another new man approached them at some subtle and unnoticed signal from the marshal. ¡°This man,¡± Kean introduced with a wave, ¡°is Hairely and he is the governor of this floor. He will show you around the floor and bring you to your quarters. You are to follow his orders as if you are following mine! You are dismissed.¡± With that, Kean turned and strode away.

    The whole group didn¡¯t move, even after the marshal had left. Paralyzed from the authority and power the man exuded, even when he was out of sight his presence still held them in place and in silence. Full of uncertainty, none of them knew what to do, or what to expect from the new man in front of them. He studied them with a queer smile and glance. He then chuckled and said, ¡°What, Marshal Kean got you scared? Good, that was what he meant to do. Still, you had better believe every word he says, because he means it. I have seen better men than you all get destroyed by his training! But I am not as harsh as him, please be at least a little easy around me. It is his job to push you to your limits; it is my job to bring you back. I will be taking care of you while you stay here. Well, follow me; we do not have all day to stand here. And even more so, for when you dread the approach of tomorrow it comes much sooner than expected. There is much for you to learn tonight as well.¡±

    Hairely was an old man who had apparently been in charge of Newmeag floor his entire life, cleaning, preparing, and maintaining the state of the floor. He worked with energy and faithfulness of a man who had experience and love for his job. ¡°I¡¯ve overseen the turnover of hundreds of units in my stay here, but I have never seen a marshal create such results as Marshal Kean does. He and the other Marshals are each experts in their respective fields of combat and you will be required to train under all of them. If you manage to survive their schedule, then you will be the best equipped to survive in the battlefield. But he really is a monster.¡±

    Gethroe offered to carry help Drake again but he declined saying, ¡°I will be forced to train tomorrow despite how I feel, right? In that case, I must do my best to prepare myself right now.¡±

    ¡°Depend upon your friends while you can, young masn,¡± Hairely responded, ¡°That is what they are there for. Woe to you the day when you fall and nobody is there to catch you!¡± With some reluctance, Drake took hold of Gethroe¡¯s shoulder again.

    ¡°He called himself the god of us,¡± Horebour exclaimed. Hairely was kind and easy to talk to and Horebour let loose the thoughts in his heart. ¡°Such words are blasphemy! How can he say such things?¡±

    ¡°The truth is never blasphemous,¡± Hairely said wisely. ¡°In a real sense, he is the god of you for the next few months. He has absolute authority over all of you and there is nobody who can intervene, not even me. Put your faith in him though, he is not here to kill you; he is here to fulfill the will of Kami.¡±

    Drake and Ashton were afraid and anxious about their ability to survive here and even those who were indoctrinated grumbled a bit at their fortunes. Heath complained, ¡°He will be pushing us too hard though, how did we ever get stuck with such a nightmare of a marshal? I felt the blood in my body freeze at his glare.¡±

    ¡°Indeed,¡± Vanyer agreed, ¡°I cannot imagine how such a man could exist inside The Endless City. As fellow followers of Kami, how can he treat us such? Our motivation should be coming from our love and duty to Kami, not from fear.¡±

    Hairely responded saying, ¡°Sometimes fear produces better results. But in this case, it will be a combination of the two. His facade of a fearful instructor is an act, but it is also a necessary tool to get you prepared for the battlefield. But you have not lost all of your love and duty in these training halls, the schedule has been carefully crafted to create powerful bonds between the squad members.¡±

    The level Hairely was displaying to them was very large, containing dozens of rooms on either side of a long and wide hallway. It was lt well by the dozens of torches lining the sides. In the middle of the hallway were three long tables, set end to end, crossing the expanse of the hallway. ¡°Here is where you will be dining with the whole floor, twice a day. Unlike most of your other activities, you will be eating together with all the other units.¡±

    Next, he showed them the different and varied training rooms spaced out on both sides of the main hallway. ¡°Each of these rooms represent the different type of training that you will be undergoing. I take personal care to make sure they are properly stocked and clean in order to ensure you best ability to learn and perform in the different areas. The different Marshals operate the different gyms and they will inform you of the specifics for each. It is those places that will be collecting your sweat, blood, and tears.¡± The men shivered as they walked past the gyms, peering inside and imagining the horrors of the equipment there in use.

    Lastly, he showed them to their quarters, the last rooms on the end, full of bunks. There were eleven of them and on the doorway of theirs was another sign that Ashton could not read. He presumed it said something like ¡°Marshel Kean¡¯s unit¡± but Hairely informed them otherwise.

    ¡°It states, To wrestle with Fate. It was put there long ago by some forgotten marshal in the past, but Marshal Kean liked it and claimed this room for his own men. Perhaps he believes that the sign will inspire you to work hard, but I do not see how. None of you are able to read it.¡±

    But Drake was oddly attracted to the words etched onto the door frame, though, and he touched the carving delicately with his fingers, tracing the strange ruin outlines.

    ¡°What are you thinking of?¡± Ashton said to Drake, as the men filed into the living quarters, claiming bunks and securing spots.

    Drake didn¡¯t answer his question. He asked instead, ¡°Why do you think the priest choose to not indoctrinate us? What did he mean when he said that destiny was a tricky thing?¡±

    ¡°I do not know,¡± Ashton replied startled by the question. ¡°From what I have gathered, the priests here are not to be understood.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond immediately, but when he did he asked, ¡°Ashton, I believe that we can survive here. It will tough, but I believe that together, and even with these silly people, we will be able to survive.¡± Drake turned and looked at Ashton. ¡°Do we still hope and work towards an escape?¡±

    Ashton replied, ¡°We were fortunate to escape the indoctrination and to be alive with our minds intact. I will never forget my life and village in the wilderness, and as such it will live on in my heart. To attempt escape would jeopardize our well-being here, for now at least. I believe that we need to be patient. Until the time comes where escape is clearly an option, we should not dwell on it. And who knows? Our own thoughts may change on us yet and we might find a new purpose for ourselves here as well.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond, but instead gazed upon the words on the arch. Ashton continued, ¡°We should not try to alienate ourselves from the men here. I know that they may seem silly and ignorant to you, but whatever beliefs they hold are real to them. Do not despise them, pity them instead. We have the ability to make a home for ourselves here with these people. At the very least, as Hariely said, there will come a time when we will need to rely on them.¡±

    Drake looked up at Ashton and in his eyes were a deadly and fierce gleam. He said, ¡°I understand what you are saying and you are right. I have promised to give it my best shot at surviving here with you and accepting these circumstances seems to be the best route to do that. However, I will not forget what Kami has done to us. Pity them, you said? You are right, I pity them, but I am also angry for them. I have a great rage for the brutality and mercilessness of this god. As a member of the house of Fendell, I vow never to forgive him and never to forget.¡±

    Ashton wondered at Drake and the power in his eyes. He recalled the other times when Drake exuded such strength before and understood the influence from Drfuil that was awake within him. Just how much did the god Drfuil influence Drake and how much was the mere mortal of Drake?

    Ashton was relieved that Drake acquiesced to the governance of the marshal and The Endless City, but he wasn¡¯t sure how long that would last. There was something strange afoot within the system and after seeing the look in Drake¡¯s eyes, questions assailed him as he pondered about the future. Why hadn¡¯t the priest indoctrinated them when he should have? What was the meaning of conscripting masses of men from the wilderness when the city obviously had unimaginable resources and power at their disposal? What end will come to the man Drake, who had a personal encounter with god?

    The questions faded, but did not disappear when Hairley announced the orientation and dinner. ¡°Gather your food and your strength,¡± he said, ¡°Tomorrow, training will begin for all of you and no amount of preparation will fully enable you to be completely ready for the schedule.¡± The men took his advice with seriousness, Ashton and Drake even more so. Danger the others could not comprehend loomed over them and Drake and Ashton only knew a part of it themselves. There was no sun to be seen on the floor, but Drake knew that with the light of dawn the next day, a certain hell was waiting for them all.

 Chapter 17

    Lieutenant Fallow was in a mood of discontent. There were several factors ruining his mood as he stood atop the wall, looking down into the mist covered land far beneath him. the least factor not being the annoying and obnoxious Captain Grisly he now served under. This captain was small and fat, physical characteristics that are inelegant in any officer of high position, and he sat in a throne like chair under an overhang next to where Fallow stood. His greasy face and oily hair only added to Fallow¡¯s discomfort in being in his presence, as well as the man¡¯s attempt to look down on him despite being significantly shorter.

    Under the socially oppressive presence of this man, Lieutenant Fallow remembered longingly the days when he served under Captain Liehold. In the Wilderness, Captain Liehold was strict and cold but at least he was reasonable and competent. Fallow¡¯s current Captain was neither, as if his long and continued position on the wall was what had reduced his intelligence to that of a blithering fool. This captain¡¯s name was Grisly and he had held his station on the wall ever since he secured his rank of captain, nearly fifteen years ago. As one of the few lieutenants under Grisly, Fallow was forced to endure his seemingly endless ability to talk about his own life and irrelevant experiences he had had lately. Fallow tried to listen respectively, but found his attention wavering as the warm and rich breeze from the wall blew over them, making flags flap cheerlessly behind them.

    Another factor contributing to Fallows discontent was shared by all the soldiers who had returned from the caravan. Due to their unexpected and ¡°untimely¡± arrival from the portal, the week of vacation they were promised was cancelled and new assignments were given to them immediately. Fallow would have objected if he thought it would do any good. Soldiers could only put faith in their superior¡¯s competence and understanding in every area of their service, including scheduling, and appeals were never permitted. Fallow had gotten his request to be positioned on the wall again, but the air did not taste the same as he had expected it to, either due to the odor the captain produced in quantity, or the distaste that a vacation canceled meant for him.

    To many soldiers, a position on the wall was punishment in and of itself. Many deemed it boring and dead, and avoided it as much as they could. New recruits were always given a post on the wall to begin their training, and they always got out of the posting as fast as possible. No action had been seen on the wall for hundreds of years, and no soldier could imagine such action happening in the first place. But Fallow liked the peace and he liked the air and the view. When he was there he felt like he was on top of the world, looking down upon all the tiny events that took place so far below. When asked why he liked the wall posting though, he always responded saying, ¡°I like being able to witness the Light of Kami directly, unobscured and fresh.¡± Not that his bewildered friends had ever felt the same as him, but they couldn¡¯t argue with a pure desire such as that.

    There was one more reason why Fallow liked a position on the wall. While boredom was the common symptom for a wall position, Fallow filled the time with reading and sometimes writing, as per his master¡¯s instruction. He really hadn¡¯t seen anybody else enjoy reading like he did, which he thought was a shame. Even the old library keepers, Havign especially, were full of an energy and life that was so intoxicating.

    Listening to his Captain drone on, Fallow took a deep breath and tried to enjoy the moment. Since Fallow had returned to the city a week ago, he had not experienced a single disturbing dream. Sleep came soundly again and for that relief alone Fallow was glad to have returned. The last few days in the wilderness were terrible, lack of sleep and physical irritation almost made him lose it. In The Endless City though, there was peace and security; here he could relax and contemplate the faithfulness of Kami. Already, the strange thoughts and ideas that seemed so important and terrifying at the same time had faded away from him almost completely.

    But still, Fallow could feel that things were not the same as when he had left months earlier. Somehow everything looked different to him, as if the world was now shaded in different colors than before. In ways he couldn¡¯t understand or even categorize he felt somewhat of a stranger in the city, lonely and confused. He remembered now what Havign had told right before he left on the mission. ¡°The wilderness houses terrible curses and feelings within it.¡± The old priest had told him. ¡°It is a land without a god and it is unnatural, but it is also the land from which you came from. You will find that the experience will change you as you come to understand the world around you better, and feel your native soil under your feet. Kami-sama has adopted you into his family, but you were once a lost orphan and going back into the wilderness and re-experiencing that land will change you. When you return, do not expect to be the same person you were when you left.¡±

    At the time, Fallow had brushed off the words and had not taken them seriously, but now the old and reedy voiced returned to him, even as the breath of the wind blew against him as well. As always, a steady wind blew against them as they stood on the top of the wall, threatening to blow them off, but with no realistic possibility. How Fallow missed the old priest right now!

    Today Fallow had scheduled an early dismissal from his shift as well as the next day off from his post on the wall. He hadn¡¯t been able to visit the library since his return a week ago, and wanted to visit the ancient and majestic building that was the library of the Divine and see again the teachers that lived there. Today and tomorrow were set aside for the visit and now he only had to wait patiently for his Captain to dismiss him. But upon Fallow¡¯s arrival in his presence a half an hour ago, the captain took the opportunity to tell Fallow everything and anything that came into his mind. Perhaps due to his recent experience of being under great commanders, General-Commander Soul and Captain Liehold, Fallow found himself quickly losing tolerance with the fat and lazy Captain.

    ¡°And did you hear what happened to Captain whats-his-name down on eclectic duty within the city?¡± Captain Grisly spoke. He did not wait for an answer before he continued, ¡°I was attending the party supervised by Commander Hulu, I met him a long time ago while I was in the academy, he¡¯s a very nice man and plays good ball too. Well, I was at this party supervised by him and I saw-.¡±

    Fallow¡¯s patience suddenly broke and he cut him short saying, ¡°Sir, I am sorry but I have urgent personal business to take care of. My shift ended an hour ago and the lieutenant has already dismissed me. Do I have your permission to go?¡±

    The captain was shocked by the interruption, respectful though it was. He did not have a good reason to keep the man longer and he reluctantly signaled the man¡¯s dismissal with a slow salute as if he could not believe the lieutenant had actually asked to go. With a quick bow and a, ¡°As your will,¡± Fallow departed as fast as he could, not looking back to see the frozen picture of confusion on the captain¡¯s face.

    With a sudden new energy, Fallow almost ran back to his quarters, regretting his loss of his horse. Fallow enjoyed the posting on the wall but it came with two major drawbacks for him. The first was that he could not take his horse with him, his beloved horse, Carla, that had been with him his entire trip into the wilderness, as well years before. He had received his horse when he had entered the mounted legion, and it had proven useful to him even within the assignments in the city, getting him to his locations in a timely manner. But on the wall, horses were not applicable or practical and he had to leave his beloved horse with the division stable head who had promised to take good care of her. She would be used for training he knew, but there was nothing he could do about that. Waste was not an option within the city.

    The other drawback was related to the first in that Central Library was not located near to the outside wall. While it was true that in the enormous city most places were even days away from each other, the library is located significantly closer to the other postings Fallow could have obtained. Compounded by the fact that Fallow no longer had a horse at his disposal, the trip to the library took hours, through crowded streets and maze like passages. A stay at the library usually meant two or three days for Fallow if he was posted at the wall, thus the necessity of getting days off for the visit.

    Fallow made a stop at his quarters to change out of his uniform and put on civilian clothing, something rarely done by soldiers of whom most wore their uniforms all the time. He also stopped to gather the documents and writing materials he had created and collected since his last to the library. There were also materials that needed to be returned and he shoved all the necessities into his bag and left as quickly as he could. Fallow did not spend much time in his home other than sleeping, he much preferred being out on the streets. He used to live in quarters shared by other soldiers, but after he reached officer positioning he was given the opportunity to seize a personal residence. He was expected to secure a wife and start a family with the personal residence but he had done neither so far. Most of his free time was spent away, whether in the library, on the wall, or in some other solitary place to read and think.

    Fallow was grumpy as he left his house, thinking about the time wasted waiting for his Captain to finish talking, and he slung his bag over his back and marched resolutely towards Central Library. Every step towards Central Library though, Fallow¡¯s mood lightened as he thought about the joys the library would have for him. The trip was long and arduous but as it took thousands of steps, Fallow was happy and tired, arriving before the light went down in the city. Havign always had a room available for him when he had extended stays; and Fallow knew he would be using one of the rooms for this night as well.

    Fallow walked up the high steps at the entrance to the library and entered it boldly, pushing the great and ancient doors to the side. The inside was dim and quiet, there were little to no visitors there, especially as the night started to settle over the city. Fallow knew Havign would be up and around though, as far as Fallow could tell, the librarians never rested. He never asked Havign directly, but it seemed to him that the old priest never slept. At all hours of the day and night, he could be found within the library, organizing, reading, writing, and dusting. Today as well, Fallow found him among the tall wooden shelves containing the old classics of the territory, dusting away with his dusting tool.

    Fallow observed the priest silently then asked, ¡°Why do you not use your power as a magician to dust the books instantly rather than going around and manually dusting them?¡± The old priest didn¡¯t appear surprised by the sudden intrusion of the soldier.

    Havign responded without looking away from his work, ¡°I used to, you know. Back when the library was a busy place and we did not have time to properly dust them. But we were all younger then and had so much more energy for such things.¡±

    ¡°More energy?¡± Fallow asked, ¡°I would have thought that a simple word would take less energy than walking around all day and climbing old ladders, dusting the books with your hands.¡±

    Havign chuckled and responded, ¡°I am afraid the spell work priests do is more complicated than you realize. At any rate, doing this by hands has many advantages. The first is that we can inventory the books as we dust, but the second and infinitely more important reason is,¡± he finished dusting the shelf and turned and looked at Fallowed with a smile, ¡°that it gives us something to do in all of our spare time. It has been very boring around here without you popping in, welcome back.¡± He reached up and gave Fallow a tight hug, an awkward event for a priest as small as he was.

    Fallow hugged him back, now used to these gestures of affection these librarian priests used. He remembered the first time he had been hugged and how completely shocking it was for him. Now, he cherished it almost as much as the priests did. He responded, patting the old priest on the back and saying, ¡°Thank you, it is good to be back.¡±

    They withdrew from each other and Havign asked, ¡°But where have you been? I expected you back weeks ago.¡±

    ¡°It is a long story and I am sorry I could not have made it sooner. I have brought all of my material with me, as you requested.¡± Fallow displayed the bag he was carrying for Havign to see.

    ¡°Oh excellent,¡± Having responded clapping his hands. The sound echoed loudly in the large and empty building. ¡°You have come at the right time too, Dinner is about to be set. I am not surprised though, you have a knack for appearing at the right time. I will open up a seat for you and afterwards we can talk about your adventure. I feel already that it was quite exciting; I can¡¯t wait to hear what you have to say about the wilderness. We have not had any new direct sources in a long time, and I¡¯m sure your writing will be a great addition to our collection here.¡±

    ¡°Now I know why you really encouraged me to take the mission into the wilderness,¡± Fallow joked, to the amusement of the priest. Havign led him away from the tall shelves of books, meticulously organized but hardly read. Fallow looked forward to the meal with the priests, and not just because he was hungry. It was always an interesting experience; the priests ate and interacted differently than how the soldiers did. It was always comfortable, fun, and enlightening.

    There were many librarian priests working and living in the library, but certainly not as many as there were in the past. Many worked behind the scenes, rearranging, correcting, and organizing all the volumes that occupied the library. Some of them worked in areas of research and help, mostly working with the officials and populace of the city, handling information requests or personally escorting them around the library. All the priests shared the cleaning and dusting responsibilities. But however many priests occupied the library now, it is only a small fraction of the number of priests that used to work there long ago.

    ¡°Here now,¡± Havign had once told Fallow. ¡°We only operate with a skeleton staff, and of course that is what is really only needed. But once this Library was the center of culture and learning in the city and it was always filled with people of many races and tongues from all corners of this territory, and even from territories outside of ours. But since the war started, the interest in the arts and learning dropped and the divine children are no longer encouraged to enter into the libraries service. Now all learning and efforts go into the war, they care only now about strategy, power, and glory. We have not had a new priest enter our order for many years. I¡¯m sure you would have made a great Librarian if you were born of the divine, Fallow. We could use you. It really is a shame; people no longer treat the library with the respect and importance it deserves.¡±

    ¡°The people are more concerned about the safety of the city right now,¡± Fallow had responded defensively. ¡°Isn¡¯t that important as well? The library would not be able to exist if not for the effort of the defense forces.¡±

    ¡°That may be true,¡± Havign had sighed. ¡°But they are missing an important part of what it means to be alive. They no longer care about knowledge, innovation, and learning. I am afraid that this city has been stagnating for a long time.¡±

    The Priest often told many wild and fascinating stories about the past, and Fallow listened to them in amazement, unsure that they were real and skeptical that Havign simply hadn¡¯t made them up. Especially the talk about other territories living in trade and harmony with The Endless City, such words were clearly false. ¡°You have gone too far this time,¡± Fallow had responded laughing after one amusing story Havign had told him. ¡°It was an entertaining story, but how can you expect me to believe it when the main character is a peddler from outside the wall?¡±

    ¡°But it is a true story.¡± Havign insisted. ¡°My predecessor witnessed it himself and wrote this down himself.¡±

    ¡°But you speak of a setting that does not exist,¡± Fallow had explained, still laughing at the story. ¡°Nothing exists outside of the wall, except darkness and fear and death.¡±

    ¡°Maybe,¡± Havgin said casually. ¡°But what about the time when the city was not at war with the enemy? We have not always been at war, right? Settings can change and weren¡¯t you once a person living outside the wall? The enemy didn¡¯t always surround us as they do now.¡±

    But Fallow had only shaken his head and replied, ¡°You speak in riddles, I do not understand.¡±

    ¡°I know.¡± Havign had said sadly, looking at Fallow with pity in his eyes. The look made him uncomfortable.

    Even if some of the stories Havign had told were suspicious, his claims about the old magnificence of the library were surely true. All around him evidence and proof of the once former greatness of Central Library existed in real time. Great halls and rooms were in the library, spaces for masses of people to learning were everywhere to be seen, but now they were empty and cold. When Fallow stayed overnight, it was in one of the many empty quarters that he slept. Old ornaments and furniture existed in the room, decorations and etchings that it always made him wonder what type people once slept in the same room long ago.Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.

    The sheer size of the library was not the only glorious thing about it, or even the astounding and priceless decorations and architecture that gave it wonder. In the center of the library was an enormous statue, starting at the floor on a large dais and reaching all the way to the roof. It was created with a majesty and realism that often made men quail at the sight of it. It stood as though a protector and keeper of the library, holder of all the knowledge and wisdom of the universe. It was clothed in long robes of purple and gold that looked to be flowing despite its nature of stone. In his left hand lay and open book titled life and his right hand was lifted up as if offering its knowledge to those worthy. His head was bald and his face displayed a serene yet divine expression of confidence and power. The first time Fallow had seen it on one of his first ventures into the library; he wanted to fall to his knees in reverence and fear towards it.

    As Fallow had stood frozen before it, gazing on it with wide eyes, Havign had approached him and said, ¡°Yes, isn¡¯t it impressive? The greatest craftsmen of the time worked together for sixty years to create it. No such skill exists today I am afraid. For many years, it has stood in the library, it was created along with it. You are in good company my young friend, many other greater men than you have beheld it gaze, but there are few these days that have.¡±

    ¡°Good priest,¡± Fallow had responded barely getting the words out, ¡°Who does this stature depict? Surely someone of great power and wisdom!¡±

    ¡°Only the greatest.¡± Havign had said proudly, ¡°It is Kami himself, depicted at the coronation of this building.¡±

    ¡°Kami-sama!¡± Fallow had whispered and he really did fall to his knees and he hid his face from the gaze of the statue. ¡°But images of Kami-sama are not permitted!¡±

    Havign had pulled Fallow to his feet again, despite the resistance. He had said with annoyance, ¡°And this is why! Humans have the tendency to worship the images as though it was Kami himself and Kami finds it to be insulting. Get up! It is only stone you are looking at, no different from the stone you walk upon in the street. This statue only represents Kami, it is not him itself and it is not to be worshiped or feared. Get up already!¡±

    With reluctance Fallow did come to his feet, but he still would not look at the statue directly. ¡°Why was such a thing created then?¡± he then asked.

    ¡°It was a special occasion,¡± Havign had explained, leaning forward on the railing and gazing at the statue. ¡°And Kami wanted to support and encourage the library. It was a long time ago too, when the city was more open to the presence of Kami. It is an impressive thing, but still,¡± he had turned around to face Fallow. ¡°I will not have my pupil falling down every time he sees it. I want you to observe and appreciate the statue for its artistic value, as it was meant to be. You will come to accept it more easily in the future.¡± Fallow didn¡¯t dare look at it and doubted such a day would come when he would.

    But today Fallow was able to really look upon the statue as they passed it walking from one end of the library to the other. They were currently on one of the upper floors in the library, on level with the face of Kami. Havign was used to seeing it and walked by without noticing, still talking about the trifling events that had taken place among the librarians lately. But Fallow wasn¡¯t listening and he stared at the statue in awe as they passed it. As they rounded the floor the face of the statue slowly came into view. No matter how many times he saw it Fallow still felt the desire to fall onto his knees before its presence. Still as impressive as always with its simple and transcending realism, Fallow thought the face was the most powerful part of the piece. The eyes gazed out radiantly and Fallow wanted to stand still and bath in its sight. This figure was literally the only image Fallow had ever seen of Kami. No pictures were allowed in the city and the god had not come into public view for many years. Fallow had imagined the god¡¯s appearance before he saw the statue but the real image had exceeded his expectations in glory and power. He sometimes wondered how much more so the real thing would be if he ever saw it.

    As always, that night¡¯s meal took place in one of the rooms to the side of the main lobby and all the priests attended, except for the few who had to remain on duty. The plain wood door to the dining room remained open to the lobby, letting the librarians see the ongoing there in case their assistance was needed.

    The room had a low ceiling crafted of wood and support arches. Small and cramped compared to the excessive space of the many other rooms in the library, Fallow often wondered why the Priest still choose to eat there when wider areas were permitted. Today when they seated, he finally did ask them.

    ¡°Why do you choose to eat in this room that barely fits everybody, when there are many other available for you? I am sure you could find another one acceptable for you.¡±

    There were seven priests present in the room at the moment and they all responded similarly, playfully aghast at the suggestion but seriously adamant in their response. ¡°The librarians have always eaten in this room,¡± they replied. ¡°Far be it from us to break such a long and historic tradition. It would be as awful as throwing away unused books.¡± The priests all looked similar to Fallow and he had difficulty distinguishing them from each other. Havign he could differentiate, but now he could only tell them apart from the places they sat. If they were stubborn about staying in this room, they were also stubborn about sitting in the same places each time as well.

    ¡°But wasn¡¯t there once hundreds of librarians living and working here,¡± Fallow asked. ¡°How could you all eat in here?¡±

    As much as Fallow enjoyed the strange company of these old and somewhat silly priests, they also enjoyed the company of the young and serious human. They often laughed and teased him in certain subjects and they laughed and teased him now. ¡°Of course they could not all fit in here at once, the eight of us have a difficult time fitting in here now.¡± The priest named Jacobin sitting beside Fallow explained. ¡°They would eat in shifts. During those times, there were always a group of priests eating in this room. Things were much more chaotic then, and there wasn¡¯t space for them anywhere else either.¡±

    ¡°How could that be?¡± Fallow asked, even more confused, ¡°Did Kami provide constant meals to the library instead of just twice a day?¡±

    ¡°No, no, you do not understand.¡± Another spoke in unreservedly, ¡°Back then Kami did not provide food they way he does now. There was room and space available for growing it and there were also massive imports of food from neighboring territories.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Fallow said simply.

    Havign leaned forward and attempted to explain. ¡°Fallow, Kami-sama creates and provides food for the city daily, right?¡± Fallow nodded. ¡°But that is only because there is no space now for growing it ourselves. Before the war, the empty land you see from on top of the wall used to be fields and orchards. It was used for growing the food necessary to feed the city.¡±

    ¡°And even then, that was not enough,¡± another priest chimed in. As always, the priests enjoying teaching and explaining things to any who listened. ¡°We had to import enormous amounts of grain and other essentials from our neighboring territories in order to feed ourselves. It was an essential part of city operations and an entire industry and economy was based off of that.¡±

    But Fallow was lost and bewildered and he seemed stuck on several points. But his ignorance did not dismay or disgust the priests; it only encouraged and excited them. ¡°Food is grown?¡± he asked incredulously.

    ¡°By the throne, yes!¡± they almost shouted. In the excitement, a couple of the priests ran out to find books and other sources to explain the idea. ¡°You know the apple tree in the temple courtyard?¡± Havign asked.

    ¡°I have heard of it, but I had never actually seen it or even been inside the temple-.¡±

    ¡°But you understand that apples are created from the tree, right?¡±

    ¡°Yes. I believe those apples are used in part of the annual Festival of the Highlanders-.¡±

    ¡°Yes, yes, but that is not the point.¡± Dismissing the sacred festival with a wave of his hand, Havign continued, ¡°The point is that that apple was grown from the plant, it was not created by Kami directly. You understand that right? You could eat that apple as if it was the same apple you had eaten for breakfast today.¡±

    Fallow was still confused and astounded by the new knowledge. The other priests returned quickly and presented diagrams and pictures of different plants and their uses in food. ¡°Sometimes you could eat the roots, the stems, even the leaves of these different plants,¡± Havign said, pointing towards the different designs displayed. ¡°This plant is called wheat and these grains you see on the top, those were grinded up and used to create bread.¡±

    ¡°Bread is created from a plant?¡± Fallow asked amazed and incredulous.

    ¡°Well, not right now. Bread is created directly by Kami-sama and given to us. But originally, yes. The grain was grounded up, and went through a process called baking. It doesn¡¯t happen anymore though.¡±

    ¡°I want to grow bread too.¡± Fallow said excitedly, he was holding a book in his hands and flipping through it. ¡°Will this tell me how to do that?¡±

    ¡°It does,¡± Havign responded with a smile. ¡°But that might be too difficult to do right now. If you really want to grow something, I suggest you start with simple vegetables like these,¡± He pointed towards specific plants on the pages. ¡°This will be relatively simple and easy to grow now.¡±

    Fallow was looking down and reading through the pages. ¡°It looks like I will need some land to grow these on though. I do not know of any land near me to use.¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t really need land; you only need some soil and container to hold it in.¡±

    Fallow held the book in his hands as though he was holding a treasure. It was titled The fantastic world of Gardening. ¡°Can I borrow this book?¡± he asked delicately. ¡°I will take good care of it.¡±

    Havign smiled at him and said, ¡°You have showed great care for the books you have taken so far. I believe we can trust you with this as well. In return, we want a portion of whatever you manage to grow.¡±  Fallow promised and placed the book delicately into his backpack, taking great care to treat it gently. The other priests were just as excited at the idea of real gardening as Fallow was. ¡°I am surprised at you, Fallow,¡± Havign added. ¡°You usually just call me crazy and laugh at me when I suggest something like this.¡±

    But Fallow only looked confused at the words and Havign didn¡¯t press it.

    Soon though, their discussion was interrupted by the arrival of the food. As always, it appeared suddenly on the table as if it suddenly sprang into existence right there, which of course, it did. All across the city food was appearing inside people¡¯s houses, inside the dining halls and onto the tables of those who feasted on the bread of Kami.

    As a soldier in the greyhoods, Fallow had been trained to give thanks to Kami before the meal in a very specific way. The first time he ate with the priests though he was shocked at the different customs they used to praise Kami. As a soldier in the army, an officer always led the prayer of thanks to Kami, including praise for the food, light, breath, and life in verses of ritual. Fallow had expected the same from these priests but instead they had simply said in chorus all together, ¡°Praise and thanks be to Kami, who has provided this food to us.¡± Then they had proceeded to eat to the astonishment of Fallow. Fallow had asked why they did not follow the set prayer that everybody else used.

    ¡°We do not have a set prayer for us,¡± They had responded. ¡°How much credit do we give Kami anyway? He provides us food certainly, but does he provide us with our very life or did that come from another source? There are many people living outside of these walls you know, whom Kami has not touched with his will.¡±

    Fallow found that any time he spent with the priests was enlightening and interesting, but it was difficult to gather them all in one place at once.  It was one of the reasons why he enjoyed coming here and eating with them so much. Today he followed the priest¡¯s customs in prayer and ate with them happily. He saw the food in a new understanding today and he broke the bread in his hand, crumbling, thinking, and observing. He said suddenly, ¡°That doesn¡¯t make any sense.¡±

    ¡°What is the matter, Lieutenant?¡± Jacobin asked, dipping a piece of bread into seasoned oil.

    Fallow responded slowly, ¡°How can what you say be true? You speak of things unheard of and unknown. Outside of this city¡¯s walls exists the perpetual darkness that Kami strives against, but you talk of times of trade and prosperity beyond the wall. Even more so, of times of trade with other territories! What you have been telling me doesn¡¯t match what I know to be true, yet I see this evidence before me. Even in the wilderness I recalled certain things.¡±

    The room became unnaturally quiet at Fallow¡¯s pronouncement. Some of the priests chewed thoughtfully, while others had stopped eating altogether. They gazed at Fallow with their Golden eyes and Fallow suddenly felt foolish and alien among them; that he had asked a stupid question. It was eerily silent in the room; the priests had had been noisy and talkative before were no longer.

    ¡°Lieutenant,¡± Havign said calmly. ¡°You normally do not look into these issues this much. Why do you start asking these questions now?¡±

    Fallow was even more confused. He asked, ¡°Should I not be asking this? Doesn¡¯t it bother you, too? These two different ideas are in opposition of each other.¡±

    ¡°But you never cared about it before.¡±

    Fallow contemplated for a bit but then said simply, ¡°Now I do.¡±

    ¡°There are some questions that you should not explore.¡± Another priest said suddenly.

    Fallow was shocked and confused. The mood was upsetting him and he said angrily, ¡°What is that supposed to mean? Wasn¡¯t it you who taught me to ask questions in the first place? You told me that knowledge comes from exploring the world around you, questioning things and evaluating them. Isn¡¯t this library a holder and preserver of truth and knowledge? How can you say then, ¡®There are some questions that should not be asked?¡¯¡±

    ¡°It is true that knowledge comes from questioning,¡± Havign responded. ¡°But there is some knowledge that should be kept from you.¡±

    The priests continued to look at him, their golden eyes piercing him with their radiance, but the looks now frustrated and angered Fallow. Never before had he been denied like this before. ¡°How can that be?¡± he demanded. ¡°Why do you choose to hide things from me? Haven¡¯t I been studying here in order to learn under you?¡±

    ¡°Havign,¡± Jacobin said. ¡°You have taught your pupil well, but perhaps too well. Some things were meant to be hidden from him.¡±

    ¡°He had never shown interest in such things before though,¡± Havign responded. ¡°Like water off a duck¡¯s back, the issues never impacted him. Something must have changed within him.¡±

    ¡°It is everybody¡¯s fault really,¡± another put in. ¡°We all were eager to share our understanding with him, but we didn¡¯t prepare for the consequences of it.¡±

    ¡°He asks questions about some areas, it is only natural he would be curious about others. Everything is connected to each other.¡±

    ¡°We have been careless. It might have been wrong to take a pupil in the first place, Havign.¡±

    Fallow burst in yelling, ¡°Stop talking amongst yourselves as if I wasn¡¯t here!¡± The priests no longer looked to Fallow like the friendly old men but had somehow turned into terrible spell casters again, hiding themselves in webs of deceit and malice and viewing humans as inferior being to be despised. Fallow shuddered a little under their gazed but he didn¡¯t move. ¡°I¡¯m not some human here to play with, to teach interesting things and to amuse yourselves with. I am here of my own volition; you have never treated me different from you before.¡±

    ¡°Fallow, calm down, we didn¡¯t mean it like that.¡± Jacobin said, trying to calm him. Fallow still looked around the room with anger in his eyes.

    Havign sighed and said, ¡°Look, it¡¯s not like we are trying to keep secrets from you, but there are some things that are simply not permitted to talk to you about.¡±

    ¡°What does that mean?¡± Fallow cried in frustration, standing up. ¡°You are presenting to me an understanding of the world that I cannot reconcile. It cannot relate to what is known to me already and it is grating me.¡± He shook his head. ¡°Why do you now deny me resolution?¡±

    Still, the room was quiet and Fallow suddenly felt a deep unease in his heart and he recognized it. The feeling first came into existence in the wilderness, a quiet but resolute feeling deep inside of him that somehow things were not correct. The dreadful prisoner¡¯s faces suddenly came back to him, and he remembered, even deeper, his own experiences. He felt woozy suddenly and he sat back down quickly. His head started spinning. He had hoped these feelings would disappear when he returned to The Endless City and it did for a bit. But right now, the more Fallow considered his memories and experiences and the words of these men, the greater his uneasiness became. He felt frightened and naked and alone.

    Havign spoke suddenly, ¡°Fallow, the world-.¡±

    ¡°Havign!¡± Another priest cut in, interrupting him. There was fear in his eyes.

    Havign continued again, speaking slowly, ¡°This is an answer you must come up with yourself.¡± The whole room stiffened, but nobody objected to his words. Havign continued, ¡°The books in here and the experiences we can provide show you evidence of the past, but it is you who has to balance it with what is in your head. In the end, you will find that what is real is never black and white and that it is also hardly easily discovered.¡±

    Fallow wasn¡¯t satisfied with the answer but something in Havign¡¯s face told him to not continue his line of questioning. He looked back from face to face and he did not say anything. The silent moment held for a long time.

    Jacobin clapped his hands and said with forced eagerness, ¡°We hope you have the greatest success in your endeavors, Fallow. In the meantime, this food, given to us directly by Kami-sama, is getting cold. We should eat it up before it all disappears.¡± The other priests tried to respond to the call, but it was clear that the meal was over, the priests mainly pecked over the food. Fallow did not eat any more but sat in thought.

    Havign looked at him with concern in his face. He said, ¡°Come Fallow, eat and gain your strength. There is much work for us tonight, you have yet to share your experience in the wilderness with us, I am sure that will be fascinating to hear. And we have lots of material to go over.¡±

    Fallow shook his head in an attempt to get rid of the strange feelings inside of him. ¡°You are right,¡± he said with a smile. ¡°It is by the Grace of Kami we were able to make it back at all!¡± He hoped that he would not experience the disturbing dreams again tonight, but he doubted that would happen. Even in this sacred sanctuary in The Endless City tormenting feelings found him again.

 Chapter 18

    ¡°Ashton, sing us a song.¡± A voice called out along the long dining hall table. The men sitting at it were battered and exhausted; and looked as if they had been fighting continuously against powerful foes bent upon mutual destruction. Many of them were sprawled across the dining hall despite Hairley¡¯s scolding about proper manners.

    The squads were breaking fast currently, all the men of the floor together in the long dining hall. They had learned of Ashton¡¯s talent for song soon after they arrived here weeks ago because he often sang to himself when relieving stress or hurts. The men enjoyed listening to him, Horebour especially and as he ate the fruit in front of him he pounded on the table and said, ¡°Yes, sing us a song now, Ashton!¡±

    Ashton pulled the bread away from his mouth and said, ¡°I sang last night at dinner for you, you relentless children!¡±

    ¡°And it was wonderful,¡± Vonyer replied steadily, eating calmly as well. ¡°We want to hear you again. Nothing soothes our aching muscles like the uplifting spirit in your voice.¡±

    ¡°His songs are all depressing though.¡± Heath said, stuffing his face with food. ¡°They are all about death and hardship and struggle, not something used to cheer people up.¡±

    ¡°You need to appreciate the artistic value of the songs,¡± Vonyer said defensively. ¡°Not all songs can be loud and obnoxious drinking songs like the ones you share.¡±

    ¡°Both songs have their places,¡± Drake replied over the noise of Heath¡¯s outburst over Vonyer¡¯s insult. ¡°But I think that Ashton¡¯s songs have a unique meaning to us here. All we are doing now is suffering and enduring hardships. So,¡± he turned to Ashton trusting his apple into his face. ¡°Sing for us!¡±

    ¡°No!¡± Ashton replied, pointing his finger down at all of them, ¡°I need to eat when I have the chance, I can¡¯t spend all of my free time singing for you.¡±

    ¡°Free time?¡± Drake asked. ¡°There is no such thing here; there is only time to be sleeping and time to be wrecking yourself. What is this free time you are talking about?¡±

    ¡°Come now Drake,¡± Horebour said, playing along. ¡°Don¡¯t carry such a disheartening attitude. This is a valuable time for all of us. Sure, it is difficult and at times spirit breaking; I cannot remember what it is like to not feel pain in body. But through the balming agent of song, we can find meaning and purpose here.¡±

    ¡°I will not be falling for that¡± Ashton protested. ¡°I am just as hurt and tired as all of you!¡±

    ¡°Just sing us a song Ashton!¡± Drake called out. ¡°The music heals everybody, including you.¡±

    ¡°I do not sing when called upon like a fool.¡± Ashton said aggressively, but the squad continued to pressure him. Drake knew he would give in eventually, the combined pressure from them along with his agreeable nature meant Ashton could be persuaded to do almost anything.

    It had been three weeks since Drake and Ashton had entered The Endless City, or at least as far as Drake could tell. The 20 scratch marks he had carved into his bed frame told him that as many nights had passed since they arrived on the floor, but he had no way to confirm the accuracy of their claims. The days here seemed longer than normal, as if extra hours were stuffed into them and with no sun to see, there had no way to tell real time. To him at least, the days certainly felt longer. If Drake had not known better, he would have said they had been here years already.

    Just as the Junior-Marshal Kean promised, the training was body breaking at its most timid points, especially for the injured Drake and Ashton. Every morning began in the dark before the lanterns had lit up completely. On the first few days the squads fumbled around in weariness and confusion while their Marshal screamed at them to move quickly and quietly. Thankfully, the dark morning¡¯s work only consisted of basic cardiovascular and muscle training and nothing more complicated. It was grueling, but at least it could be reasonably accomplished in the dark.

    When the morning phase ended and the lanterns started lighting up, there was a small rest while they broke fast in the dining hall, consuming the food of Kami. The first day of eating had shocked both Drake and Ashton as the food suddenly appeared before on the table and as the group gave thanks together to Kami in ritual and ceremony before eating. But since then their hunger and exhaustion had relinquished them of their care for the strangeness in the world around them. Nobody else seemed surprised by it anyway.

    While the workouts in the mornings were always the same, after the men had finished eating the food, the next phases of training were varied. There were eleven marshals on the floor as well as Hairley and each one was in charge of instructing the different squads in a particular form of light infantry training. Each day consisted of three different phases of training with three different marshals, cycling through a four day week before it started over again. Each marshal pounded in his teachings as though he was the hammer and his teachings were the nails. The only real rest the men had besides sleeping was when they trained with Hairley. He taught weapon cleaning, maintenance, and understanding and while what he told them was important and challenging, it was not physically demanding. Each night, right after their dinner, he also led a short service in praise and gratitude for Kami. At first Drake grated his teeth in anger at the thought of praising the monster who had done this to all of them, but soon he simply became grateful for the time of rest.

    But it was not enough time for adequate rest for these men. Day after day they were punished by their instructors, being forced to endure their madness of training. The instructors were merciless and demanding, working their students as if the very flames of the enemy were licking at their feet. At the dining table, the men all looked similar as they did when they were caged into the wagons, during the days they could no longer recall clearly. Many were dead eyed and without spirit.

    ¡°This is a necessary part of our training,¡± Horebour had said once, after a particularly defeating session. He lay upon the ground with the rest of the company, panting for breath and life. ¡°Kami will see all of us through, he would not test us so if he knew we could not pass.¡± He seemed to be trying to convince himself though, more than the people who heard him.

    But Drake felt like there was something more sinister in the training, another aspect of deconstructing these men to form them more into the likeness of their desires. Every session required quick action, mindless obedience, and unending work. Drake struggled to retain his rational and individual thought after the weeks of training.

    There was only one aspect of the training that brought comfort to these men, just as Marshal Kean had predicted in the beginning. Whatever differences the men in the individual squads once had with each other became irrelevant after the first few days in the floor. Through the distress and hardship the squads faced together, incredible bonds were formed, deeper than friendship and faster than love. It was the faith and knowledge that every person in your squad faced similar trials as you; absolute trust and comradeship was born. Drake suspected that such a consequence was intended from the beginning, along with the desired result of absolute soldiers. Either way, Drake knew that as much as he depended upon his squad for realism and integrity, so also did everybody depend upon each other. It was the only thing that kept Drake from losing his spirit.

    Uniquely for Ashton, he reacted differently to the brutality. Perhaps as part of his native programming, he endured the hardships without change or compromising of his character. Perhaps it was his song that cleansed his spirit every day from the impurities the training brought to his mind, but his spirit stood forth like a rock in a creek letting the hardships flow past him without changing him.

    If the comradeship was a lifeline for the sinking men, then Ashton was a lifeboat. He ever provided encouragement to his friends and strength beyond that of the physical. His simultaneous detachment from his physical environment and yet his complete presence in the group created a paradox that the marshals could not understand. His physical accomplishments in the training fields were small, but nonetheless, his presence was the biggest factor contributing to the survival of the group.

    That was why, only minutes later, Ashton was singing for the group again, during the few precious minutes that were available for them at their feast.

    He said to them, ¡°This song is about a fair maiden who loses her life in a feudal strife. Her lover enacted his wrath against both villages afterwards, bringing peace to the two tribes. Maybe not an original theme, but I find the music pleasant to witness.¡± He sang clearly for the group.

    She wove the cloth with beauty and grace

    And she flashed her smile with joy on her face

    Her laugh was like the river foam

    Her hair was long and neatly combed

    Fair Nailie, a delight to the eye

    Fair Nalie was doomed to die

    She walked beside the river clean

    And saw the world with sight so keen

    She bathed the goats and washed their fur

    The babes were small and they came to her

    Fair Nalie who loved to cry

    Fair Nalie was doomed to die

    There was a man who was brave and strong

    He courted her and sang her songs

    His strength was great and beyond compare

    But he was kind and gentle and full of care

    He boasted greatly about his love

    He said their union was from above

    Fair Nalie a delight to the eye

    Fair Nalie was doomed to die

    The tune was slow however and Ashton could not finish the song before their meal was abruptly ended. Loud clapping brought them back from the fairy tale and into the hot and dry reality. Hairely came into the dining hall clapping his hands for attention, ¡°The time is here now, get to your gyms. You know what happens when you are late! The marshals are not forgiving; get moving before you are late!¡±

    ¡°But the food has yet to disappear,¡± Heath protested gesturing to the table before them.

    ¡°Kami does not work on our schedules, we work on his. It will disappear soon enough, Kami always takes the remains.¡±

    Despite the reluctance to move from the table, all men proceeded swiftly to their designated training sessions. One squad had been late for one of their sessions and it only took seeing that squad¡¯s punishment to instill in all of them the fear of being late as well.

    Drake¡¯s squad had their first session that day with Marshal Kean. Rather than taking it easy on his own squad it seemed he pushed them harder in order to achieve results above the other squads. This was Drake¡¯s third session with the man and while he always had a subtle fear towards all the different gyms, he disliked Marshal Kean¡¯s instruction the most.

    Marshal Kean was a young yet experienced soldier who was an expert in hand to hand combat. While he was still skilled in every other aspect of the light infantry program, his specialty in unarmed combat and even unarmed against armed opponents, won him the position of training that trait to the new recruits. At first Drake thought that the man was disgusted with the assignment and that he abhorred the indoctrinated wildness people because of how difficult and strict his training sessions were. But after experiencing him twice Drake was convinced he was harsh not because he hated them, it was because he simply hated everything.

    Marshal Kean was ruthless and unforgiving, and everything he did was with full intenseness and energy as if he constantly fought demons with every action he did. There was no rest or break with him; his sessions were 100% effort for the entire time. He had then doing various drills of the most arduous nature, cruelly punishing those who did not give all of their effort. In his first meeting with his squad he had proclaimed that he was god over their lives until the time came when they graduated or died trying and every moment with him confirmed that assertion. Incredibly powerful in presence and might, the squad members could only do as he commanded with fear and mindlessness lest he spot you out and teach you the meaning of total control.Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.

    Drake wasn¡¯t sure he ever gained anything from the man¡¯s first two sessions other than an instinctive obedience algorithm and a hurt body.

    As they entered the gym, carefully early, Kean was dressed in his usual combat armor. As always, he had done the morning exercises with all of them and Drake wondered briefly where he had gone to change and eat since that time, because he wasn¡¯t wearing the metal armor he had on now, covering his forearms and shins, or either the heavy leather uniform when he was with them this morning.

    At their approach, he stood up and took advantage of the extra time the squad¡¯s arrival gave him. He immediately instructed them to start the exercises he had drilled into them in their earlier sessions and the men split into group without hesitation and complied. As they did so he paced about them and spoke loudly for all of them to hear. He said, ¡°The last three sessions in every gym here should have filled you with the basic foundations for light infantry, muscle building and training, but most importantly, the proper mindset of a soldier. Unwavering obedience and faith in your superiors and Kami is what makes a good soldier, everything else is just ornaments on the wall. Continued molding in that area will continue until you have graduated from here; until it has been engrained permanently into your being.¡± The men were already straining and sweating already under the stress of the exercise, but he ignored it. ¡°However, beginning with this fourth session, actual skills in the eleven areas of this training program for light infantry will commence. Congratulations, you have all passed our physical requirements for us to start technique training.¡±

    Despite the words of praise, his death glare remained in his face as if he had wished for them all to perish in the first three sessions. Nobody answered his praise. After a pause, he continued, ¡°As you are aware I will be teaching you hand to hand combat. While this may not appear the most useful skill to have on the battlefield to you, let me assure you that in many cases, this skill will be your most valuable tool you can have on the field. Weapons may not always be near you in times of danger, but these skills will never leave your side.¡±

    ¡°You will be taught how to subdue and kill your opponents with efficiency and effectiveness. Especially against armed opponents this skill will become most important. Never think that weapon users have an advantage over you, for this skill set is specifically created to oppose such circumstances. When you complete my training, you will not be in fear from any kind of opponent, for my techniques are perfect, created to fight armed, not armed, armored, or not armored. It will take guts and effort beyond what you can imagine at this moment but as my own squad I expect every single one of you to master my teachings.¡± He snapped his fingers and everybody stopped their exercises, some in mid movement causing them to lose their balance and some to fall over. Suddenly enraged at their incompetence, the marshal beat and scolded the men who had fallen over.

    After his moment of rage, Kean looked back up at the group as though a demon had possessed him. His eyes laid on a curse to all who saw it and he glared haughtily at them all. He shouted at them, ¡°Remember this you filthy barbarians! Your potential as soldiers is zero! Your workable material is a slag of mud and your minds are dirty canals of contradictory beliefs and impulses! I have been given the impossible task to make you more than you are capable of being! It is not through my training that you will become soldiers of The Endless City, it is only through the transforming power of Kami. You are a piece of mud and through fire, pressure, and meticulous sculpting will you become something more!¡±  Kean then turned and pulled the man he had beaten up roughly, setting him to his feet. Then he proceeded to his next training objective as if nothing had happened. Drake felt a low pressure pulling his heart down.

    ¡°What am I doing here?¡± he thought bleakly, the stray thought reaching his weary mind. ¡°Am I really becoming a soldier of Kami? I thought I had escaped it when I was not indoctrinated at the beginning, but perhaps this is yet another part of the indoctrinating process.¡± Due from physical and mental exhaustion Drake no longer contemplated the world outside of this floor. With his battered mind, he could not answer his question or even keep it in his mind for long. It slipped away from him before he realized and then the marshal was demonstrating something to them and he had to pay attention less he get into trouble. Without thought, his body moved as it was commanded and forms and settings were pounded into him and the time blurred around him. For many of the men, pain had lost most of its meaning on them; it was now a close companion; reliable and safe.

    The session with Marshal Kean ended after a seemingly endless time and despite the increased effort the marshal put into teaching the new techniques today, he was the only one who was not sweaty and ready to collapse. In a rare show, he didn¡¯t give them abusive words at the end of the session. Ironically, many of the men took it as praise of their effort, because it certainly was not of their ability to master the new skills. The next two sessions with the other marshals succeeded the first and they proved to be similar in fashion. They started to teach them actual techniques in their particular fields, short weapons and spear wielding. Respectively, each expected their own techniques to be learned and mastered. The men mostly felt overwhelmed and flooded from the excess inflow of information and the marshals scolded them for their slow understanding. At least before today they only had to do easily understood exercises, if not easily accomplished ones.

    The sessions ended and even the upbeat and ever joyful Horebour had nothing to say as they entered the baths before their meal was given to them. The marshals expected cleanliness and hygiene along with all the other information they were supposed to understand. ¡°We are not barbarians,¡± Kean had told them the first day. ¡°We work hard for Kami and your sweat and soiling is proof of that, but.¡± He eyed them darkly, ¡°The Endless City is a civilized and holy place. Your filth and smell will not be tolerated. There are baths available for you, so clean yourselves. You will eat you dinner fresh, or not at all.¡±

    As was many things with Drake, events that had either angered him or encouraged him soon simply became meaningless. At first he was delighted by the prospect of cleanliness, but it quickly became simply another chore that had to be accomplished before the relief that was dinner. Frightening him, Drake found that the only thing he really looked forward to anymore was the food when he ate. ¡°Oh god,¡± he had said to himself. ¡°What am I turning into?¡±

    Drake noticed, to his dismay, that the indoctrinated people were all taking the events much harder than Drake or Ashton.

    ¡°It might be a byproduct of the indoctrination,¡± Drake had theorized to Ashton. ¡°Their mind¡¯s strength and resistance has been weakened by it, so they are more easily affected by the hardships here.¡±

    Ashton was very concerned still. ¡°They do not look like they will last much longer.¡± He had said anxiously. Drake had to agree with him.

    Drake replied, ¡°We need to do what we can for them then.¡±

    The dinner was as fabulous today as it was every day, meats and fruits covered the table when they arrived. The men could no longer appreciate it for its full value, though. With even less energy than usual, they ate quietly after the prayer and thanksgiving lead by Hairley. Nobody spoke but they all knew what each other were feeling, most of the men wondered if they would be able to last in the training or if what little strength they had would give out on them. Without a request this time, Ashton sang another song as much for himself as it was for everybody else. All the different squads were in similar shape to Drake¡¯s today, beaten, bloody, and dispirited, not even the indoctrination of faith they had been given could lift them out of their lifelessness.

    Hourbour sat next to Drake right during the meal and he ate his meal quietly. Ashton¡¯s song floated over the group and Drake asked Hourbour, ¡°What are you thinking of friend? Now of all times, we could use your heartening words, why do you stay silent now? It is unlike you.¡±

    Hourbour smiled weakly and said, ¡°I do not feel any words of such nature inside of me right now. There are only the stale words that I have been repeating since I first met you.¡±

    ¡°Are you losing your faith?¡± Drake asked bluntly.

    Hourbour shook his head, ¡°Losing faith? Certainly I am. But not in Kami, only in myself. I fear I do not have the strength to meet the demands of Kami anymore.¡±

    Drake did not know what to say, he looked at Hourbour sadly. ¡°It¡¯s funny,¡± Hourbour continued, turning to face Drake. ¡°I had thought that after I had made it here that it would all be well and good. I had thought that after the pilgrimage we would simply be accepted into the arms of Kami straight away. I should have known it would not be that simple. We are barbarians after all; it makes sense that we have to go through this purification.¡±

    ¡°Purification?¡± Drake asked setting down his apple.

    ¡°Yes, purification.¡± Hourbour  repeated. ¡°That¡¯s how I see this training. We are in the holy city of Kami, Drake! Isn¡¯t it impossible for sinful people like us to simply walk in, clad in our dirty souls? There needs to be some sort of cleaning before we are permitted to actually enter the city proper, right? A pure and holy god such as Kami cannot allow people like us to pollute his presence, we need to be cleaned first, that is what I believe this whole experience is. But,¡± Hourbour continued sadly, picking up Drake¡¯s apple and taking a bite of it. ¡°Perhaps once the sinful part of me is scrubbed off there will be nothing left of me? Perhaps all this place is is a setting where we realize our own shortcomings and perish with its realization?¡±

    Drake felt troubled by Hourbour¡¯s words and he replied, ¡°I don¡¯t see the residence of this place being any more holy than we are.¡± Hourbour didn¡¯t respond and Drake continued with force, ¡°Listen to me Hourbour, I do not believe we are intended to die here. And even if we are, I won¡¯t let that happen. We are going to survive this, together, okay?¡±

    Hourbour shook his head and didn¡¯t respond. Drake finished the apple while brooding.

    Hariley led the worship time and after the dinner he stood at the head of the table and looked at all of the men. He sensed the mood of the table and looked at them all with sympathy. Rather than starting the ritual praise, he said to them instead, ¡°They really beat the life out of you today, didn¡¯t they? I haven¡¯t seen everybody so dead for my service since that last recruits were here. Without fail, the first day of technique training creates this same air.¡± He held out his hand as if to snatch the feeling there. ¡°Despair and apathy and fear, all mixed together. Let me tell you gentlemen, it does not smell good and it is not something the baths can wash off you. It rises from you and fills this entire place, emanating out and into the Holy city. Kami smells the incense and he turns away from you at its repulsiveness.¡± He flicked his hand in disgust.

    At that statement, he captured the attention of many of them. Hourbour looked up intently, ¡°Yes, he turns away,¡± Hairley repeated. ¡°And why wouldn¡¯t he? You yourselves have turned away from him first.¡±

    ¡°Is there any hope then?¡± a man cried out. ¡°Even Kami has abandoned us in this place!¡±

    There was a sudden great distress and noise at the pronouncement and many of the other men called out in despair. Hairley had to smash down a drinking jar to get their attention again; it broke to pieces upon the table. ¡°Fools,¡± Hairley called out. ¡°Have you forgotten where you are? And have you forgotten what you are doing here? You are inside The Endless City completing the holy work that Kami himself has laid down upon you! How could you give up hope when the path is so clear before? Kami is faithful to those who are faithful, but those who turn against him will be thrown away and burned along with the enemy! For those who follow the will of Kami there will be salvation and grace. Never lose faith in your ability to complete his work here, the god most high has put it upon you!¡±

    ¡°But I do not have the strength to accomplish all that is expected of me!¡± another voice called out and the men cried out in agreement.

    ¡°Of course not,¡± Hairley responded harshly. ¡°It is not your own strength that you should be leaning on in the first place! Were you not told that when you first arrived here? Your strength is in your friends, in your comrade who share your burden with you. But most importantly, it is in Kami that you find your strength. Human flesh can wither and die but the life of friendship and the strength of Kami endures forever. Put your faith and hope in Kami again and you will be renewed in your spirit.¡±

    ¡°Increase our faith!¡± the men cried out and Hairley answered them.

    ¡°Those who have strength, steady the man next to you, for those of you who have despair, share it with those around. When all men carry the burden and share the strength, all men will make it through. Kami is a great and merciful god who gives second and third chances to those who disobey him. But woe to him who doubts the authority and might of Kami, he will be slit from his pack like a chisel to a sculpting wood and tossed outside the walls of this city were creatures of every black type will devour him. To him who lives in the grace of Kami, blessings and power will be bestowed on him. He gives strength to the weak and boldness to the timid so that they may perform every deed asked of them! The will of Kami is pure and his purpose is ever righteous. You have been placed here in order to fulfill that will and serve your purpose in the army of Kami.¡±

    Hariley suddenly broke into verse, speaking words with almost hypnotic energy,

    ¡°Blessed are the hungry,

    for they will be satisfied with the Bread of Kami

    Blessed are those who are lost in the darkness,

    For Kami will guide them and save them,¡±

    With every sentence, the noise in the dining hall grew; creating a frenzy and Hariley spoke ever louder to be heard.

    ¡°Blessed are those who are giving up their old lives for Kami,

    For he will give them new ones, full of strength and faith

    Blessed are those who persevere through his trials!

    For in the end, they will find the bliss and peace in the arms of our god!¡±

    The yelling and praise from the men became too great for the men to hear Hairly, but he still shouted it out,

    ¡°BLESSED ARE THOSE WHO ACCOMPLISH THE WILL OF KAMI,

    FOR KINGDOM AND GLORY AND POWER WILL BE EVER THEIRS AT THE END OF THE DAYS!¡±

    The hall had erupted in praise, gladness, and madness; the words of Hairley were too powerful for the emotionally unstable men. There was much yelling and crying of people who renewed their vows to Kami, some were on their knees; others were up jumping around in their exultation. Hairely led them all in singing and worship of Kami and the men¡¯s spirits rose as they never had before. All the pains and struggles of the day were forgotten and they frenzied in their worship and gladness of Kami.

    Even Ashton and Drake were not unaffected by the spellbinding words of the prophet of Kami, and they felt themselves get swept up in the current. But still, they were able to look upon the situation objectively.  Ashton found his way to Drake¡¯s side and gave him a concerned look. He leaned towards him and asked loudly over the noise, ¡°What is going on? The dead men before have transformed into a   mob!¡±

    Drake shouted back, ¡°This is part of the indoctrination as well, I believe! They break the spirit of the people here and then fix it how they want!¡± Drake paused for a second as the usually silent Geothro walked by, singing and weeping loudly. Drake continued. ¡°Even I feel its power! Be careful, Ashton and don¡¯t let yourself get caught up in it.¡±

    Ashton looked around in concern, ¡°Will they be okay?¡±

    Drake shrugged, ¡°Probably. All of this has been planned I¡¯ll bet, the way the balance the initial indoctrination with their physical training. This is just another part of the process. They certainly look more alive than before, right?¡±

    Ashton looked around again and had to agree. Where had all this energy come from? It was past the time to go to bed, but nobody seemed to care. Hairley was leading the whole group in song again. Ashton said to Drake, ¡°I do not like this Drake. It is unnatural. People shouldn¡¯t be messed around like this. Killing the body is one thing, but destroying the soul is another!¡±

    Drake agreed with him and said, ¡°Be sure to keep your wits about you then! Do not lose yourself in this place.¡±

 Chapter 19

    Gatal was in a state of agitation and he marched haughtily through the line of men across the military camp at the foot of the city. Kami¡¯s Lantern was straight above them signifying the noon of the day, but it also was also hot and rough to Gatal¡¯s eyes adding to his discomfort. He bowed his head low to avoid the bright light and struggled forward as gusts of wind tried to push him back. How he wished that Captain Soul¡¯s station was inside the comfortable city and not out here in the barren lands that lay before the Southern Gate! Even within Kami-sama¡¯s territory, the land outside the city was harsh and cruel to old men like Gatal.

    Out of all the territory outside the city, the seeming endless amount of land that stretched as far as the eyes could see from atop the wall, only this small portion in front of this southern gate was held by Kami¡¯s forces. There was a large hill in the center of the swath that had been raised by Kami himself long ago for some unknown purpose and it was the top of it that Gatal headed for now. The looming grassy slope held the commanding tents and structures for the force outside the wall that were simply known as the Frontline. Gatal reached the foot of the hill and sighed as he looked up it. For all of its strategic advantages, it was a pain to walk up and down.

    After a slight hesitation, Gatal proceeded to climb the Hill, putting one booted foot in front of the other and ignoring the other people that passed by on the dirt pathway. Although the swath of land in Kami¡¯s control was comparatively small, its true size was still enormous for the simple soldier. To defend this territory, no less than one hundred thousand men were stationed there at all times and that number was only included the tactical soldiers. There were also support men, priests, beasts of labor and governing bodies, all performing their separate and necessary duties for the meta-goal of a secure operational zone in front of the city. There was also the endless train of wagons that brought out food, materials, and other all-important resources from the city. Kami¡¯s dinner didn¡¯t appear outside the city walls; for the soldiers outside it appeared near the gate every day and needed to be brought out to the waiting men.

    Gatal reached the summit of the hill and it was wide and flat as though a mighty hand had simply swept the peak off from its throne. Sprawling structures and tents filled up every square unit though and the headquarters was still a short march away. The backside of the hill Gatal had just walked up was long and gentle making it an easy climb, but the front side was steep and stony. Gatal often wondered whether or not this hill had been made for such a dangerous day as this long ago, but he knew that nobody else even considered that idea. It was inconceivable to them that Kami-sama would have ever predicted or prepared for a day when his city was under siege. Gatal wanted to point out that if Kami-sama was as powerful and all-knowing as they claimed he wouldn¡¯t have been shut into his city like he has been. But he knew better than to suggest that.

    From the top of the hill he got a clear view of the surrounding area, all the territory kami held. Most of the land to the west was forest with well-traveled paths that were hidden from his view. the paths created the infrastructure of the forces. There were several strategic points fortified across the area that could yet be seen by him like the one near the river bend. The small but study fortification was built around a ford in the river making it an important traveling junction. To the East there were rocky hills much like the one Gatal was standing on now. The terrain was harsh and difficult to pass through, it was a natural barrier that protected them. Still, Gatal new there were stations of outposts and look out spots carefully hidden in the hills there as a precaution. To the south was the real defensive struggle. It was large plain with soft hills and creeks scattered around. Few trees grew there and in this location the bulk of the defenses were located. It was the most easily travelled route to attack their position and thus, it was the most heavily fortified. Every small hill or excuse for a defensible spot was taken advantage of and a walled fort was built on it. At the end of the territory Kami¡¯s forces had built a retaining wall as best they could and it was low and sturdy, meant for slowing an army down rather than stopping them. From the hill Gatal was on; he could see all the southern lands and defenses before him.  He wasn¡¯t impressed. He turned from the view and headed for the command tent.

    There were armored guards along the path, mostly for ceremony Gatal thought, and they nodded in recognition of Gatal and let him pass without interruption. Gatal smiled steely at their respect, it was something hard won. When he had first come into Soul¡¯s company nobody thought he was worthy of even recognition. Now after years of excellent service and well-chosen actions there were only few who sneered at him.

    And out of all who disliked him the worst was Vorash, the priest who was talking loudly at the center of the command tent when Gatal entered it. It was only out of duty and fear that Vorash listen to Gatal, Gatel knew that Vorash hated him.

    At the moment, Vorash was complaining to Captain Soul and it was clear that with Captain Soul¡¯s demotion in rank, Vorash¡¯s respect for him diminished as well. He didn¡¯t have much respect to begin with, though, and lashed out against the captain angrily, ¡°These conditions are not acceptable, Captain!¡± Despite the bright light of the day, the tent was dark and lit loosely with only one lantern. The effort to keep out the dust and wind also had the side effect of creating a closed and dark setting.

    Captain Soul stood calmly before the spell caster, wearing a dark blue uniform of a Captain rather than the white one of his previous position. Gatal thought he wore it just as much dignity, though, his stately uniform wrinkle free and spotless. A gold sash hung across it his chest signifying his executive authority in the Frontline. Gatal smiled at the sight because, whatever the council might have said, by giving Soul executive authority over these forces they had given him the same authority as if he was still a Commander-general. He was glad they did not mix up politics with reality too much.

    Also in the room with them were various military advisers, messengers, and ambassadors from all the different regiments held under the captain¡¯s authority. Some stood stoically with Captain Soul, but many were not able to hide their disgust with the spell caster that spoke with such disrespect to their beloved Captain.

    The captain replied to Vorash harshly, an attitude he rarely used. ¡°You will have to accept it Vorash, or I will report your insubordination to the council. Do not think that your reputation will save you there, it certainly did not save me.¡±

    Without another word, only a hateful glare at the captain, Vorash wrapped his cloak around himself and stormed out of the tent, barking wildly at the two spell casters who followed him. In his anger, Vorash didn¡¯t see Gatal until he bumped into him. ¡°OUT OF MY WAY!¡± he snarled savagely for a second until he realized who he was addressing. He froze for a moment, and then stepped aside and left silently, kicking up dust with his footsteps. Gatal heard the captain sigh heavily and sit down at his desk. He looked over at Gatal and said steadily to the remaining men in the tent, ¡°That is all for now, please go and follow my orders.¡±

    The men hesitated, and one on the right hand of the captain dressed in armor and cloaked in Grey said, ¡°Sir, there are still other matters that need to be attended to.¡± Gatal had not seen this man before, but judging from his ease in the captain¡¯s presence and the scar on his face, he looked like a seasoned veteran. Gatal liked the look of him.

    ¡°Yes, I know, Commander Davison¡± Soul responded. ¡°But it will have to wait a little bit longer, I am afraid.¡±

    Davison resigned his objection, but another man protested again and Soul had to force them out saying, ¡°Go now! I understand the importance of these matters; you do not have to keep saying that.  But something urgent just came up; waiting ten minutes will not cause harm.¡±

    The men bowed slightly to him saying, ¡°Yes, Sir.¡± They left, but not before some got their parting scowl at Gatal. It was clear they thought his presence was not worthy of their captain¡¯s. Only Commander Davison respectfully bowed to Gatal and he did likewise in return. Davison left without another word. Gatal held the tent door flap for them and closed it once they all left, leaving them both in a sudden dimness.  Gatal came in and commented, ¡°I¡¯ve never seen you talk to a subordinate like that before.¡±

    Soul looked back and grunted, ¡°Vorash doesn¡¯t seem like a subordinate anymore, just an angry and rebellious child.¡±

    Gatal snickered at the description. ¡°Why did you keep his order with you? You could have selected another block of spell casters to accompany you.¡±

    Soul sighed and said, ¡°It¡¯s true that I didn¡¯t request another set of spell casters, but I didn¡¯t think that his group would be selected to work with us again out of the dozens of available groups.¡± He sat down in his chair and leaned back looking at Gatal squarely, ¡°Actually, it seems he requested to be sent out here. He is an ambitious person, perhaps he thought he could gain some renown on the Frontline. But, I¡¯m sure if he had known I was to be his commander again, he wouldn¡¯t have been so eager to come.¡±

    ¡°What¡¯s the problem?¡±

    ¡°The problem?¡± Soul replied. ¡°There are too many to count.¡±

    Gatal considered for a moment and then asked, ¡°What was Vorash upset about?¡±

    With a loud creak in his chair Captain Soul stood up and said, ¡°A great many things actually, and not all of them related to me.¡± He stepped outside of the tent and Gatal went with him. ¡°I could use some fresh air, being in a tent all day does not suit me, despite what my eager young subordinates seem to think. Take a walk with me.¡± The two left the tent together and strolled towards the edge of the hill. ¡°Do you know how many outposts we have on this side of the wall?¡± he asked Gatal once they were in view of the frontier.

    Gatal looked out and asked, ¡°Forts and everything?¡± The captain nodded. ¡°I¡¯d say close to one hundred.¡±

    ¡°Closer to two hundred, actually,¡± the captain corrected. ¡°And I need to be able to communicate with all of them at a moment¡¯s notice. Skirmishes with the enemy are becoming more frequent, and more scattered around the perimeter. They are testing our strength and resistance, looking for a weakness. I need to know when and where they are attacking the moment it occurs so I can properly use my forces. I need spell casters at all the outposts to set up this communication. Can you believe there was not such a communication network already set up?¡±Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.

    Gatal was not surprised and he knew that, despite his words, Captain Soul was not surprised either. The previous commander did not stress the importance of communication as Captain Soul did. Or a great many other things that Soul was now scrambling to fix. Gatal asked him, ¡°Are you setting up one now?¡±

    ¡°Trying to,¡± Soul replied in disgust. ¡°But there are too few magicians out here. Inside the city there were tens of magicians coming out of every palace and hall, but out here I can only scrape up as many as I can find.¡±

    ¡°Did you send a request to the military board for more?¡± Gatal asked, stating the obvious.

    ¡°Yes, yes,¡± Soul replied dryly. ¡°And they said that in the Defensive Mandate I will be acquiring as many spell casters as I need. Hundreds even.¡±

    ¡°The Defensive Mandate?¡± Gatal inquired, surprised at the name.

    Soul raised his eyebrow at Gatal, ¡°You, with all your ears, haven¡¯t heard about it? I find that hard to believe.¡±

    Gatal waved it away, ¡°I have been busy the last few weeks remember? If I recall correctly it was you who sent me down to the lower levels to deal with irregulars.¡±

    ¡°You do not recall correctly,¡± Soul replied with a smile. ¡°It was the council¡¯s decision not mine. And if I recall correctly, it was you who said you were grossly overqualified. Why did it take you so long to return?¡±

    Gatal looked at Soul with glowing and excited eyes, ¡°I found something interesting, actually. It took a lot of planning and work to get him where I wanted him to go but I have high hopes for him yet.¡± Gatal waved it off again, ¡°but that story if for another time, quit playing with me and tell me about this Defensive Mandate!¡±

    Soul shook his head. He reached in his robe and took out a scroll. Unrolling, he said stately, ¡°While the last Council meeting had put me out here and demoted me to Captain, the real news from the meeting was the Defensive Mandate. The council has decided that an attack by the enemy is imminent and has concentrated its forces on defense. Listen to this, In accordance with the highest wisdom and intelligence, the council of the Divine, along with all the powers of the state and under the hand of Kami-sama, do declare the city to be in a position of imminent threat of the enemy and from all the forces at his disposal. As such, all powers and responsibility of the state, delegated throughout the governing body, are now taken up solely by this Council in order to coordinate an effective defensive position to counter the increasing pressure put out by the enemy. This statement is authorization and orders for all high commanders of the City¡¯s military powers to prepare their minds and hearts for the coming of war once again and to heed the voice of Kami and to bring about the salvation of the city.¡± Captain Soul rolled up the scroll again, ¡°Of course there is much more to it, long and full of words. But the meaning is clear so let me summarize. In the city all available forces are put on standby status, all resources are put in reserve, and new defensive plans have been drawn up and implemented. The council has taken up all the authority of the military. In short,¡± Soul said looking down at Gatal. ¡°The whole city is on alert and preparing for an attack. The council means to meet the threat head on.¡±

    Gatal looked back at Soul with wide eyes, ¡°That is incredible, Sir! That is just what we wanted. You counseled them for that decision, didn¡¯t you? I never thought they would actually do it though!¡±

    ¡°It wasn¡¯t just me who counseled them,¡± Captain Soul said modestly. ¡°Many other officers and aristocrats felt the same. Still, I was very relieved when the Mandate was issued two days after you left for the lower levels.¡±

    Gatal felt like jumping for joy. He said excitedly, ¡°when are the reinforcements supposed to arrive? With the complement of spell casters no doubt!¡±

    Soul said dryly, ¡°Last week, actually. That¡¯s the problem.¡±

    Gatal felt his joy leave suddenly. ¡°Last week?¡±  He asked incredulously, ¡°what is holding them up?¡±

    ¡°I am, apparently.¡± Soul replied. Gatal merely shot a confused look at Soul. He continued, ¡°or at least, indirectly.¡± He sighed and said, ¡°It seems that most of my former comrades in brass feel it was wrong of the council to demote me. They are boycotting and delaying the Defensive Mandate as much as they can in a statement of discontent. They want me reinstated as General- Commander. That is why my spell casters are not here yet. Nor the reinforcements of men either, as much as fifty thousand are expected in the first wave alone I am told.¡±

    Gatal was flabbergasted and he could barely get his words out. His eyes bulged in anger and he stamped his feet. ¡°What does-why would- this is outrageous¡­¡±

    Soul leaned against a tent pole and said, ¡°I know, I know. It is very frustrating.¡±

    Gatal found his words. ¡°If they wanted to do something for you, they then should be helping you get the people you need!¡±

    Soul replied calmly. ¡°I sent them all a message asking them to stop, but it is unlikely to do so. At this rate, they are going to have a significant clash with the Divine aristocracy. I do not know what might happen.¡±

    ¡°They are delaying the rush of preparation for an attack from the enemy because of their trivial politics!? Don¡¯t they realize what is at stake?!¡± Soul made to answer but Gatal answered his own question with wrath, ¡°Of course not, right?! Why would they?! They all believe in the all-powerful Kami-sama, why would they care about trivial things such as defenses? They could all stuff their faces with pastries while the field is overrun and not give a hoot about it! Those fatalist pigs! What do they really care about?¡±

    Soul put a hand on his friend¡¯s shoulder. ¡°You go too far Gatal. I understand your frustration, I share it too. But we must still do what we can for the situation, yelling about it won¡¯t help anything. We need calm reasoning and quick action now, more than ever.¡±

    Gatal shot him a glare, ¡°Why do you care? Whether you work hard or not you believe that everything will end the same, why do you sacrifice yourself so much for this city?¡±

    Soul responded stately, ¡°Because I believe that men will be rewarded for the deeds they performed in their life. I know that Kami will win this fight, just as I knew he would win it at the battle of Crushed Snake all those years ago. It is my joy and honor to be the tool he uses to accomplish his will. I want to continue to be his tool in the time to come. If I die now, I will die knowing I have done the best any man could do for their god. Does that make sense to you?¡±

    Gatal pulled away from the captain, fuming silently. He couldn¡¯t understand the captain, not ever. He felt in his heart a dread he had been carrying around with him for a long time now, the dread of losing his captain to death, empty and fruitless death. He turned away and asked instead, ¡°What does this all have to do with Vorash¡¯s anger?¡±

    ¡°Ah, yes,¡± Soul replied coming up next to Gatal again. ¡°I had ordered him and his underlings to create and act as the communication network until the new spell casters arrive.¡± Gatal snorted in half amusement. Communication for spell casters is a relatively simple job and for the elite group that Vorash was the head of, he knew they would find it demeaning.

    ¡°There are only about 70 of them, and you said close to two hundred outposts? How are you going to-.¡±

    Soul interrupted him. ¡°Of course, I can¡¯t have all of the outposts manned, but if I strategically place the spell casters and have them do a little running around on their own, I believe I can get enough coverage to satisfy me.¡± Gatal snickered again at the thought of those proud magicians running around.

    ¡°What did you offer him to do this?¡± Gatal asked.

    Soul stood up straight and asked, ¡°What makes you think I gave up something for him?¡±

    Gatal rolled his eyes. ¡°Come on, Vorash wouldn¡¯t ever do such a thing without some form of compensation. Besides,¡± he continued. ¡°I heard Vorash screaming that your offer was unacceptable when I first walked in.¡±

    Soul fingered with his sash for a moment and then said, ¡°You are right, besides wanting to get a little bit of cooperation from Vorash, I felt it was unfair to ask so much from him without a reward.¡±

    Gatal waited expectantly, ¡°So?¡± he asked after a moment of silence. ¡°What did you give him?¡±

    Soul found his sash very interesting again and he fingered it without looking at Gatal. Gatal felt horror come over him. ¡°You didn¡¯t!¡± he said indignantly.

    Soul looked up and said plainly, ¡°I did.¡±

    ¡°You gave him command of all the spell casters in the Defensive mandate?!¡± Gatal yelled.

    ¡°Indeed, I did.¡± Soul replied, ¡°I felt it was a reasonable trade.¡±

    ¡°Vorash as head of the Magicians?!¡± Gatal yelled again, his voice was getting rough from straining it repeatedly. ¡°He is incompetent, hasn¡¯t he shown you that over and over again? You want him to be giving orders during a battle?¡±

    ¡°I understand your misgivings about him. He does act childishly sometimes. He is ambitious and savage sometimes, too, but I know that when given duties he feels is worthy of himself, he will do an outstanding job. He did not get to his current position while being stupid you know, there is intelligence inside of him.¡±

    Gatal just shook his head and muttered quietly. Soul looked out over the plains, ignoring it. After a moment Gatal spat at him, ¡°And by Kami¡¯s great chair, what am I supposed to do? You just gave away my job! Did you have any good news for me, or did you just call me here to run me ragged?¡±

    Soul looked back at Gatal patronizingly, ¡°Gatal! I am surprised you are not taking this better. It relieves you of some responsibility and should free you to do certain things that require your attention. I am sure a man such as yourself will find some way to pass the time. You did mention you found something interesting, did you not? When you are ready, tell me about it. I called you here so you could do your esteemed work unhindered.¡±

    Gatal paused, and then snorted suddenly. ¡°When you find yourself lost in the battle because your spell casters are lost too, you had better take responsibility and not blame me.¡±

    Soul replied meaningfully, ¡°I take responsibility for all of my decisions.¡± He stood up straight again and walked back to his command tent. ¡°It¡¯s good to talk with you again, I am afraid I have work to attend to though. I sense my subordinates losing their composure in agitation.¡± He called out over his shoulder to Gatal. ¡°I expect great things from you in this assignment!¡±

    Gatal thundered back, ¡°You mean the assignment of not have a real place in this army anymore?¡±

    Soul turned around and walked backwards for a moment, yelling back, ¡°Think of all the things you could accomplish for this army without the restrictions of orders and command?¡± He grinned at Gatal and stepped away.

    Gatal stood still for a moment and then said to himself sardonically, ¡°Actually, there are a lot of things I could do¡­¡±

 Chapter 20

    Captain Liehold was uncomfortable, and it wasn¡¯t only due to the tight fitting and stiff formal uniform he was wearing. When the dinner invitation came two weeks ago from Council member Sevril of the Divine Council, he knew it for what it really was. The Aristocracy often held large parties, platforms from which they could display their wealth and power to the city. Humans were often invited, but only the highest ranked officials or the prominently placed citizens were important enough. As a captain, Liehold was rarely invited to these gatherings and that was the way he preferred it. Nothing seems as distasteful to him then spending time in a building of opulent luxury and gossip with people whom he disliked. On any given day, Liehold would rather be in the front lines with his troops.

    But upon seeing the invitation, Liehold knew that something was different about it. The host for it was none other than Sevril, the Head of the council of the Divine, part of the true aristocracy. It was unheard of such a proud and prominent member of society would create such an event, and even more unusual that LIehold was invited. Liehold was intelligent enough to understand that such an invitation was not a request.

    The party was held at the personal residence of Councilman Sevril, but Liehold doubted that a better building could have been found to host the event. Sevril¡¯s residence was a huge palace near the center of the city. High walls and decorated ceilings gave off the effect of incalculable wealth, along with the fusion of light and crystal that hung from the building like moss. Each of the different floors in the palace illustrated different settings of glory. The bottom floor depicted wind and air with art and gems and sculptures to illustrate it. The second floor was decorated in the form of water, and the third was of fire and heat. The top floor was decorated in gold and light representing the power of Kami and his majesty above all of his creation.

    Liehold stood alone in the crowd on the main floor, in awe of the beauty of the palace despite himself.  All around him men and women were talking and laughing, each wearing their fancy uniforms and dress with an ease and familiarity Liehold did not have. Unlike Liehold, they seemed impervious to the splendors of palace, with the exception of the food provided. Long silver cords hung down from the ceiling, falling almost to waist level and supporting the trays balancing with different assortments of food and drink on them. Liehold had never seen such set up for food delivery before, much less the type of food provided.

    Liehold felt overwhelmed when he first entered the palace and he thought for a moment that perhaps he had entered the temple instead. He had wanted to run and hide from the glory, but he had resisted the urge with force of will. Now Liehold endured the riches and the company with a scowl. He scowled at the atmosphere around him, he scowled at his own weakness, and he scowled at the drink he was holding. It was a red fruity drink he could not identify that left a pleasantly sweet aftertaste in his mouth. Despite his thirst, he could not help feeling that if he gave in and took a sip, he would be condoning this event.

    Looking around again, Liehold beheld the lavish splendor of the room. Once he got over the blinding awesomeness of it, he was able to discern some of the details. There were precious gems and marble pillars majestically holding the roof up, there were dignified staircases connecting the levels to each other. There were lights and colors that astounded and attracted the eyes. But of all the wondrous decorations, Liehold knew the most impressive aspect of the room was the food and drinks available. The varied and fine dishes that were available displayed the favor that the host had with Kami.

    Liehold looked at his drink again and then finished it with a quick gulp. He tried to savor the taste, but it was too rich for him. He wished again that night, that he was at his post.

    Suddenly, a short and squat figure appeared before him and brought him in for a hug. ¡°Liehold!¡± Captain Grisly exclaimed. ¡°It is so good to see you! It has been months since we had last met!¡±

    ¡°A couple of years, to be precise.¡± Liehold responded doufully. He pushed away from Captain Grisly as if he was coated in filth.

    Grisly did not lose a beat, ¡°Either way it has been far too long, there is so much that has changed here since you took deployment on the front lines!¡± Grisly was merry and blossoming with energy, holding a drink in one hand and a plate of food in the other. Liehold wondered briefly how he was able to eat like that.

    ¡°It seems everything has changed.¡± Liehold responded, actually thinking that everything looked the same.

    ¡°Oh, you would not believe how much has happened around here. Why I was telling General-Commander Kielly just minutes ago about the recent happenings around here and he was most interested. Did you know what Captain Sceen accomplished last quarter? Truly remarkable it was, she was able to house a special event¡­¡±

    Liehold did not hear what exactly Captain Sceen had done; he stopped listening to the silly and sweaty man before him, and wondered why he was being punished like this. People like Grisly had always annoyed him, the officers who took cozy domestic positions that required little effort. Like Grisly, those officers soon became entangled within the web of gossip and intrigue within the aristocracy. Some men like Grisly thrived off of it, others did not. Liehold had avoided domestic positions as much as he could.

    Captain Grisly¡¯s voice came into understanding again when the man grabbed Liehold¡¯s shoulder in a friendly manner. The drink he had in it earlier was gone and he was saying, ¡°And he didn¡¯t think that the man was worth a blit of light, but he still managed to get the job done. I surely wouldn¡¯t have offered him a second chance though, not after the mistake he had made. A captain can¡¯t be too soft on his officers otherwise they will-.¡± His voice suddenly raised an octave and he grabbed the clothing of a young man passing by. ¡°And here is my young Lieutenant Fallow who managed to secure an invitation to this party! Where have you been? You disappeared the moment we stepped in here together.¡± He dragged the lieutenant into view of Captain Liehold. ¡°Fallow is one of my best officers, with him around I know I can relax. I understand that you two served together on your wilderness expeditions not too long ago.¡±

    ¡°It is true,¡± Liehold said in surprise. Fallow had on his formal uniform as well and he was wearing a forced smile in front of Grisly. ¡°It¡¯s good to see you again, lieutenant. I hope you are enjoying your post on the wall.¡±

    Lieutenant Fallow brightened noticeably at the sight of his previous Captain, ¡°Thank you sir. It is good to see you again as well. How are things at your post?¡±

    ¡°As fine as ever.¡± Liehold responded smiling, glad to have a man of similar values in the room with him. ¡°How did you manage to get an invitation to Councilman Servil¡¯s gathering?¡±

    Grisly intervened before Fallow could respond, apparently ill at ease at not being part of the conversation. ¡°I know, isn¡¯t it strange? But apparently, all the lieutenants from the recent wilderness expedition were invited. Of course, most could not come, but I was able to drag Fallow here with me. I wouldn¡¯t let him miss this event for the all the gold in Kami¡¯s coffers! It is strange though, I must say, the whole thing is strange.¡±

    ¡°There have been a number of strange things happening lately.¡± Liehold said casually. Despite his distaste for Grisly, Liehold stayed in his good graces for a reason. Grisly might not be clever or deceptive, but his gossiping skills let him be one of the most unofficially informed humans in the city. Liehold was able to obtain a lot of information from the man.

    ¡°It is true!¡± Grisly exclaimed, glad to be the center of attention again. ¡°I have never seen such disruption within the city before. Men are becoming mad! It all started the day Soul returned from the wilderness with you.¡± Fallow had been eyeing the different colored drinks nearby but his attention picked up at the name of his former commander. ¡°I doubt such a big ruckus had ever been centered on a human before.¡±

    ¡°What ruckus?¡± Fallow inquired, carelessly taking the closest drink and returning to the conversation.

    ¡°You hadn¡¯t heard?¡± Grisly asked inquired deliciously. ¡°The council of the Divine demoted Soul and made him a Captain as punishment for returning early from the wilderness expedition. This outraged many of the high ups in the army; many had viewed Soul as some sort of savior. They have been up in arms since then.¡±

    ¡°Surely not in rebellion?¡± Fallow replied in horror. Girsly laughed at him.

    ¡°Of course not. But they have the ability to create trouble in their own way.¡± Grisly threw his arms wide theatrically. ¡°It seems they are very serious about their beliefs!¡±

    ¡°And rightly so,¡± Liehold put in. ¡°There is not a man in the city who can match up to General-Commander Sou-.¡±

    ¡°A man, maybe, but not the divine.¡± Grisly said easily. ¡°And he is not a General-Commander anymore Liehold, just a captain now.¡± Grisly forgot to use Liehold¡¯s title as captain, but Liehold ignored it. Grisly continued. ¡°Many of the officials started protesting the council¡¯s decision. There has been strife between the two for a long time now and they are using it as a platform to speak on. The restructuring of the forces in the city only adds to the problem. Many of the officers in the domestic forces have been put on operating status! Even my own division is on standby.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Fallow said suddenly. ¡°How come I wasn¡¯t informed of this!¡±

    Grisly laughed. ¡°Oh, I forgot, you are one of my lieutenants. I had been keeping it a secret from you. But it¡¯s on the table now! Yes, we have been put on standby status. But I do not think they would transfer us, not after my long years of service here.¡±

    ¡°But the men need to know of the possibility,¡± Fallow said angrily. ¡°They need to prepare themselves! We must inform them when we get back-.¡°

    Grisly hadn¡¯t lost his good mood, ¡°Lieutenant, Lieutenant. You need to learn to enjoy the moment. Those things can wait; we are at a party right now. That kind of talk can wait till later.¡±

    Fallow looked mutinous so Liehold asked quickly, ¡°What happened to the former General-Commander?¡±

    ¡°Yes, indeed,¡± Grisly said dramatically, getting back into it. Fallow was left simmering alone. ¡°You see, nobody suspected that the council would act in such a manner, to think that the hero of Crushing Snake had fallen so low. Many of the mid and upper level officials were upset at the judgment; they believed it was too harsh for such a man. But you know,¡± he said now waving a fat finger before Liehold. ¡°He is getting older now and he has that foreign priest by his side always. I never understood why he hung around such a creature, but now he is surely paying for it. He is simply not the man he used to be.¡±

    ¡°He is yet the most skilled commander in the city, Grisly,¡± Liehold said stately. ¡°Even more so in his old age.¡±

    Grisly held up his hands innocently. ¡°All is the will of Kami,¡± he said. Liehold grunted softly and looked away. Grisly continued, ¡°I understand your devotion to the man, but if he is as good as you say, he will still perform great service to Kami where he is.¡±

    ¡°Where has Captain Soul been placed, anyway?¡± Fallow asked, apparently suppressing his anger.

    ¡°He has been positioned on ground floor southern wall,¡± Liehold said almost bitterly.

    ¡°Really?¡± Fallow said, sounding intrigued. Liehold knew why. The southern gate that Captain Soul now oversaw was the same gate he issued out his forces, years ago, at the battle of Crushed Snake, breaking the siege. The enemy still held most of the territory outside the city, surrounding it, but that one gate and swath of land beyond was held by The Endless City, letting forces travel in an out of the territory. It was one of the most strategically important spots in the city.

    ¡°It is true,¡± Grisly said. ¡°And interesting things are happening there as well, especially since the Defensive Mandate that was issued a couple months ago and the new restructuring. Thousands of soldiers have been redirected for gate and field defense. And did you know,¡± he said as if he held some delicious treat. ¡°Captain Soul has been given elevated executive status over the forces there?¡±

    ¡°The Councilmen are too smart to waste away the talents of Captain Soul,¡± Liehold replied. ¡°It only makes sense to give him executive authority over the causeway. Especially due to the increasing pressure put on by the enemy.¡±Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    ¡°So, it is true then,¡± Fallow put in. ¡°The enemy is preparing an attack? There are such rumors floating around the men.¡±

    The two captain¡¯s looked down at Fallow, and Liehold wondered what drove the lieutenant to ask that.  Liehold answered, ¡°The rumors of the soldiers are ever groundless, and you shouldn¡¯t take heed of them. But it is true there have been increasing skirmishes and clashes along the causeway¡¯s defensive perimeter. Extra divisions have been sent there to help reinforce it as part of the restructuring.¡±

    ¡°But such actions are groundless I say,¡± Grisly added. ¡°Many of my friend¡¯s forces have been sent away. Can you believe it? These officers have spent their lives in the domestic service of The Endless City and then they get sent to the front lines. Such cold orders! The defense of the city is ever secure in the Hands of Kami.¡±

    Liehold shuddered a little thinking of all the captains just like Grisly being sent to the front lines and actually being expected to issue combat orders. He was glad that at least Grisly¡¯s division hadn¡¯t been sent to the front lines, at least for now. He watched Captain Grisly snag a passing treat off of a floating tray.

    Fallow then asked something that surprised Liehold. ¡°What would happen if the southern gate was lost?¡± he asked seriously.

    Grisly looked back at Fallow as if he was looking at a foreign entity. ¡°What are you saying boy? Why would we lose the southern gate?¡±

    Fallow appeared confused, ¡°The enemy forces are preparing to attack the gate area, or so the evidence suggests. Do you think otherwise?¡±

    ¡°Well certainly they can attack us,¡± Grisly said. ¡°But we will defeat them in that fight. That is the only end I can see.¡±

    ¡°How can you say that?¡± Fallow asked. ¡°The battle of Crushed Snake was taking back territory we had been defeated in already, doesn¡¯t that mean that it is at least a possibility that the enemy forces could overrun ours this time?¡±

    Liehold felt troubled at the words. ¡°Where is your faith in Kami, boy?¡± Grisly asked, losing his cheesy smile for the first time. ¡°Kami has ever been and will continue to be victorious in his battles against the enemy.¡±

    Fallow opened his hands in a shrug as if it didn¡¯t matter, but his tone betrayed his real emotions. ¡°I guess I am simply confused. You say that Kami¡¯s forces are invincible, but can¡¯t you see that land stretched out before you from your post on top of the wall? Do you see the ruins of the old cities and countryside? That all used to be within the control of Kami, but now the enemy has it. That is all territory we have lost in the past. I have heard that long ago, there was even a time when Kami wasn¡¯t even at war with the enemy.¡±

    Grisly looked angry now and he walked up as close to Fallow as he could and got in his face. ¡°I do not know where you have heard these stories, boy,¡± he said, in a voice that finally earned his name. ¡°But you had best keep those ears shut. Those are the words of the faithless. People who believe such things live in dark holes of pain and filth, living outside the joy and light of Kami. Keep your faith in Kami, for all good things come from him.¡± Grisly stepped back and said, ¡°Your talk has made me lose my appetite for this.¡± He tossed the treat he had in his hand onto the close tray and it vanished half eaten. ¡°I am going to find something else.¡± He marched off in a huff.

    Liehold thought that Fallow looked upset too. ¡°I¡¯ve never seen Captain Grisly lose his smile like that,¡± he said with a tight one of his own. ¡°I think I actually enjoyed that.¡± Fallow looked up at the captain with an angry frown. ¡°What is bothering you?¡± Liehold asked, ¡°Besides this whole party.¡± Feeling comfortable all of a sudden, Liehold secured for himself another colored drink, a dark blue one this time.

    ¡°He insulted the Librarians,¡± Fallow glowered. ¡°He said that they were worthless and filthy.¡±

    ¡°The librarians don¡¯t believe in the infallibility of Kami?¡± Liehold asked, surprised. He took another sip of the drink.

    Fallow appeared thoughtful for a moment, ¡°I do not know what they believe, really.¡± he said, ¡°But they are the keeper of the histories. They were sanctioned by Kami himself, how can they be considered not State approved? I find it difficult to believe that any group of priests could be heretical; the words in the library are truth. Isn¡¯t that what the library is supposed to be?¡±

    Liehold asked casually, ¡°Do you visit the priests much?¡±

    ¡°Yes, I do,¡± Fallow nodded. ¡°In fact, one of the reasons I actually came to this party was that it is close to Central Library. Hopefully I will be leaving here soon and heading over there.¡±

    Liehold drained his drink, ¡°I cannot say that I have great knowledge of the librarians. As a Captain, I was required to take several lessons under them, but I never got the impression they were any different than other priests I had encountered. You asked whether or not the library holds truth. It holds facts, certainly, but do not get that mixed up with truth. Truth is what is here and what is present. Kami exists here and are not his words truth? I will not let myself get tied up in the past, I would advise you do to also.¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t appear to be appeased, ¡°But sir, how is it that Grisly can say that Kami is invincible when the proof of its opposite stares at him every day at his post?¡±

    Liehold shook his head. ¡°You ask difficult questions. I am certain that Kami struggles on our behalf and that the Battle with the enemy will end with his victory. How he chooses to achieve that victory is for him to decide. I can only say this,¡± he looked back and winked at Liehold. ¡°I am glad that reinforcements have been sent to the causeway, but I am also glad that Grisly wasn¡¯t sent there as well.¡±

    Despite his mood, Fallow smiled a bit at the jab, Liehold knew that Fallow did not have the highest respect for Captain grisly as well. ¡°Well, I am afraid you will not be able to leave this party soon to visit your friends in the library. The host has yet to arrive and you will not be forgiven if you leave early.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s true sir,¡± Fallow said, looking around. ¡°This really is a magnificent palace, certainly fit for a member of the council. I feel out of place here.¡±

    ¡°Then you can join me in feeling out of place.¡± Liehold said dryly. ¡°And you can stop calling me sir, at least in here. I won¡¯t have my only companion here saying that and making me look like I am forcing him here to keep me company.¡±

    ¡°Of course not,¡± Fallow replied, smiling. ¡°What kind of drink is that anyway?¡± he asked looking at the drink he had had in his hand for a while now.

    Liehold shook his head, ¡°I have no idea.¡±

    ¡°When is Councilman Sevril supposed to arrive, anyway?¡± Fallow asked, looking around and taking a sip of the drink. Upon tasting it he sputtered and choked a little on it.

    ¡°He is late already, but then again, it is foolish to ever think that divine beings would ever be on time.¡± Liehold said, hitting Fallow on the back while he was coughing. ¡°He will come when he feels like it, be it now or later.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Fallow said gasping, his eyes watering.

    The two officers walked through the party together, greeting acquaintances and admiring the palace. Many of the decorations and practical aspects of the palace displayed some form of novel sorcery, as if the host was doing his best to impress his guests. On the second level, there was an exquisite fountain of crystal that hung from the ceiling and reached down to the floor. In different areas, the water was flowing in designed paths of magic, more often than delicate physical curves and falls, governed the flow. Both of the officers spent a lot of time observing the structure and tracing the flow of water through it as it moved up and down and at impossible angles, defying physics.

    There were many other instances of magic throughout the palace, items of curiosity and practical use. Even Captain Liehold who was used to seeing sorcery was impressed.

    ¡°It would take a whole squad of priests to uphold event the decorative magic,¡± Fallow exclaimed after observing a statue that twisted and moved in accordance to sound and light. ¡°How could he use such power to decorate his home?¡±

    Liehold explained calmly, ¡°He operates this magic all on his own, most likely. He is not a member of the divine aristocracy for nothing. But I think he is putting a little extra effort into it tonight. I think he is planning something. If you haven¡¯t noticed, Captain Soul is not here himself.¡±

    ¡°Is it true then, what Captain Grisly was saying?¡± Fallow asked. ¡°About the discontent within the military? I haven¡¯t noticed anything from where I am posted.¡±

    ¡°I am not surprised you haven¡¯t, especially considering your captain won¡¯t even tell his lieutenants that they have been put on standby status.¡± Fallow¡¯s frown returned at the mention of it. ¡°But you must understand that your positions have always remained on the edge of city and out of the real action. I stay on the outside as well, but being a Captain means I need to stay informed.¡± He sighed and leaned against the railing that was on the second floor.

    ¡°Yes, what he was saying is true, although Soul never spoke out against the Council¡¯s decision; the human leaders in the Military are very upset. They have created movements against the council lately, seeking to obtain appeals to Kami. All of them should be here in fact, look.¡± He pointed towards a bald man with a large brown beard on the floor beneath them happily enjoying the company and the food. ¡°That is General-Commander Huoli, he is in charge of resource planning and repositioning within the city. As an act of protest, he has been delaying his projects, causing real issues and delays in the Defensive Mandate. And that person.¡± He pointed to a woman with short red hair and a fiery temperament on the floor across from them. ¡°That is Adjacent-General Deneuse, she has already submitted several appeal proposals to the temple legislator.¡± He turned back to face Fallow. ¡°Most of the top military is currently working against the Council, stalling and resisting as much as they can. I suspect that this party is an attempt to appease them.¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t respond and he looked deep in thought. He distractedly picked up a trinket he had noticed. It twirled and flashed with light in his hand in endless revolutions. He brought it to his eyes and said softly, ¡°Fascinating¡­¡±

    Liehold didn¡¯t see what was so fascinating about it. To him, and to most humans he knew, sorcery was a mysterious and intimidating event, and no amount of experience with it ever took that away from them. The priests and divine authority knew that as well and as the two factions depended on each other more and more during the war, it was necessary for the aristocracy to maintain their position of power above the humans. It created anger between the two races. The flashing lights were intriguing, but deep in his heart, Liehold wished that such power didn¡¯t exist; it created helplessness in the humans that could not be overcome.

    There was a sudden commotion on the main level and Liehold looked back and said, ¡°Ah, our host has arrived.¡± Fallow reluctantly put down the trinket and looked towards the noise as well.

    Councilman Sevril had entered his palace from the main door and gust of wind and light came in with him. He was tall and thin with shoulder length black hair meticulously groomed. His skin was pale and his jet black eyes surveyed the world with seeming lifeless rationality and disdain. He wore robes of many dark colors and also many ornaments of silver, gold and other precious gems on his fingers and neck. He strode in with grace and authority. All eyes had turned to him the moment he arrived and the noise level rose in the building.

    ¡°An impressive entrance,¡± Liehold said grudgingly, but then he gasped suddenly, and the whole palace became still when they saw who the councilman came in with.

    The new figure had the form of a human, but it could not be more clear even the most casual observer that it was not. To behold him was to see the very power of Kami directly and he reflected and the aura of Kami with his presence. He was even more eye catching than the councilman, clad in a simple white and gold tunic, contrasting with the dark and bold colors of the councilman. Its hair was golden and flowing like a lion¡¯s mane about it and in him was light, the light of the god. It wore only sandals on its feet but in his face was power and glory.

    As he looked around, the people saw his eyes were blank and white as if he was blind. But such strength was in the man that Liehold felt like a tiny insect before his eyes. The noise of the crowd within the palace had vanished for a moment when the new figure was seen, but then the palace buzzed with awe and dread. The two newcomers spoke with the guests, but they did not know how to respond to the presence. Liehold and Fallow on the floor above them could not hear what they were saying.

    Fallow asked in wonder, ¡°Who is that man with the councilman? I have never seen someone like that before.¡±

    ¡°It is one of Kami¡¯s vessels,¡± Liehold responded in disbelief. ¡°I have never seen one in person either, to think that Councilman Severil was able to attain its attendance at this event! Such presence is unheard of; they usually stay only within the temple of Kami. What does it mean, bringing him here?¡±

    The vessel moved through the crowd, leaving the host behind him. The crowd parted before the man, as if his aura alone could hurt them. He gazed around calmly searching for something. His eyes settled upon a man nearby he walked to him without hesitation. General-Commander Huoli froze absurdly with crumbs on his beard as the vessel stopped before him, staring him down. The vessel then spoke in a soft voice that could still somehow be heard by everybody in the palace.

    ¡°General-Commander Houli,¡± it said with absolute calm. ¡°You are in charge of the supplies and resource distribution in the city, are you not?¡± Houli, nodded pathetically and the vessel continued, ¡°Kami is upset at your failures in performing your function effectively and efficiently. Delays will not be tolerated and purposeful misconduct will be considered as treason. The will of Kami is absolute, do you understand?¡± Houli nodded again, his face full of fear.

    The vessel nodded himself, ¡°I am glad that you understand.¡± It said with almost a voice with relief. He reached up with his hand and touched Houli¡¯s left arm. There was a white light that emanated from the hand and suddenly the Houli screamed, in terror or pain, Liehold could not tell. The whole Palace shirked back in fear and when they looked again, Houli¡¯s left arm had vanished, leaving only a bloody stump there. Houli looked down at it in horror, soft whimpering sounds coming from him.

    The vessel spoke again, this time to the whole audience, ¡°The council is the arm of Kami and I am the hand. Their orders are absolute and are to be fulfilled without hesitation or resistance. Never forget that we are at War! Against an enemy that seeks to destroy each and every one of us! Kami is fighting for us, how can you fight against him? Punishment for treason is death, but the mercy of Kami has spared this man¡¯s life. I expect the city¡¯s military to work effectively again. Any report I hear of it being otherwise will be dealt with personally by me.¡±

    Without another sound, the vessel left the palace. Sevril bowed to him on the way out and he nodded in acknowledgement. Houli was carried away by some medics and the stained floor was getting cleaned by the servants. The party guests looked frightened and uncertain, and Sevril told them, ¡°Please, enjoy the food.¡± He left with a bow.

    ¡°I understand now,¡± Liehold said to Fallow. ¡°This wasn¡¯t a party to appease the military; it was to force them into submission!¡± Fallow nodded and watched the retreating figure of Council member Sevril.

 Chapter 21

    Fallow entered Central Library only a few hours after the councilman left his Party. The attendees were in shock at the arrival and actions of the vessel. Many had missed the point of the arrival altogether and were lost in the very idea of a vessel coming inter their presence.  Some of the guests had scrambled around; trying to obtain anything the vessel might have touched as if it had turned into pure gold. Liehold was much graver than the people who threw themselves on the ground in praise and worship of Vessel as he left the palace. After the vessel was gone he immediately disappeared. Fallow lingered a little bit, trying out some of the food available and inspecting some of the more interesting aspects of the party, but soon left as well. It was late in the night and the lights were starting to dim. A slight rain had started and much of the populace was outdoors enjoying it, standing or sitting in circles singing songs in praise of Kami. The sounds reverberated throughout the city, mingling with the soft patter of rain. Jacobin the priest was manning the front desk when Ashton pushed open the tall broad doors.

    Jacobin called Fallow over to his desk with a wave of his hand the moment he saw him. ¡°Fallow,¡± he exclaimed eyeing Fallow with surprise. ¡°You are soaking wet! What happened?¡± The library appeared to be empty.

    Fallow rolled his eyes at the priest, ¡°What, do priests never look outside? Kami is sending rain and it was a long walk here.¡±

    ¡°Is that so...¡± Jacobin mumbled, looking out a little round window next to his desk. ¡°Sometimes we just get lost in here.¡± He turned back to Fallow quickly. ¡°But you are dripping all over the floor!¡±

    Fallow looked down at the puddle he was creating. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, is marble flooring, a little water won¡¯t hurt it. Besides, I do not have anything dry to wear.¡±

    ¡°Well, come on back and I will give you some spare clothing.¡± Jacobin said with irritation, as if the puddle was offending him personally. ¡°We only have priestly garments, you know. Pale and bland, but I am sure you will look fine in it.¡±

    Fallow changed into the clothes Jacobin provided for him, they were light and comfortable and Fallow felt clean with them on. In the lobby, he then cleaned up the mess he had made on the marble floor; Jacobin complained that he was too old for such work. ¡°You can use magic,¡± Fallow said with exasperation as he was cleaning up the water, ¡°It would take a second for you clean the floor.¡±

    But Jacobin only shook his head. ¡°You, like all the other humans, are too na?ve. It is a difficult concept for you to understand, but believe me when I say, it is not true.¡± Then he paused, ¡°Well, it would take a second, but the effort would not be worth it.

    Fallow growled playfully in disgust, and Jacobin laughed at him. Inwardly though, Fallow wondered what it really meant to wield such power. The Priests of the highland order never hesitated in using their power, why did the librarians behave differently? Fallow suspected he would not get a straight answer if he did ask.

    As he was finishing, Fallow asked Jacobin, ¡°Don¡¯t you priests ever get out? Surely you all don¡¯t stay confined in here, but I can¡¯t say I have ever noticed any of you leaving this place. You don¡¯t even recognize the change in the weather.¡± Fallow stood up and returned to Jacobins side at the desk, with his towel.

    Jacobin sighed and leaned on the desk. ¡°Our lives are this library; we do not leave it often. Even in the old days we did not go out much, and now even less so. But that is okay, that¡¯s how it is meant to be. Our place is here.¡± He straightened up and asked cheerfully, ¡°But anyway, what brings you here this late at night?¡±

    ¡°I am here to see Havign,¡± Fallow said, handing the damp towel to Jacobin. Jacobin tossed it lazily to the side. ¡°Can you tell me where he is now?¡±

    ¡°Actually, He isn¡¯t here now. In the library, I mean.¡±

    ¡°Really?¡± Fallow said incredulously, ¡°Weren¡¯t you just saying that you guys don¡¯t get out much? I have never known Havign to be absent.¡±

    Jacobin held up his hands in innocence, ¡°Nevertheless, it is true; he is not here right now. He should be back late late tonight.¡±

    ¡°Where has he gone?¡± Fallow asked in disbelief.

    Jacobin shook his head, ¡°I do not know, on some errand. He actually does that every once in awhile. It¡¯s not an issue though, it¡¯s not like we are prisoners here. He has the right to leave occasionally and privacy when doing so.¡±

    ¡°Oh.¡± Fallow responded, looking troubled. He tapped his hand on the desk while staring out in the library.

    ¡°I suggest going to bed now and then talk to him in the morning.¡± Jacobin said, studying Fallow, ¡°There is no point in waiting up for him. What do you need him for anyway?¡±

    Fallow looked back to Jacobin, ¡°I just have some questions for him, that¡¯s all.¡±

    ¡°Well, if it is only answers you are seeking, you can ask me. I am sure I have sufficient knowledge for your needs.¡± Jacobin smiled wryly.

    Fallow considered Jacobin for a moment. ¡°Okay.¡± He said, ¡°Tell me, how did the war with the enemy start, and when?¡±

    Jacobin paused. ¡°The war?¡± he asked warily.

    Fallow continued, ¡°I¡¯m asking, how did the war start? We haven¡¯t always been at war, that¡¯s clear to me. That means that there must have been a beginning to it and I was wondering how that happened.¡±

    Jacobin responded nonchalantly with a frown. ¡°What are you asking? You know what is taught, Kami has been struggling eternally against the enemy. Did you forget the military doctrine? This is what Kami tells us.¡±

    Fallow was affronted. ¡°But it is not true.¡± Fallow protested. He gestured at Jacobin with a finger, ¡°And you know it!¡±A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    ¡°What is truth?¡± Jacobin asked dryly. ¡°Truth is what Kami says. His words become reality, and when he says that the fight against the enemy has been continuing since the beginning of time, it becomes truth.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t even know who we are fighting though!¡± Fallow burst. ¡°I only know it as some unknown but terrible foe. Who are these people and why are we even fighting them? What is their objective?¡±

    ¡°Does it really matter who they are or why they hate us? Either way they are still trying to destroy this city. Everything we do we do because we are told to. Whether it is to fight, to work, to live, or to die, Kami directs everything. Who are you to disagree with him?¡±

    Fallow looked at the priest and there was a silent resignation in the old man¡¯s eyes. Fallow said abruptly, ¡°I cannot let this go. I know already that something is amiss. I remember the time when I did not live in The Endless City. I was captured and indoctrinated ten years ago and I want to know why. I have been told and I have experienced things that do not correlate with one another and I want to know what fact is. I want to know what the histories say.¡±

    Jacobin nodded as if he understood. ¡°I see¡­¡± he said softly. He studied Fallow for a moment and Fallow shifted uncomfortably under his gaze.

    ¡°Go to bed.¡± Jacobin said suddenly throwing his hands up, ¡°It is after hours and I must close up here. Only those who wear the priestly garments are allowed inside Library Central after dark and I can¡¯t babysit you.¡± He started to close up his desk.

    ¡°What?¡± Fallow replied, bewildered by the unexpected response.

    Jacobin shooed him away. ¡°Do you need me to spell it out for you? As a Priest of the library, I can¡¯t find it in myself to deny knowledge to those who inquire. But read at your own risk!¡± He pushed Fallow to the main stairwell, and then disappeared to lock the main doors. Fallow was left alone in the library. The statue of Kami gazed down upon him in its magnificence, but the lights in the library slowly faded and the face was filled with shadows.

    Fallow had been in the library countless times before, but always during the day and mostly with Havign. But at night when the primary lanterns were dimmed, the library changed appearance as if the light from the lanterns disguised its true nature. Long dark shadows spread across the foundations and eerie figures and designs crowded the place. Before, Fallow had become accustomed to the sights the library offered, but now he noticed every subtle shape of rock, wood, and darkness.

    He walked slowly through the library, unsure where to start his search. He could not read the titles of the books were they laid on the shelves due to the lack of light, so he had to often bring them to a small corner of the library were a lone lantern was still lit and sort through them individually. Fallow had never explored the contents of the library unsupervised before and at first he found it exciting. Soon though, after fruitless and time consuming searches for what he looked for, he came to appreciate the immensity and complexity the knowledge in the library was.

    The shadows never moved on the walls but it was getting very late and Fallow was losing his motivation. Without some form of reference, he had been simply grabbing sections of books and relocating them near the light source to inspect, and his pile of unused books was getting too large for the desks to handle. He thought briefly about the amount of time and effort it would take to return the books to their proper places, but it was unimportant to him now.

    Many of the books were irrelevant and Fallow wondered why they even kept. Some were simple reports about the day¡¯s activity in certain departments of the military, others were actual books. There were fiction and nonfiction housed in the library. There were simple manuscripts and scrolls available, but the sheer mass of writings in the library sapped Fallow¡¯s energy.  The hours made him weary and Fallow was about to give up his search when the next book he picked up caught his eye. The title read A collection of writings from the Land that was Parathas. Fallow took it out of the pile and opened it up tentatively. He sat directly under the light, flipping through the pages and reading its writing, soon he forgot his exhaustion as he lost himself in the work.

    Havign appeared before him hours later looking down at the man who was engrossed in the writings of the book. Fallow didn¡¯t notice Havign¡¯s arrival, but read intently the work in his hands. Havign asked loudly, ¡°Have you found what you are looking for?¡± Fallow was startled at the sudden noise and he stared wide eyed at the old priest. ¡°What are you reading?¡± Havign asked simply. After a moment of hesitation, Fallow closed it and handed the work over.

    ¡°Ah, yes.¡± Havign said with pleasure after seeing the title and opening it. ¡°I remember this.  Quite the work it is. There was precious little left of Parathas after it was destroyed by the enemy. I am afraid this here is the majority of it. Most people who had memories of the territory are dead now. Parathas has now been lost in memories and in physical reality.¡± He looked at Fallow. ¡°Jacobin told me you would be around here. Look at the mess of books you have made.¡±

    ¡°Is it true?¡± Fallow asked quietly. ¡°Is it true what is written in there?¡±

    Havign shook his head and closed the book. ¡°You need to stop using that word.¡± He said. ¡°It does not mean what you believe it to mean. Rather than that it is true, I can say that it did happen. God¡¯s have the power to change many things, they can change memories and people, but they cannot change the past.¡±

    Fallow looked as if he was struggling to put to words his thoughts. Havign sighed and said, ¡°I imagine you are confused. Please remember that this is only a small picture of what happened back then and an even smaller part of the universe back then as well.¡±

    ¡°The book spoke,¡± Fallow said, breaking his silence. ¡°Of a city and people working and living. The people there were subservient to Kami. One of the journal¡¯s spoke of a growing sense that war was coming with one of their neighbors, but there wasn¡¯t actually a war going on.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Havign replied calmly. ¡°That would be the writing of Pathus, of whom the territory is named after. He was the land god of Parathas and he was part of an alliance of territories called ALPs, an alliance of lesser powers. I call it an alliance but it was really simply a group of land gods who gave up part of their sovereignty to Kami in order to secure part of the Kami¡¯s and the alliances protection. Not all gods are equal in power and many needed protection that they alone could not provide.¡±

    Fallow looked down, trying to ingest what Havign had said. ¡°I¡¯m confused.¡± He responded pitifully. ¡°I don¡¯t understand.¡±

    Havign leaned in close, coming within a foot of Fallow¡¯s face, ¡°You¡¯re not just confused Fallow, you are afraid, afraid of what you might learn and what it might mean to you. Stop your attempts to understand this world, weren¡¯t you much happier in your ignorance? Go to bed Fallow and forget what you have learned tonight, you can be happy, confident, and innocent, Fallow. Is this knowledge really worth so much to you?¡±

    Fallow looked up, and there was a great pain on his face. He said deliberately, ¡°Ever since I have returned from the wilderness I have been uneasy. I did not recognize what bothered me before, but now I know what it is that keeps me awake at night and torments me. I do not know who I am. I cannot stop now; I know that this knowledge will help me understand my purpose and existence here.¡±

    Havign leaned back and said, ¡°What I might tell you may not give you the peace you are looking for. Do you still want it; even if it will change everything you understand the world to be?¡±

    Fallow replied, ¡°I do not even understand this world now.¡±

    Havign smiled. ¡°You make me torn.¡± He said. ¡°On one hand, I feel sorrow for what I, and the other priests, have done to you. On the other hand, it makes me incredibly happy to see you transform into thinking living creature once again. Prepare yourself, for I will tell what I wish I could shout from the palace roof. If I could, it would shake its very foundations.¡±

 Chapter 22

    The library was quiet and still, only the soft patter of the rain on the ceiling hundreds of feet up could be heard from the small dim corner where Havign and Fallow sat. The late hour and the disorienting blackness of the library helped created a feeling of unrealism to Fallow, a feeling of the world slowly tilting to its side and spilling all of its contents into a bottomless void. The owners of shabby books and littering manuscripts around him reminded him of the time when he first started to learn under Havign. He was young and eager and Havign was old and eager, both discovering the wonders of words together. If Fallow knew then that this road of education led to this point of fear, doubt, and disillusionment, he doubted he would have willingly stepped into the library again. But Fallow could not silence the spirit inside of him any longer, even if he knew that the answers would destroy him. Havign sensed that truth as well and considered Fallow¡¯s fate with guilt and sorrow.

    Havign sat down next to Fallow on the old creaky chair and spoke. ¡°This entire city,¡± he began, ¡°From the most powerful aristocrat down to the lowest day laborer, is part of what is called the cult of Kami. It pervades every aspect of the city, especially including the minds and hearts of its citizens. Despite its size though, the cult has a simple purpose; to keep absolute faith, loyalty, and devotion in Kami. In the cult of Kami, there is no dissention, no doubt, and no worries. As a member of this city you cannot escape it, nor even recognize it as there is no comparison given for alternative understandings.¡±

    ¡°But the cult of Kami was crafted using lies to deceive and ignorance to blind. Fact was set aside and a far more convenient and functional belief was set in place. As a member of the Order of the library, I found it heartbreaking to see ignorance encouraged by Kami, especially when before he was such a supporter of art and knowledge. But when war broke out within this territory, after years of struggle, Kami saw the necessity of the cult and implemented the order.¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t know where to start, he understood the words coming at him, but their meaning eluded him. ¡°I don¡¯t understand,¡± Fallow protested. ¡°How could the god of truth lie to us?¡±

    Havign smiled sorrowfully at Fallow. ¡°If you want to learn, you will have to abandon all the foundational beliefs you hold as truth and open your mind to different possibilities. Open your eyes Fallow and realize that what you know is only a small stint of dust upon the side of the great wall. Listen to what I am saying! The answer to your question is obvious; Kami isn¡¯t the god of truth. There is no such thing! There is only one thing Kami is god of and that is this land, this territory. It is true that he is full of power and glory, the city itself proclaims his greatness. But that is it. He is not the creator of life no does he hold any power over your soul. He is neither holy nor sacred; as with everything in the universe, he is only a being struggling against a world that threatens to destroy all that he holds dear. I will not say that his creation of the cult is wrong, because I do not believe it is true. Whatever is necessary is never wrong.¡±

    Fallow looked at Havign but Havign could not see his eyes in the darkness. ¡°Tell me more.¡± He said.

    Havign leaned forward and looked at Fallow, his golden eyes glowing in the dim light. ¡°You said that you wanted to understand your real purpose here.¡± Having continued, ¡°Actually, what you already believe to be true in that regard is correct. You are here to serve Kami, and you have been doing a fine job of it since you arrived. What you really wanted to know was why, that question was never properly explained to you. The beliefs of the cult that were instilled in you when you arrived and what you have experienced in reality are opposing each other. I could simply tell you why you are here but I know that will not be helpful to you because you still interpret the world through the eyes of the cult. To start then, I will have to get rid of your mistaken understanding and reinstill in you the proper knowledge of the universe.¡±

    Havign sat back up, ¡°You have been taught that there is one god, Kami-sama, and that he created the universe and all that is in it, correct?

    Fallow answered back hoarsely, ¡°Yes.¡±

    Havign hesitated for a second and then said, ¡°I am afraid that is not what actually happened. Kami-sama created this world and that is all. He did not even create the humans living in it.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean,¡± Fallow cut in suddenly. ¡°¡¯This world¡¯? Are you implying that there are other worlds other than this?¡±

    ¡°Yes!¡± Havign replied. ¡°by the Hem of Kami-sama¡¯s robe, yes!¡±

    Fallow frowned at Havign. ¡°I would say that is silly,¡± He responded plainly.

    Havign laughed, ¡°Maybe it is silly. But it is also true. A god is born from the union of two gods. When the child is old enough he will leave his mother¡¯s territory and go forth and establish his own. With his hands he will raise mountains, carve valleys, dig rivers, and create a land as he sees fit. Those sentences are from the famous work of Geraldine the Scribe and his book, Wonders of the Universe. We do not have a copy of it here I am afraid, it was loaned to another territory a little bit before the war broke out and we haven¡¯t been able to reclaim it since. Oh, it still breaks my heart!¡± He smiled wearily at Fallow, ¡°It is not important for you to remember the work or it''s author right now, it is only important for you to understand that your perceived understanding of the world is incredibly narrow. Countless worlds exist outside of this one, each with their own people, culture, history, language, and education! A whole universe exists out there, not affected or even related to the events that occur here. It is a universally accepted fact among the more educated and less ignorant populaces that gods are merely the creators and sustainers of their respective lands. They hold power and authority over their lands, but that is all.¡±

    ¡°I do not understand,¡± Fallow replied. ¡°Where are these other territories? If I travel far, can I cross into them? If I stand upon a mountain, can I see them far off?  Can I see them the wall if I look hard enough on a clear day?¡±

    ¡°No, no,¡± Havign responded taking a loose sheet of paper. ¡°You cannot see them with your eyes from inside of the territory, nor take a step into them. They are separate worlds, not connected by space.¡± He drew something quickly with his hands, ¡°Here, look at this illustration, it may help you.¡± He gave it to Fallow.

    Fallow stood up and held it up in the light. ¡°What am I looking at?¡± Fallow asked, scanning the page.

    Havign pointed at it. ¡°Each of these circles drawn here represent a territory owned by a god. I drew this from memory so it may not be entirely accurate, but these are the dozens of territories that are near us and their respective gods.¡± He pointed towards a specific circle. ¡°This is where we are now, the territory of Kami. These territories,¡± he said pointing to other near ones. ¡°Are the ones we used to trade with in the past. We imported most of our food from them but since the blockade of the enemy, contact with the outside has been severely limited.¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t know what to say and he studied the work without real understanding. ¡°This one isn¡¯t labeled,¡± he asked, simply to say something.

    Havign raised his eyebrow, ¡°Nevertheless, I am sure you know more about it than I do. It is the Wilderness, the territory your little mission went to. And your native territory. The wilderness isn¡¯t some obscure land that barely fits within your understanding of the world; it is a territory unto itself. You were born inside another world Fallow, and then you spent four months there just recently without even realizing it! What did you think that place was?¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t answer and asked instead, ¡°But why is there no god labeled for that one?¡±

    Havign shrugged, ¡°I am afraid I do not know why. According to all practical knowledge about the gods, they are linked to their territory and the territory is linked to the god¡¯s. They do not exist without each other, but I have never heard of a god for that territory. Maybe the god is hiding or has abandoned it, I do not know. I can only speculate on it. Because there is no god to protect and defend it, it is often exploited by the territories near it.¡±

    Fallow continued to gaze at the paper, trying to make sense of it. He felt dizzy and hot, suddenly uncomfortable in the small corner. He slowly sat back down into the chair, never tearing his eyes off the paper.  ¡°I was told that my people were orphans from my land and that Kami had adopted us. I guess that is true to some extent.¡±

    Havign shifted uneasily.

    Fallow finally looked up again. ¡°How does this relate to the journal I read?¡± he asked, setting the sheet aside.

    Havign sat down as well. He said sadly, ¡°What you read was the journal from one of these other worlds. It was written by the god of it, himself, actually. I mentioned ALPs before, the Alliance of Lesser Powers. It is important to know that all the worlds do not nessesarily live in peace with one another, which is why alliances and power struggles continue. There were 30 different territories that comprised ALPs and the alliance itself lasted for thousands of years. It wasn¡¯t really an alliance though, as much as it was a system of authority and power under Kami. Kami had conquered those 30 territories, either through war or threat of war, and they all were satellite entities that supported and followed Kami. That alliance had been under attack for centuries already when Kami¡¯s territory itself finally got invaded. After that, the surviving territories broke off from the alliance.¡±

    ¡°The same enemy we are fighting now,¡± Fallow asked. ¡°Who is the enemy then, really?¡±

    ¡°Of course, it is a god as well,¡± Havign responded. ¡°The land gods may be all powerful, but they are plagued by the same things humans are. Greed, ambitions, pride, hate, love, the gods all carry these emotions as well and sometimes they clash against one another.¡±

    ¡°Specifically, we are at war with a land god called Desue. Similar to Kami, he had created for himself an empire of different territories that bowed down to him. ALPs and Desue had been hostile towards one another for a long time before the war, competing in economic and cultural influence among the different territories and alliances nearby.¡±

    ¡°What you read was what is left of the territory of Parathas, it was the first territory to come under attack from Desue when the war started. It was unprepared for the armies of Desue and the might of the god. It fell quickly and when Desue personally slew Pathus, the territory disappeared along with the god. This book is literally all that is left of the territory. Full war began after that between Alps and Desue. Many battles were fought and territories were burned. There were heroes and villains, marches and sieges. Nothing destroys like war does; learning, knowledge, structure, and populaces disappear or are warped through the event of war. The War went badly for the ALPs, it lasted hundreds of years but Desue eventually defeated each the 14 territories that served as defenses and made it into Kami¡¯s territory. That was five hundred years ago.¡±Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.

    ¡°Once Desue had a foothold into Central territory, the rest of the ALPS split off immediately. With a losing battle at his gate, Kami-sama was desperate. It was at that point that Kami instituted the cult. It is through the strength of Kami and the blind and ignorant faith of the people that keeps the invading armies at bay.¡±

    Havign sighed and continued, ¡°The truth is, Kami is becoming more desperate every day. The people believe that Kami is invincible, but he knows best the reality of the war. He knows that he is on the losing end of the fight, he is doing all he can to struggle and to survive. When the General-Commander Soul punched a hole in the blockade in the battle of the Crushed Snake, Kami authorized missions into the wilderness in order to conscript more soldiers for his army and to scavenge for resources. Anything at all that he can do to help his fight in the war, Kami did. You were kidnapped, brought here, and then indoctrinated and conscripted into the army, adding more people into the cult. The mission you just went on into the wilderness was for that exact purpose, you know that.¡±

    Fallow remained silent and Havign stopped speaking as well, letting the man come to grips with what he was told. When Fallow spoke again, it was with trembling. ¡°Who all knows the reality of our situation?¡± he asked.

    ¡°The whole reality?¡± Havign asked. ¡°Only Kami truly knows the real state of his territory. Out of compassion, the Librarians were allowed to keep their knowledge but we are to remain ignorant of the current events. We are also not allowed to use our powers as mages. The council and the aristocrats retain a certain amount of real knowledge about the situation, but they do not know the history of the war and therefore do not understand the true threat to us. They are given just enough knowledge to function competently. The priests, too, are aware of the cult, they are the ones responsible for maintaining and supporting it. But they have very little real knowledge of the universe. The populaces, including the military, are full members of the cult and understand only as much as they are told. There are different levels of delusion in the city, but in the end, everybody has some level of ignorance. We live in a city of fools, Fallow. Of course though, it¡¯s only the foolishness that keeps the city alive.¡± Havign paused, and then added, ¡°There are the vessel¡¯s too, I suppose. They would have a full understanding of reality, if anybody did.¡±

    Fallow spoke again. His voice was dead and calm, but Havign could feel and explosion of emotion sealed up inside of him. ¡°A vessel came to Councilman Sevril¡¯s party today.¡± Havign raised his eyebrows in interest. ¡°He punished one of the military commanders for his delaying tactics in the new military strategy. Captain Liehold said that is was a move created to scare and intimidate the military into action.¡±

    ¡°You saw a vessel?¡± Havign asked, surprised. ¡°That is a rare sight, especially nowadays. They usually remain in attendance of Kami. If the military was dragging their feet, an appearance made by a vessel would certainly speed them up. What did you think of of the vessel?¡±

    Fallow spoke with almost a feeling of grief in his voice. ¡°At first I thought it was Kami himself,¡± he started. ¡°He was exactly as I had imagined, much like the statue in the library. When you saw him, you immediately knew that what you were looking at was not human, but something else with far greater power and glory. He looked like he was carrying a bright lantern at first, but then as I looked closer I saw that the light was simply radiating from his body, as if he was a lantern himself. He was tall and looked like he had the confidence and strength to do anything. He was very frightening. I felt that with only a look from him I would perish, but I couldn¡¯t tear my eyes off of him.¡± Fallow asked quietly, ¡°What does it mean to be human in this city of gods?¡±

    ¡°There is only one god in this city, Fallow. Do not ever make that mistake, for Kami is a jealous god. The vessel¡¯s may wield great power, but it is only power borrowed and bestowed from Kami, they are not gods. They are the arms of Kami, the Will even.  Even the aristocrats and priests who are powerful in their own right are still insignificant before the might of Kami.¡±

    ¡°But still,¡± Fallow insisted, his voice shaking a little. ¡°They have power above the humans. We are subjected to their might along with Kami.¡±

    Havign looked at Fallow, concerned. ¡°Humans and the divine work together to protect this city.¡± Havign explained, ¡°Neither could do it alone, we need and support each other.¡±

    ¡°LIES!¡± Fallow burst suddenly, his voice echoing throughout the large empty library. ¡°Our men stand upon a foundation of lies! People live and die for this city! They are raised and bred to fight for its god and for their belief that the world will end with Kami standing triumphant! I believed in the righteousness of the fight, I believed in the struggle of god against the evil. We humans have suffered through the harshest of settings and we have persevered against an enemy because we believed. I remember the days on the battlefield, facing the enemy and their terrible cries. Our swords and our spears collided and our side fought with heart and vigor even as we saw our comrades die next to us because we had faith in the salvation of Kami. You have called this foundation the cult of Kami? It is much more than that; it is a whole reality we understand to be true. But woe to me the day I first stepped foot onto these streets of stone in the company of my companions and looked upon The Endless City and its beauty in the light of Kami. My heart felt it would burst that day as I beheld the wonder of the righteousness we were protecting.¡±

    ¡°Fallow¡­¡± Havign said, but he didn¡¯t finish his sentence.

    Fallow continued as if he didn¡¯t hear. Wells of tears came up in his eyes, but he shook his head angrily, ¡°But none of it is true, there is no everlasting glory within the light of Kami, is there? There is only the struggle for power among beings greater than ourselves, and we are left to wallow in the waste of their whims. Lies.¡± Fallow squeezed his eyes shut and let his tears fall. ¡°I need a moment please.¡± He sobbed, placing his hands on his head. But then he spoke after a short pause, ¡°It would have been better if you had not told me.¡±

    ¡°You would not have been satisfied otherwise, Fallow, and you would have been left up to your own musings about the world. That would have been dangerous and you could have easily become lost.¡±

    ¡°LOST?¡± Fallow shouted, looking up at Havign. His cheeks red and wet. ¡°I¡¯M LOST ALREADY! WHERE DO YOU THINK I AM RIGHT NOW? IS THERE ANY PART OF MY LIFE THAT WASN¡¯T A LIE?¡±

    ¡°Fallow,¡± Havign said. ¡°You mustn¡¯t lose faith over this.¡±

    Fallow was paralyzed at the man¡¯s words. ¡°Lose faith?¡± Fallow repeated incredulously, this time much quieter, his eyes flashing in angry tears. ¡°You have just told me that all I have ever known as fact is a lie created to enslave me and my people. A lie perpetrated by the very being whom I worshipped and lived for. How can I not lose faith and hope in him? How can I not lose faith and hope in everything? This city is built upon the broken lives and trust of the millions of men in the city. ITS ALL A LIE.¡±

    ¡°You listen to me Fallow, and you listen to me well,¡± Havign said sternly placing one of his hands on Fallow¡¯s shoulder. ¡°There is so much you do not understand. Even now this city is one of hope. This city was built thousands of years ago and it took the most brilliant minds of men and divine beings. It took the combined sweat, blood, and effort of all the people in the territory and while it stands it is yet a monument to the strength the people in the city have. For all of history the humans and the divine have worked together in peace and mutual benefit. In the past there was true knowledge, wisdom, and enlightenment here. Never think of Kami as a god of deception, for that is not what he is. You have seen the image in the center of the library! He is a god of learning and knowledge, desiring the prosperity and freedom of all the people he rules over, divine or mortal. The ALPs was not just an alliance of power but also of trade, in goods and knowledge. The prosperity of ALPs was a golden age as was unrivaled as far as we could see. I know it may be difficult to understand now, but Kami only ever does what is best for his territory. Tell me Fallow, who gives you food to eat every meal? Who provides the light for you to see? Even now you sit and speak of the faithlessness of Kami while under the light of his lantern.¡±

    ¡°He has betrayed us, all of us Humans!¡± Fallow spat.

    ¡°I have given you the ability to use rational judgment Fallow; do not let your emotions rule you now! Kami had protected this city from the enemy for over 500 years, while many gods were defeated in a fraction of the time. Can you believe that Kami is doing everything he can to rescue his city? You say that he has betrayed you, but I ask, what is it he has betrayed? Your trust? Your trivial little understanding of the world? You are too narrow-minded, Fallow. Why do you value your own feelings above the safety and protection of a city of millions of inhabitants?¡±

    ¡°And do not I have the most to be upset about? My whole existence is based upon the freedom of knowledge and learning, But Kami has instead lifted up ignorance instead.  My heart is broken to see the inhabitants of the city living as they are. But I still have faith in Kami. I believe in the final victory of Kami over Desue. I believe that there will come a time again when this territory can live in peace and I can once again educate the populace in truth and life. For now, and for always, I will trust the Will of Kami.¡±

    Fallow gritted his teeth. ¡°Even as he deceives the entire city?¡± Fallow challenged.

    Havign responded calmly. ¡°Even if he were to decide to destroy the library tomorrow, to level this plot, and to burn all the books here, I would still have hope that once again it would be rebuilt.¡± Havign looked at Fallow sadly.

    Fallow did not respond. It was close to the dawn of the new day, but neither Fallow nor Havign moved. The rain could still be heard faintly in the night and the long shadows created from the piles of books danced slightly in the flickering light. They reminded Fallow of the men in the city he had passed seemingly long ago now, on his way to the library, celebrating in the rain Kami had provided that day. ¡°I need to talk a walk, to think.¡± Fallow blundered, standing up. ¡°I mean, take a walk.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t get lost.¡± Havign said, staying put. He watched Fallow walk across the library, moving without any particular destination.

    Fallow was a man of action. His life in the military was clear and simple and he obeyed his orders with conviction. Confusing thoughts, ideas, and emotions only bewildered him and even more now than before he wondered what his purpose was in The Endless City. The library was large and he felt insignificant before it, much like how he felt about his city now. There were an almost unlimited amount of places he could have wandered to, but he was not surprised when he found himself on the top floor, looking straight in the face of Kami, it was the only place in the entire city where he felt he could actually be in his presence.  Lights in the city began to glow, announcing once again a new day in The Endless City. The large glass windows allowed the light into the library and they slowly lit up the whole place. The statue of Kami came into clear view and dominance soon.

    Fallow spoke to it, asking softly, ¡°You pluck me from my homeland and transform me into what I am now? Who are you? Who are you to fill me with emotions of delight and faith? I thought I knew you, but now I do not know anymore. There are some things I do know, though. Whether or not it is simply something you have instilled in me, I do care about the protection of this city and the people I know in it. If that is something you care about too, then that is at least one thing we have in common. I no longer can trust you, though.¡± The eyes of the statue stared solemnly back and Fallow turned and left. The morning light reached the top of Kami¡¯s head and it flashed in its reflection.

    Fallow left then, meaning to take to his bed immediately, but Havign intercepted Fallow on the first floor. Fallow said to him, holding his hand up ¡°We will find out later if this night will cause my own destruction or not. For now, I will trust you, but Kami will have to prove himself to me before the end. I am going to go to sleep now, though, I am very tired.¡±

    Havign nodded, ¡°I understand. But I am afraid you will not get any rest soon. A Captain is here to see you and you need to go meet him now.¡±

    Fallow gave Havign a tired look of concern and alarm and moved to the entrance instead. There he met Captain Liehold.

    When Liehold saw him he spoke. ¡°Fallow,¡± he said in surprise. ¡°You look terrible. What have you been doing all night? Why are you wearing those clothes?¡±

    Fallow looked down at himself and shrugged apathetically. ¡°What can I do for you, Sir?¡± he asked with respect.

    Liehold took out a rolled-up document from his tunic. ¡°There have been new orders I am afraid.¡± Liehold said sternly. In contrast to his words though, Fallow thought he looked excited, ¡°After the performance last night; the defensive mandate has been expedited. Things are finally moving as they should have been three months ago! I have been ordered to take command of a mounted company and we are being positioned with the defensive legions outside the gate. I am not leaving without you, though, and I have transferred you from Grisly¡¯s company to mine. You look like you need some rest, but that will have to wait. There is glorious battle brewing on the plains.¡±

    With his hand stretched out in front of him, Liehold crushed the orders and they splintered into dust and magical residue with a soft shattering sound.

 Chapter 23

    The whole city was moving unlike it had in any of the mortal men¡¯s memory. That is not to say that the city had not moved before, it had always been alive with the daily toiling of its citizens, the wives and the husbands, the children and the beasts, the temple and the commerce. But this was different, while before the city was like a bubbling spring, now it was like the waves of the tide. One force and will moved the city¡¯s inhabitants to their places with sure purpose and the whole city dug down and braced itself for the told coming attack. Armies moved, the ground rumbled, and the skilled laborers were put to use by the divine governance, making swords and spears and armor for the scores of warriors that were now off the reserve and in active duty. The city was electrified with an energy and spirit; it was a flood of excess excitement and doom. The city burst as scores of men and women poured out from the gate in long marching lines of soldier finding their places in the frontline. Up on the wall the men stationed there saw the glory of the companies, their shining armor glinting proudly in the light like a sea during sunrise. And all men beheld and wondered, was there ever a force that could rival the strength of The Endless City and the power and majesty of Kami? It was prophesied throughout the city that this would be the last battle, the final stroke that would defeat the enemy for good and usher into being the glorious new city of Kami and the salvation of all the righteous.

    The city rumbled with excitement, and even the deep places below were affected by the new motions. The new conscripts were blind, but all could sense the change in the air, in the walls, and in the stone of the floor. They looked up towards the ceiling and whispered to one another about what it might mean. The marshal¡¯s behavior had changed suddenly as well, as if a new urgency was upon them. They pushed the men harder than ever before.

    Marshal Kean was no exception, a strange light was in his eyes now and whatever minute traces of mercy he had left in him were wiped away. Deep in the closed room in the floor, he punished his exhausted men as they struggled vainly to accomplish his impossible demands. A day after Fallow¡¯s reuniting with Captain Liehold, Kean worked his men in a frenzied desperation.

    ¡°The next person,¡± he screamed hoarsely, walking catlike though the mess of men in his gym. ¡°Who lets himself get subjugated by his opponent will get ¨C.¡± He never finished his sentence though, as one of the two men who were grappling right before him slipped in his grip and felt himself get flipped around and flung to the floor by his opponent. Without another word Kean jump on top of the fallen man like a tiger on its prey. From nearby Drake now saw that the poor man was Heath. With furious blows Kean beat the kid as Heath covered his face with his arms and cried out. Kean was yelling all the while, ¡°YOU WEAK PIECE OF CARNST! WHAT DO YOU HOPE TO ACHIEVE WHEN YOU ARE AS PATHETIC AND COWARDLY AS YOU ARE! JUST DIE IN YOUR OWN INCOMPETENCE!¡±

    Ashton, Hourbour, and Gethroe all made a move towards the Marshel to stop him, but Drake reached him first. Standing above the marshal with fierce anger in him, Drake reached down and threw the officer off of Heath. Kean tumbled as he fell away from them and Drake yelled at him, ¡°What do you think you¡¯re doing?¡± Ashton and Genthroe made for the unconscious Heath, lying in a small pool of his own blood. Hourbour took up a position next to Drake, backing him. The whole room tensed and the other men stood still, waiting to see what would happen.

    To Drake¡¯s surprise, the marshal got up calmly and wiped off his uniform without looking up. ¡°What am I doing?¡± he said, re-adjusting his armor. ¡°What are you doing Drake? Haven¡¯t we gone through this before?¡± He spoke nonchalantly.

    ¡°You can¡¯t just hurt these men like that!¡± Drake countered, flinging his right arm back to draw attention the Heath, now being propped up by Ashton.

    Ashton looked grave but said to Drake, ¡°He¡¯ll be okay Drake, don¡¯t do this again.¡±

    ¡°You were going to kill him!¡± Drake hollered, ignoring Ashton¡¯s words.

    ¡°Better that he die here than out there on the battlefield!¡± Kean replied looking up at Drake with a glare. ¡°For weak people such as you the battlefield will be a plain of blood, death, and horror of the likes none of you can imagine. Here at least, you can die peacefully within the arms of your brethren and Kami, rather than in the bloodlust of the enemy. I am dispensing mercy.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s not for you to decide, Marshal!¡± Drake snapped back. ¡°We have the right to decide how we are to live; you¡¯re supposed to be responsible for us, to care for us. Not to do this!¡±

    ¡°Those who cannot attain results,¡± the marshal said savagely. ¡°Should just die.¡± He turned around to speak to the whole group, ¡°Make no mistake all of you! I would slaughter the lot of you rather than let you out of this floor without attaining my standards. Between you and my training record, my record is infinitely more important to me! You are nothing!¡±

    ¡°You can¡¯t do that!¡± Drake spurted out stupidly. The blood rushing to his head from his rage blotted out his ability to think straight. In the truest form of the word, he was seeing red.

    Marshal Kean raised his arms out and said to Drake, ¡°I can.¡± He turned and spoke to the whole group again. ¡°I was given responsibility for training you bunch of fools, certainly. I had also been given absolute law for your lives; none have the right to challenge me.¡± He was speaking calmly but to Drake, Kean felt a dangerous line laced into his words. Drake felt his hair stand on end. Despite Drake¡¯s challenge, the marshal still had absolute command. He turned back to Drake and continued, ¡°You¡¯ve challenged me before Drake; you know what you need to do to change things.¡± Kean dropped into his fighting stance and beckoned Drake forward, eager to tear him apart. He spoke in a deadly voice, ¡°You have lost to me four times before, and are you ready to be broken by me again? I will not let you leave until you are in a worse condition than your friend.¡±

    Hourbour whispered urgently into Drake¡¯s ear, ¡°Drake, you need to stop now. Heath will be okay. Don¡¯t fight the marshal! Last time you did you almost had your arm broken, this time will be worse!¡± Drake¡¯s blood was boiling though.

    Drake looked back at Ashton to see him shake his head and whisper, ¡°Don¡¯t do it.¡±

    But Kean spoke loudly, ¡°Come on Drake, you cannot back out now. You¡¯ve challenged my authority yet again because you feel that what I am doing is wrong. Where is your conviction though!? Without beating me nothing will change, you just a dog barking into the night. In fact, if you don¡¯t fight me now, I will punish everybody. I will whip them to the flesh and then drag that off their bodies to coat the floor in my den! I will beat you until I hear you whisper at me that you wished you were dead. You can¡¯t stop halfway Drake. Besides,¡± he added with a glint in his eyes. ¡°I will not be satisfied if you back down.¡±

    The threat paralyzed everybody in the room, their imaginations creating the horror in their minds and their skin crawling because they knew he would do it. Drake was frozen too, in dread. The marshal barked at him, ¡°Now, Drake!¡±

    Not even Ashton protested when Drake slowly walked forward to face the menace. Ashton only supported Heath up and silently looked on in anguish. As Drake closed in, the men withdrew to the corners of the room away from the fight. Only Vanyer, Hourbour, and Gethroe stayed forward and they backed up to be behind Drake. The room, in reflection to the mass of activity up above, was charged with energy. Before Drake could position himself properly though, the marshal attacked.

    The marshal had on his usual armor, guards on his forearms and a small chest plate on his upper body. He came in close and struck with his right hand in a hard blow aimed at Drake¡¯s unprotected right side. It was a feint however, at the same time he brought his left hand around in a swift motion in Drake¡¯s blind spot at the back of his neck. He meant to end it in a sudden move, knocking Drake out in one quick motion. But Drake sensed the trap and moved slightly forward as well, taking the lessened blow to his side and avoiding the neck strike all together.

    At the same time, he was able to land a counter at the marshal, hitting him on the edge of the breastplate, almost mirroring the blow Kean had given him. They both backed out after the sudden clash, each feeling the pain from each other¡¯s blow. ¡°Good instinct!¡± Kean said suddenly. ¡°But now I come for real!¡±

    Marshal Kean had not won his renown as a master fighter idly. Drake had fought against him four times before over the last few months and knew what kind of creature he was. The man struck at weak points with precision and agility. He moved around on his feet in almost a blur, never letting himself stay still to keep his opponent unsteady. He depended upon key strikes at his opponent rather than raw strength, but he was still capable of punching holes through his enemies if the situation called for it. He used little armor on his uniform so as to not slow himself down, but the little armor he kept he used well and often to his advantage. The man was a monster that enjoyed his abilities almost as much as he enjoyed hurting others.

    And aside from his strikes, his grappling and throwing techniques were deadly. Drake knew that if he got caught by the man¡¯s hands it was over, and he knew this because the marshal had been trying to teach his techniques to these men for the past two weeks. Drake had been thrown around enough the past week by his comrades to leave his body covered in black and blue bruises that slowed him down.

    But Drake was not a raw recruit anymore; the months of training had transformed him into a being capable destroying his opponent with his bare hands. In very many ways Drake¡¯s hands had already become as deadly as weapons. With his rage to give him strength, Drake squared up with the marshal and the two fought in a series of quick blows, fighting for territory and positioning with each other in order to secure clearer advantages.

    In fact, within the short period of only four months, Drake had become a powerful soldier, capable of standing with the rest of the fighters on the battlefield and, more impressively, last a minute in a duel with Marshal Kean.

    After securing the ground to Drake¡¯s close right side and before Drake could reposition himself, the marshal threw a straight strike a Drake¡¯s right temple. To avoid it, Drake leaned left to have the marshal¡¯s steel like hand scrape across his cheek, but he gave up his opportunity to reposition his feet in doing so. In a swift execution, Kean swiped his legs across the ground, tripping Drake. The last thing Drake saw before the painful blackness was the triumphant scowl on the marshal¡¯s face as he brought down the heavy blow that ended the fight.

    In my dreams, I saw a fierce storm. The whole sky was covered in dark and grey clouds and the tension in the air felt like energy was just waiting to burst. The wind was great and it blasted my face and ears so that I could hear nothing besides its great howl. I thought I could hear words in the wind but as much as I closed my eyes and strained my ears, there was nothing understandable I could make out. It was only the chaotic murmurings from sources I couldn¡¯t understand. There was no rain, and that surprised me, for the bulbous clouds overhead were dark and heavy as though they held enough water to flood this place. But then I realized that the darkness in the clouds was not just due to their density but to the fact there was no light behind them to begin with.

    The wind was growing steadily more terrible and my clothing and hair were both fluttering madly. I had to squint my eyes to see and place my hands before them to protect them from the debris the wind was carrying around. The plain I was standing on were mostly bare, the long and subtle hills were sparsely covered by short trees and even shorter grass. I thought to myself that even if there were bigger trees around, they would have surely been blown away already.

    Bright flashes appeared above me, exploding suddenly then disappearing just as quickly. I waited to hear the thunder that accompanied lightening, but either the roar of the wind was too great or it wasn¡¯t lightning at all, for I could not make out any deep vibrations in the air. The flashes continued though, presenting me an awesome spectacle of light and power. I stood in awe of the lights, and somewhat anxious at the incredible force being displayed. I looked around briefly to share the experience with somebody, but I saw I was all alone in this place. Great gusts of wind continued, wiping across the short grass creating ripples of fascinating beauty, but the more I looked around these plains the more lonely I became.Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    The lightning was now flashing more often and I suddenly grew afraid. I tried to move away from the small hill I was on, but my feet wouldn¡¯t move. I looked down at them and saw that they were secured to the earth by two long dusty grey chains. I reached down to pull out the chains from the earth, but no amount of strength I could muster would budge the steel links that held me.

    The rain suddenly came pelting down, and along with it was large hail that bruised me when it hit. I cried out in pain and tried to protect myself from the unsought, when I felt the chains on my legs give a tug. I looked down again and saw that the chain was disappearing into the ground below me, dragged by some unknown force. I began panicking and struggling against the force, ignoring the sharp blows of the ice and cold. The chain was being pulled inexorably, though, and soon I was slowly dragged into the earth, screaming. As the dirt came in around me, I looked up and saw Drfuil standing high in the air, looking down at me as if all the pain of the universe was upon his heart.

    Drake woke up sputtering as if a bucket of water washed away from him. He looked around wildly wondering where the heck he was and where the face of Drfuil had gone too¡­ Ashton held him steady, and said, ¡°Take it easy Drake, it¡¯s okay, everything''s alright now.¡±

    Drake¡¯s head hurt terribly and as he reached up to touch it he felt the large bandage on his head. He knew it was stained red with blood from the pain he was feeling. ¡°What happened?¡± he muttered, letting his hand drop from the wound.

    Ashton snorted, ¡°What, you do not remember challenging that monster to a fight? No wonder, considering the knock he gave you.¡±

    Drake groaned in pain, ¡°No, I remember it now. I thought I had him this time.¡±

    Ashton snorted again, ¡°Yeah, for about five seconds you had him, about one second longer than last time if I recall.¡±

    ¡°yeah¡­¡± Drake said letting himself fall back onto the bed he was lying and closing his eyes. Then he jerked up, ¡°Wait, why am I here? I usually wake up on the gym floor after the marshal trashes me. I shouldn¡¯t be in my bed!¡±

    Ashton was sitting beside Drake on the floor; he was carving another flute with one of the knives from Kami¡¯s table. He let the shrapnel fall to the floor. ¡°There have been big changes since you have been out.¡± He said without looking up.

    Drake sat up in horror. ¡°What?! What changes? What¡¯s going on? How long was I out?¡± Drake winced as a stab of pain came through his body.

    ¡°Only about a day.¡± Ashton replied looking up now. There was a grin on his face. ¡°Settle down already, didn¡¯t I tell you everything was fine.¡±

    Drake hesitated, and laying back down again softly. ¡°Sometimes you say that though, and it is not true.¡± He grumbled.

    Ashton laughed, ¡°I suppose that is true. But believe me now when I say it.¡±

    Drake shook his head at his friend slightly. He saw now that he was in his squad¡¯s dormitory on his own bed. The room was empty besides the two of them and besides the quiet scraping of Ashton¡¯s blade; he could only hear low mumblings in the background. He closed his eyes and asked, ¡°How is Heath doing?¡±

    ¡°Much better than you actually,¡± Ashton replied easily, returning his attention to his flute. ¡°Really, your temper is going to kill you one day. You were lucky to survive this last one.¡±

    ¡°Oh, come on!¡± Drake growled angrily. ¡°You saw what he had done to Heath. If I hadn¡¯t stopped him, he really would have killed him. Don¡¯t scold me about my temper!¡±

    Ashton sighed, letting his hands drop, ¡°I suppose you are right. It was a lose-lose situation, that one. But,¡± he continued, picking up his flute again. ¡°The four earlier times were for much less noble reasons if I recall correctly.¡±

    ¡°You sound like an old lady.¡± Drake complained lying still in his bed. It was soft and comfortable to him, something he didn¡¯t have time to notice before. Drake waited a bit, listening to the soft chipping sound of Ashton¡¯s knife. He asked bluntly, ¡°Are you going to tell me what the news is or am I going to have to strangle you.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯d like to see you try.¡± Ashton replied casually.

    ¡°I¡¯d like to see you stop me,¡± Drake countered.

    ¡°Yeah,¡± Ashton replied mockingly looking up at Drake, ¡°Maybe all I¡¯d have to do is take my little finger here and push you away from me like so¡­¡± he brought the knife up close to Drake. He scowled back. Ashton laughed and retreated. ¡°The training is done,¡± he said. ¡°As of yesterday, the entire floor has graduated from our time here.¡±

    Drake was taken aback. He asked quickly ¡°What do you mean? We are done? What about the last month?¡± He thought for a second. ¡°What about Marshal Kean?¡±

    Ashton talked to Drake directly, ¡°Apparently, you managed to impress the marshal with your spirit, if not your skills. He had been told only days prior that there would be a forced graduation soon and he felt that we were not ready. That explains why he acted so aggressively the last few days at least. After your fight with him he said, and I quote, ¡®If every man in this squad is as hopeless as this man, then I declare this hopeless lot to be qualified.¡¯¡±

    Drake grunted, ¡°That doesn¡¯t sound like praise.¡±

    Ashton shrugged, ¡°You should take it as such. Anyway, we won¡¯t see him again; he had been called away suddenly for another post, probably one he will like better. You know Drake,¡± he said softly. ¡°I think he was just getting desperate in the end because he didn¡¯t think we were ready. He wanted us to be as prepared as possible for the real battlefield. In his own way, he really did care about our wellbeing.¡±

    Drake rolled over to see Ashton directly. ¡°Lies,¡± He said after a moment. ¡°That guy is a monster and I hope he finds his just end at the point of a spear.¡±

    Ashton shrugged, ¡°Unlikely, he could take out a whole company of men without breaking a sweat, I¡¯ll bet. I am glad he is in our army.¡± Drake didn¡¯t respond so Ashton continued, ¡°Not much else is known at the moment. We have had this last day off as rest before we get sent away. I have been hoping you would wake soon, I doubt our new officer will take kindly for waiting on a wounded man. By the way, I volunteered to look after you while the rest of them got to go out with Hairly, I have missed out on a great deal I am sure. You can barely hear them talking out there, but I am sure it is more exciting than waiting on a dead man.¡±

    Drake scowled, ¡°Don¡¯t lie to me, I know the only reason you stayed here was so you could finish your flute. Not that you would be successful this time anyway. How many flutes have you gone through?¡±

    Ashton smiled, continuing to look at his creation, ¡°Not enough, I do not think this one will end up being useable either.¡± He held up the flute to his eyes and sighed, ¡°We do not know why we are graduating early, some theories speak of a disaster in the city that we are needed for, other theories say that we simply have learned all the materials already and there is no point to keep us here. Personally,¡± Ashton said frankly. ¡°I think the former is more likely. This is all speculation anyway. But I¡¯ll bet,¡± he looked at Drake seriously. ¡°That what we find out there will be no better than what we have here.¡±

    Drake paused at his words. ¡°You believe we are going straight to the battlefield?¡±

    ¡°We were going to go straight to the battlefield after we had graduated normally, right?¡± Ashton answered. ¡°I mean, we are conscripts to begin with, why would that change now? I believe that all that has happened is that the need for soldiers became more urgent. And whatever caused that cannot be good.¡±

    Drake blinked silently, considering the information. Ashton let the silence come in and continued with his flute as Drake digested the news.

    ¡°It¡¯s just so sudden,¡± Drake said. ¡°I knew we were heading for the battlefield, but it always felt like that day was still ages away. Who knew that four months could change me so much? If you¡¯ll believe it, I had stopped thinking about escape a long time ago.¡±

    Ashton looked up and said, ¡°Yes, we have changed much. But there is time now to think, isn¡¯t there? I see no angry Marshal coming up behind us, no forced worship with Hairly, no hundred other things that took away our time an energy. Now there is peace and quiet that I almost forgot existed, and also energy. I too, have been too exhausted to consider home lately.¡± He sighed almost imperceptibly. ¡°Perhaps that is a form of indoctrination too, to make us too busy and tired to think about whom we are and what is important for us.¡±

    Drake knew that Ashton was feeling guilty about having forgotten him people, if only for a second. Drake comforted him saying, ¡°Your songs hold as much memory for them as any whole day of contemplation. You never stopped singing, did you? We haven¡¯t changed that much yet, escape is not outside of my hope, nor should it be yours.¡±

    Ashton countered, ¡°Do you think we will have any more opportunity out there than in here?¡±

    ¡°Absolutely,¡± Drake said with conviction. ¡°If we get set with a harvesting patrol like the one that got us, it would be a simple matter of slipping away in the night. Nobody would suspect that two indoctrinated soldiers would ever run away, they have no kind of security set up for it!¡±

    Ashton rolled his eyes at Drake but smiled. ¡°Your spirit will be enough for both of us I¡¯m sure. Let¡¯s pretend for the moment we will not be simply sent out with the rest of the new recruits to be used as fodder for the enemy.¡±

    Drake quieted down, ¡°You think that will be what will happen?¡±

    Ashton shrugged. ¡°Perhaps not. But it seems likely to me. We are still far from being fully trained, what use would they have for soldiers like us? Conscripted foreigners from the wilderness will not have the same standing in the army as the natives; the marshals have made that clear to us. We are like captured slaves, except we are willing now.¡±

    Drake pondered what Ashton said then slapped the wall and spoke, ¡°At least we made it through training, though! Who knew? Let¡¯s try not to think about that and consider what we have accomplished. If I had been told what we were going to go through at the beginning I wouldn¡¯t have believed we would have survived. But we did! Remember our promise at the beginning that we would survive? I still plan on keeping that promise, but we just past the first obstacle. We need to celebrate, Ashton!¡±

    ¡°I am afraid you missed the celebration, Drake,¡± Ashton grinned back, his spirit returning. ¡°It was yesterday while you were sleeping. Don¡¯t worry though; we had a good enough time without you.¡±

    Drake recoiled in horror, ¡°You all celebrated without me? That¡¯s cold, Ashton! Where¡¯s my party food?¡±

    ¡°Actually,¡± Ashton said pulling out a sack. ¡°Its right here, we saved some for you.¡±

    Drake¡¯s eyes grew big when he saw it. It was just normal food, but Drake was suddenly ravenous. ¡°YES!¡± he said sincerely sitting up and ignoring his headache. He took the food and ate it heartily.

    ¡°Are we forgiven now?¡± Ashton asked dryly, picking up his flute again. Drake nodded emphatically between bites. ¡°What a celebration.¡± Ashton continued sarcastically.

    Suddenly a head poked through the dormitory door. Heath said with excitement plastered on his face, ¡°Ashton, we have news!¡±

    Ashton beckoned him in, there was a similar bandaged around his neck as Drake. He saw Drake awake and jumped excitedly, ¡°Drake! You¡¯re awake! Have you heard the news?¡±

    ¡°Yes, yes,¡± Ashton replied for Drake as he choked on his bread trying to answer him. ¡°He heard the old news, what¡¯s the new news?¡±

    But Heath was more concerned about Drake and his bread problems and he took the opportunity to say to him, ¡°Thank you so much for saving me, Drake! I wish I saw your fight with the marshal, I bet you were marvelous. What a monster he is! I am sorry you ended up like this.¡±

    Drake tried to wave him off still trying to clear his esophagus. His eyes watered which Heath perhaps thought was strong emotions and Heath continued to press his feelings of gratitude and his apologies to Drake.

    Annoyed, Ashton slapped Drake on the back, saving his life, and barked at Heath, ¡°Stop dawdling and tell me the news! I didn¡¯t volunteer to sit with Drake so I could be last to hear what was happening!¡±

    ¡°Right,¡± Heath said straightening up when he sensed that Drake was alright. ¡°The officers from the city have arrived and gave us orders. As of now, our unit is part of 2003rd Scouting legion. We will be leaving within the day to take up our positions within the military, topside.¡±

    Drake cut in, his voice a little raspy, ¡°Did they say why all this is happening so early?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Heath responded. ¡°Yes, they said something about a Defensive Mandate that had put all available troops in readiness, including the ones like us.¡± He held his hands out in front of him and illustrated. ¡°He had one of these orders that shatters after you read them. It was wonderful to see! There were some important sounding words in the orders, but you will have to ask Vanyer what they meant. He is good about that kind of things.¡±

    Drake pressed him, ¡°We are leaving today for the topside?¡±

    ¡°Yes!¡± Heath replied, hardly able to contain his enthusiasm, he slapped his knee in excitement. ¡°And we have been given active posts along with the rest of Kami¡¯s forces. We will be real soldiers!¡± Drake felt a deep sense of foreboding and his stomach crawled. Heath finished triumphantly. ¡°We are being stationed as part of the Frontline!¡±

 Chapter 24

    Drake looked up at Kami¡¯s great Lantern in the sky, an imitation, Darke thought, of the sun that was in his own territory. Although bright and hot like the sun Drake remembered, this lantern was small and close to the land, as if a person could almost reach up and grab it from the tops of the highest buildings in the endless city. Additionally, the lantern moved across the sky like the sun, but where it went to each night Drake could not even guess for it certainly did not set down over the horizon. Drake knew this could not happen because there was no horizon as Drake understood it to be.

    Drake and the company of men he was with were positioned out on the furthest edge of the land Kami still held as his territory and like the harsh line of an impassable river, the light the lantern provided did not show on the the dirt the enemy technically held only paces away from where Drake stood on the far southern perimeter.

    Drake had been in stationed in the area of the Frontline along with all the other recruits from the wilderness after they left the dark catacombs of The Endless City. Although Drake had been told many times that Kami did not shed his light on the enemy land and could see it from afar at the encampment, this was the first time in the three months he was this close to the exact edge of it and Drake couldn¡¯t understand how it could be true. Drake¡¯s curiosity had gotten the better of him and he had taken an impromptu hike to this spot after his work ended. He stared numbly at the dark hollow trees, ferns, and grasses on the other side and shook his head continually.

    ¡°The miracles of Kami.¡± Ashton commented dryly, behind Drake. He was not as shocked as Drake and Ashton continued passively, ¡°considering all the other things he does, why does this one bother you so much?¡±

    ¡°The light just ends!¡± Drake said angrily. ¡°How can that be? It doesn¡¯t make any sense, I don¡¯t understand! Does our enemy just carry a bunch of torches with them when they come up?¡±

    Ashton sighed and rolled his eyes. He said, ¡°My homeland doesn¡¯t have any light at all.¡±

    Drake snarled unreasonably, ¡°That doesn¡¯t make any sense either. Kami-sama, I hate this kind of sorcery.¡±

    Drake stepped forward some, right up to the edge and brought his hand out to pass over the barrier. He hesitated for a moment as if a beast would suddenly jump out at him once he breached it, but then firmly stuck his hand through. He watched in fascination as a black shadow appeared on the  arm he put out. He rotated it, then pulled his hand back, shaking his head again.

    Ashton looked around with a frown on his face, searching for potential intruders. After a few moments of letting Drake sate his curiosity he said, ¡°We should head back Drake. It took us an hour to get here, another hour to return. We will have only lost not only our meal but our own time to sleep, you know.¡±

    Drake snorted. ¡°I made Heath promise  to save some food for us.¡± He said, turning back toward Ashton with an evil smile. ¡°He wouldn¡¯t dare cross me, our only problem is if he gets caught¡­¡±

    ¡°Not unlikely to happen,¡± Ashton replied picking up Drake¡¯s pack and giving it to him. ¡°I won¡¯t bet on a full belly tonight. I hope satisfying your curiosity will be sufficient for you, I know how grumpy you get when you miss a meal.¡±

    ¡°I did not make you come,¡± Drake grumbled, putting his pack on his and picking up his spear he had leaned against a tree. With a nod they started their march back to camp.

    Drake and Ashton, along with the rest of his squad from the floor, had been positioned on the furthest edge of Kami¡¯s territory, far away from the secure forts and central administration of the Frontline and the central hill. They inhabited the dark woodlands straight southwest from the gate, on the border of the plains, the forest, and the enemy. There, the Lantern of Kami was the dimmest and the bread of Kami took the longest to arrive. Nestled into the side of a hill and surrounded by mournful trees, Drake was sure that he was part of the least valuable and least maintained stronghold in Kami¡¯s territory. Nevertheless, the fighting Drake and Ashton already experienced here was fierce.

    When Drake and the rest of the scouting legion first arrived three months ago, fresh from the training catacombs, none of the troops were experienced in battle outside of training, none had killed before, and none were equipped to handle major incursions with the enemy. As part of the Defensive Mandate, the forces of Kami had spread their troops to fill in every corner of their territory, including this forsaken plot of land. When the scouting legion arrived, led by their passionate Lieutenant Dravis, they had to hastily put together the fort they now inhabited.

    From the tactical standpoint, the new tiny fort was supposed to be a mere lookout post there to gather news and transmit information to headquarters via the lone spell caster, Horace, they had with them.  For all practical purposes, actual clashes with the enemy were meant to be avoided; Drake understood that as did the lone magician Horace they had with them. But their commander, Lieutenant Dravis, felt otherwise. To Drake¡¯s endless frustration, even with only the small contingent of scout class soldiers under his command, when the enemy approached Kami¡¯s borders, Lieutenant Dravis directly opposed the entrance of any enemy troops within his jurisdiction, regardless of what type of enemy advanced on them.

    Under the enthusiastic Dravis¡¯s command the five hundred men that composed the legion fought with a heart that could only derive from absolute belief in the power and salvation of their god. It amazed Drake to see the men¡¯s spirit and stubbornness in the battles they had had so far. The soldiers scrapped for every inch of territory they were designated to defend as if every step on it by the enemy was a blasphemous outrage only repaired by rivers of blood.

    Drake and Ashton understood, though, that this speck of territory was the least concern of the god that dwelled in the city, so many miles away. Those two fought instead for their own lives, and the lives of their friends who had been put into the same scouting legion as them. Of the 500 men that were there, the majority were men who had been on the same training floor as them and had come from the same floor as them.

    Drake remembered clearly the first time they had the enemy invaded their land.  They had been spotted in the territory only a week after the men arrived and before their fort was even completed. Drake witnessed directly the words and action of Dravis at that time. Upon hearing the news, Dravis had issued out the entirety of his forces to meet them directly in battle, disregarding common sense, the battle tactics given to him by his commander at Central, his own life, and the furious cries of his spellcaster who vainly screamed to the lieutenant that such actions were foolish and downright insane.

    Dravis¡¯s words were clear though, ¡°By the Staff of Kami, Horace, the battlefield is not the place for cowards!   We have been purposed by Kami on High to defend and keep his territory; I cannot look away as the barbarian scum defile our land with their filthy footsteps!¡±

    The priest, Horace, had screamed back in frustration and fear. ¡°It is not our job to engage the enemy!¡± he had pleaded. ¡°We are a mere scouting legion not equipped for this kind of work. We are here to spy and report, not fight! Do you even listen to your orders given to you by your own commander? How are we supposed to handle that kind of enemy force? We are not equipped to handle this, we will all certainly be killed! We need to scatter and let this force pass so that our rearguard can handle it, people who are there to actually fight the enemy! This is our job!¡±

    ¡°You sent the report to Central I had asked you to, already, correct?¡± Dravis had asked, looking out over his region from the wall of his partially constructed wooden fort.

    ¡°Yes!¡± Horace had replied emphatically.

    The lieutenant then countered, ¡°Then we have done only the least of our duties. We have a higher cause to consider, we need to teach the barbarians that even one foot in our territory will mean the end to their abominable lives!¡±

    Horace almost cried; a sight that many of the men enjoyed seeing. With a charismatic attitude, the lieutenant led the men himself, putting his own life on the line for his principles. He believed that men could accomplish greatness with the power of Kami behind them. Drake believed that man was going to get them all killed.

    During the fight that ensued, Dravis had led his men bravely. That skirmish was the first time that Drake had killed a man, the fallen soldier screaming in agony and curses as Drake split open his side with a face of white, but it was not the last time Drake thought he was going to die. What began as harassment and guerrilla tactics against the well-armed enemy soon turned into a fierce battle for survival. Eventually, most of Dravis¡¯s men were encircled and grouped together by a well trained and eager enemy. At that moment, Drake felt that he would die at the end of the many and deadly glittering spears aimed at him and his companions.

    The cloaked and shrewd Horace with them wove desperately what magic he could to protect them, but Drake could tell there was little he could accomplish. Horace had raved wildly, cursing the lieutenant in, ¡°Damn you Dravis! Your foolishness has gotten us all killed, where is your eternal glory now?!¡±

    But the lieutenant had merely smiled and held fast with his men, tightening their circle. Drake hardened his heart against him, but Dravis was much cleverer than either Drake or the Horace had given him credit for.

    Before the enemy could close in for the final strike, there was a loud blow of a horn near them and a mounted legion had come charging in, brandishing their swords and lances in a glorious rescue, breaking the enemy line. Soon after, an armored battalion came up as well and together, those two units pushed back the snarling enemy and slew all that came into reach of their cold swords and spears. The scouting legion looked on in wonder to see the hope of life returned. Dravis stood proudly before his men, watching the last ranks of the enemy fall back into their own dark territory.  The reinforcements had been planned; he had called for them immediately when he heard that the enemy troops had come. Apparently, he had set out only to delay the enemy until they arrived.

    Dravis had called out to his men afterwards, ¡°See what we can accomplish?! We, the lowest rank of soldiers in the far out reaches of Kami¡¯s hand? It was said that we should hide from the fight, but look at what we have accomplished! The hand of Kami is great, so great that even the smallest people can make a difference in the fight. Kami has given us the opportunity to fight for him, do not hesitate when he is with you! For there is power, and honor, and glory, and victory for those who trust in Kami and fulfill his Will!¡±

    After that first battle Dravis had come up to Drake and Ashton as they rested, sitting down on the gnarled land that had housed the battle. The men were exhausted, but excited; the lieutenant was vibrant with energy. ¡°Good work!¡± he had called out joyfully, looking down at them. ¡°The last of the enemy is getting cleaned up as we speak. Praise be to Kami for the strength in our arms! We will be rewarded for our deeds.¡±

    Drake had responded angrily, panting, ¡°You couldn¡¯t have told us you had called for reinforcements? I thought we were done for!¡± Ashton said nothing, still recovering his strength.

    ¡°You should have had more faith in me,¡± the lieutenant had said with a light sparkle in his eyes and hitting his chest with his hand. ¡°I am not as crazy as our esteemed spell caster would have you believe. Besides, he was the one who sent the message for me, but that did not stop him from losing faith, the coward.¡±

    Drake only shook his head and rested on the ground along with the rest of the men. They had miraculously suffered few casualties, and none from Drake¡¯s close friends. The scouting class of soldiers were light and quick; the agility let them buy time for the reinforcements to come and to stave off the enemy attacks. Despite all of Drake¡¯s misgivings, it was true that Dravis¡¯s goals were being accomplished.

    Since then, there have been multiple incursions with the enemy, and they fought them with similar heart. As always, Dravis refused to let the enemy travel unhindered through his territory despite the counsel of his peers and the magicians.

    ¡°Only an order from my commanding officer will make me change!¡± He had once said boldly during a regional meeting via magic. The other lieutenants looked at him gravely, but his commanding officer didn¡¯t say a word. Grudgingly, Drake admired how straightforward and persistent the man was, as well as his unmovable faith in the salvation of Kami. Drake was not surprised to see that the men followed Dravis wholeheartedly; he seemed like a man filled with the sacred spirit of Kami. He was a like prophet among the plebeians. Drake supposed that if he had the same faith in Kami¡¯s salvation as they all did, he too, would be spirited to work above and beyond the limits of a scouting legion. But Drake knew that this behavior was exactly what the indoctrination was design to create. As it was, he felt the lieutenant would still get them all killed soon.

    Ashton took the events better than Drake and shrugged it off. ¡°For now,¡± he had said. ¡°The only thing we can do is put in our best effort to keep ourselves and our squad alive. There is no changing our commander¡¯s mind.¡±

    And so, the time went by on active positions on the far side of the Frontline. The attacks increased in power and persistence and there was little time for rest. They had almost been overrun not a few times and had narrow escapes. Drake suspected the rest of the frontline was feeling pressure as well but no news reached them on the edge. The reinforcements that came up during the battles came later each occurrence and with less intensity and, from Drake¡¯s point of view, it was only a matter of time before they would lose this particular region to the enemy. The enemy was relentless but, according to Dravis, they would only gain the territory over the dead bodies of the entire scouting legion. Drake wondered if he would ever get out of there.

    Dravis had promoted Drake to squad leader after the second battle and Drake had balked at the idea. ¡°Me, as squad leader?¡± he protested. ¡°There are many other better qualified men than me. Hourbour would make a better leader than me, he has the heart and the faith to-.¡±

    Darvis had interrupted him cheerfully, ¡°Certainly Hourbour is a good man. He is passionate, trustworthy, and honest. All the men here are great Drake, but I need something different than that, something that you have.¡± Drake didn¡¯t understand. ¡°I need someone who can rationally act in tough situations, and not just act blindly on faith.¡±

    ¡°But that is exactly what you do!¡± Drake responded crossly, forgetting to be respectful.

    The man laughed it off. ¡°I¡¯m more than just that Drake.¡± He said easily, tapping the side of his head with a smile, ¡°I have a brain as well, but I just disguise it better than most. You should learn to disguise yours too if you don¡¯t want people to know you have one.¡± For Drake, Dravis was a difficult man to understand.

    As Drake and Ashton marched back to camp, they met several of their own sentries, each calling out to Drake respectively as he and Ashton passed by. Drake waved back good naturedly, feeling somehow at home here. Inside of him a small part detested that feeling.

    When the duo arrived back at camp, the Great Lantern had passed completely and night had come upon them. They passed quickly to their own quarters that houses their squad of men. Drake looked up at the wooden plaque hung over the doorframe of the barracks and smiled tightly at the sight. He had made it himself and on it he had written the foreign words from the training level, to struggle with fate.

    When Drake and Ashton entered Horebore looked up from his laying position on his bed. He asked with a frown, ¡°Where have you two been? You have missed the meal, we were worried about you. I had to lead the men in prayer in your place, Drake.¡±

    ¡°I am sure you did a great job,¡± Drake replied easily, feeling tired as he put down his pack next to his bed. The one great drawback to being a squad leader was the expectation that he lead the prayers that occurred before the meals. Drake hated it, and skirted that responsibility whenever he could.

    Horebour grunted, pleased at the compliment, but Vanyor piped in. ¡°But where were you?¡±

    ¡°We did some reconnaissance,¡± Ashton lied easily. ¡°Drake had a feeling about the southern edge, so we went to investigate. We found nothing suspicious though.¡±Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.

    ¡°I admire the dedication,¡± Horebore said, sitting up, ¡°But couldn¡¯t you have just sent a team to investigate for you?¡±

    ¡°That would have defeated the purpose,¡± Drake mumbled softly to himself. He took off his armor with gusto. He then added loudly, ¡°I couldn¡¯t send people away just for my hunch. And as it turned out I was wrong, so I am glad we did it ourselves.¡±

    ¡°Was it worth the loss of our meals?¡± Ashton replied pointedly, taking off his own armor as well.

    Drake glanced over at Heath brightly, sitting on his own bed a little ways away. ¡°Not if our operation went as planned!¡±

    Heath replied back with a smile and a thumbs up, a sign he learned from Drake. He said energetically, ¡°The mission was a great success! Full reserves have been kept with me as planned.¡± he reached across towards his luggage and retrieved a bulging bag.

    ¡°The spoils of war!¡± Drake laughed eagerly, bounding over to Heath and rubbing the kid¡¯s head. He reached out to the food.

    ¡°You stole from Kami¡¯s table!?¡± Vanyor said, crossly. ¡°You should be ashamed of yourself.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t be like that, Vanyor.¡± Drake replied, his mouth full. ¡°We were doing the work of Kami, how can this be wrong?¡± Ashton snorted but didn¡¯t say anything. He, too, came over and grabbed some dried fruit. Horeboure laughed at them.

    Soon, the food was eaten and Vanyor was persuaded to silence. It was already past the time of sleep accounted for for the squad so they quickly all laid down to get what rest they could. Oftentimes, the enemy attacks came at night, so they gear was kep close by them if needed. It was quiet in the camp.

    On this night, after darkness had fully settled across the territory, the enemy came in again. They were spotted almost immediately by the skillful eyes of the scouts and was quickly reported to the lieutenant at camp.  When the news came, a loud horn was sounded, waking the men who were asleep and announcing the need to prepare for war. Drake was used to this but cursed the enemy that they should choose this night, a night he was already without much rest. Once heard, the men prepared themselves itself for battle with eagerness, even before the lieutenant gave the order to. They had gone through the motions enough to know and had won every time.

    As his squad readied, Drake split off and headed directly toward Dravis¡¯s office, along with the other squad leaders. There, they would hear the reports from the scouts, formulate a plan, and then execute Dravis¡¯s orders. Drake feared for what the scouts would bear tonight and he was not disappointed. Despite Drake¡¯s opinions on the matters, plans were made and orders were given. The squad leaders headed out, but Drake remained behind.

    ¡°This is crazy, Lieutenant,¡± Drake practically shouted at the painfully cheerful Dravis across the short makeshift table from him. Dravis once again made Drake realise that, besides the intense skirmishes they had been forced to participate in, Drake fiercest fights were with mad officers who composed Kami-sama¡¯s glorious army. The lieutenant he was talking to frowned back at Drake and continued to attach his chest armor to himself without pause.

    The two of them were now alone inside the small room that served as the main office of the lieutenant¡¯s regiment. The others had left without a complaint but Drake alone couldn¡¯t leave without at least a word of protest. These orders were beyond Drake¡¯s tolerance.

    Lieutenant Dravis sighed and looked back at Drake. ¡°Why am I not surprised that you remain to question me?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s your fault for promoting me to squad leader!¡± Drake bit back. ¡°If you want me to be quiet, then dismiss me from the rank!¡±

    Dravis smiled slyly at Drake. ¡°No, I will not do that. You are too valuable to not use you, despite your irritating attitude.¡±

    Drake straightened up and glared at the man. He said sweetly, ¡°It¡¯s my duty to inform you that your strategy is flawed.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s worked every other time.¡± Dravis replied casually, tightening the straps on his breastplate.

    ¡°We can keep doing this forever!¡± Drake finally burst. ¡°The enemy attacks have been getting more intense every time, eventually we will be overrun! We need to retreat back while we can! Even our esteemed priest, Horace, agrees with me this time!¡±

    Dravis looked up sharply at Horace¡¯s name and he spoke, ¡°I¡¯d say that this time, it is you who are agreeing with that priest.¡±

    Drake replied indignantly, ¡°Sir!¡±

    But Dravis waved off Drake¡¯s concern and started strapping on his arm guards in silence. After a moment, he spoke, ¡°Are you a prophet, Drake?¡±

    Drake was caught off guard by the question. ¡°I... what? No, I¡¯m not a prophet.¡±

    ¡°Then how can you know, Drake, that we will fail here? There are none who know the future here, only Kami-sama sees all.¡± Dravis paused and gave Drake his full attention. ¡°We have been given responsibility to protect this holy land, it¡¯s not something we can run away from.¡±

    ¡°We are a scouting legion!¡± Drake protested. ¡°We are not supposed to be fighting anything.¡±

    Dravis scowled, and then continued to fasten his armor on, ¡°Now you really are sounding like our esteemed priest, Horace. He¡¯s given me that line so many times, I¡¯ve lost count. Listen Drake, and have some faith! We¡¯ve been outnumbered from the start, is today really any different? It is Kami-sama¡¯s strength we have relied on, not our own. He will not fail us, not this time and not any time in the future! I may not be a prophet either, but that is something I now that we can count on! Come on now Drake, the enemy is fast approaching, if the reports can be believed.¡±

    The man had finished putting his battle gear on and grabbing his sword; he left the bare office with a smile at Drake and went to go find Horace to make his report to Central with him. Drake was left fuming but there was nothing he could do. From the beginning, it had been impossible to deter the lieutenant from his plans. Drake went out and joined the rest of the company.

    Hourbour was bruised and had a large scrape on his side that was still healing from the previous battle, but he took up arms enthusiastically despite the wounds. He had taken on the role of spiritual guider since the company had left the training floor and the care of Hairly. ¡°Once again, we arm ourselves with metal and march out to meet the enemy with swords!¡± he said loudly to the legion that stood inside the courtyard of the fort. ¡°But do not forget the more important protection we all must bring with us. Guard your hearts and your minds from the deceits and the shadows of the enemy!¡± he shouted out. ¡°The day is Kami¡¯s; let us fight to keep it so!¡±

    The men shouted back with a ¡°Hurrah!¡± This speech and drumming was a ritual and Drake understood the importance of getting the men fired up for the action. He participated as heartily as the others despite the growing dread in his heart.

    Hourbour continued on, ¡°We fight not for our own lives, for we have already given those to Kami. We fight on, comforted by his salvation. Do not lose hope in the faithfulness of Kami, those who die on the battlefield will be ushered into the paradise of the righteous and into the presence of the god himself! We fight to protect each other, to protect this land, and to protect the city! Rejoice! Rejoice I say, for the kingdom of Kami is at hand!¡±

    The men cried out again and shook their spears and banged their shields inside the small fort. Other shouting could be heard above the clamor from less enlightened men.

    ¡°Let¡¯s send those demons from whence they came!¡±

    ¡°Let¡¯s slaughter the lot of them!¡±

    ¡°Death to all who dare tread upon the sacred ground of Kami!¡±

    ¡°Death to the Barbarians!¡±

    The enemy was only leagues away to the west though; they would have to hurry if they were to meet them. The lieutenant was late and when he finally appeared, the magician was with him. The lieutenant was vibrant as always and he smiled and waved at his men like he always did. He was just a battered as the soldiers and his survival through all the intense fights had made him bigger than life. In contrast though, Horace looked exceptional pale and dead eyed, like he was heading for his grave.

    The lieutenant came up and took Hourbour¡¯s spot before the army, dismissing him to his post. One of the men shouted out, ¡°Were you able to get the message out?¡±

    The lieutenant winked, ¡°as always, the guard will be coming shortly. And again, as always, we will head out and meet them first! For every footprint they dare to leave behind on Kami¡¯s sacred land, we will cleave off a head in homage!  Who¡¯s with me?!¡±

    They were all with him and they shouted so, shouted that they were ready to send the demons back to their dark recesses. Drake didn¡¯t like the looks on the magician¡¯s face though; it looked more defeated than usual. There was little time to consider it, though, and the company moved out of the fort and headed towards the predefined positions. There was careful planning for these incursions, planning that had saved the men¡¯s lives many times already. The men trusted in their lieutenant.

    The scouts had reported a relatively smaller number of units entering the territory this time, but spread further apart than usual as if to avoid a mass ambush. But this worked in favor of Kami¡¯s forces as they were able to move quicker and surer in the woodlands and dispatch the spread-out troops in small groups at a time. Drake and Ashton held a rear position further away from the fight, but they could hear distant sporadic clashes of men and the occasional wail of death. As it was, this fight would end without the need for reinforcements, it seemed.

    Drake looked up at the sky, but as always, there were no stars. The wind rustled towards them, bringing loose leaves and the sounds of battle. When the breeze died down, all turned quiet again. The night lingered on.

    Ashton spoke quietly, ¡°I don¡¯t like this. Why did these forces spread themselves out like this? They must know that it only gives us an advantage over them, it doesn¡¯t make sense.¡±

    Drake shrugged, still upset and now tired and apathetic. ¡°They must simply be trying new tactics. Last time we were able to ambush a great lot of them at once because they were too close together. This is probably an overreaction.¡± He ended sarcastically, ¡°Let¡¯s just have faith in the strength of Kami. I don¡¯t want to care anymore.¡±

    Ashton persisted though, and ignored Drake¡¯s jab. ¡°Doesn¡¯t the lieutenant know that we are spread out now as well? More than usual at least. Our ability to communicate with each other has been compromised.¡±

    Ashton was right on that account. The enemy had spread itself out so much that the small squads of soldiers could no longer communicate effectively. Drake tried to dismiss it though. ¡°We¡¯ve dealt with situations like this before. We are not much more spread out than usual. We have a plan Ashton, and it is working well so far. There haven¡¯t been any red arrows in the sky yet, have there?¡±

    The flaming arrows in the sky were how the non-magical units communicated with each other. Every color meant something, but the red one meant trouble. Ashton had been scanning the skies intently and could only shake his head to Drake¡¯s question. There have been no red signals so far; in fact, there have been no signals at all.

    Ashton could only mutter, ¡°This situation is too different than usual. I don¡¯t like it.¡±

    Drake let the silence creep in around them. They did have a small lantern with them, but of course it was unlit. The only light they could see by was the light emanating from the city. During the day the city looked normal; if normal could be how you describe it. Even from the legion¡¯s far away region the city stood tall and enormous. The walls rose up vertically in impenetrable, unscalable, and immeasurable heights of grey stone. It was like a fortress made of mountains. From where Drake was now, he still had to crane his neck slightly to see the fog covered tops of the wall. At least from that sight, Drake could understand why everybody believed the god who created it was invincible. Drake couldn¡¯t understand why they even fought for this territory outside the walls when the city was so impregnable.

    Drake wished he could have seen the inside of the city, but his group had issued out of the tunnel almost right at the gate. It was as if they were purposely withheld from seeing the wonders of the city and Drake felt affronted by the act. Many of the other soldiers were dismayed at not being able to behold the city as well. One of the favorite pastimes of the men was to sit around the few natives in the fort and listen to their stories and descriptions of the wondrous city. Drake was conflicted to stay and listen to the tales, he was mad at himself for even wanting to see the city.

    During the day, the city stood in majesty, but at night it shown in glory. Dull golden light drifted from the city walls as if the walls themselves created the light. It shone onto Kami¡¯s territory and provided the little light they could use in the darkness. As it was true there were no stars in the sky, so also was there no moon.

    Ashton was bothered little by the lack of light in the darkness and, considering the man had lived in blackness his whole life, he was actually more comfortable without the bright lantern in the sky during the day. When he first saw it he squawked with fright as if the very light burned him. The unnatural reaction of the light had to be cured quickly though, all the other wilderness people basked in the rays as if they were nourished from it. And after the months in the dark underground caverns, Drake too, enjoyed the light from Kami¡¯s lantern on his skin once again.

    The line of thought led him once again to his memories of home and the burning sun that resided there. For the thousandth time that month, he wondered if he would ever be able to return to that land. He asked suddenly, breaking the long silence, ¡°What are we doing here, Ashton?¡±

    Ashton snorted, ¡°Obviously, we are holding up the rear guard. Somebody has to do that. This is probably punishment for your objections you voiced at the lieutenant.¡±

    ¡°No not that,¡± Drake said, standing up straight. ¡°I mean, look at us! We are literally fighting an enemy we know nothing about except for the propaganda given to us, for a side that kidnapped us and tried to brainwash us!¡±

    Ashton didn¡¯t turn to look at Drake. He cussed suddenly, ¡°Blast! Where is that yellow sheen of light!? It has been too long; we should have seen it by now! This is wrong, everything is wrong!¡±

    ¡°Calm down,¡± Drake said, surprised at the outburst. ¡°The troops are more spread out, it will take longer. Just be patient, you will see it. Just be glad we weren¡¯t given front class action this time.¡±

    Ashton grumbled, ¡°I¡¯d rather be up front where I would know what was happening. Staying back here in the dark in maddening!¡± He strained his eyes, but sighed. He pounded a tree then said to Drake, ¡°I do not know Drake. What else could we be doing now?¡±

    Drake fired back quickly, ¡°Looking for a chance to escape! Plotting our revenge! Creating a conspiracy, a hundred other things! We are alone right now, nobody would notice if we simply left. They would assume we had gotten killed or carried away! Why don¡¯t we just run away right now, it would be easy! We could have done it earlier, who would know? They would never suspect desertion.¡±

    Ashton shook his head, ¡°It¡¯s not that simple and you know it! We agreed to escape if we had been sent to the wilderness, but we haven¡¯t. We are here at the frontline, we have no idea what is out there and right now we are alive. Sure, the food is a little scarcer, but it could be worse. Besides,¡± he said, turning to Drake earnestly. ¡°We are needed here. I do not think I can simply leave our friends, do you? Hourbour, Vanyour, Heath and Gethroe. Can you really just pack up and leave them here?¡±

    Drake kicked a rock away; it thudded against a tree out of sight. He said ruefully after a moment, ¡°I don¡¯t suppose they would come with us?¡±

    Ashton chuckled at the idea. ¡°More likely they would talk you out of ever leaving and convince you of the salvation of Kami for real.¡± Drake chuckled softly as well. Silence wafted over them again like the breeze in the trees above them.

    Drake shifted in the night. He said sadly, ¡°It¡¯s just that, I feel we are just waiting for our death here. You know what I mean?¡±

    Ashton turned to answer but, there was a sudden disturbance to their right. Drake and Ashton became alert immediately, drawing weapons and ducking down behind the bushes in case an enemy chanced by. It was unlikely that the enemy had penetrated the second line without them knowing, but they had to be ready.

    A moment later two friendlies came into  view. It was Heath and Micheal, the two soldiers who were also positioned as rear guards and were close by to them. They stopped at Drake¡¯s previous spot and looked around. Micheal was one of the few natives that were part of the scouting legion. The natives were easily identified due to the long hair they kept in contrast to the short hair the wilderness men had. Micheal was a short but fiery woman who was a zealot for Kami. After a moment, she whistled softly around, signaling to Drake and Ashton to come out. Without another moment wasted, they emerged and approached the pair.

    ¡°What are you doing here?¡± Drake hissed softly. ¡°There hasn¡¯t been a signal for the next wave yet. What happened?¡± The two soldiers held similar positions away from them in the territory. Like Drake and Ashton they should be waiting for a signal to advance forward.

    Heath answered back, ¡°The signal is late! Something must be wrong!¡±

    Drake replied roughly, ¡°If something had gone wrong we would have seen that too! There would have been red flares in the sky! The forces are just delayed because the enemy is spread out so much. There isn¡¯t anything to be concerned about.¡±

    ¡°We should have seen something either way by now!¡± snarled the woman, startling Drake. She had her sword on her back instead of a shield and she carried her spear in her left hand. She pointed her finger accusingly at Drake. ¡°It is your responsibility as the group leader to investigate this! Yet you have stayed here and done nothing!¡± Drake found it difficult to respond. ¡°You need to go forward and find out what is happening, now!¡±

    Drake wanted to shout back and say that he never wanted the position of group leader in the first place. To say that he did not like have the responsibility of the command, even though his actual authority was small. But he didn¡¯t, he knew he couldn¡¯t without compromising himself. They were all willing lackeys of Kami after all¡­

    Ashton piped in quietly, ¡°She¡¯s right Drake, I understand that you feel the need to stay put as per orders and wait for the signal. But something is clearly wrong. We should have seen some signal by now. It¡¯s too late for every contingency plan we have. We need to move ahead and figure out what is going on.¡±

    ¡°Fine.¡± He bit off with intensity, ¡°But you three are coming with me.¡±

    ¡°Wha-!¡± Heath started but Drake interrupted.

    ¡°If something has gone awry as you all claim,¡± Drake said snapping at them. ¡°Then you will be no use back here. And if everything is fine and I am made out to simply be a worry wart in front of the lieutenant, then I will not be alone.¡± Heath grumbled a little, but neither Micheal nor Ashton said anything. ¡°Come on Ashton,¡± Drake then said reaching into his pack. He pulled out a strange container from it while Ashton readied an arrow on his bow.

    The container held flammable goo that Drake couldn¡¯t figure out what it was; he supposed it had some magical properties. It produced a deep violet color as it burned and without hesitation Drake spread some on Ashton¡¯s arrow and lit it on fire. With the glowing tip Ashton pointed the bow straight up and pulled back on the string. He let it go with a load twang and the group watched it fly into the air above the trees and then fall away to the far left. It was Drake¡¯s signal that he was moving forward outside of the lieutenant orders and for the other groups to stay put for now.

    ¡°Let¡¯s go!¡± Drake said, putting the container away and slinging the bag around his back. He picked up his spear and led the group away deeper in the woods. Despite the gloom of night and the occasional clang of metal and men, the group moved forward boldly.

 Chapter 25

    Drake led his small group forward through the thick brush and darkness of the region at a quick pace. By definition, the scout class of soldiers were light and agile so Drake was able to move quickly around the terrain with his men. Unfortunately, the training his men had had in the floors beneath the city neglected the more subtle aspects of scouting. Sure, they were fit and battle ready. But they couldn¡¯t march through a forest quietly to save their lives. Despite their best efforts and experience from the last three months, they moved with a ruckus that frustrated Drake.

    ¡°Move quieter!¡± he hissed continuously at them at every snapped twig, broken branch, and loud grunt they made as they moved. Heath and Ashton tried to comply, but they only succeeded in moving slower and being louder. Michael didn¡¯t even bother.

    ¡°We were not trained for this Drake and trying to now would not be helpful.¡± Michael spat back, holding a branch up with her left arm. The night was hot and humid and the cool breezes weren¡¯t enough to alleviate the discomfort. Trudging through the forest took a lot of effort and they were hot and bothered. She wiped the sweat off her forehead and continued, ¡°You¡¯re making just as much noise as we are, anyway!¡± Drake didn¡¯t respond because she was right and there was nothing to say. He turned and continued his march.

    Like everybody in the scouting unit, Drake had on little armor for protection and no helmet. Small guards on his forearms and shins were the only defense he carried on him. Unlike most, he did not carry a small buckler on his back. He only had a long spear as his weapon that was also used as a staff while marching. Ashton carried a bow and quiver with him and had a short sword strapped to his side. He too, did not carry a shield.

    Heath was more standard with his armament; along with the guards on his forearms and legs he had a small chest plate, a shield and a spear. Most men carried either a sword or a spear depending on their preference, weapons they had all been trained in from the halls. The dark grey cloaks that had been issued to them as part of their uniform had been abandoned quickly; it was too hot on the frontline for such things. They all had on, instead, dark grey sashes across their torso with an accompanying insignia that stated what class and unit they belonged to. Drake hadn¡¯t had much contact with other units anyway to see what they wore, but he appreciated the mobility of their uniform.

    They had been moving for a few minutes and Drake asked Ashton again with irritation, ¡°Still no sign from them?¡± Ashton only shook his head. Drake swore.

    There should have been a signal from nearby men soon after Ashton had shot his violet arrow into the sky.  The other groups should have seen the light and responded in kind with some sort of affirmation. Ashton had the best eyes out of all of them in the dark, naturally, and he kept his eyes searching for the cues. But here were none to be seen. Drake¡¯s stomach twisted with his emotions. He was convinced now, there was something wrong afoot. Where was everybody and why couldn¡¯t he communicate with them? Drake growled in frustration.

    There was sudden movement in front of them, soldiers were approaching fast. It was too late for them to hide so Drake gave the signal for ambushing. The men fanned out in a horseshoe shape ready to strike at the new guest, whoever it might have been. Micheal and Heath each withdraw their swords sharply and Ashton fell back with his bow ready. Drake brandished his spear, ready to plunge it into the lead barbarian, if need be. He gritted his teeth in a snarl.

    To Drake¡¯s shock, Vanyor and Horbour appeared, stepping through the brush carelessly but hurriedly. Drake cried out in surprise and lowered his weapon. ¡°Hourbor! What are you doing back here, you should be part of the 1st line!¡±

    Neither man responded, nor even halted on their march. As if they didn¡¯t see Drake, they passed on by, almost knocking into Drake. He reached out his hands and grabbed both of them on the shoulder, ¡°Hey! Where do you two think you¡¯re going?¡±

    As soon of Drake touched them, Drake felt a cold current of static travel up his arms, then fade away. Both he and the two men jumped at the touch, Hourbore and Vanyor as if the very claws of the enemy suddenly appeared behind them. They turned around fast, Horebore bringing his spear around and Vanyor wiping his shield and barely striking Drake on the side of the head as Drake dodged the sudden blow. Quickly seeing the mistake, Heath rushed forward and supported Drake as he fell over. There was a small cut on Drake¡¯s temple now.

    ¡°Drake! Heath!¡± Hourbour cried out in surprise once he recognized them. ¡°Why are you here?¡±

    Heath yelled at the two, ¡°What do you think you¡¯re doing? You nearly knocked his lantern out!¡±

    ¡°We¡¯re sorry!¡± Vanyor apologized anxiously. ¡°You scared me, I was just acting instinctively! I didn¡¯t mean to hurt you!¡±

    ¡°You should have sneaked up on us like that!¡± Horebour added, helping Drake up. ¡°It¡¯s dangerous to do that.¡±

    ¡°I didn¡¯t sneak up on you!¡± Drake said angrily, holding his cut with his right hand. ¡°You nearly ran us over! We were not hiding; we were standing right in front of you! How could you have missed us?¡± At his words, Hourebor and Vanyor noticed Ashton and Michael with them as well. Drake continued, ¡°Explain yourselves; what is going on? Why have you left your posts and why haven¡¯t there been any signals?¡±

    ¡°But, Drake,¡± Vanyor said shakily. Now that Drake was looking at them calmly, he saw that both of them were very frightened. ¡°We did send a signal. Lots of them! We never got a response from anybody, no matter how many we shot up. We used up all of our arrows, look!¡± Hourbore displayed his empty quiver for them to see.

    ¡°Impossible!¡± Ashton cut in. ¡°I have been keeping a watch on the sky all night! There have been no signals from you or anybody else all night. That¡¯s why we came forward in the first place. Tell us, what happened up there?¡±

    Vanyor and Hourbor looked at each other uneasily. Hourbour replied, ¡°There are ghosts!¡± Drake snorted loudly. ¡°No, really!¡± Hourbour pleaded. ¡°We sent up scores of red arrows! Something terrible is happening, a new plot of the enemy or something! These woods have been strangely misty, we haven¡¯t been able to contact any of the other soldiers, be it visual or otherwise. They are all simply gone!¡±

    ¡°Get a grip on yourselves, that doesn¡¯t mean there are ghosts out there!¡± Drake replied contemptuously. ¡°We need to push forward and find Dravis, now! Ashton,¡± Drake said turning to him. ¡°Let loose a red signal now, and then a white one to gather everybody here. We need to regroup and organize ourselves. The enemy has yet to be seen and we are all lost in our own territory for, Kami¡¯s sake! The enemy could already have passed us. What are the scouts doing?¡±

    Vanyor reached out and grabbed Drake¡¯s shoulder, ¡°There is more Drake, don¡¯t be so hasty yet! We did not say we hadn¡¯t met the enemy, we did! Three soldiers in a group together, came right up by us. We ambushed them as planned, but when my sword touched their bodies, nothing happened. It was like cutting through a fog!¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Drake asked in disbelief. ¡°What are you saying?¡±

    ¡°It was like they were there, but not there.¡± Hourbour added. ¡°The soldiers didn¡¯t even notice us, but went by as if nothing happened. I tell you Drake, they were ghosts! We immediately sent off the red signal but nobody answered. Then another group of enemy soldier came by and the same thing happened. It was like slicing through a candle flame. The soldier flickered for a moment, and then reappeared as if nothing happened! I tell you, it is a trickery of the enemy. We panicked after that and tried to alert everybody, with signals, with our voices, anything! But you are the first people we have seen, and you are from the rear guard! There should be hundreds of men in these woods, but we can¡¯t find them.¡±

    Drake felt like the world was spinning for a second. He grasped the nearest tree for support. This incursion was falling apart and a deep fear rooted itself in Drake¡¯s stomach at his men¡¯s words. He didn¡¯t want to believe it, but before he could say anything, Vanyor spoke bluntly. ¡°We think it might have been magic.¡±

    Drake recoiled in horror at the word. So far, there has been little magic involved in their fights. Only the small magic their spell caster could produce was there, they never met any enemy spell casters. Which was fortunate because Drake knew the power that such creatures possessed. A single strong magician could wipe out every man in the scouting legion with a single voice. He suddenly understood what the static was when he had touched then men in the beginning; it was his ring breaking a spell.

    Drake gathered himself and turned around to the group, ¡°Ashton, do as I have said! We need to try to pull our forces back and regroup. We need to find Dravis, now!¡±

    ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Heath asked, visibly shaken by their story.

    As Ashton readied his arrow Drake explained, ¡°The enemy must have magicians with them! They must be interfering with our senses, getting us to see things that aren¡¯t there and to not see things that are there. Those ghosts Vanyor described were just illusions created by magic. Decoys! And the reason that we can¡¯t see all the other units¡¯ signals is probably because they aren¡¯t letting us! Vanyor and Hourbour almost passed by without noticing us when we were right next to them, they must have been under a spell as well.¡±

    Micheal responded in horror, ¡°If the enemy was just a decoy, if they can just mess with our sight like that¡­.¡± She didn¡¯t finish her sentence.

    Ashton was ready with the arrow aflame and his bow taunt. He said quietly, ¡°It means that our communication network has been destroyed, our senses cannot be trusted, and that the real enemy is probably surrounding us as we speak.¡± He let loose the arrow. ¡°It also means that nobody will probably see our signals. In fact, for all we know or can know, everybody else could be dead already.¡±Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road.

    Heath cried out, ¡°Isn¡¯t there anything we can do?¡±

    Drake pounded the tree he was leaning on and swore. The more he thought about it, the more he realized just how helpless humans were against magicians. He felt himself once again, on the long march of the zombies from back in the wilderness, helpless and afraid. His head was spinning, making it difficult to concentrate. ¡°We need to find Dravis,¡± He said again. ¡°He will have the spell caster with him; he will be able to block the enemy influence. From him, we should be able to get a signal out to any men still alive. We need to fall back.¡±

    Michael started, ¡°How are we supposed to find him-.¡±

    She was interrupted suddenly by the death born cries of the enemy. Two soldiers burst in behind them, their war cries startling the group and taking advantage of their carelessness. During the discussion, they neglected to keep a look out, letting these two men come up close somehow. Drake cursed himself for his failings as one bore down directly on him. With a defiant yell, Drake turned to meet him. The man was too fast though, coming up close to Drake, his sword glittering in the weak golden light of the city as it rose for the strike. As if in slow motion, Drake watched the blade fall, passing inches away from his guard and falling down upon his right shoulder and slicing him neatly in two. Drake screamed as a horrible sensation of liquid nitrogen poured through his insides, promising to end his miserable life.

    But then the soldier exploded into thousands of shards of light and disappeared like smoke in the wind. Drake stood paralyzed in shock, unable to comprehend what had happened, letting out unnatural grunts. He heard laughter behind him and he turned his head to look at the source.

    Ashton was laughing at him, bent over and wheezing at Drake¡¯s perplexed face. Drake could only repeat, ¡°What¡­what?¡±

    Ashton answered him between fits, ¡°That wasn¡¯t¡­ a real sol-soldier.¡± He tried to stifle his giggles with his hand, ¡°It was one of the phantoms. It was a ghost!¡±

    Drake looked around wildly. Ashton was the only one laughing; the other people had taken the encounter much more seriously. Drake saw the other illusionary soldier march away, not noticing his missing companion. Drake panted out in wonder, ¡°An illusion?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Michael said casting an angry look at the still laughing Ashton. ¡°Just an illusion. You are not as dead as you might have been. That is what you get for letting down your guard! If that had been a real soldier, you would be in Kami¡¯s halls right now!¡±

    ¡°And he would be in a better place for it!¡± Hourbour said. He looked shaken; it looked like the other phantom had attacked him in turn. ¡°We still have a major problem here! Our men are still out there with no idea what is going on. Real enemy soldiers could be coming at us any moment in force; we do not have any communication or coordination. We need to have a full retreat!¡±

    ¡°Right.¡± Drake said, collecting himself. He massaged his chest where he thought he had felt the slicing of his flesh. It still hurt. ¡°That is why we need to find the lieutenant and his spell caster. When we do, we will send the retreat signal, and regather at the fort.¡±

    ¡°And then what?¡± Vanyor asked. ¡°We still can¡¯t fight the magicians or the enemy. The situation would not have changed!¡±

    ¡°The reinforcements should be here soon!¡± Drake said eagerly. ¡°They will have brought spellcasters with them; they always do. At this point, we need to hide and let them handle the enemy. We just need to survive until the reinforcements come! That¡¯s what we should have done from the start.¡±

    A strong and clear voice cut in from nowhere, ¡°There will be no reinforcements this time, I am afraid.¡±  The six soldiers jumped and looked around anxiously for the source for the sound. There was none. Then slowly, their magician, Horace, materialized in front of them, his figure coming into focus. He said softly to all their shocked faces. ¡°What? I am a spell caster too, am I not? Making myself appear invisible to you is easy, especially when strong spell work placed upon this regain already like it is now.¡±

    ¡°Curse you magician,¡± Drake shouted. ¡°We have had enough surprises tonight, don¡¯t sneak up on us like that or we would be liable to kill you!¡± The magician snorted in contempt.

    Getting over his surprise first, Ashton asked, ¡°So it is true then? There are magicians with the enemy?¡±

    The magician nodded solemnly, ¡°We are already surrounded as it is; the first sighting of the enemy was a trap, to spread us all out. They have also intercepted all of our arrows, keeping us all in the dark, so to speak.¡± He added bitterly, ¡°most of the legion has been wiped out already.¡±

    Heath and Michael gasped in horror. Horubour and Vanyor muttered prayers silently and Ashton was quiet. Drake challenged the magician, ¡°How do you know all this? How can you know that if communication has been cut off?!¡±

    ¡°Because,¡± The magician replied angrily. ¡°I was with the lieutenant the whole time. I received the signals; we knew what was going on from almost the beginning. But we couldn¡¯t find a way to communicate back. The enemy knew where we were and came after us directly, blocking my efforts entirely. I barely managed to escape!¡±

    ¡°You were attacked by the real enemy? What happened? Where is the lieutenant, what happened to him?¡± The magician didn¡¯t respond. ¡°What happened to the lieutenant?!¡± Drake pressed with intensity.

    ¡°What do you think happened!¡± the magician shouted back. ¡°He¡¯s dead, along with everybody else in his guard! I told him from the beginning that we couldn¡¯t win this time; that the enemy probably had magicians with them. But he didn¡¯t listen to me. He never listened to me! And now he has paid with his life. I saw him get restrained by the enemy spell caster and strangled by his own hands working against him. That is the power of our enemy; it¡¯s not something we could have handled from the start!¡±

    ¡°And you ran away, LIKE A SNIVELING LITTLE RAT, YOU COWARD!¡± Drake screamed. ¡°How did you get away, did you hold the lieutenant out as bait and turn invisible? Did you make a deal with the enemy to turn over you soldiers positions to save your life?!¡±

    The Magician¡¯s face turned red in rage and he said with a gravelly voice, ¡°You dare suggest treason from me? You dare suggest that I sold out the legion?¡± The magician screamed, ¡°IT WAS DRAVIS, WHO SOLD OUT THE SOLDIERS HERE, IT WAS DRAVIS WHO BETRAYED YOU ALL! HE, AGAINST ALL COUNSEL, SET FORTH IN HIS ATTACKS AND HIS IDEALS. HE LED YOU ALL TO HIS DEATH BECAUSE OF HIS INCOMPETENCE AS A LIEUTENANT AND HIS BELIEF IN THE STRENGTH OF THE PATHETIC RACE OF HUMANS!¡± Hourbour looked stricken at his words, and the rest bowed their heads. Drake didn¡¯t know how to respond. The magician continued after a moment, ¡°But Dravis was proved wrong tonight, for all his faith, he is now a dead man, along with the rest of the men here. We have lost this region, we need to fallback.¡±

    Drake felt punctured by the magician¡¯s words and didn¡¯t respond.  Ashton piped up in his stead, ¡°The reinforcements are still coming; they will have the proper strength to repel the enemy. You are right we should not have attacked when it was not our place. But surely, this region isn¡¯t lost altogether, yet.¡±

    The magician looked down on Ashton in contempt, ¡°There will be no reinforcements, didn¡¯t you hear me earlier?¡±

    ¡°But the lieutenant said you go the message out,¡± Heath protested, looking up from his prayers. ¡°He said that they were coming!¡±

    Drake answered Heath instead. He said in a low voice, leaning on his spear for support, ¡°He knew there would be no reinforcements from the beginning, didn¡¯t he, magician? He went out anyway. He lied to us.¡±

    The magician nodded, ¡°All fronts in this area have been attacked, not just ours. There were not any extra forces to be sent here. All the attacks so far have been nothing, this is the main assault of the enemy, they will have swept away the majority in the edge of the frontline by now, it had been predicted by the generals. Key regions to the west of us had been fortified, but we were told to simply withdraw. As usual, the lieutenant stubbornly refused.¡±

    Vanyor said painfully, ¡°It was predicted? How can that be? How can he still send us out here if he knew¡­¡± nobody answered him. He grew hot, ¡°What about the salvation of Kami, what about his faithfulness to those who trusted him, how can it end like this?¡±

    Hourbour answered him, ¡°it hasn¡¯t ended like this, do not be upset.¡± Everybody looked at him, ¡°We are only a small part of this story; that is, the story of Kami¡¯s triumph over evil. It is not our place to try to understand the depths of Kami¡¯s will and plan, only to trust and believe in him. Do not despair Vanyor.¡± There were tears in Horebor¡¯s eyes and he said peacefully, ¡°for their essential efforts in the fight, Dravis and the others are now in the Halls of Kami, waiting for the day with Kami stands triumphant over the enemy. At that time they will be resurrected and all men will enjoy the kingdom of Kami in peace and freedom. Do not lose faith yet, and not over something this small.¡±

    Vanyor nodded and accepted his words. Drake wanted to scream out at them, that they were wrong, that they have been deceived and brainwashed. That there was no salvation of Kami¡­ But he couldn¡¯t break the hope they had, so he swallowed his rage and his tears and said, ¡°There is no way to know whether or not everybody is gone, many could have survived like we have. They must have also realized that there is no communication available to them either. The only sensible thing to do is to return to the fort, the other survivors will have gathered there as well.¡±

    ¡°Shall I send the full retreat signal, anyway?¡± Ashton asked.

    ¡°Don¡¯t bother. At this point you would only be alerting the enemy to our position. Let¡¯s head back quickly!¡±

    Micheal spoke suddenly in an eerie voice. ¡°We can¡¯t do that either,¡± she said pointing back towards the fort. They all looked in the direction she directed to. There was a strange flickering light coming from that direction and as they listen closely now, there were also soft screams¡­ ¡°The fort is already burning.¡±

    They stood paralyzed for a second, the magician spouted quickly to Drake, ¡°They are already behind us! We need to move now! We need to leave this place before all escape routes are closed. They are not an enemy we can fight!¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond, but stood frozen at the sight of the burning fort. The flames burned strangely, reminding him of Drfuil¡¯s flames on the throne. He swayed slightly as he realized the sudden destruction of his home for the last three months. How could this have happened so easily? Only yesterday, the whole legion had stood proudly in Kami¡¯s Lantern, joyous at the deeds they had accomplished for their god. Now, in a sudden whirlwind that had bypassed him completely, it was all over.

    ¡°Drake!¡± Ashton shouted, bringing him to his senses again.

    Drake took charge immediately, ¡°Follow me! We should the magician¡¯s advice now; I don¡¯t see any other alternative! It seems we are saved by luck today; may god have mercy on our souls for leaving this place. We are going to make a break for it, and we need to be fast and quiet! Magician, we will need what cover you can provide, if only to stifle our noises. The rest of you, keep your weapon on you. We will not be the heroes today, we are going to run and cut down any enemy in our way!¡±

    The soldiers responded in unison and followed Drake as he broke way to the east and north in full retreat. With his men behind him now, he let the tears spring up in his eyes and fall. Despite himself, he had come to love his place with his comrades in the fort.

    The group escaped noiselessly now, thanks to the magician. Before they had gone completely out of sight, Drake turned and looked back at the fort they had built together. It burned blue and yellow, strange colors used only to display the spell work used. With a curse, Drake turned back and doubled the pace. Somehow, the oppressive world of magic was going to pay for how they toyed with the lives of humans!

 Chapter 26

    Drake and his men had marched through the night without break, each carrying their packs and weapons but still retaining their optimal pace. Their training from the halls had, at least, prepared them for such work. They had marched warily, as Drake had told them earlier, ¡°As far as we can tell, the attack came from the west so we will head east towards the plains. There is a good chance we are already encircled though, be prepared at all times to engage the enemy. We will break through if we have to! There is no quick way to tell the enemy apart from the phantoms, so, if we see do the enemy, do not hesitate, just attack quickly and efficiently. We are in a hurry! If it does turn out to be nothing, then we will ignore them and just continue!¡±

    Soon in, the group ran into only a small detachment of the enemy, perhaps patrolling the edges. They had marched straight into the enemy group, catching each other by surprise. Drake slew the enemy in front without hesitation and before the man even noticed he was there. It was a real man, not a phantom, and he died silently, falling down from the impact. Drake prayed there was not a magician with them or, if there was, that it was the man he had just killed.

    There were only three of the enemy, now two since the first one died instantly. Horace quickly blocked any possible communication with the rest of their comrades and the six of them circled and slew the two with ease, ignoring the snarls and foreign language of the enemy. Drake understood the words though, strange phrases of curses and hate. He didn¡¯t bother to translate.

    Thankfully, it didn¡¯t appear there was with a spell caster. After the last man fell, Drake singled them to keep moving, not letting them rest. The whole encounter only took a few minutes and it only increased the urgency of the escape. They cleaned their weapons and departed without another word.

    They made it through the rest of the night without any other incidents, and with the rise of the Great Lantern in the morning so also came a sweet feeling in their hearts. They had exited the borders of the forest land only hours ago and were now upon the hilly plains. There were not any soldiers or outposts to be seen, but it was quiet and peaceful. They felt they had escaped.

    Hourbour looked back and exclaimed suddenly, ¡°Curse them, those filthy dogs! They are burning the territory down!¡±

    The group paused and looked behind as well, Drake leaning on his spear for support. It wasn¡¯t just their territory that was in flames, the whole west coast was darkened by the black smoke wafting from fires below.

    ¡°Is that normal?¡± Ashton asked solemnly. ¡°Do they usually burn the territory they conquer?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± The magician said. Drake would have thought that the long trek would have been difficult for the lean looking magician, but he looked calm and fresh in the morning light. Everybody else was exhausted and filthy. ¡°In the past, after every successful attack they would burn all the land they have gained. It may just be some sort of ritual, I don¡¯t really know. They probably view it as some sort of cleansing; we do the same thing when we take back territory. But it is good news for us at least. They have only come so far as the flames burn, for now we are out of their reach.¡±

    The men were relieved at the news, and some slumped to the ground to rest. Drake stared back at the land, his eyes straining to see the end of the smoke. ¡°They have taken a lot of the forest it seems.¡±

    ¡°The outer edges at least,¡± Ashton responded, squinting in the light. ¡°Most of the inner lands will not have been secured yet; not in one night. It looks like the river fort has held at least, that was the most fortified along the edges.  But all the areas that only had scouts in them were probably taken with ease.¡± He gazed back from where they came. ¡°It¡¯s a good thing we got out when we did, our entire region is in flames.¡±

    A cool breeze came across the plains, vaporizing the sweat on their bodies and giving them much needed relief. Heath basked openly and smiled in the sunlight. Micheal said suddenly, ¡°What do the enemies do with the bodies? I wish we could have at least buried them.¡±

    Drake gut twisted as he thought about all the men who had died. Gethroe, Dravis; all the men he had trained with; they were all gone in just one night. What would the enemy do with their bodies? He felt angry and helpless. ¡°I never even had a chance to save them!¡± He thought bitterly to himself. What was the point?

    The magician answered Micheal¡¯s question, ¡°From what we can tell, they do not do anything special with them, as far as desecration goes. As heartless as the enemy is in their battles, so also are they in their victory. Most likely, the bodies got burned with the rest of the forest, that is all.¡±

    ¡°That is a relief,¡± Vanyor said squatting down on the ground. ¡°But either way it does not matter. They will be given new bodies in the salvation of Kami. It is not like they are gone forever, that thought comforts me.¡± The men nodded, but Ashton was silent. Drake knew Ashton had his own beliefs what happened to the dead. Drake did not have any comforting beliefs though. For him, death was simply the end, a black void. He did not believe in anything and the thoughts of his friends angered him.

    Drake said suddenly, ¡°We haven¡¯t reached our destination yet! It is still a day¡¯s march to get to Camp Newhouse from here, we need to get moving!¡±

    ¡°Drake!¡± Ashton protested. ¡°That¡¯s crazy, we are all exhausted! We are out of danger for now; we should just find a place to rest. We can continue when we are ready to march again.¡±

    ¡°No.¡± Drake repeated irrationally. ¡°The enemy could be right behind us, we are not safe here out on the plains. We need to keep going!¡±

    ¡°There is no indication of that,¡± The Magician said seriously,.¡°This will be a multiple day campaign most likely, they will not start their next phase so soon.¡±

    Drake was about to protest but there was a sudden sensation in the back of Drake¡¯s mind, like the presence of another soul. He remembered how it felt from his time with Drfuil. He wiped around, alarmed, scouring the plains with his eyes looking for the enemy. It was empty and serene.

    Heath asked hesitantly ¡°Drake, what¡¯s wrong?¡±

    Drake turned to the magician and asked, ¡°Did you feel that?¡± The magician shook his head, confused. Drake eyed the plains again. The sensation had only lasted a moment, but it was pungent. It reminded him of somebody, but he couldn¡¯t remember who.

    Ashton spoke now, ¡°Drake, talk to us. What¡¯s wrong? Did you see something?¡±

    ¡°No¡±, Drake responded, still looking away. ¡°I felt somebody around¡­¡±

    There was a pause. ¡°You felt somebody?¡± Michael asked skeptically. ¡°How do you feel somebody around, what do you mean?¡±

    Drake looked back, realizing he didn¡¯t have a good answer. Ashton spoke instead, ¡°Drake we are all tired, and so are you. Well,¡± he added, looking at the magician. ¡°Most of us are at least. You need rest too. And food. We are all hungry I am sure.¡±

    Drake was suddenly tired, as if Ashton¡¯s words reminded his body of something it forgot. ¡°Alright. Fine¡± he said. ¡°Let us take a short rest, eat, gather our strength. We will start moving again at noon, though.¡±

    Ashton nodded, ¡°Sounds fair.¡±

    The group moved on and found a short hill they could hide behind. In the morning light, there was a nice shadow on the back of the hill to rest in. They quickly ate the rations they had on them and then rested with relief. The magician kept a lookout; he seemed to not need rest. During this trip, Drake had come to respect the magician more, begrudgingly though. Although the magician clearly could have moved much faster than all of them, he never complained about the pace or even the rest they were now taking. Drake wondered why he had disliked the man so much before, perhaps he was just biased towards the magicians. He didn¡¯t know.

    After he had closed his eyes, he fell asleep almost immediately, resting his head on his pack, the hill blocking the rays of the sun. The others fell asleep soon as well.

    <hr>

    I was dreaming and in my dream I was standing on a tall mountain, so tall that the all around me cold snow lay plastered across the terrain blotting out all colors. My bare feet stood atop the snow impossibly without impression, but I didn¡¯t notice that. The mountain I was on was all part of the same mountain range and it extended so far to the left of me that I could not see the end of them. The sky was clear and cloudless, only a bright sun and blue sky was there. To my right though, was the valley, it appeared that I was on the last mountain in the long chain.

    Despite being so high up, I could see clearly all the lands before me, stretching out to untold miles. There were rivers and plains and forests and lakes; all the possible and endless terrains available to a world and it was glorious to behold. The great star was in the sky, lighting up the whole of the territory and the water sparkled in its beauty and the plants and trees tall in it. I looked still and saw the land turn in its seasons, from winter to spring to summer and then fall, each season bringing about its own beauty in an ever-changing world.

    Suddenly, humans appeared far below. They domesticated the lands and cared for them as I would have cared for them. They created and built as only creatures with wills could have done. Now as I looked across the land, proud towers and cities stood. Ports and harbors and many masted boats stood in the waters. The land was richer and more beautiful than ever before and my heart filled with joy to behold it.

    Suddenly, like a storm, a large darkness came across over my beloved territory. Wherever the shadow touched the plants rotted, the building collapsed, the rivers dried up and the people dies by the millions. I cried out in anger and distress and stepped forward to stop the destruction of my treasure, to smite the power that dared to tread about on my territory.

    But as I stepped forward, the mountain below me started sinking suddenly and I fell along with it. With slow rumblings, the entire mountain chain started falling as well, crashing into the valleys and lakes below and destroying the world. I fell with the mountain, crashing into the land and then falling through it towards a void, escapable. Strong chains bound my wrists and my loneliness crushed my spirit and I called in in agony and despair. I was trapped in this cage, sealed away for all eternity. My heart broke and I cried out, if only my life could be ended to spare me from this misery!Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    Drake was woken up by Ashton shaking him slightly, and whispering intensely, ¡°Drake! Drake, wake up!¡±

    Sitting up straight Drake asked anxiously, ¡°What going on? What¡¯s wrong?¡± Tears were streaming down his face.

    ¡°You¡¯re what¡¯s wrong, Drake! You were thrashing around in your dreams, yelling even. You woke me up, but I don¡¯t think anybody else has.¡± Ashton looked at him with concern. ¡°Are you okay? You are crying.¡±

    Drake rolled over and groaned; he was sore all over. ¡°Yes, I¡¯m fine.¡± He said angrily. He understood that the sadness was not his own, but he could still feel the despair in his heart. He wiped away the tears furiously.

    Ashton pointed at his chest and said in a hushed voice, ¡°Look Drake, your ring.¡±

    Drake looked down and flinched. The ring was glowing slightly, only perceptible because they were in a shadow. Ashton looked mesmerized by the sight of it. He asked softly, ¡°Why do you suppose I can see it, now? I haven¡¯t seen it since the wagons in the wilderness. What were you dreaming of Drake?¡±

    Drake grabbed the ring and chain and stuffed it down his tunic. ¡°I try to keep it hidden, if only from myself,¡± He responded.

    Ashton nodded as if he understood. He asked, ¡°You had another dream about the angry god, didn¡¯t you? I think that the ring appears when you are in contact him, no?¡±

    Drake lashed out, ¡°He¡¯s a thousand, million, miles away in a whole different dimension right now, there is no way he can see me!¡±

    Ashton smiled slightly, still looking at where Drake had hidden the ring, ¡°You are overacting again Drake. I wonder why the lieutenant picked you as a leader when you act so unstable sometimes.¡±

    ¡°Dravis is dead.¡± Drake said bitterly, laying down and facing away. ¡°Shows you how good his judgment was.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know,¡± Ashton said lightly, ignoring Drake¡¯s foul temper as usual. ¡°Dravis was a wise man I think. He was intelligent and brave, he proved that in battle. I think he saw and thought more than he let others believe he did. He knew he was going to die yesterday before the battle began, I¡¯ll bet. It was his own principles that killed him in the end, not his error I judgment.¡±

    Drake grunted, ¡°Believe what you want. He was an idiot, though, who got not only himself killed but everybody in the legion. That shows you how dangerous a man like him is, how dangerous this faith in Kami can be.¡±

    Ashton nodded solemnly and sighed. ¡°I suppose you¡¯re right, it was almost our death too.¡± He let the moment pass and then asked again, ¡°What did you dream of Drake? I do not think you should ignore the visions you see, they might hold important meanings for you.¡±

    Drake rolled over and challenged, ¡°Like what?¡±

    Ashton shrugged. ¡°I want to know at least, if only out of curiosity. Not everybody has a mind link with a god you know, such a unique and powerful thing.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s not a mind link and it¡¯s not wonderful, okay?!¡± Drake protested. ¡°It¡¯s a curse that doesn¡¯t let me rest peacefully. It¡¯ll probably haunt me for the rest of my life; I¡¯ll never get a decent night¡¯s sleep again.¡±

    ¡°The dreams are so terrible?¡± Ashton inquired. Ashton had been trying to get details out of him about the dreams for months now. Today, he was more relentless than usual, his eyes boring into Drake¡¯s skull.

    ¡°Yes,¡± Drake stressed, hoping Ashton would drop it.

    Ashton waited a moment and then asked again, ¡°Do what did you dream about this time?¡±

    ¡°Good god, Ashton!¡± Drake spat. ¡°Why do you want to know so badly? It doesn¡¯t concern you!¡±

    ¡°Why are you so uptight about this Drake?¡± Ashton implored, ¡°And it hurts to hear you say that I am not involved in this when I clearly am! But I will forgive you, please tell me!¡±

    ¡°Fine!¡± Drake burst. ¡°I sometimes see his memories, and sometimes I just feel his emotions. It not pleasant, and not informative, it¡¯s not wonderful! It¡¯s mostly pain and agony about his current condition, trapped inside his cage unable to do anything. I get to experience those feelings as well. I hate it!¡±

    Drake let his anger escape his mouth. Ashton stared at Drake in wonder though and asked simply, ¡°You see his memories?¡±

    It suddenly hit Drake why Ashton was so interested. To Drake, Drfuil was just a tormentor, but to Ashton, he was his long lost god out of their myths and legends. Ashton was like a child wanting to understand what his dead father was like.

    Ashton said suddenly, ¡°I¡¯m sorry. If it bothers you so much, I won¡¯t ask again.¡±

    ¡°No, no.¡± Drake replied, waving it off. ¡°You deserve to know, i guess. I¡¯m sorry I held it back for so long.¡± Drake took a deep breath, willing himself to face the memories he had.  Drake started slowly, explaining what he saw and what he thought it meant. How Drfuil had created the world, saw that it was still empty and then had invited humans to live in it. How the humans planted, built, and enriched it. He told of the glory of the land in its golden age. But then also of the time of destruction and subsequent incarceration.

    ¡°I know the details are sketchy, but again, these are from dreams,¡± Drake said. ¡°I don¡¯t think I am supposed to get details, just the feelings he had.¡±

    ¡°And what feelings did he have?¡± Ashton asked his eyes bright with curiosity.

    Drake suddenly felt uncomfortable, ¡°You know, Pride and stuff¡­¡± Ashton waited patiently. ¡°He really cared about the land, not just the people in it but the land itself. He taught the humans how to cultivate and tame it, he taught them how to build and create. He felt such joy at the works of the humans, kind of like how a dad would be proud of his son¡¯s achievements. It would be true to say that Drfuil loved his territory and worked hard to create it into the image he thought was best. The humans thrived there!¡±

    Drake¡¯s tone got darker, ¡°But then disaster befell the territory. I¡¯m not sure why or how, I just know the feelings he had at seeing his territory getting killed and burned. Hate, anger, rage, sadness, and despair. The enemies locked him away in the end instead of just killing him so that he would have to witness the continued tragedy of his territory while he was helpless to stop it. That¡¯s all he feels anymore I am afraid.¡± Drake shifted uncomfortably. ¡°But this all happened so long ago, even he has lost track of the time. Now his land is just the wilderness as you see it.¡±

    ¡°I wish I could see what you have seen,¡± Ashton sighed leaning back. ¡°To see the territory in its glory must have been amazing.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond. He didn¡¯t feel like talking about it anymore. It made him feel guilty and ashamed to talk to Ashton about it, like he had done something wrong. He turned away and tried to fall asleep again. Ashton was tactful enough not to question him anymore; he was content with what he had at the moment.

    The day was growing hotter, and although the warm light of the Lantern was not reaching them at the moment, Drake could tell today was going to be a scorcher. He looked above; the sky was as clear now as it was in the dream and made him think about the gods. Did Kami have the same feelings regarding his territory? Drake didn¡¯t know.

    Ashton pulled out his flute from his tunic and then started playing softly. He had completed the flute only a month ago, to the joy of him and everybody in the camp. In the short times they were all together in the fort, he would play for them songs from the fireside. Now he played softly, and it was a tune Drake recognized, the one about the god in their lands.

    After playing for a while, Ashton stopped and asked, changing the subject abruptly, ¡°What are we going to do now anyway? Heath and the others are under the impression that we will simply fall back to headquarters and probably get reassigned to another division, or simply join with the next troops we find.¡±

    ¡°This talk about the past and then the future is confusing me.¡± Drake said, turning back to Ashton. ¡°What do you think we should do?¡±

    Ashton said sadly, ¡°I do not know. I think time in this military will be the death of us, and soon. We were lucky to escape this last attack; we can¡¯t count on that luck again. I had said this before, but I am now convinced of it. Us wilderness conscripts, we do not really have a place in this army. If we rejoin with the headquarters I am sure we will be sent to the front of the line again as scouts. But still,¡± he said looking back at the other men sleeping. ¡°We cannot just abandon them either. They will get killed, soon, without us.¡±

    Ashton looked back at Drake. The ring had disappeared again and Drake was looking at him with serious eyes. He said, ¡°I could kill the magician. His spells won¡¯t work on me you know. I could tell the others that he had turned on me or something. They would believe me.¡±

    ¡°Really?¡± Ashton said dryly. ¡°To what end? How would that help us?¡±

    Drake sat up, ¡°We could lead them away from the military. Find a safe place to hide until the war is over. We could live out here, maybe.¡±

    ¡°And how would you convince them of that?¡± Ashton said, not taking Drake¡¯s words seriously. ¡°Getting the indoctrinated soldiers to run away would be hard enough, but Michael is a native, remember? I doubt anything will get her away from her city. You want to live out here? In the war zone? Or in the enemy territory? Good luck with that, if either side catches us they will kill us for being traitors or kill us for being enemies. And how would we get food? We get all of it now from Kami, I doubt there are many natural resources we can use out here¡­¡±

    ¡°Okay!¡± Drake said angrily. ¡°I get it! It was just an idea.¡± Ashton snorted in amusement. ¡°Maybe you should come up with an idea and I can make you feel stupid.¡± Ashton laughed again. ¡°No seriously,¡± Drake said, ¡°Do you have a better idea? I want to hear it.¡± Ashton didn¡¯t respond. ¡°Then shut up and go to sleep!¡± Drake turned over again and closed his eyes.

    Ashton didn¡¯t move, but sat thinking quietly. He said after a bit, ¡°There must be something we have overlooked, something that can help us. I think we will find our ways eventually, for now, just believe.¡±

    Drake spat back, ¡°If I hear somebody tell me to believe in something again I am going to lose it!¡± Ashton shook his head.

    As they lay down, there was a commotion above them and Drake sat up in alert. Ashton crawled up to peer over the hill cautiously. He said back down to Drake sarcastically, ¡°If you still want to kill the magician, do it quickly! He is coming our way.¡± Drake looked up and crawled up to Ashton. ¡°It is not noon yet, I wonder why he is coming over.¡± Ashton said.

    ¡°I¡¯m sure we''ll find out when he gets here,¡± Drake replied. ¡°It probably isn¡¯t good news anyway.¡± He turned around and slumped down again. Ashton did the same. They were still tired despite the brief rest.

    Soon they heard the magician calling out to them. He sounded anxious and nervous. Drake didn¡¯t like that sound and awoke the rest of the men. ¡°Get yourselves ready!¡± he said sliding down to the men below and waking them. ¡°The magician is nervous, so I am nervous too!¡±

    They did so obediently, but a little groggily. They gathered their belonging and waited for the magician to appear. He did so readily.

    ¡°Drake,¡± the Magician said earnestly peering down from the top of the hill. ¡°I have been calling your name. Get up here quickly!¡±

    Drake climbed the slope for the third time ¡°What is it?¡± he called out.

    ¡°The general magistrate is here to see you!¡± the magician squeaked out, something Drake had never seen before.

    ¡°Who the hell is the general magistrate?¡± Drake asked grumpily, reaching the peak.

    The magician nearly exploded in indignation. Ashton had climbed up with Drake and asked curiously, ¡°Coming to see Drake? Who would know he is out here in the first place?¡±

    A familiar figure appeared in front of them. It wore a blue sash with a gold-plated pin on that glittered in the light. ¡°I am the general magistrate, Drake.¡± He said coolly. The magician nearly bowed in front of the figure in reverence. ¡°Though I suppose that title would have little relevance to you,¡± he continued.

    Drake¡¯s felt his blood pressure rise, ¡°You!¡± he shouted, clenching his hands.

    ¡°Yes, me.¡± The figure said easily. Ashton only stared in bewilderment.  ¡°It took me a long time to find you Drake, imagine my dismay to find out you were part of a legion that was way out on the outskirts! But I am so glad to see you are safe.¡±

    ¡°Gatal!¡± Drake burst. ¡°That was you I felt this morning, wasn¡¯t it?¡±

    ¡°Yes, it was, I had been probing the fronts for a while looking for you.¡±

    ¡°What do you want from us now?¡± Drake said defensively, ready to strike if need be.

    The figure smiled mysteriously, ¡°Don¡¯t be so hostile Drake. I come in peace, or at least, as peaceful as it can be in these times of war.¡± He stepped forward and reached out with a grin, ¡°When I first saw you in the lower halls of the city I knew great things were awaiting you. Come now Drake, I will guide you to that greatness, and to the freedom I know you are looking for. In fact,¡± he said, bringing his arms wide. ¡°I can offer you all that you wish for, if you just follow me Drake!¡±

 Chapter 27

    Lieutenant Fallow was part of the 32nd Mounted legion, an ancient and proud legion among the various possible positions on the frontline. Its origins dated back to even before the war against the enemy, it was from a time that only existed in the record books in Central Library. The legion served additionally as a symbol military might and prestige. It was an honor for every soldier of Kami to be able to ride in such an elite group. Captain Liehold had brought Fallow into the frontline and into this legion from his position on the wall, but despite the glory and joy Fallow had as part of the legion, he was not sure he would have rather had stayed within the city.

    Since the revelation Fallow experienced in Central Library, Fallow had a hard time grasping some of the metanarrative questions that now dogged him. The Defensive Mandate had created an attitude among the citizens of the city and the soldiers of the army that Fallow could not partake in. He had once felt that the city was stagnate before, merely waiting around, getting fat, and believing that the salvation of Kami was coming in some place far in the future. This atmosphere had created a lax political setting inside the city, a place where men like Captain Grisly thrived despite his incompetence as an officer.

    But now, a new belief like fire had spread around, energizing even the land at their feet.  This was to be the last battle, the men said to each other, the final fight to bring an end to the war with the enemy. They, with their own hands, could seize the glory and triumph. Victory was inevitable to them and the soldiers were alive like never before. They believed, as they never had before, that they would live to witness the triumph of Kami.  There was faith; faith and duty. At every dawn the men had cried out to Kami¡¯s Great Lantern, ¡°Is this the day? Will today be the day of Kami¡¯s salvation?¡±

    In Fallow¡¯s first month on the frontline, the 32nd mounted legion had been sent out many times to help rout enemy forces that had made their appearance within the territory. With swift judgment and power the legion had punished the offenders heavily for their trespassing and with every outstanding victory the men were reinforced in their belief that the war was drawing to a close. The men saw the strength of Kami¡¯s military and wondered to each other only how long it would take to drive away the enemy completely. Days, weeks, Months? They all knew in their hearts that it would all be ended soon.

    Fallow too, had been caught up in the joy and energy of the men, and while he may not have been totally convinced in the power of Kami, he felt that the strength in the men would perhaps be enough to finish the battle. It was such joy to be with them, that he let himself believe. Great choruses of cheers sprung up at the end of every fight, exultations in the strength of men and the power of Kami. But Fallow failed to notice the resistance of the enemy increased with every incursion. He did not listen and he did not pay close attention to the realities of the war and instead drank the soft wine of ignorance.

    Fallow had woken up violently on the first night of the second month. Once again, they had been sent out along with other armored and unarmored legions to push back an enemy incursion.  As they had every time before, they expected to swoop in and cut off the heads of their enemy in a flash, throwing them into chaos. Then, with coordinated efforts with the other legions, they would push back the remaining enemies back to darkness from where they came from. It had happened many times before.

    But when the 32nd had arrived late and carelessly the enemy had already entrenched itself within the land. Kami¡¯s foot soldiers were engaging in heavy fighting near the center, duking it out with the opposing armored legion and were making no leeway. The 32nd was to cut in across the enemy¡¯s right flank and disrupt their line and when they did so, the enemy was prepared.

    The enemy had managed to craft and plant great stakes in the ground all around them, creating an unforeseen wall of death to the riders. Furthermore, the enemies on the flank were armed with long spears with large cruel hooks on the end meant to tear down riders from their mounts. In their confidence, the 32nd rode in and many promptly met their death on top of the wooden stakes. The rest suddenly found themselves floundering in the land and suddenly attacked by a battalion of the enemy wielding the cruel hooks. Fallow felt the true horror of battle and his friends around him were ripped off and skewed by the merciless enemy.  Captain Liehold quickly ordered a withdrawal, but not soon enough to save the hundreds of men and horses that had already fallen to the enemy¡¯s traps.

    During the rest of the battle, the 32nd gave only a minimal amount of support and it was largely thanks to the steadfast armored legion that the enemy was eventually pushed back again into to their land.

    For the men of the 32nd, this was a reminder of the harshness and strength of the enemy they were fighting. For the men who were confident in the salvation of Kami, the event emboldened their hate of the enemy. They had lost much of the joy of the fighting and replaced it instead with a hard determination and hatred for their enemy.

    For Fallow, this was instead a crash in the night waking him up from his quickly forgotten dreams. He now saw the true position of the enemy; despite every loss they suffered they always came back stronger and fiercer. They were better armed and better organized. They learned and matched Kami¡¯s tactics. Fallow remembered again that they were on the losing side of the war, that instead of fighting the last battle to ensure the victory of Kami, they were instead fighting desperately to keep what little territory they had under their control.

    Fallow had approached his captain the night after. ¡°Sir?¡± he had asked, coming into the small and dank room that served as Liehold¡¯s quarters on the frontline. The 32nd¡¯s home base was a fort near the center of the territory called Fort Credent. There was a small lantern in the room that gave light for Lieholds paperwork.  ¡°May I come in?¡± he asked lightly.

    Liehold looked up from his work, weary eyed, ¡°Yes please, lieutenant Fallow,¡± he said, leaning back and abandoning his work. ¡°I could use a break from this.¡±

    Fallow came in cautiously, unsure how to phrase his thoughts. He studied the boot marks left on the dirt floor. After a moment, he looked said, ¡°I would like clarification regarding the purpose of the defensive mandate.¡±

    Liehold looked at him and then chuckled softly. ¡°Why am I not surprised?¡± he responded. ¡°You always ask the strange questions. What is there to be curious about, Lieutenant? As the name suggests it¡¯s the military operation meant to counter the increasing threats and attacks by the enemy. If I have my numbers correct, I believe we have already tripled the amount of men in the frontline so far. We are here to defend and keep this territory, you know. More men and materials are soon coming, too.¡±

    Fallow let the answer hang in the air and then said quietly, ¡°The men believe that this is Leasnal, the battle prophesied to end the war forever and usher in the full coming of the Kingdom of Kami. They believe this will be the final defeat of our enemy.¡±

    Liehold said plainly, ¡°Yes, I¡¯ve heard that rumor spread around too. It is not a problem, why do you bring that up?¡±

    ¡°Because I do not believe that this is Leasnal,¡± Fallow had said bluntly. ¡°Again, as the name suggests, this operation is simply a defensive battle meant to maintain our position, not an attempt to reconquer all of Kami¡¯s territory.¡±

    Liehold waved his hand, ¡°Let the men believe what they want. If they believe that this is the war to end all wars, they will fight all the harder, will they not? That is better for everybody.¡±

    ¡°Is it?¡± Fallow challenged, surprising the captain. ¡°We are giving these men false hope!¡± The captain merely shrugged. ¡°What do you believe this operation is, Captain?¡± Fallow asked in a tone serious enough to give Liehold pause.

    Liehold spoke after a moment of consideration, ¡°Far be it from me to limit Kami, you know? I do not know the future Fallow, I am no prophet. I am a military man; I follow my orders and perform my duties to the best of my abilities. Is this operation Leasnal? Maybe, maybe not. It could be, you know, if Kami willed it to be.¡± He rested a moment and then said suddenly, ¡°I can see it now!¡± He stood energetically up and gestured to Fallow. ¡°Imagine it with me. With every battle from now on, we push the enemy back, further and further, taking ground and killing the enemy. Soon, our feet are walking on the old territory, reclaiming land back from the enemy. Our boots march across the old sacred land once again and Kami restores it with his blessing and fruit! Every barbarian outpost we overrun we burn and remake new with Kami¡¯s standard flying on the top. From the top of the wall men could look out and see only green and light upon all the territory around them. Until finally, the enemy is completely vanquished from the land and men are able to walk and explore the entirety of Kami¡¯s territory once again. What a great day that will be! Can¡¯t you see it, Lieutenant?¡± Liehold ended eagerly.

    Fallow frowned, apparently he could not, ¡°We have only been fighting defensively up till now and the enemy is getting stronger each time too. What makes you think that we will be able to turn this around?¡±

    Liehold shook his head, giving up, ¡°If only you have been there 20 years ago Fallow, and seen what we accomplished back then, then you wouldn¡¯t be so doleful.¡±

    ¡°At the battle of Crushed Snake?¡±

    ¡°Yes, Yes!¡± Liehold responded eagerly again. ¡°If you think that things look bleak now, it was worse then. The enemy had completely surrounded the city, and had done so hundreds of years prior. But look at what Kami had accomplished, look at what General-Commander Soul had accomplished! I was there, Lieutenant, it was such a sight! The roars and cries of the enemy still ring in my ears as we charged against them. The towers on the walls all sprang to life at once, hurling their loads at the enemy, wiping out hundreds on single blows. The magicians had organized themselves under General-Commander Soul and performed miracles against the enemy. Against all odds, we had succeeded against the enemy then and set up this frontline, this little window outside of the city. It can only grow from now on, General-Commander Soul will see to that. The spirit of Kami is with him like no other man before!¡±

    Fallow responded quietly, ¡°It¡¯s not General-Commander anymore, Captain.¡±

    Liehold brushed the point aside, annoyed, ¡°Still, have some faith Fallow, have faith in the power and salvation of Kami. This might very well be the war to end all wars. I certainly hope it to be. May Kami be praised!¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t respond immediately, but looked down at the floor. Liehold turned back towards his work. ¡°You know what I am doing now, right?¡± Liehold replied, picking up his papers.

    Fallow looked up, ¡°writing done the names of those who fell in the last battle?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Liehold responded, looking down the list he had just created. ¡°For every man lost under my command, I need to record it so that their families might know what happened to him. I have done it many times before; it is something every commander has done for the last thousands of years prior. Well,¡± he added almost humorously. ¡°I doubt Captain Grisly ever did this; he has never been in a battle, I think.¡± Fallow smiled slightly and Liehold continued. ¡°I don¡¯t do it just for the families. All these men,¡± He said, displaying his writing. ¡°have died for the glory and victory of Kami, they are all already in his halls. When we have finished the war, all the names will be honored for their sacrifice for the city. It comforts me to know that their deaths will not have in vain, even if they all are in a better place now, tasting the fruit of Kami¡¯s salvation. I wait patiently for the day I will do the same.¡±

    Fallow stood up suddenly and said with a tight smile, ¡°Yes, there are in a better place now, sir. Thank you for your time, sir, and thank you for answering my questions.¡±

    Fallow bowed and left and as he shut the door Liehold called out to him, ¡°The salvation of Kami will be realized Fallow, just you wait and see. It will be glorious!¡±

    Despite the words of Liehold, the battles did not turn suddenly in their favor, but grew harsher. Fallow spent much of his command time keeping his men alive rather than in engaging the enemy. Until finally, during the last attack, they were not ordered to go out at all.

    Many captains from all over the frontline had gathered in their Fort Credent, instead. The captains were discussing the situation inside the fort¡¯s large hall and were shut away from the rest of the soldiers. The men muttered amongst themselves as rumors spread around, rumors of the enemy¡¯s strength and the loss of many of the edge regions. Staying away from the men inside the stables, Fallow waited impatiently for his captain to return from the meeting.If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.

    One of Fallow¡¯s few joys out here was his horse he was now grooming. After his repositioning in the frontline, Fallow had first gone to retrieve his beloved horse from the training barracks where it had been lent. Of course, his mare was treated with respect in the training halls, but she was used and worked much harder and with less love than Fallow would have liked. Now his cool gray horse stood patiently with Fallow as he took extra care to groom and feed his horse. It was one of the few things that calmed him down these days.

    ¡°There you are, Carla, good girl,¡± he called out soothingly to her, patting her neck. The stables were near the hall that the captains occupied at the moment, and he kept a close eye on the doors.

    He heard somebody come up behind him. It stopped short, and seemed to wait for Fallow¡¯s attention. Fallow ignored it though and after a moment the person said, ¡°Having fun petting your beast, lieutenant?¡± Fallow turned around quickly and wondered what soldier could possibly have the audacity to insult his horse. It was Vorash.

    ¡°Vorash!¡± Fallow exclaimed, forgetting the offense in his surprise. ¡°What are you doing here?¡±

    ¡°My comings and goings are of no concern to you.¡± Vorash responded without hesitation, like automatic lines. He stood in the shadows of the stable, letting only a small amount of light hit his frame.

    Fallow ignored his words. ¡°If you are here then that must mean that the executive captain is here as well!¡± Fallow exclaimed again, following his logic and forgetting his horse in his awe. ¡°And he must be here for the captain¡¯s meeting!¡±

    Vorash responded with an annoyed grimace. ¡°Well deducted, Lieutenant. One of the unseen consequences of being the Magician Head Commander is that I have to follow Soul around like a lost mugrat. But the meeting was becoming dull, so I left. Humans are so trivial, they are often not worth my time.¡±

    It was Fallow¡¯s turn to scowl and he returned to brush his horse gently. He said politely though, ¡°What can I do for you sir?¡±

    Vorash smiled. ¡°Nothing, I just noticed somebody I recognized around and wanted to talk to him.¡± Fallow didn¡¯t respond. Vorash continued playfully, ¡°You want to know what is going on, don¡¯t you? I can tell you if you want. The truth, that is.¡±

    Fallow paused and turned, ¡°Why would you do that?¡± he asked cautiously.

    Vorash said easily, ¡°Because I want to. Also, to have you please tell the executive captain that I have returned to the headquarters at Central Hill when I am done.¡±

    Fallow scowled again and said, ¡°Should you be leaving without him?¡±

    Vorash shrugged, ¡°No, but it is such a bother to leave with him. There are rituals, and meetings and follow ups; it¡¯s so bothersome. It so much easier just to slip away, but I generally get scolded when I do. That is why I want a third party to relate the news.¡±

    Fallow scowled at the man. This is the character of the man who commands the magicians, on whom so many lives depend on? ¡°I believe that you came over here just to harass me actually, Lord Magician.¡± Fallow said, suddenly using the magician¡¯s formal title.

    Vorash laughed, ¡°You humans are so amusing already; I hardly need to make fun for myself.¡± He stepped into the stable and reached up towards Carla. Fallow almost told him to go preach to Kami, but he restrained himself. ¡°Besides,¡± Vorash continued, ¡°Why can¡¯t I do both? I have got to relieve some of my tension.¡± Fallow tried to ignore him, but he pestered him again with his sneer, ¡°Don¡¯t you want to hear the truth?!¡±

    Fallow said stubbornly, ¡°I will learn it all from my captain when he returns; I do not need to hear it from you.¡±

    Vorash laughed again, but this time more cruelly. ¡°Do you really believe that your Captain will tell you everything, and not filter it to you? I am giving you the opportunity to know what is really going on. The truth behind all the facades put in place!¡± Vorash leaned in close suddenly and said, ¡°I know you are different from all these other men Fallow, don¡¯t try to hide it! I know you see more clearly than that human trash. Tell me Fallow, what is it like to visit the Librarians? Those withered up old fools, clinging vainly to the past. What did you learn from them, I wonder?¡± Vorash¡¯s eyes stared at Fallow intently as if to summon the answer to come out. Fallow knew that with but a word of magic from the man, he could be made to answer those questions forcefully. He shivered slightly and remembered why he was so uncomfortable around magicians.

    Fallow snapped back quickly, ¡°Tell me if you want to. Or don¡¯t tell me! I do not care either way. I will relay your message to the executive captain as you wish, even if you had only requested it.¡±

    Vorash smiled and gave in easily. It was clear he wanted to speak anyway. ¡°The defensive mandate is too little too late,¡± He declared. ¡°The enemy has been preparing for this assault for years, probably since we first broke out 20 years ago. We have only been preparing for a little while now, we do not have the men and resources to hold the frontline. How can we expect to combat this enemy force? These last few months of attacks have just been probing strikes, nothing more. They were finding out positions, strengths, and our tactics! The real assault is beginning as we speak. Scouts report immense troop movement. The officers decided it would be best to fall back and regroup!¡±

    Fallow nearly shocked at the words, and Vorash seemed amused by it. ¡°How can you say such things like that?¡± Fallow protested. ¡°How can you smile? What kind of magician are you to spell out such dark words?¡±

    Vorash grew hot and responded in kind. ¡°This frontline, from the beginning, was a vain and irresponsible waste of our city¡¯s resources and men!¡± Vorash shot back. ¡°There had been insufficient time, insufficient men, and insufficient magic work done to make this Frontline a viable location for a counter offensive. The whole idea was folly from the start! We are safe behind our walls, are we not? We have been safe for hundreds of years, of what use has this frontline been? We will lose this battle as well as many men and resources but I will do what I can save as much as possible. Soul may have won the hearts of the city 20 years ago, and inspired great thoughts of glorious victory,¡± Vorash said bitterly. ¡°But this will be his great shame! The whole city will know of his failure in this battle, they will know of the true weakness of humans! It doesn¡¯t matter if we abandon the edges and concentrate our forces in the center, we will lose this battle in the end!¡± The door to the hall burst open suddenly and Fallow immediately departed in an escape from the man¡¯s words. Vorah called out to him, ¡°Don¡¯t forget to relay my message!¡± Vorash disappeared.

    The captains exited the halls, but they all seemed cheerful and attentive, not as though they had grave meetings about serious concerns. Fallow thought that maybe Vorash was lying to him; when he spied his captain he went quickly to him. Many other lieutenants we doing the same for their commanders, but Fallow was the only one from the 32nd.

    ¡°What¡¯s the news, Captain?¡± Fallow asked, putting up a fake smile and hoping that Vorash was a lying rugnut.

    Liehold lost his smile and considered Fallow. ¡°We have pulled back our forces from the edges in the South and West and repositioned them on the key defensive regions,¡± He said plainly. ¡°From there, we will be able to better defend our territory.¡± He saw the look on Fallow¡¯s face and added heartily, ¡°Don¡¯t look so grim Lieutenant; this was within our Executive Captain Soul¡¯s calculation! There is no need for worry, the casualties will be minimal and we will be at a better strategic position.¡±

    Despite the captain¡¯s light words, Fallow felt a deep dread. He asked aggressively, ¡°So the main offensive of the enemy is starting now and we are already giving up more territory?¡± Liehold frowned made to answer but the appearance of another man stopped him short as he approached.

    ¡°The answer to your question is simply yes, Lieutenant,¡± Executive Captain Soul answered. He looked as regal now as he did in the wilderness when Fallow first met him despite his demotion. His uniform was adorned and stately as usual, but it was the aura about him was what made him unmistakably awe inspiring.

    Liehold and Fallow bowed in his presence and Soul continued calmly, ¡°I believe you have a message for me?¡±

    ¡°Yes, sir!¡± Fallow said quickly, losing his fire and suddenly wondering how Soul knew and how was he going to tell the man that his subordinate was insubordinate. ¡°Lord Magician Vorash said to tell you that he has gone on before you.¡±

    Soul sighed. ¡°Not surprising,¡± he said dryly looking up into the night sky. The golden light of the city played off him like a jewel. ¡°He was always one to skimp out on the minor details. I regret already leaving Gatal off on his own.¡± He turned to the lieutenant and said, ¡°Thank you for the report. Now just as the Magician predicted, there are bothersome duties I must now perform.¡± He turned to leave.

    Feeling bold, Fallow stopped Soul before he could take a step. Pleadingly, Fallow asked, ¡°Sir, Vorash also said that the Defensive Mandate in an exercise in futility and that the frontline will be lost no matter what we do. He says the enemy forces are too great and too well prepared!¡±

    Liehold, tried to shush Fallow and wave him off, but the lieutenant remained steadfast. Soul answered sternly, ¡°I do not discuss strategy with lieutenants, I do not have the time.¡± But he considered the lieutenant and then his expression softened. He said gently, ¡°From the beginning we were outnumbered. The enemy has always have overpowered us and outplayed us. That is why we do not trust our strength, for we are weak, so weak before the terrible power of the enemy. We trust in Kami to deliver us from this evil, we are only his instruments and we can only do what is best at the moment. Trust more in Kami and have some faith lieutenant.¡± With a nod to Captain Liehold, Soul left to perform his duties without another word.

    Fallow was silent and pondered Soul¡¯s words. Liehold prodded him, ¡°Are you oaky? What possessed you to ask such things? You nearly gave me a heart attack.¡±

    Fallow looked back and said with force, ¡°I will do the same Captain. I too, will do what I can do with my utmost effort.¡±

    The captain scratched his head, ¡°Excellent¡­¡±

    The next day, Fallow rode out with his legion again on the southern plains. After the attack by the enemy last night and the subsequent withdraw, his legion was sent out to scout and note the enemy¡¯s progress and make sure they haven¡¯t ventured further than they were designed to. Fallow could see the rolling black smoke across the way from where the enemy burned the land. He gritted his teeth and wondered, what would Havign say about the situation? Would he be like Vorash and believe that the forces of men couldn¡¯t last, or would he be like the Executive Commander and trust in the strength of Kami? At this point, Fallow felt lost and confused, he didn¡¯t know what to believe.

    His group reached a designated point and his squad split off to the west, closer to the smoke. He shouted to his squad, ¡°Keep your eyes open for anything unusual! We are looking for any of the enemy trying to sneak in. We are not here to engage the enemy, just scout. Remember that!¡±

    The five men he had with him nodded in response and followed his orders. It was a hot and uncomfortable day and the wind they had against them didn¡¯t make them feel any cooler, it only made the riding harder. The horses sweated in the heat.

    With Fallow were the same officers he had under him in the wilderness. It was nice to be with them again, the trust and relationships they had created there added comfort to his work now. They rode with grace and confidence beside him. The marshal called out suddenly, ¡°I see movement over to our left!¡±

    The marshal directed the group to the spot and Fallow soon saw the figures moving across the land. There were eight of them by his count; they looked like scout class troops. He and his men turned and intercepted them, pulling up alongside them. Their horses snorted in the dust.

    The men looked exhausted; their leader held a long spear and eyed him wearily. Looking around, Fallow wondered where they had come from. Judging from their uniforms they were clearly members of the greycloaks.

    Fallow called out to them, ¡°Greetings scoutsmen! What reasons have you to traverse these lands? These should already be empty.¡±

    The leader answered, ¡°We are making for Camp Newhouse! We have come from the 1032nd scouting legion that was positioned on the front.¡±

    Fallow waited for more but the leader didn¡¯t continue so the man next to him did. He had a large bow and quiver on his back and said sadly, ¡°Our legion has been wiped out by the enemy. It is only by the grace of Kami that we made it out alive.¡±

    Fallow responded in wonder, ¡°Your scouting legion faced the enemy last night? I was told all legions were to fall back to the second perimeter.¡±

    Another man stepped forward and to Fallows surprise, it was a magician. The man spoke, ¡°Our lieutenant choose to stay and fight despite the orders. We are all that is left of our legion. Are we near to Camp Newhouse? We were to be positioned there if we had left our region last night.¡±

    Fallow considered the words and the men for a second and turned to his subordinate and said, ¡°Sub-commander! Give them men some water! They look thirsty and worn out.¡± The man did so, taking their extra water rations and distributing it. The scout soldiers accepted it gratefully. Fallow said to the travelers, ¡°I am sorry for your loss, it must have been very difficult for you. You are still some ways away from Camp Newhouse, I am afraid. You will not make it before nightfall.¡±

    The leader looked uneasy and asked, ¡°How is the progress of the enemy? Will we make it in time?¡±

    Fallow shifted on his horse, ¡°You know more about that than I do, I am afraid. My mounted battalion is out here checking that out right now.¡± The man looked around, uncomfortable.

    Another voice called out that Fallow instantly recognized with a shock like he had been struck with something. It said, ¡°Lieutenant Fallow, aren¡¯t you going to offer an escort for us?¡±

    Fallow zeroed in on the voice, unable to believe what he was seeing. ¡°Gatal!¡± He shouted after a moment. ¡°By Kami¡¯s arched chair, what are you doing out here!¡±

    ¡°My business is my own, actually,¡± Gatal responded. ¡°But we would appreciate an escort nonetheless.¡±

    Fallow sat on his horse in awe, staring at the old magician. He said angrily, ¡°You magicians always say that, never explaining yourselves!¡± Gatal opened his arms up in a shrug. Fallow then made a snap judgment, ¡°Marshal, please take command and continue with our mission. I will escort these men back, personally.¡±

    The marshal squawked back, ¡°Sir, this is highly irregular, leave me to escort these men if you must.¡± He added with dismay, ¡°What will I tell the captain if you stay?¡±

    But Fallow was all eyes for Gatal. That magician was out here for a reason, a very good reason, Fallow felt certain of it. Fallow wasn¡¯t going to let that treasure go. He jumped down from his horse eagerly while the leader of the group looked at him with distrust. He paid him no mind. ¡°Tell the captain,¡± he replied to his marshal. ¡°That the esteemed General Magistrate asked for an escort. It would be rude of me to leave him out here alone.¡±

    Gatal responded lightly, ¡°What an honor it is to be recognized out here.¡±

    Fallow leaned in close to Gatal and said, ¡°Tell me what you are planning out here, magician! You surely know more than that rotten Vorash and you are plotting something.¡±

    Gatal eyed him with a surprised grin and said back softly, ¡°Only the rescuing of this land, nothing more! You want to help?¡±

 Chapter 28

    Drake was dismayed to learn that they would not be able to reach Fort Newhouse by the end of that day. It meant the night out on the open and unsecure plains. Drake didn¡¯t like this area; not only because of how defenseless they were there, but also due to the way they resembled the plains from the wilderness. From his time in the caged wagons Drake had endured countless hours staring out into endless stretches of grass and meadows. Seeing similar terrain now, it gave him a caged feeling.

    The sky was cloudless, as it usually was. It seemed that Kami only sent clouds when he wanted it to rain and otherwise left his lantern clear. The only thing that diluted the sun now was the thin smog that rolled over to them from the burning of the forest. It was dark and unpleasant with a thick smell of smoke that wouldn¡¯t leave. But the smog only seemed to make the air heavier and unbearable. The morning light was hot enough, but now in the afternoon, the Great Lantern sent punishing rays down on any who dared traverse openly.

    Still, Drake and his group marched on in their pursuit of a safe location, their backs turned away from the desolate land they just fled from. The continued forest fire was just another reminder to Drake of his time in the wagons.

    Drake grumbled to Ashton quietly as they walked side by side, ¡°Now another jester has joined our group, as if Gatal wasn¡¯t bad enough. I swear, these people are just appearing out of thin air. Why do they feel the need to stick to me?¡± Ashton didn¡¯t know what a jester was, but he understood Drake¡¯s meaning and he gazed back at the offending newcomer.

    ¡°He was kind enough to give us an escort and provisions,¡± Ashton said, studying the lieutenant that joined them. The newcomer wore his complete greyhood uniform proudly despite the heat; Ashton could tell he was the straight type of soldier. He was now walking with Gatal and talking with him about something that they couldn¡¯t hear. The lieutenant led his horse behind him and had offered to let his horse carry some of the packs the men were burdened with. The men were grateful but Drake refused to let his pack go. ¡°What are you upset about?¡± Ashton asked.

    ¡°Look how close he is with Gatal,¡± Drake stewed, looking back at them. ¡°It can¡¯t be a coincidence that he met us out here. You heard what Gatal said this morning; those two are surely plotting something!¡±

    Ashton nodded and commented, ¡°Looks like they know each other from before. I wonder how much Gatal told him about you?¡± Drake didn¡¯t respond.

    That morning Gatal appeared out of nowhere, more so than the lieutenant had, and had turned Drake¡¯s world upside down. Standing on top of the small bank they had used as shelter, and towering over him despite his short stature, Gatal demanded Drake to leave with him immediately and follow Gatal. He didn¡¯t say where to and was righteously unconcerned about the rest of the group.

    Drake was stunned and outraged, asking why on Kami¡¯s green plains, he would want to join Gatal. Gatal responded cunningly, ¡°I can give you what you want Drake. You want freedom, right? I can give you that. If you come with me I can even take you back home to your beloved wilderness!¡± Drake noted with this offer with some satisfaction. The priest wasn¡¯t omniscient if he thought that Drake had originated in the wilderness.

    Drake had asked how that could be accomplished and Gatal had responded saying, ¡°Come with me, Drake, and I will show you. I will take you away from this soldier¡¯s life and away from the frontline. You have divine qualities in you that can be flushed out; together we can turn you into a being with great power!¡±

    Drake shuddered despite the heat, remembering those words. He knew what Gatal was talking about, and he writhed on the inside thinking about the sleeping beast imprinted on his family ring. He still remembered the awful feeling of having his mind taken over by the ring. Drake violently declined the proposal, saying, ¡°I would rather die, than let my mind be manipulated by you, or anybody else in this place!¡±

    But Gatal was adamant. ¡°This is not something you can pass on, Drake!¡± Gatal had said heatedly. ¡°You are not a simple human, despite what you want. You hold a power far greater than you can imagine and you cannot waste away here on the frontline in a simple scouting legion. And you can¡¯t pass up on the offers either.¡± Gatal continued his golden eyes seeming to spy into Drake¡¯s heart. ¡°There will never be another opportunity to escape this place without me, despite whatever abilities you may think you have. The world is a scarier place than you can imagine and you will surely die if you remain out here!¡±

    Drake would have responded in a rage and told Gatal to go to hell, but Ashton had intervened before he could. Ashton insisted that he at least hear the man out, to listen to what he had to say. ¡°After all,¡± Ashton said looking Drake directly in the eyes. ¡°You promised me you would find a way to escape, did you not? You owe it to me, at least.¡±

    Drake was scared and angry, but he reluctantly agreed to at least hear Gatal out only for Ashton¡¯s sake. ¡°But,¡± Drake ended with hostility. ¡°I¡¯m not discussing anything with you until my men are safe within Fort newhouse. Got that?!¡±

    Gatal would have disagreed, but thought better of it. In the end, it was his turn to be grumpy. He had joined their march but Drake wished the priest would just disappear like the way he came. The Priest represented his worst fears and if not for Ashton, he would have run the priest off. But then the young lieutenant appeared as well and decided to toss in his lot in with Gatal, unexpectedly joining them as well. Now Drake was feeling increasingly frustrated as he felt he was getting caught up in events he couldn¡¯t control. He marched ahead steadily, trying vainly to reach safety before night fell and to rid himself of the two pests as soon as possible. He had no idea what would come of him after that.

    Vanyor, Heath, Horebour, and Micheal had been strangely quiet since Gatal appeared; Drake thought that they were in awe to see the general magistrate come to them personally to escort them to safety. Drake let them believe that.

    It was in the afternoon heat that Micheal spoke, breaking the silence that had formed around the them. ¡°Lieutenant Fallow,¡± she asked, speaking up loudly to reach the man several paces in front of her and facing the other way. ¡°What are the conditions like in Central? How did the battle go on the other fronts?¡±

    Fallow responded bluntly, ¡°Last night the full retreat of all the outer regions had been issued. For the most part, except for legions like yours, all the land attacked was taken without a fight. And those that did fight were annihilated. There are few survivors, including yourselves. Command is still reeling from the blow.¡±

    ¡°How can that be?¡± Heath asked in dismay. ¡°We have been successfully staving off the enemy¡¯s advances for the last two months, how can everything be lost just like that?¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t respond, so Drake did for him. He said bitterly, ¡°Obviously, the enemy is much stronger than had been anticipated. We hadn¡¯t been staving off their attacks; those advances were just feelers of the enemy. Last night was the real attack; we should have retreated like we were ordered to.¡±

    There was a moment of silence and then Fallow said with a frown, ¡°I¡¯m sorry for your loss.¡±

    Hourbore tried to shrug it off, ¡°We knew there would be casualties in the fight. We have lost men before. All is for the Glory of Kami you know. I will probably take my place soon too in the Halls of Kami¡­¡± His voice trailed off.

    Heath spoke up as well, ¡°It was just so sudden, you know? We didn¡¯t even see it happen, just next thing we knew we were the only people left.¡±

    ¡°Why did you stay?¡± Fallow asked, voicing a question that was on his mind. ¡°Orders were for the scouting legions to withdraw, what were you trying to accomplish by staying?¡±

    ¡°You bring up an interesting point.¡± Gatal said, joining into the conversation. ¡°But it was the commander¡¯s decision to let the groups that wanted to stay to be allowed to.¡± Gatal added sarcastically, ¡°If the men wanted to die for Kami so badly, who are we to stop them? Far be it from us to disallow the pure hearted to follow through on their holy work!¡± Hourbore shifted uncomfortably at his words. Gatal continued, ¡°You people have survived last night though. What happened? How did the enemy wipe you out so easily?¡±

    Gatal looked to Drake but Drake merely said, ¡°Ask the magician, he can tell you.¡± He turned away from them.

    Gatal and Fallow turned and looked at the magician in turn. Caught off guard, Horance cleared his throat and said, ¡°The enemy used powerful magic to overwhelm us. They confused and disrupted our ability to communicate. They had first sent in fake images of soldiers to lure and spread out our forces, and then they encircled us and killed us off one by one. I-.¡° he stammered slightly, ¡°I have already sent my report through the priestly network.¡±

    Gatal turned serious and stopped in his tracks, confronting the magician, ¡°They sent in fake images? Explain.¡±

    The whole group slowly came to a halt as well, waiting for the magician who suddenly planted roots.  They followed Gatal¡¯s gaze and soon all eyes were on the magician. He swallowed nervously and said, ¡°The enemy cast spells that affected our senses! Things that we saw and felt were not actually real, but some of the things that were real could not be seen! We use lighted arrows to communicate across groups, but last night the sight was always intercepted and nobody was able to confer news and information. Lieutenant Dravis and I couldn¡¯t communicate anything to our men.¡±

    ¡°And this was everywhere?¡± Gatal asked his tone and gait completely different than his usual appearance of apathy and boredom. This sudden change was making Drake nervous.

    Micheal answered his question, ¡°Yes, it was everywhere. Drake and Ashton where only a small ways away from each other and our arrows couldn¡¯t even reach each other!¡±

    Heath chimed in too, ¡°And Horebour and I ran into the ghosts twice, at two different locations!¡±

    ¡°Is such things possible?¡± Fallow asked, looking skeptical. ¡°I have never heard of such warfare.¡±

    ¡°Anything is possible if there are enough magicians,¡± Gatal said gruffly, flinging his cloak around and impatiently marching forward. ¡°Count yourselves lucky to have escaped at all,¡± he called back. ¡°And do not mourn too long for your comrades, I am sure you will get the opportunity to battle the enemy soon!¡±

    After a moment, the group started moving again, talking amongst each other, questions about the meaning of such magic and the possibilities of continued warfare in the near future. Micheal was asking Fallow about the conditions of the frontline and Drake took the opportunity to sneak up to Gatal who had moved ahead swiftly.

    ¡°Hey,¡± he said aggressively, trying to catch up to him. ¡°Hey, what are you so worried about, huh? I¡¯ve seen you magicians do amazing things before, how is this any different?¡±

    Gatal grunted, ¡°You are either ignorant or have extraordinary experiences Drake. I suspect the latter from you. It is not so easy to perform miracles as you might think. Our army runs a strong and fundamental note of magic that dissolves and jams any of the petty tricks the enemy magicians might create. Otherwise, in battle a simple priest could crush an army. Sure, it is easy enough to confuse a mortal man¡¯s eyes, but not against our soldiers.¡± Gatal sighed and looked at the sky. ¡°It would take considerably strong magic to do what your magician suggests happened. Especially, when considering it didn¡¯t just happen in your region, but in all the outer regions.¡±

    ¡°What makes you think this has happened to all the regions, and not just ours?¡± Drake challenged.

    Gatal snorted in amusement, ¡°Your region was the most insignificant region to take, and they would not use such a powerful weapon simply against you! The only way you could have been affected by it is if the entire area attacked faced the same predicament.¡±

    Drake considered his words and asked, ¡°Does it worry you?¡±

    Gatal turned to Drake and said sincerely, ¡°We have never seen this level of magic before. The power frightens me!¡±

    The rest of the flight became muted. Soon the energy and excitement from the two meetings wore off and they remembered that they had just spent the entire night prior also fleeing. Their pace dropped considerably and even Drake felt the need to stop and rest. They had been marching all evening with only a short rest for food and drink at a small stream they had arrived at.

    In the late evening, suddenly  Horace let out a stifled cry, startling the men. He cried out again and swooned. Hourbour was closest and grabbed hold of the man before he toppled over completely, ¡°What¡¯s wrong?!¡± Hourbour asked anxiously. The group came to a weary halt.

    Gatal hurried up too and asked quickly, ¡°What¡¯s that matter?¡± After a moment, horace seemed to be feeling better. ¡°I¡¯m alright, I¡¯m alright,¡± he said angrily, trying to tug away from Hourbour, but the man held him fast. The magician seemed ashamed to be helped by the human but he was still unsteady.

    ¡°What happened?¡± Gatal grilled him. ¡°What¡¯s going on with the network?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know,¡± horace responded still holding his head and upset, he yelled back. ¡°Aren¡¯t you connected as well? You tell me!¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve disconnected myself from the network a long time ago, tell me what happened!¡± Gatal spat.

    But the magician was aghast, ¡°You weren¡¯t connected to the network?¡± he swayed again. ¡°Everybody must be connected, why haven¡¯t you been connected?¡±

    Gatal planted his feet squarely and dominated the younger and taller magician, ¡°You don¡¯t need to know.¡± Gatal thundered, ¡°Now tell me what happened!¡±

    ¡°What the Hell is this network?¡± Drake asked, stepping forward and grasping Gatal¡¯s shoulder. ¡°What the hell is going on?¡±

    ¡°The network is how the magicians communicate across long distances,¡± Fallow replied with concern, also stepping up. ¡°Don¡¯t ask me how it works, though, I do not know.¡±The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.

    ¡°I¡¯ve been forcibly disconnected!¡± the magician finally answered, his lips trembling. He started shivering all over as if he had caught a chill.

    Gatal shouted back, ignoring the clearly unsteadiness of the magician. ¡°That¡¯s impossible! Get your act together, fool!¡±

    ¡°What does this mean?¡± Heath asked nervously, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword around his waist. He turned around, looking for any enemies nearby.

    Gatal was beside himself and didn¡¯t answer and stomped around a bit. Fallow said instead, ¡°Perhaps this is another form of attack by the enemy. You said they had done this before, right?¡±

    ¡°No, it¡¯s not!¡± the horace snarled, regaining his energy somewhat. ¡°Before was a simple sensory influence. It¡¯s impossible to break the network; it¡¯s never been broken before. It¡¯s something else!¡±

    Eyeing the distressed magicians, Drake said calmly, setting a mood, ¡°Let¡¯s stop here for tonight then and find a place to rest.¡±

    Michael spoke in answer, ¡°There is still plenty of light left, and we can keep marching.¡± She had been leaning on her spear and looking out against the setting of the Great lantern. She turned to Drake, ¡°I would like to keep going.¡±

    But Drake shook his head, ¡°We will not make it to the fort until tomorrow anyway, and we are all exhausted, including you! Besides,¡± he said, looking slyly back towards the Horace. ¡°It looks like our esteemed priest will need a break now.¡±

    Gatal broke in heatedly, returning from wherever his thoughts had led, ¡°No, we must keep moving! The network has been breached, something terrible must be happening. We will not be safe here!¡±

    Drake looked at Gatal for a moment and then looked out across the plains. There was still light see and their field of vision from their current spot could see miles in each direction. All was quiet and peaceful, except for the black rolling smoke now miles and miles behind them. He said, ¡°There is no activity anywhere on these plains, much less an invading army. I think we will be fine for now. Especially when we have a powerful magician keeping awake and on guard for us such as yourself,¡± He added sarcastically.

    But Gatal protested, ¡°No, we must move! Can¡¯t you see the signs? The network has been compromised; we do not know the entirety of the damage. This kind of attack is unimaginable!¡±

    But Drake scowled and said flatly, ¡°What is this network, I have never heard of it before. I¡¯m not sure you two are overreacting because of you pride as magicians and your beliefs in the all-powerfulness of yourselves. Get over it.¡±

    Drake turned away from Gatal as the priest looked like he had been stuck by a battering ram. Ashton felt more concerned about the news than Drake was and, looking at the lieutenant, saw that Fallow was as well. But he couldn¡¯t deny that all he wanted to do at the moment was to lie down and find a comfortable nook to sleep in. Without a word, he, and the rest of the men spread out in search of a satisfactory spot to spend the night. Their standards had fallen low as their weariness grew so soon a location was found. The men rested on their packs and dreamed of the golden halls of Kami with their weapons lying close beside them. Gatal remained indignant though and kept pacing back and forth, muttering under his breath, and pestering Drake every other minute.

    ¡°Shut up!¡± Drake hissed, finally annoyed. He had enjoyed seeing the magician upset, but it was unbelievable how agitated the magician was now. Drake was sure that if Gatal could, he would have simply taken Drake away by force. He felt a little pleasure to know that Gatal was powerless to him.

    Before Gatal could say anything more, Fallow swooped in to his rescue. ¡°Gatal, Drake is right to remain here tonight and secure at least a little rest for his men. They should not be forced to march on in their condition.¡±

    ¡°Fools!¡± Gatal snapped. ¡°Idiots,-.¡±

    Fallow cut him short again, ¡°nothing you say will be able to change this, so just, calm down, and take it easy. Just deal with it.¡±

    Gatal glared at him, flexing his hands as if pretending to strangle them both. He relaxed slightly and said, ¡°Whatever, it¡¯s not like I will not be able to escape anyway. You take your lives into your own responsibility.¡±

    ¡°Excellent,¡± Drake responded back, hoping that was the end of it, and trying to get comfortable on the thick itchy grass. ¡°Just like I wanted it. Maybe now I can actually get some rest.¡± Gatal glared at him again, but said nothing. He sat and turned away, facing the plains.

    Before Drake could sleep though, Fallow spoke again, ¡°Actually, now, while we have time, I would like to have my questions answered. Your rest will have to wait.¡±

    Drake grunted, ¡°What? Time? What time? I am supposed to be asleep already.¡±

    ¡°Still,¡± Fallow said ignoring him. ¡°I have left my post to follow Gatal. I need to know why now and what he is planning.¡±

    Drake rolled over and said, ¡°Doesn¡¯t concern me.¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t respond but after a pause Gatal turned back and peered at them. ¡°But it does concern you Drake,¡± He hissed at him. Drake popped one of his eyes open to look at the priest. The Great Lantern was almost gone now and Gatal¡¯s face was in a half shadow. Two golden eyes could be seen shining out of the hooded face. ¡°I too, have left my post to find you Drake. I have sacrificed much for you, I disobeyed orders and left you unindoctrinated in the dungeons. I hid you from the eyes of the spellcasters in the city so that you could get through unnoticed. And then spent weeks trying to track you down in this forsaken frontier after your level unexpectedly left the training halls. I spent that time constantly worrying about you and your place, wondering whether you had met your end already to the enemy. Don¡¯t you dare frivolize the efforts I have put into you already, I have sacrificed everything for you. There are hundreds of other deeds I could be doing now, including using my extraordinary powers to help fight and protect the legions that are now under attack. But instead I have chosen to come find you out here. I will not let my sacrifices be in vain!¡±

    The other men were asleep already and their soft breathing could be heard in the silence. Horace was asleep as well for the first time, resting from his suffering under the network. Ashton was close by and awake though, keeping an ear to the talk.

    Angered, Drake spoke, ¡°Like I said, that doesn¡¯t concern me. I didn¡¯t ask you to do all those things for me; I do not owe you anything.¡±

    Gatal¡¯s eyes flared in rage, ¡°You ignorant rutnog, you¡­¡± he paused and then added. ¡°This is something bigger than you Drake, you must understand. A man in your position holds responsibilities. Wake up Drake!¡±

    Fallow broke in, ¡°I¡¯m sorry to interrupt.¡± Drake looked up at him but the lieutenant was staring at Gatal, ¡°Did you say that you left this man go undoctrinated?¡± He seemed unable to believe it.

    ¡°Not just me,¡± Drake answered happily. ¡°But Ashton here too. We have not been blinded by the teachings of the priestsk, here.¡±

    Fallow turned and looked at Ashton who waved back halfheartedly while still lying down. Fallow¡¯s mouth worked silently as if he couldn¡¯t find words, liek was fighting internally. They waited patiently for him to speak and when he did, it was with a quivering voice. He said shakily, ¡°You had better tell me what you are doing Gatal. This is a breach with immeasurable illegal activity. I cannot begin to comprehend it.¡±

    ¡°You probably couldn¡¯t comprehend it Lieutenant,¡± Gatal countered. ¡°It¡¯s something beyond you, so far beyond the tiny world you and everybody else here lives in. There really isn¡¯t a point in explaining it. Just go to sleep¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t patronize me!¡± Fallow spat. ¡°I know far more than you think, I have spent time with the scholars in the library. They have revealed the truth to me. The truth about the cult of Kami!¡±

    Gatal answered back with cruel sarcasm, ¡°Do you now? The cult of Kami you say? Why, you must know everything now that you went to Central Library! Tell me lieutenant, what are all the names of the lands nearby, the number of trees in the forests of Grace, and also in what direction and with what force the enemy may attack next??! I had doubted those old men had any backbone left in them, but good for them to have found a disciple, for all the good it did.¡± He paused and added, ¡°Those priests hide themselves in the library, fearful of their own knowledge, and their teachings are meaningless before the might of the enemy!¡±

    Drake expected Fallow to explode in fury as well. But he learned something of the man¡¯s character when he simply waved it off and said sternly ¡°Tell me what you have done and why and if I am not satisfied with your answer I will report you to the council!¡±

    Gatal was stunned and after a moment he actually laughed, ¡°You are threatening me? Don¡¯t you know who I am?¡± he stood up and said sternly. ¡°I am the former Lord Magician of the imperial greyhoods, the general magistrate of the frontline, and the personal attendant to the former General-Commander Soul. I could destroy you, or as easily wipe your memories of this night, so watch your tongue!¡±

    Fallow was unimpressed with Gatal¡¯s words and eyed him angrily. Drake felt the tension between the two rise and Drake feared Gatal might actually attack so he added dryly, ¡°There was quite a lot of ¡°formers¡± in there Gatal, what happened?¡±

    Fallow stared at Drake and then rolled his eyes. Ashton snickered softly in the background. Gatal looked to explode again, but then sighed and lay back, lying on the tall grass behind him as though giving up. he remained quiet and Drake hoped they were done for the night. But soon Gatal spoke again, still lying on his back, ¡°There is little hope in the war, you know? Everybody, including myself, have given everything for it, but I know that it will be lost. I had lost hope a while ago; I know that we will lose. I have only one goal remaining now.¡±

    ¡°You sound like Vorash,¡± Fallow commented. ¡°He said something similar.¡±

    ¡°Vorash is an idiot,¡± Gatal said violently, sitting up. ¡°He has already given up on the frontline, hasn¡¯t he? The fool, he doesn¡¯t realize its importance.¡±

    ¡°Neither do I apparently,¡± Fallow said solemnly. ¡°So tell, from the top. Explain to me what you are planning and why. I will be able to understand.¡±

    ¡°As will I,¡± Drake said, adding into the conversation despite himself.

    Gatal looked at them and threw his hands up, ¡°It apparently matters little either way.¡±

    Drake shrugged, ¡°We are waiting. You tell us that you put so much effort into this but you won¡¯t say why? Sounds suspicious to me.¡±

    Drake meant to get a rise out of Gatal, but clearly it didn¡¯t work. After a moment, the man said on his own, ¡°Do either of you know what a vessel is?¡±

    ¡°Yes!¡± Fallow responded quickly. ¡°I believe I do know.  They are the guardians of Kami¡¯s temple, right? They are powerful magicians, perhaps the most powerful in the city. I saw one at the head councilman¡¯s party a while ago actually. Truly an amazing sight!¡±

    Gatal nodded, ¡°You are close, Fallow. The vessels are tied directly to Kami, they exist as an offshoot of his power. They are not magicians, which are beings that are born as part deity and have power innate. The vessels only obtain power through their contract with god.¡±

    Fallow nodded, ¡°Yes, I believe my teacher said something along those lines.¡±

    ¡°Did your teacher also tell you, Lord Knowledge, that Kami is not the one supreme god of the universe, but that there are actually many gods each with their own territory?¡±

    Drake knew this would be a real blow to any decent soldier of Kami and he watched Fallow carefully. The man hesitated and then said reluctantly, ¡°Yes¡­¡± then he said quickly. ¡°How do you know all this, anyway?¡±

    Gatal said back indignantly, ¡°Don¡¯t you know what I am, lieutenant? I am the foreign magician that had been gathered up by the former General-Commander Soul. Do you not realize what that means? Like you, I am not a native to this territory, but unlike you I have not come from the barbarian and godless wilderness. I have come from another territory. I had once lived and served another god. He too, had his own Vessels. Most gods have them!¡±

    Fallow seemed unable to comprehend it and sat frozen. Gatal asked dryly, ¡°Should I continue, lieutenant?¡±

    Fallow replied hoarsely, ¡°But what does this have to do with Drake? Why are you telling me this?¡±

    Gatal lazily, turned his eyes over to Drake and Drake felt his blood freeze at the look. Suddenly he knew what Gatal was going to say but before he could protest Gatal spoke, ¡°Because Drake is a vessel of another God.¡± Seeing the look on Drake¡¯s face he continued, ¡°Oh, come on Drake. What else could you be? You must have realized it; I refuse to believe that you have no idea about this! You clearly have come in contact with a god and have formed the contract with him. There is no point in denying it. The ring around your neck says it all!¡±

    Drake made to protest but again, before he could, Ashton spoke, ¡°It is true, Drake is a vessel of a land god. It¡¯s the reason why we have not been indoctrinated like the others.¡±

    ¡°Ashton!¡± Drake threatened but Ashton ignored him.

    ¡°Based upon Drake¡¯s own account of what happened and your explanation of what vessels are, what else could he be? Drake refused to be the vessel willingly though¡­¡±

    Drake felt betrayed and looked at Ashton in anger, but Ashton smiled carelessly back. Gatal spoke happily, ¡°Alright, now that that point is settled and clear to everybody.¡± Fallow looked a little punch drunk and Drake was rebellious but Gatal continued lightly, ¡°My plan is simple. Drake obviously is not trained on how to use his powers as a vessel, so I will teach him. Once trained his strength we will be immensely helpful in driving back the enemy and could potentially help win the war. Simple, no?¡±

    Fallow nearly bit his tongue in reply, ¡°Him? A vessel? Are you crazy?¡± He jumped up in his agitation and implored Gatal, ¡°Have you seen Kami¡¯s vessels, Gatal? Have you ever been in their presence? They give off an unmistakable aura of holy power, to compare this man, or any man with them, is folly! You insult Kami, even by suggesting it.¡±

    ¡°I understand, what you are saying,¡± Gatal replied back nodding back, taking his words seriously. ¡°I have seen them and they are truly wonderful beings. Clearly, they are beyond us in every way. But would you believe me if I told you that they were once humans, just like you or me?¡± Fallow scoffed but Gatal continued, ¡°They were once simple men and only after having become a vessel have they become fully realized arms of Kami. Drake could be the same!¡±

    Drake wanted to argue back, but Fallow was doing it for him. ¡°This is ridiculous. Even assuming you are correct about this,¡± Fallow said indignantly. ¡°Your plan is simply to teach him how to use his ¡°divine¡± powers? Isn¡¯t he the vessel of another god? What is he doing here? Why is he not with this other god? Why hasn¡¯t he been trained already? What is he even doing here? There are too many unanswered questions, Gatal. And after you teach him, you plan on simply unleashing him on the enemy? Do you have any idea whether Drake would actually comply with your orders? I mean, no offense,¡± he added pointed to Drake. Drake gestured that he would not be offended and Fallow continued, ¡°But from Drake¡¯s point of view, he has been a victim of countless acts of violence against him by this city and its god. What possible motivations for loyalty to The Endless City could he have? He probably hates this city! How is this a good idea? What assurances do you have that this will work and not just backfire on you? What¡¯s to stop him from wiping us out instead? In other words, are you out of your priestly mind?¡±

    Gatal made to answer, but he got distracted for a moment. He looked down to his left and mumbling to himself. Fallow looked on in bewilderment, not knowing if he should be expecting an answer from Gatal. Gatal looked up again suddenly and just as Fallow made to question him, a completely new man materialized before them. Fallow and Drake let off a yelp in surprise.

    Gatal chastised him, ¡°Silence you fools! This is just a communication from Central. Now be quiet!¡±

    Now that Drake was looking at the image closely, he could tell it wasn¡¯t real, it was shining slightly and was translucent, like the phantoms that had attacked him yesterday. The figure wore a dark blue uniform with a gold sash across it. He was a man about in his 50¡¯s and when Gatal saw it clearly, he whispered out, ¡°Commander Soul¡­¡±

    The figure spoke, ¡°Gatal, as you are probably aware, the network has been compromised. We can no longer communicate with all of our troops on the field. Along with it, the enemy has made steady advances along our western front, securing most of the forest already. It is clear that they are heading straight toward Central and I predict that they will arrive, at latest, tomorrow evening. At this rate, the Frontline will be overwhelmed with n the next few days. The enemy has always outnumbered us, but now it seems they also are overpowering us with divine might.¡±

    The figure shifted slightly and spoke again, ¡°But still, I cannot order a retreat to the city. I have been give orders to hold the frontline at all costs, and I must obey my lords, even if it means the ultimate sacrifice.¡±

    Gatal let out a small whimper, but the figure continued on, uncaring, ¡°This communique is being delivered out by Vorash, and in this troubling time, he has proved to be most useful. But I am afraid this setting is beyond his abilities. I had let you go because I trusted you had important work to accomplish, but now I am asking you to return to me. Gatal,¡± Soul said solemnly. ¡°I need you by my side right now, more than ever before. If we are going to be able to survive this battle, I am going to need your strength.¡± The figure looked away and said, ¡°I have no idea where you are right now, nor even if you are even getting this message. I can only hope and pray to Kami that you will come back. I believe that together, we can find a place for our victory even in this mess.¡± Soul looked back and said, ¡°end of message.¡± The shining image of Soul dissolved into nothing in the air. All that was left was the shock from three men.

 Chapter 29

    At the news, the group was pushed on with a new urgency. Fallow immediately departed on horse in great haste, cursing himself for leaving his legion in the first place. Gatal warned him of the danger of riding out alone now; that the battle lines were unpredictable, but Fallow was insistent.  ¡°I am a lieutenant with the 32nd legion; I need to be with them if battle has reached Central!¡± Quickly, the man saddled up his horse and galloped away, leaving behind his luggage that would only slow him down.

    Along with the message was another from Vorash and it gave, if possible, even bleaker news. Gatal translated aloud his voice full of dismay. ¡°Three whole armored legions from the forest defense have been virtually wiped out, along with their supporting infantry!¡± he had told them, his own voice barely registering in his astonishment. ¡°Fort Bronx, Drashnel, and Camberlin by the river have been all taken by the enemy, only Fort Kinberlin to the north was able to hold out. The 5067th and 2032nd Mounted battalions have been pushed back with great losses. Several of the archery and scouting legions have gone simply MIA.¡± He turned back towards the group, his voice heavy, ¡°The enemy has pierced through the forest making a straight line towards Central Hill. Everything in its path has been destroyed. This is impossible!¡± he breathed out in disbelief. He looked up solemnly at Drake, ¡°New lines have been drawn in Central valley along the river, between the walls of Central and the forest. And they appear to be holding for now. But who knows how long that will last!¡±

    The group had been woken at the clamor and was stunned at the news. For the soldiers of Kami their panic quickly turned into a fierce desire to return as soon as possible. They felt the spiritual summons to make for central to join in the fight rather than keep moving to Fort Newhouse. ¡°We need to move to Central!¡± Horebour had cried. ¡°Kami is making his call, we must heed it! He will need every able-bodied soldier to help. This is the day that was prophesied; surely this is the last battle of the enemy. Kami is calling all men to his him, we need to return and help fight! Leasnal is on us!¡±

    But Drake had different thoughts and split quietly from the group and had asked Gatal if there was any place that would be safe for his men. Gatal glared at him and said, ¡°No, there is no place that will be safe out here! The entire frontline is being overrun, as I had predicated! Only the walls of the city will keep them safe! But even that may not last much longer.¡±

    ¡°Then let¡¯s get to the city!¡± Drake snarled. ¡°As it turns out all of Kami¡¯s armies are nothing!¡±

    But Gatal was talking to himself again, saying, ¡°This power was beyond any of our calculations, something terrible has come; only a being of immense divine power could do this to us. Not even in my worst case considerations did I think that this could happen so quickly!¡± He looked up and cried out in dismay, ¡°Soul!¡±

    ¡°Gatal!¡± Ashton interrupted, stepping closer to them. ¡°What will it take make it into the city?¡±

    Gatal looked at them squarely and shook his head, ¡°You can¡¯t make it! As you say, your men are not fit for such a march. They will not make it to Fort Newhouse in time, much less Central, much less the city! And how do you propose to enter the City? Soldiers do not desert the army, but that does not mean that your party will simply be welcomed into the gates! Unless an official order is given to retreat,¡± The priest yelled, flinging his hands in the air. ¡°It¡¯s impossible!¡±

    ¡°If the forces are as overwhelming as you so,¡± Drake protested, keeping his ground. ¡°Why wouldn¡¯t a retreat be ordered? We wouldn¡¯t be shut out here by the city to die, would we? Or are all commanders like Lieutenant Dravis, refusing to withdraw no matter the danger?¡±

    Gatal¡¯s eyes gleamed suddenly, ignoring Drake¡¯s question, ¡°I must keep you alive, nothing else matters anymore! Not your men, not the army, not even the entire frontline. Come with me already!¡±

    ¡°No!¡± Drake responded incredulously. ¡°I¡¯m not leaving without my men and I have no intention of going with you in the first place.¡±

    Gatal looked at them with cold calculating eyes, and then turned back, ¡°You are my only care now, Drake! I must get you to safety.¡±

    Drake felt his rage well up inside of him and he said in a deadly voice, ¡°Are you even listening to me? I said I¡¯m not following you! And I¡¯m not leaving these people behind, Gatal!¡±

    Gatal shrugged helplessly, ¡°The enemy is surely closing in and cutting us off from the city as we speak. You and your men will not make it alone. Your men will not make it at all.¡±

    Ashton broke in, ¡°What about your spell work, Gatal? Can¡¯t you give these men energy to march on? What about the miracles that magicians are supposedly able to perform?¡±

    Gatal gave him a look of contempt. Then he closed his eyes and said, slowly, as if ripping his heart out, ¡°no, it is no use after all. It was a long shot to begin with, but it is all over now. Who would have thought the enemy would move so quickly? Stay, leave, run, do whatever you want, I do not care anymore. I will leave now and join my Commander on the hill. You all can just die out here.¡±

    Drake felt the chills of reality sweep through and broke in desperately, ¡°Wait! Stop, I¡¯ll make a deal with you!¡±

    Gatal looked at Drake lifelessly and didn¡¯t speak. Drake struggled for words, and Ashton asked plainly, ¡°If we make it to Camp Newhouse, and secure some horses, can we ride back to the city and make it in time?¡±

    Gatal said quietly, ¡°What is it worth to you?¡± He looked at Drake. ¡°What deal are you proposing? I can use my magic to get you to Newhouse quickly, and then you all would have a chance at making it back alive. But it would be a great sacrifice for me to do this. In return I want no resistance, no delays. You are to come with me willingly afterwards! Do you hear me Drake?¡± Drake felt a cold wash over him as Gatal spoke with finality. ¡°Make your decision quickly, Drake! Will you stay here with your men and die, or will you choose to save them and sacrifice yourself to me? Choose quickly, I am losing my patience!¡±

    Drake felt great anger come over him suddenly. Anger at the need for this choice, anger at the war he was forced to be a part of, anger for the events and the beings that had put him in this spot, out in these desolated plains at night. But he also felt fear, fear that the words of Drfuil would come true and the one day he would lose himself to the ring and become the vessel Drfuil desired. He knew that to give in, would be a heavy push towards the end that Drfuil had created him. He suddenly felt that he had been led up to this point purposefully.

    Drake looked at his men; they had packed and geared up for the return journey quickly and were eager to leave. They looked dead and beaten; It was clear that they would not be able to complete the journey on their own. Drake remembered what Ashton has said, seeming so long ago. He had said that the creation of bonds with his comrades was probably a part of the indoctrination process, that is was the way he could be controlled. He was hateful that such a thing could happen to him, but nonetheless, powerless against it.

    ¡°Fine!¡± he had stated, trying to swallow his anger. ¡°Get us safely to the city gates and I¡¯ll accept your conditions!¡±

    At Drake¡¯s words, Gatal performed his spell work as he promised and even secured the help of Horace. The spells they used filled the men with energy as if new life spring up into them, to Drake it was like the rising of the sun in his homeland. Ashton had described it this way, ¡°It¡¯s much more than just physical healing and energy boost, it¡¯s an emotional and spiritual renewal as well. And with it, came the feeling that you could do anything, overcome any obstacle and every fear. It was like waking up one day and realizing that you are strong! It was similar to the time on the plains in the wilderness, the whole body heated up, and you felt ready to take on the world!¡±

    Drake did not receive any of the spell work though, as usual, his ring negated all the energy and magic cast on him. Gatal had said to him, ¡°I have done what I can for your men, but you will have to push yourself. Let us pray that it will be enough!¡±

    ¡°Pray to whom?¡± Drake mumbled, but either Gatal did not hear him or just ignored him.

    Fallow was long gone by the time they started out; he had galloped away as soon as he could. Drake wondered if they would ever see him again. It suddenly occurred to him that Fallow now knew about him. Was he a possible threat? Drake decided it didn¡¯t matter at this point.

    When they were ready the group charged forward like wild beasts. They had turned their shock into grim determination, and with the boost of energy they had received they looked to run the entire way back to the city. Drake had to restrain them slightly.

    The group marched on eagerly through the night and sooner than expected, they had reached Fort Newhouse by early morning, just as the sun was coming up over the horizon. The camp was in chaos, they too had been caught off from the network. The fort had been built on a hill in the plains and from it; the western forest could be clearly seen. At the moment, almost all of it was in flames.

    The fort¡¯s commander was flustered and agitated, but he was stern in his decision to remain at the fort. Drake didn¡¯t really care either way at this point. With Gatal with them, their request for steeds was readily answered, along with additional provisions.  Ashton tried to convince them of their imminent demise, but the commander shook his head and said to them, ¡°I have been ordered as Captain of this fort to guard and maintain it until otherwise directed by my Commander. How can I leave my post now? No, I cannot abandon it.¡± Drake didn¡¯t bother to argue with him.Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!

    From Fort Newhouse, it was straight north to central. The enemy was still pushing in from the east at an alarming pace; Drake hoped they would make it to central before it too, was conquered. The men believed that they were rushing towards the glorious last battle and the salvation of Kami, but Drake was simply hoping to make it in time for the retreat.

    Ashton voiced Drake¡¯s concern out loud to him along the way, ¡°What if no organized retreat is ever made? Without one, I do not see how we could enter the city.¡±

    Drake grunted back, ¡°There are so variables. All I can do is hope that this Soul is as competent as Gatal makes him out to be! We will make it to the city somehow, I promise you!¡± He tried not to think about what he had promised Gatal. Would this be the end of his pitiful life as he knew it? They followed the barren road as fast as they could.

    <hr>

    Fallow had reached the Central by late morning, but only after pushing his poor horse Carla hard. He knew he would not be able to join his mounted legion with her if he went to battle, a decision he regretted to have to make. He gave her over to the stable boy at Central when he arrived and watched her wistfully get led away. Beyond that, he was just relieved to find Central still alive and strong when he arrived. He wondered if he would ever see Carla again as he let her go.

    Central was the land that encircled Command Hill, roughly a mile in radius. A great wall and other defensive structures and towers lined its edges forming an impressive sight. The whole thing could be considered one large fort in itself actually, with the hill rising majestically inside of it. It could house thousands of troops in itself and was considered the most secure location in the Frontline. Fallow had ridden up to the gate and was able to pass through without trouble. From the one of the commander¡¯s inside he learned that his legion was not there.

    ¡°The 32nd had gone up south yesterday morning.¡± The logistics lieutenant told Fallow.

    ¡°I know, I was with them!¡± Fallow burst. ¡°But where are they now?¡±

    The lieutenant shook his head. ¡°We¡¯ve lost contact with all of our expeditionary legions, the 32nd included! We have no idea where they are. Presumably, still patrolling our southern perimeter!¡± he shouted in frustration. ¡°Everything has been thrown into chaos since we lost the network; we¡¯ve lost contact with everybody not immediately in our area. Kami¡¯s throne, we can¡¯t even communicate with the Hill!¡±

    With that, Fallow left in a daze. For some reason, he had expected to find his legion at Central, but now he was alone and quite lost without them. He couldn¡¯t ride out again to try to find them either, not with the enemy advancing on them. With nothing else to do, he eventually made his way up the eastern wall and looked out. He had seen the battle lines from his ride in, but the sight from the wall was beyond his imagination. Heavy lines of troops had been positioned between Central and the forest. Fallow could see various skirmishes raging across the way. But always the forces of Kami fought defensively, holding the line and fighting off the enemy. The strong river that flowed from the city into the forest had another key point in this no man¡¯s land, and Kami¡¯s forces held it still despite the intense fighting around it. Fallow wondered for how long they could stay there.

    Another soldier was up there with him nearby, looking out solemnly. The man was missing his left arm, and right side was heavily bandaged, but he still stood proudly on the wall facing the enemy. Judging from what remained of the man¡¯s uniform, he saw that he was part of the 324th mounted legion. Fallow moved over and said to him, ¡°I am Lieutenant Fallow of the 32nd Mounted.¡±

    The man turned and nodded, ¡°Marshal Sargy of the 323rd.¡± He paused and then added, ¡°Or what¡¯s left of it.¡±

    Fallow frowned asked, ¡°I have been away up south since this morning, can you tell me what happened?¡±

    The man grunted, shaking his head ¡°Nothing is clear right now, after the initial attack two days ago we had set ourselves up ready for further invasions. But somehow, despite that, the enemy had smashed through Fort Bransley late yesterday. Since then, they had taken three consecutive forts along the river, Bronx, Drashnel, and Camberli, at unimaginable speed.¡± The man turned and looked at Fallow. His right eye was covered up. ¡°My legion was part of the counterstrike we had prepared at the last fort. We had fourteen different battalions gathered, but we failed. My legion was wiped out completely and we were forced to retreat. As you can see¡± he pointed out towards the fighting. ¡°We have drawn up new lines here, but I cannot join them now, I barely escaped alive.¡±

    Fallow felt overwhelmed, and had to forcefully hold back his tears. Looking over the field again he cried out, ¡°How could this happen? How could the enemy be so strong?¡±

    Sargy looked at him wildly, ¡°The anit-Kami is with them! A terrible magic was upon the fields, it spread fear and confusion among the men. Communication was cut off, we were alone and surrounded! In the forest, there was nowhere to run! Plus,¡± the soldier added. ¡°There were ghosts! The enemy was using magic to deceive our eyes. We didn¡¯t know half the time if what we were seeing was real or fake! We had no chance out there.¡±

    Fallow shook his head. That¡¯s what happened to Drake¡¯s scouting legion! He thought. The man spoke again, but this time with a sly smile, ¡°But look! We are now under direct control of General-Commander Soul! We are holding them off now at the river and the other areas. The enemy cannot use their same trickery in the broad day light and openness of these plains. We have powerful magicians on our side now too; they have been gathered from the city.¡±

    ¡°But the network is down, is it not?¡± Fallow asked, noting that the man used Soul¡¯s former title. He let it go but wondered where the man¡¯s enthusiasm came from. Fallow was fighting the despair in his gut.

    ¡°Yes, but in these close quarters,¡± Sargy said, gesturing towards the battle. ¡°We can still communicate traditionally. Here,¡± the man said confidently. ¡°We are able to overcome the power of the enemy and with commander Soul in charge we will be able to push back the enemy finally. It is said,¡± the man added with a childish smile. ¡°That this will be the last battle, the final battle!¡±

    ¡°Leasnal.¡± Fallow said, looking out again at the warring men.

    ¡°Yes, Leasnal! under the power of Kami and the walls of the city, we will end the war here, today even!¡± The man¡¯s eyes shined. ¡°I am so glad to be able to witness it, though I am wounded I am still alive. Praise Kami!¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t respond, but left the wall and Sargy silently. He entered the paths of the fort again and soon found what he was looking for. The magician he now confronted was wounded as well, and the more that Fallow looked around the more he noticed that mostly wounded men occupied the fort. Or at least this section. He approached the magician and asked, ¡°Spellcaster, where might I find Lord Magician Vorash? I must see him!¡±

    The young priest looked up; his eyes were dead and lifeless in sharp contrast to Sargy on the wall. Despair seemed to ooze from the man, but he replied flatly. ¡°Check the command building. How should I know? The network is down, you know.¡±

    Fallow bowed slightly in respect to the wounded priest, and then made his way hurriedly to the tall tower on the eastern side of Central that housed the immediate commanders. There he found Captain Davison and Vorsash in heated debate. He opened the door cautiously and witnessed the Head Magician was screaming again, but this time at the captain.

    ¡°WE NEED TO ORGANIZE A RETREAT!¡± Vorash shouted. ¡°PUT AWAY YOUR IGNORANT BELIEFS AND DO AS I SAY!¡±

    Davison replied back stonily, ¡°Go back to the walls, you worm! Your words are heretical; we will fight and defend this territory and keep the will of Kami! We will hold them at the river, stop being a coward and keep your forked tongue in your mouth. I will not issue the order to retreat, unless Commander Soul tells me too. I only answer to him.¡±

    ¡°But we have lost contact with the hill!¡± Vorash spat. ¡°How do you hope to receive orders from him? Without contact with the commanders, that makes you the head officer out here. You ignorant, foolish, slimy human; you will get us all killed! The frontline is not defendable! You must organize a retreat!¡±

    Davison¡¯s eyes flashed, ¡°What are these blasphemous words I hear from you? You suggest retreat on the day of Kami¡¯s victory? Where is your faith, where is your loyalty, where is your duty? You are a coward! Away from me, you vile beast, before I have your head! Soul may have appointed you as lord magician, but I do not recognize the words of a traitor!¡±

    In a cry of fury, Vorash suddenly unleashed a spell. Fallow feared that he was going to kill Davidson, but instead, the whole western side of the room burst apart in magical fury. From the hole, the battlefield could be seen clearly and the dark smoke from the burning forest hung in the background. The cries of men and the din of war could be heard with the gusts of wind. Fallow and Davidson stared out at the hole, stunned, and Vorash shouted, ¡°Look out at the field and open your eyes! Haven¡¯t the best of your armies already fallen at the slightest touch of the enemy? Even now, you soldiers remain alive and fighting thanks to the effort of my magicians. Realize this Captain, in this war you humans will not be able to fight anymore. You soldiers are useless before this new power of the enemy. You hold them off now, but that will not last forever, nor even a day! The enemy will be applying new strength to their forces here soon and we will not have the ability to retreat then. While the network is down, we are practically helpless to defend reasonably. You must give the order to retreat; only the walls of the city can save you now!¡±

    Davison stared out of the hole, his face pale and afraid. But he spoke sternly, ¡°We cannot lose, not here, not like this. Not when the arm of Kami is with us and his Will before us! If Kami is with us, who can stand against us?¡± He turned back toward Vorash and a strange light was in his eyes. ¡°We will win here today, Vorash! Have faith in the soldiers, in your magicians, in every person who is fighting for us now. But especially, have faith in Kami who has promised us victory and salvation.¡±

    With that the man turned and sat down heavily, his face still white and his hands shaking. With a note of disgust, Vorash left, nearly knocking in Fallow on his way out. ¡°So!¡± He said cruelly to Fallow as he passed by. ¡°where is your legion now, Fallow? Have you come here alone to watch the final moments of the Frontline? All is vain, go back to the walls and find the best way for you to die.¡±

    Vorash make to pass, but Fallow Grabbed his arm. He said to Vorash, ¡°I do not plan on dying today. Tell me Vorash, what will it take to organize a retreat?¡±

    Vorash snorted, ¡°Didn¡¯t you hear? There will be no retreat, not when everybody believes in our victory.¡±

    ¡°I do not believe.¡± Fallow said intensely. ¡°I will call for the retreat myself if I have to. Now Vorash,¡± Fallow said staring down at the magician. ¡°We are going to get this army to retreat, even if I have to arrange a Coup!¡±

    Vorash looked at him, amazed. Then he laughed and said, ¡°Finally, a human with some sense! Come, I will need your help. Perhaps we will be able to save these men, after all!¡±

 Chapter 30

    It seemed to Ashton as they rode north to Central that Gatal¡¯s previous words of imminent death and annihilation if they delayed was actually a clever ruse to commit Drake into following him. Surely, Gatal had kept his promise and they had secured the horses easily and were now speeding towards Central, but looking around, Ashton did not feel the wraiths of the enemy closing in around them as Gatal had foretold. The road they traveled on at the moment led straight north to Central, and it was quiet and deserted. Not even allied soldiers traversed the land, much less the feet of the enemy. But then, Ashton had to remind himself, not meeting the enemy was a good thing.

    The squad members, filled with energy from Gatal and Horace and also the spirit of Kami, rode quickly as if their presence alone would save the kingdom of Kami from destruction. None of them spoke, bent on reaching the battle as if that served as the only purpose for their existence. Drake was behind with Gatal and Horace and he spoke aloud what Ashton was feeling.

    ¡°Where are these armies of the enemy, Gatal?¡± Drake asked hotly. He was clearly exhausted but his anger gave him strength, ¡°Where they not supposed to be sweeping in from behind us already?¡±

    Gatal grunted back, uncomfortable on the horse and similarly tired, ¡°My fear wasn¡¯t that the enemy was coming directly for our position, it was that they would cut off the gate to the city from us. What could we do but die when our only entrance to the city is closed?¡± Drake didn¡¯t respond and Gatal continued, ¡°Take this time to curse your fate if you want to. I¡¯m not letting you out of my sight again.¡± Drake looked at Gatal as if to murder him with his eyes, but Gatal rolled his eyes back at him. ¡°Come now! It will not be as bad as you think it might be. For all intents and purposes, it will be an improvement on your current life in every way imaginable. I don¡¯t understand your vehement reaction to it, no doubt a grudge of some kind. Doesn¡¯t matter now, though¡­¡±

    Ashton wondered what it might look like for them if they survived this. What position would Drake have? How long does the deal last? Where would it leave Ashton and the others? All these questions orbited the big one Ashton was feeling, would Ashton ever make it make back to his home? The questions seemed important, but considering the dire situation they were in now, Ashton could not bring up much concern for then. What mattered if they were all going to die today? He prayed to whatever god would listen to him that they would make it out okay.

    From Fort Newhouse, the group had been following a main road that connected Central and many of the outlying forts. I was called Soul Road, named after the man who had created it twenty years ago in order to better transport his troops around the frontline. It diverted off to many different paths that led to other places, but Drake and his group kept steady, continuing north and believing that they would make it to Central in time.

    They had stopped twice very briefly to give the horses some water and brief rest, but Gatal had little patience for that. His agitation only increased the closer they got Central too, so much so that Ashton thought he might burst if they ever made it there.

    The rolling hills they passed reminded Ashton strangely of the wilderness travels, just endless hills and grass with sparse trees around. Where were Kami¡¯s armies? Was the Frontline so large and the troops so concentrated that they hardly ever met? The road they were on was cut straight and true and they passed through the lands and hills quickly. Within hours, they had come up to the last checkpoint along the Soul road. It was still manned and seemingly undisturbed.

    The group slowed to stop and Ashton looked up and saw a new soldier come out of the guard station and stand before them. He was clad proudly in regalia and armor with a bright red cloak. He kept his hand on his sword by his side, and his face was hard, but when he spoke, it was with gentleness. He said to them, ¡°I am Marshal Hiriar, guardian of the last checkpoint. Have you come from the southern lands?¡±

    Gatal answered for them. ¡°I am Lord Magician Gatal, do not impede our journey, for we are headed towards the battlefield.¡±

    The man bowed low and stepped aside to let the group pass. He said to them as they continued by, ¡°The battle needs all the help it can get¡­¡±

    After they passed the guard station, Ashton looked back at the man, his face filled with longing and sorrow. Ashton asked Gatal, ¡°Will that man stay there, even when the enemy is so close by?¡±

    Gatal answered back, ¡°The soldiers of the checkpoint have sworn oaths to guard the way. Only an order from their commander can relieve them. And since the network is down, no order will be given to him. He probably wishes he could join the battle, but his pride won¡¯t let him leave.¡±

    Ashton looked forward again and when they passed the last hill he gasped slightly at the sight as all of central laid out before them. Gatal chuckled cynically and said, ¡°What, don¡¯t you remember what Central looks like? Did you not pass through it on your way to your station along the edge?¡±

    ¡°It was night then,¡± Ashton replied. ¡°And I had other things on my mind.¡±

    ¡°Then look closely now, I doubt there will be another chance after today!¡±

    From on top of the small hill the just ascended, all of Central was stretched out before them. In the center of the land stood the giant hill that harbored the executive captain Soul and the rest of the Frontline¡¯s administration. It still looked strong and formidable with its walls and fortifications that offered additional protection to the headquarters. Way off in the distance, setting the backdrop to the play and taller and more impressive than ever before, stood the walls of The Endless City and the Southern Gate that gave Kami¡¯s soldier¡¯s access to the Frontline. So great and vast was the wall in its sheer force of intimidation that Ashton could not help but feel that the events happening at its lowly feet were meaninglessly insignificant, like a single tiny anthill at the roots of an ancient oak tree.

    From the city flowed Holding River, it ran in across the western side of Central before turning again into the forest beyond it. It was from the river that the sounds and sights of battle where emanating from, for on the river stood three forts, each fighting fiercely to hold their own against the opposing enemy on the other side of the river. The large armies on both sides of the river clashed against each other in a seemingly slow revolution of men and weapons of war. Despite Gatal¡¯s premonition of disaster, it looks like the three forts were holding their own, for now. Off to their left, Central Fortress stood proudly, defying the invading armies with its high standards.

    ¡°Praise be to Kami!¡± Vanyor said, raising his spear and shaking it above his head. ¡°At least we have made it in time! It looks like we will yet be able to participate in the fight!¡±

    ¡°Let¡¯s keep moving!¡± Michael cried out. She had withdrawn he spear too as if she would join in the fight right there. He charged her horse forward again, but the river was still miles away.

    Ashton did not have the heart that Vanyor and Michael had. He felt that what they were seeing was rather the last feeble struggle of a field mouse as it got crushed by the coils of a constrictor snake. The sounds of battle could be heard from the river whenever the wind blasted them. It chilled Ashton.

    Shouting battle cries loudly, the rest of men chased off after Michael, already tasting the blood of their lips. Staying behind slightly, Ashton asked Gatal, ¡°What now, Priest? We do not want to enter the fight; it seems the straightest way is to head off road directly to central, rather than following the road to the three forts along the river.¡±

    Gatal answered back, ¡°Looks are deceiving, it will actually be faster to travel the roads than going across the fields.¡± Gatal pulled the reins on his horse and looked out again. ¡°I need to get to Executive-Captain Soul, and figure out what is going on. My first objective is to get the network back up for now. Drake!¡± he called out behind him. Drake raised his head wearily. ¡°you will come with me as promised! I do not have any time for my plans for you right now, but I am not letting you out of my reach anytime soon, got it?¡±

    Drake nodded, regretting his promise already but too exhausted to argue. ¡°What about my men?¡± Drake asked, moving forward with Gatal.

    Gatal waved it off, ¡°I couldn¡¯t care less, but if you want to keep them alive, don¡¯t let them stay in the forts. This battle could turn against us very fast! I still believe that at this point we should retreat to the city. The overwhelming power of the enemy may be gone at the moment, but I am sure it is still there. I will counsel Soul to prepare to retreat! Just have them wait for the signal and evacuate with everybody else as well.¡±

    Drake shook his head at Gatal¡¯s words, and Ashton thought to himself, ¡°So there is no real promise of a retreat after all.¡± The Great Lantern was hot behind him and was making him sweat in his cloak. Horace was with him still, and the four moved without hurry down into Central.

    ¡°Still,¡± Gatal said moving his horse forward again. ¡°If you don¡¯t stop your men now, they will rush into battle before you can tear them away!¡± He laughed cruelly and rode away as well, Horace close behind him.

    Drake cursed loudly, and he and Ashton galloped forward as well. The men were already hundreds of yards away and not looking to slow down anytime soon.

    ¡°Those fools!¡± Drake shouted. ¡°They¡¯ll make it to the fort before we can get to them!¡± Ashton agreed silently.

    Suddenly, a loud sound rolled over Central, freezing everybody and halting even the proud warriors of Kami in their places. It was a thunderous loud braying of horns, overcoming the din of battle, the feet of soldiers, and the hearts of the people. It repeated itself over and the soldiers of Kami felt a dread come over them as the sound was coming from the enemy, but they knew not what it meant. Ashton¡¯s skin crawled and his anxieties screamed. Surely, it was a death note of the enemy! After the blasts ended, Drake felt a heavy silence fall over the land as everybody, from Central to the three forts on the river held their breath for what could come next. Hope wavered.The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

    Fighting a strong sense of panic, Ashton spurred his horse forward down the road to catch up with the men who stood still, looking over towards the enemy.   In his mind, he heard an alarm screaming at him to run away, to hide from the terrible foe the horns sure had summoned. He needed to get the men and retreat towards the mammoth walls. He yelled at them, but they didn¡¯t appear to hear him, and they were still far away. Ashton looked over at the enemy and saw strong movement.

    But the movement was away from them, not towards! Ashton looked on in disbelief as the enemy started to withdraw from the river. Slowly, the long columns of the enemy turned and moved away, away from the battle line. It was a signal for retreat! Without so much of a cry of protest, anger, or taunts, the enemy silently packed away their towers, rams, and other gears of war and then, turning their backs towards the stunned defenders, they marched away from the river and the forts.

    The defending soldiers were in shock at the sudden turn of events. There was a long pause and hush along the river and three defending forts. Nobody thought to chase after the enemy, no pursuit was given. After a few heart beats of disbelief, another noise could be heard traveling across the plains, clearer and far different from the noise of the enemy. It was a cheer, a long and loud cheer. All along the river and on the hill, all those who had witnessed the events were yelling and screaming and praising Kami for the success of the defense on the river. The sound was deep that even Ashton could not help but be moved by the noise of pure celebration and joy of victory.

    The group had stopped as well at the sound of the first trumpets, and now they were laughing and celebrating among themselves. They looked upon each other in wonder and excitement, as if the salvation of Kami had already come upon them. Ashton could not help but laugh with them, so relieved at his false premonition.

    Catching up to them, Ashton heard Gatal speaking to himself. Clearly, he was not impressed by the unexpected retreat. ¡°Why are they retreating? What new horrors are coming our way now?¡±

    Other than Gatal¡¯s chilling words, the only dismay around was from the Drake¡¯s men who regretted their chance to play a part in the victory that day.

    As Drake pulled up, Ashton turned to him and asked, ¡°What are the plans now?¡±

    Drake paused, listening to the celebration from the forts. He said slowly, ¡°Sounds like there is rest and food down at the forts. I feel like I could use some. Let the plans come later.¡±

    Ashton agreed. He felt alive again, somehow, like the joy than emanated from the valley had given him energy like Gatal had given him early this morning.

    Drake looked over at Gatal and called out, ¡°Cheer up priest! Despite your words of doom, it doesn¡¯t look like Central will fall today.¡± Gatal glared up at him and didn¡¯t respond.

    The road they were on ran through two of the forts before it turned back towards Central, but they were no longer in a hurry to reach there. When they arrived at the first fort, the soldiers were still celebrating and laughing and congratulating each other on their successful defense of the fort. The soldiers praised Kami for his faithfulness, and said again that the day of Kami¡¯s salvation was near.

    The extra stores of rations had been dug out per the fort Captain¡¯s orders and the men ate and drank in celebration. Drake and his group were not questioned when they arrived, but upon notice of their greyhood uniforms, they were quickly invited to join in the celebration. They did so gladly and cared no longer about reaching Central so soon.

    The celebration lasted an hour and after eating, Drake rested gratefully outside the forts walls upon the cool grass. He tried not to think, but rather let the blissful atmosphere wash over him. Ashton had soon joined him and brought some more causal refreshments. They passed the time together wondering that such a happy ending could come to them. As another hour went by, Gatal approached Ashton. He had celebrated with them too, but his happiness faded much quicker than theirs. He said to stubbornly, ¡°We need to get going again.¡±

    ¡°What is the rush this time, oh, Worried One?¡± Drake asked sarcastically, not opening his eyes. Not even the festive mood could dissipate the resentment he felt for the old magician. Ashton was playing a merry tune on his flute and the random men around them were performing an impromptu dance to it. ¡°We should stay here a while. We have been moving nonstop for two days, the men deserve some rest. I deserve some rest. The enemy is not so pressing as you would have had us believe, aye?¡±

    Gatal snarled back, breaking the happy atmosphere that had surrounded them, ¡°Have you forgotten already your predicament? This little victory does wonders for morale, but in the end it has changed very little. The war is not won yet, not by a long shot. They will be back, and soon with greater and more terrible strength. Hasn¡¯t that been proven to you over and over again? My task remains the same, I need to convince Soul to order a retreat. Your promise remains the same as well, you are coming with me to be my student!¡±

    Drake eyed Gatal darkly, and then said, ¡°A promise I regret making. Was there any valid reason to our mad rush to get here, now?¡±

    ¡°Silence, fool!¡± Gatal snapped back. ¡°Nothing has changed within the last few months here, much less the last two days. It has always been my purpose to keep you. Now come, I have found placement for your pitiful men, too.¡±

    Glaring as Gatal, Drake stood up and stretched, then singled Horace who was nearby, enjoying the dancing spectacle. ¡°Horace! Please gather the men for me; we will be leaving for Central shortly.¡±

    Horace shot Drake a look as if he could not believe he was getting ordered around. Still, he slowly left to do Drake¡¯s bidding. Drake looked back towards the city and Ashton wondered what was going through his head. He asked Gatal, ¡°You said you found a place for us?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Gatal responded roughly. ¡°I have talked with this Fort¡¯s Captain; he has said that reorganization of troops from the outer legions is taking place within central. Once there, I will be able to get them into a favorable unit, as Drake desires. With any luck, that won¡¯t matter and the whole frontline will withdraw into the city before the enemy attacks again.¡±

    The group was gathered up and regretfully, they started their way over to central. Leaving the fort and the soldiers there, Ashton felt something he had not felt in awhile, a great feeling of belonging with the military. Out on the edges with Lieutenant Dravis, he was part of a discriminated group of soldiers pushed away from the main body. But here, at least today, nobody made those distinctions. Leaving the fort along the road, Ashton wondered what his position would be again. Was Gatal going to take Drake away? It seemed like it. Drake had promised him that he would take him back to his home village when he could. Would Drake remember such a promise after Gatal was through with him? Somehow, Ashton felt less certain about his future than ever before. Back then, Drake had always been with him, but now he was going to get taken away. Ashton felt his gut contact.

    The road they were on was paved and smooth and there was plenty of traffic now. Order and restructuring of the troops damage assessments were under way. Already, Central seemed to be preparing for the next assault.

    Ashton¡¯s musing was interrupted when Vanyor asked him, ¡°Hey, do you see that enemy group over there? What are they doing?¡±

    Ashton turned and looked to where the man was pointing toward. Across the river and advancing upon the second fort was a small group of enemy soldiers. Ashton might have mistaken them for allied reconnaissance or something, but for the standard that they supported proudly. It was the normal banner of the enemy, a bright red backdrop with black designs on it that Ashton didn¡¯t understand. But this standard had extra flurry to it, as if it was special. The enemy group was small, only about twenty soldiers. Ashton doubted the second fort had even seen it yet.

    What was most striking about the group was not that it was walking calmly into no man¡¯s land, approaching the armies of Kami, it was the man who led it. He was still too far away to see clearly, but he seemed to draw the eye, like he was out of place, even on this battlefield. Perhaps it was the bright silver sword the man carried openly in his hand, which flashed and glittered in the light so clearly.

    The group marched casually across the war-torn ground, ignoring the carnage scattered about and the hulking ruins of siege equipment. They could be seen stepping over the dead bodies that littered the ground, the assorted broken weapons and wagons. The sight was so absurd to Ashton that he stopped in his tracks to stare at it. Why would a small group of twenty advance upon them, when the entire force of the enemy had been pushed back only a couple hours earlier? Perhaps they were looking for something.

    Ashton drew Gatal¡¯s attention to the group. ¡°What do you make of it?¡± He asked. Gatal stopped as well and scrutinized it. The whole group turned at the commotion as well, watching in interest. The enemy stepped just out of range of the fort¡¯s arrows and halted. It had the fort¡¯s attention now and cries of challenge rose from it. A few vain arrows flew out towards them, but did not reach. The leader of the small enemy squad looked up at the fort and then turned back and said something to his group. They bowed slightly and retreated slowly, keeping their fronts facing the man and their heads low in reverence.

    Ashton heard Horace mutter under his breath, ¡°What are they doing?¡± The lone enmey man turned and seemed to size up the massive fort in front of him, as if contemplating a blank canvas as an artist, swinging his sword idly in his hand.

    Suddenly, Gatal stood up straight, his face contorted in the worst horror imaginable. Frightened, Ashton asked cautiously, ¡°Gatal?¡±

    Gatal whispered terribly, ¡°Impossible!¡± He paused for a moment and stared into Ashton¡¯s face. He shouted suddenly, ¡°SOUL!¡± In a flash, the priest disappeared leaving his startled horse behind.

    Ashton and Drake flinched at the sudden disappearance and Drake yelled, ¡°Gatal!? What the Hell?!¡± But he priest was gone. Ashton looked back quickly to the enemy.

    The man was still eyeing the fort, and swinging his sword around carelessly, as if it was a simple toy in his hands. From the fort issued out a mounted battalion to take him out, and they were presently crossing the ford in the river. Then they turned and charged the man, their swords drawn and their war cry ringing.

    Despite the overwhelming advantage that Kami¡¯s forces had, Ashton felt his heart pounding in anticipation. He heard Heath yell out next to him eagerly, ¡°Cut down that unholy creature!¡±

    When the horses were nearly upon him, the soldier with the silver sword turned at stepped slightly back, taking a stance. When the horsemen were only yards away from him, their battle cries echoing across the plains, the man stepped forward and slashed at the lead rider. A great light exploded from the scene, blinding Ashton. When he looked back, the horsemen were gone, only partial remains of horses and men were left, charred and smoking. There was a large new crater, as if a meteor had fallen from the heavens. A second later, the sound of an explosion reached Ashton¡¯s ears along with a hot breath of wind to his face. The battalion had simply been blasted away.

    A dead silence engulfed the valley after seeing the sudden destruction of a mounted battalion by one lone figure. Then cries came out from the fort and the man suddenly leapt forward across the river in a single astonishing bound and slashed upwards on the front wall of the fort. The whole thing exploded as if a large bomb had been detonated under it. Pieces of stone, molder, and dead men rained down across the territory.

    Ashton suddenly knew why Gatal had panicked, indeed he felt himself fighting panic as well. Now he understood why the enemy retreated, where the army had failed, a vessel of the enemy god had come forth to destroy them all.

 Chapter 31

    The second fort along the river on the Frontline was named Boldgrig, after a captain that had died during the battle of Crushed Snake, twenty years ago. There was no particular trait about this man that made his name worthy for a Fort. He had died heroically and sacrificially for Kami¡¯s cause of course, but so had so many other bright young officers of that day. Why the fort was named after one fallen officer and not another officer was just chance and nothing more. But it mattered little who the fort was actually named after because the fort wasn¡¯t just a memorial for the captain Boldrig, each of the hundreds of Forts along the frontline stood as memorial for all the fallen soldiers of Kami and all who would die in the future as well. These forts were strong, especially the ones in Central. The walls were thick and impenetrable to all the boulders that the enemy could throw at them. The fort itself could house 1000 soldiers along with a full complement of support personal and mounted legions. Built directly on the river, the fort stood as an imposing structure to any who dared traverse one of the few fords along the river. It was said the forts in Central would only be taken down when the victory of Kami was assured and there would be no need for such forts anymore on the land.

    Fort Boldrig and its men were now strewn across several square miles of land, on both sides of the river, memorial now only to the strength of the enemy. The once solid fort was now only minute blocks of mortar and wood, half burning, half flying, all destroyed. Its 1000 occupants also lay around, in bits and pieces as if the very hammer of god had come down from heaven and crushed the fort as if it was a stubborn nut. There were no screams from the dying, no cries of agony, because the men were already dead.

    The man who had done this seemed entirely indifferent to the destruction he had caused, as if the act had been merely that of crushing an insect. In the attack, large chunks of the fort had been hurtled in every direction, including straight up. Now, that debris was falling around him and the pieces that seemed sure to crush him; he nonchalantly batted to the side where they landed with heavy crashes. He looked around with uncaring eyes, wondering what action he should perform next. He had been given a list of objectives to follow from his master, but he hadn¡¯t been given a priority list. He looked around thoughtfully at his different targets. The two forts on either side were obviously part of his objectives as well, but at the moment they were spaced apart pretty evenly from the second fort and he couldn¡¯t decide which to go after next. He should have started with the first one, he thought, and then just went down the line. But it was too late for that, though.

    The man decided to go after fort on his right. He was right handed after all, it only made sense he would choose the one on the right. He stepped up on a pile of the rubble and surveyed the fort on his right. The men were scrambling around, doing who knows what. They all had places to go it seemed, but it was hard to understand humans sometimes. It¡¯s not like there was anywhere they could go where they would be safe from him. Of what use was all there struggles if their works could all be crushed in an instant?

    With another leap he bounded forward and blew away the first fort like he had done to the second. This fort, too, disappeared in the face of his strength he was suddenly irritated. ¡°Weak, weak!¡± he called out, though nobody was near enough to hear him except for corpses. ¡°So, Kami, this is your army?¡± he shouted. He paused and looked at the severed head of a man beneath him. Without hesitation, he squatted, picked it up by its singed hair. ¡°These are the soldiers of the invincible Kami?¡± He asked the head, staring, empty, back at him, ¡°Where are your vessels Kami? Will you send them out of the city to fight me, or will you keep them shut in for another day?¡± He stood and tossed the head to the side with a small smile, ¡°Not that it would matter anyway. The end was decided 500 years ago!¡±

    The swordsman turned around and looked at the last fort, now twice further away than before. Could he make it there in one bound? There wasn¡¯t any challenge here; he might as well make some up for himself. Before he could move though, he noticed another one of his objectives appear. Should he go after the newly appeared target, or go after his original plan? Would the new target, provide more excitement, or did it not matter either way? He gritted his teeth and sighed. probably not.

    He decided to go after the third fort after all and couldn¡¯t quite make it in one bound. It annoyed him that he didn¡¯t make it and in another flash and following concussion, the last fort disappeared as well. He turned his gaze to the rest of central, tacking his targets.

    <hr>

    Fallow felt dazed, and he wasn¡¯t sure what which of the two possibilities the feeling came from. Was it from being transported by magic over and over again that made him feel disoriented and sick? Or was it witnessing the literally unbelievable destruction the new enemy was creating? After a moment, he decided that it was from the later. Even Gatal¡¯s most dire predictions could not have prepared him for this; this was beyond all conceivable events. Was this what it meant to be a vessel?

    After teaming up with Vorash, he had been hopping around with Vorash for most of the day, secretly organizing a retreat among the army. With the network down, it only took a fair amount of lying to get the captains to cooperate. The officers were easily trusting and took his fake orders with only dismay that the battle had come to that. There was no way for them to confirm the orders, but with Vorash¡¯s presence as the executive commander¡¯s priest, they followed Fallows words readily.

    Still, it took a large amount of effort and coordination among the different officers to get the retreat going, along with silencing of a couple of them. Vorash did that dirty work without so much as a flinch of hesitation. He scared Fallow slightly and he laughed at him, ¡°We are together on this Fallow, for better or worse!¡±

    When the enemy had announced their retreat with their loud trumpets, Fallow felt a dash of panic. Had he acted too rashly? Had he let the words of the two mad priests sway him from proper logic and rationalization? Vorash was unperturbed at the retreat though, and even grateful for the opportunity to evacuate as many people as possible to the southern gate during the lull, but Fallow had doubts. What if he was undermining the frontlines ability to effectively retaliate against the enemy? Fallow was already buried deep in his lies, it was too late to stop the retreat anyway, and he decided could only continue his campaign.

    And now, that was the only thing that he could be happy about.

    After his last magical transportation, he stood blinking and swaying on the plains between Main Central and the river. The attack began only minutes before and already all three forts, the proud fortresses that had just successfully defended against the mass of enemy troops, fell spectacularly. Fallow felt faint.

    In contrast to Fallow, Vorash had responded without hesitation, dragging Fallow along with him. It was Vorash¡¯s time to shine it seemed and he proved he wasn¡¯t appointed as Lord Magician for naught. As the enemy blasted away the forts, Vorash gathered together the strength of the highland order under him. Fallow could not help but feel his respect for the man grow. Whatever his political objectives were, the man proved himself to be reliable in battle.

    On the plains, Vorash stood with his priests giving out instruction hurriedly, preparing for their encounter with the enemy vessel. Fallow looked towards the river, it was all smoke, vapor, and dust now; he could not see anything clearly.

    ¡°Fallow!¡± Vorash shouted behind him. He turned around to see the man was motioning him over violently. He went over. ¡°You must help lead the soldiers to safety while we carry out our operation!¡±

    Fallow looked back at the priests that Vorash had gathered and wondered at the change that had come over him. He could remember the time when just being in the presence of the priests filled him with dread. To all soldiers, the priests were mystical beings of power and existence beyond them. Now, looking at them, Fallow could not help but feel disillusioned. Out here on the plains, sweating under the Great Lantern and from the fear of battle, Fallow could not help but feel they were simply people as well, scared and anxious.

    Fallow responded blandly, ¡°What do you hope to accomplish, Vorash? What can you gathering of measly priests do against that?¡± He pointed towards the smoke covered river as though the answer to his question was obvious. The vapor was slowly crawling its way over the plains, covering most of the lands now.

    Vorash swelled angrily. ¡°Do not forget who you talking to, human!¡± Vorash hissed. He grabbed Fallow¡¯s uniform, pulling him close. ¡°We are the priests of Kami, purveyors and works of his mighty power! We work under the direct will of Kami, and he is not a power to doubt!¡± Vorash let go of Fallow and pointed. ¡°Now, there are still tens of thousands of men along the river, and we are not simply abandoning them yet. They are still alive and they will need direction to the Southern Gate.¡± Vorash dropped his voice down low. ¡°We are preparing ourselves to fight the enemy vessel, but not to kill him, only to delay him as much as possible. With the time we create, you need to get as many people to the city as possible! Understand?¡±

    Fallow breathed out a soft yes. Perhaps there was still some hope left. Vorash turned back to his magicians, all looking grim and pale. Several of them looked ready to bolt, but the rest were determined. Fallow wondered what kind of power difference there was between vessels and magicians. He didn¡¯t know.

    He heard the sound of approaching horses. Vorash was busy with his men, so Fallow strode forward to the noise.

    ¡°Who goes there?¡± Fallow shouted, trying to sound intimidating. He pulled out his sword feeling that it didn¡¯t really matter. The smog was thick and he could only make it out as a small group of soldiers on horses. Their approach showed that they were making a beeline for the city gates and just happened to cross Fallow¡¯s path.

    The lead horse came to a stop near him and the rest followed. Fallow recognized him. ¡°Drake! By Kami¡¯s throne, what are you doing here? Where is Gatal? We need his power!¡± Drake pulled up looking disoriented and frightened. His eyes danced around wildly. Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    ¡°Lieutenant! The enemy has thrown a vessel at us, we are no match, we need to run!¡±

    ¡°We know; where is Gatal?¡± Fallow shouted back. ¡°We are making and counter attack and could use his power!¡±

    Drake shook his head, ¡°He disappeared as soon as the vessel showed up. I believe he went to Soul¡¯s side, but he is gone now!¡± He paused and looked towards the city. ¡°Do you know if the gates are open?¡±

    Fallow nodded, ¡°Yes, Vorash and I have organized a retreat; all of Central Main is already evacuated.¡± He looked down at the other soldiers, scared and tense. ¡°You will have to hurry, who knows how long before the vessel come further forward?¡±

    ¡°What about you, Lieutenant?¡± Hourbor asked, stepping forward.

    Fallow waved him off with more bravery than he felt. ¡°Vorash is preparing a counter against the enemy in an attempt to rescue as many soldiers as possible. I am to lead them away.¡± He gestured back towards Vorash and the mages, ¡°We have gathered close to 40 priests!¡±

    Fallow expected Drake to be reassured by the pronouncement, not to blanch and look quickly back. ¡°No!¡± he said. ¡°The vessel is targeting the priests specifically! You need-.¡±

    Drake words were cut off suddenly by a blast of hot wind and a shock wave. Drake was thrown off his horse and Fallow was sent flying several feet in the air. He landed painfully on his back and he lay on the ground, groaning in pain. When he looked up, there was a tall man, draped in black and carrying long silver sword. He had a long and stern face and his eyes looked around with irritation. He said plainly, ¡°This is getting bothersome. How many of you are there?¡±

    Fallow was hurt painfully, but he couldn¡¯t stop himself from demanding, ¡°Who are you?!¡±

    The man simply looked down at him in surprise and responded, ¡°Eh?¡±

    A strangled yell come from Vorash, and the man looked back at him. Before anything else could happen, the scene erupted in a blast of light, wind, and abrasive sound. The hot air scorched Fallow¡¯s face and he threw his arms up to cover it. When the incident ended, he looked up to find the highland priests had been decimated.

    The whole block of priests lay dead on the ground, their charred and dismembered remains scattered around. The few that survived the initial onslaught struggled vainly with their magic for only a second before, they too, met their end at the point of the silver sword. Vorash¡¯s head lay near him, but he could only tell it was his from the insignia that was half destroyed tattooed on the man¡¯s head. Fallow turned over and threw up on the ground. He had never whiteness such death and destruction before.

    Thankfully, Drake and his men were far enough away from the group of priests to escape its devastation, but it still blew most of them away. Most of them hadn¡¯t even recovered from the initial appearance of the vessel yet. Several of them fell off the horses and the rest had trouble controlling their beasts. Drake¡¯s horse appeared to have died, taking the brunt of the magical blast. Drake was working hard to stand up straight. Then Fallow noticed the shaking and panicked priest Horace that was still with him.

    The swordsman appeared again right in front of them, looking around and scowling. Drake got slowly to his feet, as if the man was a predator ready to pounce on anything that moved too suddenly. The man ignored Drake though and said with fake solemnity, holding his sword in front of him ceremoniously, ¡°Oh Kami, lord of the land, accept your servant into your bosom.¡± He looked directly at the poor priest with a small smile and with only enough time for a whimper from Horace, he cut him down. The man looked at the fallen priest, letting his bloody sword drop to his side. ¡°Amen.¡± He concluded.

    Fallow stared in wonder and horror. This man single handedly destroyed the frontline forces? He would have laughed, if he didn¡¯t feel so sick.

    The vessel had stayed still for too long. Instinctually, Drake leapt at him, his eyes filled with killing intent and a snarl escaping from his lips. From his steed, Ashton shouted, ¡°No! Drake-.¡± But it was too late.

    Sensing the attacking, the vessel turned quickly dodging the killing thrust of the spear and stepping back, his eyes wide in surprise. Not hesitating, Drake followed through, twisting around to block the expected blow that didn¡¯t come and taking advantage of the slight opening that the vessel¡¯s momentary surprise gave him. Drake lunged again shouting, ¡°DIE!¡±

    In an instant, as Drake came in close for the second time, the vessel stepped up quickly and snatched Drake by the throat, batting aside his thrust. Drake gasped as he felt his windpipe constrict on him. He quickly dropped his weapon and struggled against the single hand holding him effortlessly off the ground. The vessel stood there, unmoved.

    The vessel spoke again with a frown, ¡°That was surprising, I thought he was something else for a second, but he was just a simple human.¡± He looked longingly at Drake and then sighed. ¡°I guess not. What a letdown, hm?¡± Without another word, he turned around and tossed Drake as easily as if he were a sack of potatoes. Not a sound was heard from Drake as he flew through the air for hundreds of yards, hitting the ground an imperceptible distance way. Ashton gasped in horror.

    The vessel looked towards the city walls, keeping his frown, ¡°When are they going to get here, huh? This is boring, I only have one objective left and if I complete it now then I would just be done. I don¡¯t want that, why do they think I came out here alone?¡± He looked around at the stunned humans around him. They were all still and silent. Those that couldn¡¯t quite grasp what had occurred gaped at the man, but the others were mortified. Ashton looked at him as if he too would attack the man, but he remained still as well. When the man looked at him, Ashton said with all the hate he could muster, ¡°You Monster¡­¡±

    The man heard him. ¡°Hmph, me? A monster?¡± He asked inquiringly. He stepped forward to Ashton and when Ashton¡¯s horse retreated back involuntarily the man leapt forward and cut the horse out from under him, slicing through the length of the horse as if it was butter. Blood and the terrible cries of death burst from the horse horribly and Ashton was thrown quickly to the ground. Without pause the man stepped on top of him.

    ¡°Monster is a word that weaklings like you call those who are more powerful than them.¡± The man spoke quietly but his voice was filled with violence. ¡°Your uselessness torments you, so the lot of you cast your despair onto beings greater than you, blaming them for your hurt.¡± He leaned down close to Ashton and taunted him with a grin. ¡°And you are right, for we all are monsters to you.¡±

    The man stood up again and ground the heel of his foot into Ashton. Ashton cried out in agony, but the weight of the foot might as well have been the pressure of a mountain. The man continued incredulously. ¡°For what reason do you exist? Why were humans created? Your pitifulness and wretchedness are only surpassed by the ease at which their lives are extinguished! Is there any meaning in you?¡±

    Ashton¡¯s screams increased and Fallow struggled up, pleading with the man, ¡°Stop! Just stop, there¡¯s no point¡­¡±

    The vessel¡¯s eyes suddenly locked onto Fallow¡¯s. Fallow broke out in a cold sweat upon seeing those bright golden eyes. They seemed to pierce him and read his soul. He felt paralyzed by the state. The man roared at him, suddenly, ¡°That¡¯s my whole point, there isn¡¯t any! Any and all acts that you humans could perform in your lives can and will be wiped out by me!¡± The vessel moved away from Ashton and grabbed Fallow by the front, hauling him to his feet before he could react. ¡°Where are they?¡± he demanded suddenly.

    Fallow struggled for breath, ¡°Who?¡± he managed to choke out. He felt like his ribs were broken.

    ¡°Vessels, vessels,¡± the man replied, clearly annoyed. ¡°Where are the vessels of Kami? He¡¯s sending them out to fight me, isn¡¯t he? He better, otherwise I came out here for nothing, you know?¡±

    Fallow struggled a second and said, ¡°I- I don¡¯t know about that. I-.¡±

    Before he could finish, the vessel released him saying, ¡°Useless, useless¡­¡± Fallow fell again, his head swimming on impact. The vessel cried out, ¡°Isn¡¯t there any meaning in this?!¡±

    The vessel made a face of one in serious contemplation. Then face softened and he said slowly, ¡°I hate this, all I¡¯m doing is swatting flies, when do I get a real fight? When do I start doing real work?¡± He looked out at the rivers again longingly. Then he said in a resigned voice. ¡°I¡¯ll just kill everybody, then.¡±

    Again the man¡¯s eyes looked down at Fallow, and Fallow knew that there was death to come from them. He closed his eyes and prayed for a quick end.

    But it never came; instead the vessel leapt away, towards the river again. After a moment, Fallow cried out ludicrously. ¡°Where is he going?!¡±

    Nobody answered. Ashton was coughing and gasping for breath. Heath ran up to him, ¡°Take it easy, you¡¯re badly hurt.¡±

    Micheal stepped forward and said sadly, ¡°There is probably a higher concentration of humans over there. Much easier to kill a lot of them, I guess. We live to fight another day,¡± She ended sarcastically.

    Micheal had been thrown off her horse as well and had a broken arm. Vanyor was kneeling over the broken body of Horace, praying for him. Horebour then let out a small wail, ¡°Drake! What do we do now?¡± Michael seemed unable to speak any more.

    Ashton spoke between gasps, ¡°Our lives are still here, we need to get to the city yet, and the gates are still open!¡±

    ¡°Curse you, Ashton! It doesn¡¯t matter!¡± Fallow burst angrily. ¡°Nothing does! This is what it means to be humans, to live and die on the whims of the gods! It doesn¡¯t matter if we run anymore; he will find us and kill us eventually!¡±

    ¡°Kami will not suffer the attacks of the enemy,¡± Horebore said stubbornly but slowly. ¡°We have always been powerless before, that is why we rely on Kami for our strength! Nothing has changed yet.¡±

    ¡°Where is that strength!?¡± demanded Fallow. ¡°Where was the strength of Kami when the western edge fell? Where was Kami when the enemies marched into the forest, destroying our armies and disrupting the Network? Where was Kami when the enemy appeared before and slew all of his faithful priests? Tell me man, where was Kami when your comrade dared to fight back and had his skull crushed in as a response. No! I do not see the strength of Kami anywhere out here; it has never left his walls!¡±

    ¡°You faithless mutt!¡± Micheal suddenly added in. ¡°Kami has always been present, who has given you the food you eat, the house you sleep in, and the very clothes you wear? Who has it been who has kept you alive, even now when the sword of the enemy was at your throat?!¡±

    ¡°Those are the lies of Kami!¡± screamed Fallow unreasonably. ¡°I was a simple man from the wilderness before the holy god ripped me from my home and dragged me into his war! This is not my city, not my god, and not even my battle; Kami has only ever filled my life with deception and grief and danger. And the same is for all of you too! You¡¯re blind!¡± he shouted gesturing to all of them. ¡°All of you have been dragged into this war that was not your own and have had your lives stripped by Kami. All of this is for naught. Kami does not care for us at all, his Frontline is decimated and he sits upon his throne silently. Kami will not be coming to save us today, or ever again! We¡¯ve been abandoned!¡±

    The others didn¡¯t respond to his outburst, but looked at him with something akin to pity. Fallow couldn¡¯t take it; he wanted to scream at them again, to strangle them, to beat in them the truth of their lives. Hot tears sprung from his eyes and he wept in frustration and despair.

    Suddenly, Ashton pointed towards the city as something approached, flying in the air like three golden arrows. Ashton shouted something, but it couldn¡¯t be heard over the roar of the objects as they sped through the atmosphere. They sped by quickly, passing the group without even looking back, but Fallow recognized them for what they were. He choked out in astonishment, ¡°Kami¡¯s vessels!¡±

 Chapter 32

    The enemy vessel felt Kami¡¯s vessels coming, long before they actually arrived, and he felt a rush of excitement from it. At the moment, he was dismantling a company of armored soldiers. It was truly amusing to him the way they would rush at him, retreat in panic as he blew away their men, and then reform and come at him again. They were like animals, only capable of following their instincts. Kill the enemy, kill the enemy, kill the enemy, the standard instinct was, but when fear got the better of them, their survival instinct kicked in and they ran away only to come back at him once they reorganized. He laughed at them all as the thousands of men would scatter and then reform and then scatter again. He honestly didn¡¯t get to kill that many, he was too busy enjoying the spectacle.

    He had decided to only kill the men with his sword in order to let the battle last longer. He could have wiped them out in seconds, but sometimes, there was more meaning if the feeling of the sword cutting through flesh and bodies. He loved watching the blood flow out of their pathetic bodies. But only that kept him amused for a little bit, and he soon grew afraid that the vessels we not really going to come out.

    But now the vessels were approaching quickly, all three of them.  He was playing with a company at the moment, but now that the vessels were finally here, the soldiers were no longer important. He grinned fiercely, and with a wave of his hand he blew them away like leaves in a storm. This fight with the vessels was what he had come here for, his blood boiled at the thought of the coming battle.

    He didn¡¯t obstruct the vessel''s approach, but waited patiently for them to land. The three did so right front of him with such grace that not a single blade of grass was bent. From their faces came the prestige of the divine and their hand shown forth their might.The enemy vessel said to them, with a smile, ¡°I¡¯ve been waiting impatiently. Do you know how many of your soldiers died because of your poor punctuality?¡±

    ¡°Impertinent.¡± said the golden vessel  to his right, a female. All three of kami¡¯s vesselsl wore the same thing, light white tunics and sandals. They all had bright golden hair and eyes and each carried a unique weapon. The one speaking held a halberd. Her eyes grew hard as she looked upon him, ¡°You have trespassed upon Kami¡¯s territory for too long.¡±

    The enemy vessel laughed shamelessly, ¡°Do you honestly think that you can beat me? How many of your comrades have I killed so far, hmm? You are the last three vessels of Kami, aren¡¯t you? What makes you think you can beat me, when every other time you have failed?¡± He brought his sword up into guard and added, ¡°My name is Covall! Remember it in your graves!¡±

    ¡°There is no need to remember the names of the dead,¡± The third Vessel stated, a dark skinned male holding a glaive, ¡°And there will be no marker to cover your grave, infidel!¡±

    ¡°This will be over today, Demon!¡± the second one spoke, his expression not moving a millimeter. He was holding a sword in his hands and on his belt was another, shorter one. He said sternly, ¡°We will not let your unholy feet walk this land anymore. Kami has willed it!¡±

    ¡°Such confidence and pride!¡± Covall scoffed. ¡°But also ignorance. Do you too, ignore the history between our people? Kami may have been powerful once, but that was ages ago! Your god was done for the moment we broke into this territory, 500 years ago! Only his stubbornness has kept this place alive, but even that will have its limit.¡± Covel brought his sword up and said darkly, ¡°This will be over today, but it will end in your deaths!¡±

    Kami¡¯s Vessel and Covall¡¯s left stepped forward threateningly. Covall taunted him, ¡°You all have your divine weapons? Good! This won¡¯t be a match without them.¡± He grinned at them again. ¡°Maybe I will have to get serious too!¡± None of Kami¡¯s vessels answered with words, but they unleashed their power, leveling the land around them and displaying their strength. The air sizzled and crackled with their energy.

    The enemy vessel laughed again, ¡°You had all better come at me at once! Otherwise I won¡¯t be satisfied!¡±

    Kami¡¯s vessels came. The land exploded at the powers collided.

    <hr>

    ¡°Alright, alright,¡± Hourbore said encouraging, pulling Ashton gently off the ground. He held up the wounded man carefully. ¡°Let¡¯s go. Kami has provided for us again, we cannot lose hope yet.¡± Ashton grunted in pain as he was lifted, but he thanked Hourbore quietly for it.

    The vessels had started fighting far below by the river, and it was frightening even from their standpoint. What they saw could hardly be described as similar to anything they had ever experienced before.  It was as if a great thunder cloud had landed on the ground. Flashes of light and crashed of sound made their way up to where they were. Shockwaves and blasts of extreme cold and heat intermittently emanated from the battle ground, sometimes almost knocked them over. It was painful for them to even be as close as they were to the clashing vessels.

    As Ashton looked he could see the shockwaves coming across the grass on the plains, as it wiped back like gusts of wind were blowing through. The Great Lantern was partially covered by the mist and smoke that was coming from the battle. Central was unrecognizable.

    Heath exclaimed aloud, frightened, ¡°Truly this is a battle of the divine! I feel as though I would get destroyed by it if I moved any closer!¡±

    Michael had helped Fallow to his feet, but he tried to waive off any further assistance. ¡°Come, we can still make it to the gates!¡± She pleaded. ¡°We need to go while we can!¡±

    ¡°Why to the gates?¡± Horebour thundered. There was a bright excitement in his eyes, ¡°The vessels of Kami have come! There is no need to run, anymore! I wish to see the vanquishing of the evil firsthand!¡±

    ¡°No, no!¡± Fallow said with exasperation. ¡°there is no guarantee that-.¡± Another blast of air came, cutting off his words. This air was freezing though and seemed sucked out all the heat from his body. He gasped at the chill and brought his arms in around him.

    Ashton shouted over the roar of the wind, ¡°Fallow is right, we won¡¯t last out here at least, for much longer. All of the land is groaning from their battle, if we stay we will surely get caught up in it and killed! We should head for the city gates for cover. But,¡± he added looking away. ¡°I am not leaving without Drake.¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s dead, Ashton,¡± Michael said, pointing her spear towards where he had landed. ¡°He¡¯s found his place with Kami now, our place is in the city!¡±

    Ashton shook his head, ¡°There is no guarantee that is dead.¡±

    Horebour looked down on Ashton with pity. ¡°There is no way he is still alive!¡±

    Ashton left let go of Hourbore and stood unsteadily, ¡°You guys keep moving to the gate without me, I will get Drake¡¯s body alone.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s crazy!¡± Heath, broke in. ¡°You¡¯re not going alone! Drake is already gone, for what purpose do you want his body?¡±

    ¡°SHUT UP!¡± Ashton yelled, stunning the group. ¡°Just shut up!¡± he shouted again, breathing heavily; tears were rolling down his cheeks. ¡°I mean, I know he¡¯s dead, I know! I saw it too, the vessel killed him and his body is way over there, broken. But still, I need to see him; I need to see his body. You understand? I need to know for certain. I want to bury him, or at least cover him. I mean, look,¡± He said facing Drake¡¯s direction. ¡°He¡¯s just naked out there, right? I can¡¯t leave him like that.¡±

    Another blast from the battle came below. The group cringed as the heat swelled up to them, pushing them around. It knocked Ashton to his knees and he landed roughly. He cried out in pain.

    Hourbore reached out his hand again, ¡°You are still alive, no? There are still things you can accomplish for Kami, we will not let you go.¡±

    Ashton didn¡¯t respond and ignored Horebour¡¯s hand. ¡°Come on Ashton!¡± Heath shouted. ¡°Stop being stupid! We all regret Drake¡¯s death, we all want to get his body! But there is no purpose in that now. We have the ability, and therefore, the responsibility to live for Kami. Stop being stubborn!¡±

    Still Ashton did not move. Micheal let out sigh of exasperation. ¡°Just leave him then,¡± she said coldly. ¡°I, for one, will make it to the gates!¡±

    ¡°Yes, you will.¡± Gatal said, coming in among them again. Heath squawked in shock, but the others only showed mild surprise to see the old priest again. Ashton¡¯s eyes burned in anger.

    ¡°Where did you go, priest!¡± Ashton howled. ¡°You abandoned us! Because of you Drake is dead! What have you come back here for?¡±

    Gatal ignored his exclamation and turned to the others. He said, ¡°Return to the city at once, all of you! The frontline has been abandoned, and the vessels of Kami will destroy the foe, it is no longer a place for humans.¡± The men hesitated for a second, but Gatal urged them again, ¡°Go quickly, while you still can!¡±

    ¡°Gatal,¡± Ashton growled. ¡°I am not leaving until i-.¡±

    Gatal cut him off, ¡°I know, I know, so shut up!¡± He pointed towards Fallow and said, ¡°us three will be going to get Drake¡¯s body, the rest of you must go.¡±

    Fallow complained loudly, ¡°Why me?¡±

    Micheal needed no further encouragement. She said stoutly, pointing at Horebore, ¡°Let¡¯s go, or I¡¯ll leave you behind!¡±

    Horebour eyed her darkly and said, ¡°The loyalty of the natives are always with the city and not their comrades, how predictable.¡± But Vanyor was already pulling Heath along towards the gates.

    Fallow shook his head and said, ¡°Just go, Horebour! We would only slow you down anyway. Whatever the priest is planning, it¡¯s above us; don¡¯t try to understand the highland order. Just go!¡±

    Horebour looked at them for the last time and then said, ¡°May I see you all again in the streets of The Endless City.¡± Then he turned and left, following Micheal up the last plains and towards the road that lead to the southern gate. If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.

    Gatal said quickly, ¡°Now we need to hurry. I¡¯ll make you able to walk again; we need to get to Drake!¡±

    Ashton and Fallow felt once again the alien feeling of warmth and energy fill them. The pain washed away from him and in a moment, he was on his feet. Fallow shouted at Gatal, ¡°Why do you need to get Drake? Let go of your foolish fantasies about vessels and gods! Kami¡¯s vessels are here, we should go while we can. Isn¡¯t this the end of the battle?¡±

    Ashton got to his feet slowly as well. His anger was still in his eyes but he kept silent. Gatal ignored Fallow completed and spoke only to Ashton, ¡°Your friend is not quite dead yet I believe, do not glare at me so! He can still survive, but it is his choice now. We need to get to him and convince him.¡±

    In a sudden swift motion, Gatal chanted something and brought his arms above his head. Fallow didn¡¯t notice anything different, but knew that Gatal had done more magic. Whatever it was it made the priest was look older and more exhausted than ever before. As the priest swayed slightly, Fallow said, ¡°You are pushing yourself too much; you can¡¯t carry on much longer either?¡±

    Gatal shook his head as if to clear his thoughts. ¡°Quit objecting to everything I do, you toad!¡±

    Fallow swelled up in outrage and shouted, ¡°YOU¡¯RE THE ONE FORCING ME ALONG!¡±

    Gatal ignored his exclamation. ¡°I¡¯ll live, long enough at least to complete my mission. But I just disguised our presence. We can¡¯t have the vessel find us, right? This should protect us for a while.¡±

    ¡°Is that how you survived the priest hunt?¡± Ashton asked moving away already towards Drake¡¯s fallen body. ¡°Hiding away while all the other priests were annihilated?¡±

    The priest didn¡¯t answer, but instead struggled to keep up. Fallow followed behind him, smoldering silently.

    Visibility had been reduced as the smoke and fog from the river enveloped all of central. They could not move quickly due to the continued blasts from the vessel¡¯s battle. Fallow wondered, what the point of armies anymore? Central was already destroyed.

    The ground they were walking on was dying. The grass was all withered and brown, some whole sections were simply disintegrating into the air. Fallow whispered, ¡°This is the power of the vessels? Even the plants wither at their touch.¡± He looked towards the river, now completely blocked from view. He added, ¡°What is happening down there?¡±

    Gatal answered back softly, ¡°A vessel is a materialization of a god¡¯s power. When two gods collide, it is only natural that the world be destroyed.¡±

    Fallow kept his eyes on the river valley and asked, ¡°Do you not believe that Kami¡¯s vessels will win? Otherwise you would not have bothered with the magic to hide us.¡±

    There was another blast, greater than any other one so far. The group braced themselves, lying flat on the ground. The wave threw earth and rubble around, narrowly missing them as it landed. The whole sky turned white, then slowly dimmed away. When it passed, Ashton asked, ¡°What happened to all the soldiers by the river? They weren¡¯t caught up in this, were they?¡±

    Nobody answered. ¡°Keep moving!¡± Gatal hissed.

    But something was off, something had changed. And before they got much further, Ashton spoke, ¡°The fighting has stopped.¡±

    The group paused and listened, but there were no more sounds of battle to be heard. There were no sounds at all, just the sound of the wind, rushing back after its displacement in the fight. It got abruptly cold and the group instinctively gathered together. Frost worked its way up the ground.

    ¡°Is it over already?¡± Fallow asked, uncertainly. The air was thin and bleak. ¡°Kami¡¯s vessels won?¡±

    But nobody moved, or hardly even breathed. Suddenly, as if a great fan swept through the air, the mist was pushed silently away, bringing the river into view.

    But there was no river to be seen anymore. Nor any remnants of any building, land, or person. All of the area around the river had been blackened and broken. There was no sight of the army, Kami¡¯s vessels, or the enemy.

    ¡°Quickly!¡± Gatal spoke, his face white and dripping in perspiration, despite the chill.

    There were no more sounds or interruptions on their journey. Fallow spoke on the way, ¡°The quiet is unnerving. Where has the enemy gone?¡± Soon, they had reached Drake, leaning up against central wall where he had dragged himself into a sitting position.

    ¡°Drake!¡± Ashton called out, breaking into a run upon seeing him. It was an ugly sight. His whole body was full of scrapes and blood.

    ¡°By Kami¡¯s horn!¡± Fallow said in awe, looking down at him, ¡°He¡¯s alive! Is there a bone that isn¡¯t broken?¡±

    ¡°Drake, Drake!¡± Ashton shouted, touching him gingerly. ¡°Can you hear me?¡± Drake¡¯s eyes fluttered open, unfocused and unseeing. A sudden coughing fit seized him and clots of blood were ejected from his lungs. Drake groaned in pain.

    Fallow looked down at the man with sympathy, ¡°Shall I put him out of his misery? It would have been better if he died instantly.¡±

    ¡°No!¡± Gatal said sharply. He pushed Ashton out of the way and spoke to Drake, ¡°Drake, put on your ring! Only the power of your god can save you!¡±

    Fallow wasn¡¯t sure Drake had heard him. After a few heart beats, Drake only spoke, ¡°It hurts¡­¡±

    Ashton bent down again close to Drake. ¡°I know it hurts Drake.¡± Drake¡¯s eyes focused on him, ¡°I know, but the ring will heal you, won¡¯t it? You would awaken as a vessel, as immortal and powerful as kami¡¯s, right?¡±

    Drake eyed filled with fear and he shook his head almost imperceptibly. ¡°I¡¯m scared Ashton,¡± he said. ¡°It hurts.¡± Ashton choked back his tears.

    Gatal broke in again, ¡°Drake, you must! This is the moment that you were destined for. Death is upon you Drake, it is time to take up the responsibility given to you by god. You must do as he commands!¡±

    Even as he looked, Fallow saw a bright silver ring on a chain necklace appear around Drake¡¯s neck. His eyes followed in wonder as it lifted off of Drake¡¯s chest and floated right above him, glowing mightily. All eyes stared at it. Fallow felt suddenly like a moment of destiny was about to strike, as if all the circumstances had led up to this final point of convergence. It was a rushing tide, an unstoppable movement that Fallow could only be a witness of.

    Drake stared at the ring, his eyes wide in fear, blood dripping down his forehead and onto his face. Then he said, his word full of terror, ¡°No!¡±

    Then Drake closed his eyes and died. As the last air filtered out of his lungs, the ring too, silently disappeared from Fallow¡¯s sight.

    At first nobody said anything. Both Ashton and Gatal sat on the ground next to the body, unmoving, seemingly in disbelief. Fallow looked around at the empty landscape and said, ¡°No, eh? What now?¡± Neither of them moved and Fallow was irritated. ¡°Come on, he¡¯s dead, why are you surprised? Kami¡¯s vessels are already done and probably gone already; we need to get out of here too. This was a pointless trip to begin with.¡±

    Gatal spoke up, still kneeling besides the dead body. ¡°Silence, you ignorant fool of a lieutenant!¡± Fallow turned quickly to Gatal in surprise; he had never seen the man so out of control. He was bent and withered, but he sensed from the figure tremendous wrath and power. The priest shook in rage, and Fallow stepped back carefully. He had never seen Gatal lose it like this.

    Gatal stood up suddenly and shouted at Fallow, ¡°Drake¡¯s death is the death of the city!¡±

    Fallow stared back at the man, his mouth open in shock. He said, almost to himself, ¡°ludicrous¡­¡± he shook his head and looked away towards The Endless City. He said to Gatal, ¡°Even if central is destroyed, the city is still there! Look! Just look at that thing! Was there ever a more permanent and secure thing in the entirety of the universe?¡±

    Even as Fallow turned around, a tearing noise like a cloth being ripped was heard around them. As if he was tearing a hole in a side of a tent, the enemy vessel could be seen cutting the air and slipping into their presence. He looked down at them savagely, ¡°I found you!¡±

    The enemy vessel was there, and it was like a vision from Fallow¡¯s nightmare. His body was battered and bloody, cuts and bruising covered him and his black uniform was tattered and stained. Some of it was trailing behind him in rags. Despite his troubles, his face only shown undeniable triumph. In his right hand, he held his silver sword proudly, and in his left hand he held the three bodies of the vessels, hardly recognizable, and clearly dead. Gatal straightened up suddenly, facing the menace, but the vessel stared back lazily. ¡°I had almost miscalculated,¡± he said casually. He tossed the three dead vessels on the ground in front of him and continued, ¡°I thought for a moment I had forgotten to leave an audience for my victory.¡± Despite his wounds, he looked energized and fresh. He exuded a malevolent aura. ¡°How awful would that have been?¡±

    ¡°Behold!¡± the vessel shouted, displaying his kills. ¡°I have slayed the last of Kami¡¯s vessels, nothing now stands in our way. Tell me, Kami¡¯s faithful, what do you believe, now? Your god has failed you!¡± He grinned maniacally. ¡°And after you, his death will soon follow!¡±

    Fallow mind were moving slowly, he had a hard time concentrating. ¡°Impossible!¡± He thought, ¡°How can he defeat all of Kami¡¯s vessels so easily?¡± He recognized one of them from the councilman¡¯s party and remembered the pure strength the man had exuded. That power had been overcome by this?

    The vessel leaned in and asked, imploringly, ¡°Come on, tell me what you think! Let me hear your words of dismay! Do you still have faith in your god? After I have defeated all his minions, do you think he could overcome me, or my master?¡± He was enjoying he tormented looks on his faces of his audience. ¡°Huh? What do you think?¡± Nobody answered and he grew annoyed. He screamed at them, ¡°TELL ME!¡±

    They could only stand frozen in front of him, waiting to die. He sighed and scowled, ¡°Can¡¯t even answer my question.¡± He lifted his sword, and stared down at them hatefully.

    The air was cold and Fallow could see his breath. Ice was still forming around them, as if the very hand of winter was on the land. The vessel stood directly before him and held his sword above him to kill, and it glittered silently in the frosty air. Fallow wondered briefly about what the afterlife would be.  He had lost faith in Kami¡¯s salvation, would his unbelief destroy him? He didn¡¯t know. The vessel said softly, ¡°Just die.¡±

    Fallow closed his eyes and waited again again for the strike to release his soul from his flesh. But all that came was a sudden gust of warm air, coming behind him and gently enveloping him. He opened his eyes and saw that the sword was still over him, but he man¡¯s attention was elsewhere. His face registered a shocked and angry expression. Fallow turned to see what the vessel was looking at.

    Something was rising, only a short ways away from them. From the object, silent blue light erupted and Fallow new that it was from this that the warm air was coming. He also recognized the object for what it was.

    Drake body slowly lifted itself off its feet and stood in the air. The ring around his neck that Fallow had just seen was now clearly visible again and glowing so brightly that Drake couldn¡¯t be seen but as shadow. The divine power that Drake had became almost a physical manifestation. It clouded the air, making it difficult to move or even breathe. A deep voice was heard, as if the very words of god were spoken to them. It said clearly, ¡°I will not allow my plans to come to ruin so easily. You have not escaped me yet, Drake! I have foreseen your servitude; it would take more than this death to separate you from me!¡±

    The enemy vessel stared at him and said, ¡°I knew there was something different about you! Another vessel of Kami? How noble of you to hide yourself among the insects!¡± He stood up straight and continued. ¡°One more won¡¯t change a thing though. I¡¯m going to kill you right here, just like I killed the others. You are just another-.¡±

    The vessel was interrupted by Drake launching forward and bringing his spear crashing down upon him. The spear shattered as it hit the vessel¡¯s parry, but the attack had knocked the enemy backwards, away from Ashton and away from the group. The enemy vessel was stunned, but quickly gathered himself. He shouted, pointing at Drake¡¯s now busted weapon, ¡°You¡¯re going to have to do better than that, vessel! Of what use is a broken weapon?¡±

    But Drake just stood there silently, his hand still gripping the broken staff. Ashton stepped forward slightly. He said shakily, ¡°Drake, you are still alive?¡±

    But the man who was Drake did not respond or even signal that he had heard Ashton. After another second, he tossed the broken wood away and stepped up to the dead vessels lying on the ground. He picked up the halberd that one was still holding, wrenching the dead hand away from it. Upon holding it, it came to life, erupting a brilliant blue. Drake¡¯s mouth opened and a voice that was not his spoke, ¡°Drake, I will show you how to use this body I gave you.¡± Without another wasted second, Drake leaped at the enemy again, this time his divine weapon withstanding the blows he was producing. The enemy snarled in retaliation, yelling hateful words. The fight quickly moved away.

    ¡°Drake!¡± Ashton cried out, but the battle continued furiously.

 Chapter 33

    The blow landed on Covall¡¯s jaw, knocking his head back. Momentarily stunned, Drake used the opening and delivered a hard kick in the enemy vessel¡¯s chest. From the impact, Covall was thrown a hundred yards away, tumbling in the air. His body stopped only when it blasted into the side of Central Main. The wall exploded on impact and the fort crumbled on top of the vessel, piling more bricks upon him. Drake approached and landed yards away from the scene. The smoke and dust from the impact obscured his vision. He waited for the man to appear again.

    After a second Covall stood up again, brushing the rubble off of him and stepping out of the debris. He looked unhurt, except for his face which had lost its confident sneer. It only had on it a brutal hate.

    ¡°Who are you!¡± Covall called out angrily. ¡°I know that Kami no longer had the power to keep such mighty vessels at his side, 500 years of a blockade had made sure of that! And even if you are his, why do you come out now and not before I had killed your comrades?¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond, but just stood silently and unmoving. The vessel grunted in disgust and continued, ¡°Kami¡¯s days are numbered! You have no hope of victory, here or in the future! What do you hope to gain from this? All your armies have fallen and your holy vessels have been slain. What future is there in the golden city?¡± The vessel shouted and pointed towards the city walls, ¡°After this defeat, all the different pieces are in place! The city is next, and it will come down quickly. The only obstacles were the Frontline and the vessels and now you.¡± He glared at Drake¡¯s unmoving stance and then charged him, ¡°AND AFTER I KILL YOU, NOTHING WILL STAND IN MY MASTER¡¯S WAY!¡±

    Drake countered and the scene exploded again.  Another section of the wall crumbled in the clash, falling down and disintegrating. After a few seconds of indecipherable fighting, the two fighters came apart again, each sporting new wounds. Blood dripped down from Covall¡¯s face and he wiped it, shouting, ¡°What are you? Some new weapon of Kami¡¯s?¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond again, but stared blankly at the enemy. After a moment, Covall said, ¡°I guess it doesn¡¯t matter, you do not seem to be able to understand anything. Are you even awake? All I see is a mindless blade.¡±

    Drake leaped forward and attacked this time, swinging his weapon around in a wide arc, impossibly fast and hard. All Covall could do was block it, bringing his sword around and steadying it with both hands. He grunted hard at the hit and the earth beneath him gave away at the force. He cursed and snarled at Drake, thrusting him back and attacking. ¡°DIE!¡± he screamed. Drake fought back with cold blank eyes.

    <hr>

    ¡°Fallow!¡± Gatal shouted, trying to be heard over the impossibly loud crashes of the fight. They had found large boulder that was actually a large piece of debris from some wall, and the tried to huddle behind in. It seemed that if not for the protection it offered, they would have been incinerated already. All around them on their right the earth blazed in fire, on their left it was frozen in ice frosts.

    ¡°Fallow!¡± Gatal shouted again, grabbing the man this time. Fallow was currently trying to peak over the side of the block of wall to see what was happening in the battle. Ashton was right with him.

    Fallow turned back at the touch, his eyes wild and large. It took a moment for him to register Gatal and he asked in bewilderment, ¡°Gatal? What is happening?¡±

    Gatal shot back, ¡°The universe is unraveling?? who knows?!¡±

    Fallow just shook his head and stared at Gatal blankly.

    ¡°Where did you go, Gatal?¡± Ashton asked, stepping down from his look out spot. His eyes were filled with accusations. ¡°When the demon came, you disappeared, what did you do? Many of other priests rallied together to fight, but you ran away! If your strength is as great as you claim, perhaps it would not have ended so badly. Everybody is dead!¡±

    ¡°So Vorash is gone then?¡± Gatal asked heavily.

    Fallow nodded, feeling as though this conversation was out of place. At every other heartbeat flashes of light flickered from around the boulder making the setting seem unreal. Fallow felt emotionally drained, too much had happened. He answered Gatal¡¯s question plainly. ¡°Vorash and I had organized the evacuation of central. After the enemy vessel appeared, Vorash tried to organize all the magicians together, but that ended in catastrophe. All of them were killed instantly.¡± Fallow swallowed hard. ¡°What do you think happened to the forces outside of central? My company was away south when this happened¡­¡± he let his voice drift off.

    Gatal shook his head, ¡°They are probably alive, but not for long.¡± He looked at Fallow with a sad finality. ¡°The Frontline was lost once the vessel appeared.¡±

    ¡°Where did you disappear to, Gatal?¡± Ashton asked persistently. He eyes were full of anger, ¡°You abandoned us the moment the vessel came, where did you go? Was not Drake the whole reason you came out here? How could you leave us the moment danger appeared, weren¡¯t you supposed to protect Drake? Now he is gone, fighting that demon now, his mind lost to the ring!¡±

    Gatal glared back and said, ¡°Drake was only ever the means to an end, not the end itself! My priorities lie with Captain Soul and nothing else!¡±

    Ashton replied, fiery, ¡°A meaningless and altogether useless purpose. What can Soul do for us?¡±

    Gatal¡¯s eyes blazed angrily. He said in a deadly voice, ¡°I do not answer to you, human! Thank fate that you are yet alive, and think of nothing else. Your uselessness lies in yourself! What have you done to prevent the catastrophe at hand?¡±

    Ashton tore away from Gatal¡¯s eyes with a lingering glare and he turned back to the battle. It was a fierce as ever, great gusts of heat and cold continued to blast the land. Flashes of light and the rolls of what sounded like thunder continued relentlessly.Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.

    ¡°Where did you go, then, Gatal?¡± Fallow asked.

    Gatal didn¡¯t turn to look at Fallow, but said after a moment, ¡°I went Executive Commander Soul.¡±

    Fallow shook his head. ¡°So Soul, at least, is safe.¡± He sighed and leaned against the rock. It was warm to his touch. ¡°Someday, you will have to tell me your obsession with that man. I can¡¯t imagine he went willingly though.¡±

    Gatal shook his head and replied, ¡°He wouldn¡¯t come willingly. He forbade me from taking him forcibly; it was only after he had been practically killed and unconscious that I could take him away.¡± Gatal grimaced slightly. ¡°He wasn¡¯t at the Command hill. He was at the first fort, coordinating the defense. He almost got himself killed for nothing¡­¡±

    Fallow stared at Gatal, and then said softly, his voice oddly strained, ¡°Everybody else died for nothing, then?¡±

    Gatal paused. ¡°Yes.¡± It was a simple response.

    ¡°What about Kami¡¯s salvation?¡±

    ¡°I thought you didn¡¯t believe in Kami¡¯s salvation?¡±

    Fallow paused and then said, ¡°I wanted to. They still do.¡± He added, gesturing the city behind them. ¡°The whole land believes.¡±

    ¡°Let them believe what they want, if it makes them feel and fight better, then all for it. That is all that the salvation of Kami is, a narrative to get the soldiers to fight harder. But now it is all meaningless, Kami is now doomed, as is his city. All I care for is Soul now.¡±

    Fallow¡¯s little patience snapped. ¡°Look!¡± he shouted, grabbing Gatal and making him face the city. ¡°Do you see those walls? Does the city not still stand, impregnable? Is not the very hand of the god, Kami, set upon its walls? Is the defense of the city at all comparable to the forts built out here on the frontline? Has there ever been a more secure thing in all of the universe? Sure, we have lost this tiny, insignificant, strip of land, but the city still sits there in all its glory. It would take an eternity to try to take down the wall! It is impossible, there plenty of time for another skirmish in the frontline. I do not see your cause for despair, Gatal!¡±

    ¡°I see the city, lieutenant,¡± Gatal said coldly. ¡°But all I see is a hollow oak tree that could be fell with a single gust of wind.¡± Gatal turned to face the shocked and angry Fallow. ¡°The frontline was the last lifeline of the city and with it gone, and the city will collapse soon after. The power of Kami has grown weak, you do not understand the ways of the gods; this battle was won centuries ago! I stay for one reason alone, and that is to save Soul. I owe him a debt that could never be repaid. He too, is stuck inside of Kami¡¯s cult, he is doomed along with the city! But I will save him at all costs!¡±

    ¡°You are insane,¡± Falow replied scathingly. ¡°And how do you plan to save your commander now, Gatal? If it is as hopeless as you say, then I don¡¯t see how he, much less anybody else, can be saved.¡±

    Gatal eyed him, ¡°I have already told you my plan. You did not believe me though.¡± Fallow stared at him in disbelief. Gatal continued, ¡°The only way to save Soul is to get him away from this city. For that, I need somebody to be able to open up a portal, and I also need to convince Soul to leave willingly.¡± Gatal sighed in dismay. ¡°Drake was supposed to be the one to open the portal, once I had showed him how. But even at this point, neither of those tasks are looking to be completable. I feel as if the universe is conspiring against me!¡±

    Ashton was still peering over the boulder at the fight, but suddenly flinched and hid behind the rock. A second later an exceptional blast rocked the land, crumbling the upper portions of their hide away. He said steadily, ¡°I think Drake¡¯s chances are better than you think.¡±

    <hr>

    Things were not going well for Covall. The new vessel attacking him was relentless and Covall¡¯s injuries from his earlier fight were now showing their strain on him. He had been fighting the beast for the last few minutes, and he felt himself getting tired and worn out. On the other hand, his opponent hadn¡¯t lost a single ounce of energy and, instead, seemed to become more and more powerful with each stroke. It was all Covall could do but hold his ground and defend himself. Actually attacking the opponent wasn¡¯t an option.

    In short, the Covall was losing.

    Drake was almost on top of him, pressing him down. Face to face, Covall snarled and shouted, ¡°Where is your power coming from? Surely not from Kami, that person is all but dead, shriveled up on his throne. Three of his vessels were no match for me, what are you!?¡±

    Pulling his rage up in him, Covall threw all his strength at Drake and sent him flying away. He crashed into the walls of central; much like the enemy vessel had done earlier. The wall crumbled on impact, disintegrated from only the simple touch of the divine being. The enemy vessel took the time to collect his breath, but the reprieve lasted only a second. In an instant Drake was back, wielding the halberd and striking down at him as if the entire world backed his blade. Covall felt his strength failing.

    He made a sudden decision. He shifted his sword slightly to the right, leaving his side unprotected. Without hesitation, Drake dove in, plunging his weapon at the opening.

    The blade pierced the enemy¡¯s flesh, cutting in deeply and spewing blood on the ground. Covall let out a small grunt of pain, but grabbed onto the staff and with all the force he could muster, brought the hilt of his sword around Drake¡¯s guard and smashed him on the temple in a stroke that would have surely killed a human.

    Drake¡¯s grip went limp and without a second to waste, the enemy pulled the halberd from his wound and turned and fled, holding his hand to his side, painfully. Drake was left stunned, his weapon at his side.

    The enemy grimaced again, and held his hand up to see. It was covered in his blood. His voice full of hate, he said, ¡°I leave for now.¡± He turned and looked at Drake, ¡°But it doesn¡¯t matter, The Endless City is still done, nothing can stand up to my master¡¯s power, now! And when I return I will come and personally strangle you with your own bowels! You have not seen the last of me!¡±

    He turned suddenly and quickly slipped into Central Main through one of the many opening he created. It was deserted, and he leaped onto the top of the buildings, heading directly towards command hill.

    When he made it to the bottom of the hill, he stared up at the straight cliff and said, ¡°My last objective, you must go!¡±

    He crouched down, and brought his sword to eye level. He closed his eyes and said softly, ¡°Oh, creator of all, hear my voice and grant me power to accomplish thy will.¡±

    After his prayer, he leaped up and screamed, throwing the remainder of his power into his technique.

    In a silent blast of pure white light, the command hill and its entirety was blasted off the surface of the land, leaving not a single lump of the hill that had been raised by Kami himself.

    The vessel swayed slightly and said, ¡°A message for you Kami.¡± Covall turned and looked towards the city, panting in exertion. ¡°Your city is next!¡±

    Then he left, fleeing Central and finding his way back to his master for healing. But he would not forget the humiliation given to him by the last vessel. He had vowed to return.

 Chapter 34

    I was dreaming and in the dream I was in agonizing pain. Looking down at myself, I saw a great trident in my chest, its three prongs clearly piercing my flesh and tearing holes in my lungs and my heart. I cried out in panic, and every breath was torment and every heartbeat was torture. I reached down to grasp the weapon and pull it out of me, but it held fast inside me, it¡¯s ends coming out my back and sprouting hooks that further tore into my flesh. I screamed in agony.

    But as I looked, I saw that blood poured out from the wound but no fading black of death came over me. I was still alive, yet forced to endure the pain. Suddenly, the trident transformed into a thorny vine, sprouting out of my chest and growing on and around me, sucking my blood for its own growth as a parasitic entity. The vines grew and pinned me down onto the ground, it thorns digging into me in every part of my body. The pain stayed with me and as much I struggled, I could rid myself of it.

    I screamed out for help, calling upon a divine entity, any divine entity to save me from my wretched existence. Every second was an eternity of torment.

    A throne appeared before me, large and oaken in the making. It sat upon a dais and upon the throne, a greying old man sat. The man wore great splendorous robes of purple and gold and in his left hand he held a scepter of authority. From him, blue lights of brilliant hues shown as materialization of his power. From his throne, he looked down upon me with pity.

    ¡°What is it you want?¡± Drfuil asked me solemnly.

    ¡°I want freedom from my pain,¡± I answered, struggling under the weight of the vines.

    Drfuil shook his head at me, ¡°I cannot do that. For that pain is what you have caused to yourself.¡± He pointed down at my chest and said, ¡°Look.¡±

    I looked down as gasped in horror, for I saw now why I had not died. The bulb of the vine was my own face. When I looked at it, it let out a terrible scream, animalistic and savage and the vines tightened around me. I looked and saw that they too had many faces on them. Each one wailing in pain, anguish, and rage, all speaking at once.

    ¡°I have been ripped from my home!¡±

    ¡°I have been beaten and chained by my enemies! Tortured and captured!¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m scared, I¡¯m scared!¡±

    ¡°I have been hurt and laid out, naked upon the floor!¡±

    ¡°Every turn I am surrounded by those who wish to destroy me!¡±

    ¡°The universe has conspired against me, forcing me onto this path.¡±

    ¡°It hurts, its hurts!¡±

    The vines cried out endlessly, repeating their lines over and over again and making their twisted faces at me and calling out in despair. I turned away from them in horror, but the voices grew louder and their thorns dug in deeper; I couldn¡¯t escape. The face on the bulb looked out at me, its eyes wild and insane. It called out with all the hate in the world, ¡°God has betrayed me!¡±

    ¡°Do you see?¡± Drfuil asked stretching out his hand. There was sadness in his eyes. ¡°Your disobedience is suffocating you.  Your anger and hate choke you and hurt you; you have caused all your pain yourself. Acceptance of my words will bring you peace.¡±

    ¡°I never wanted this!¡± I shouted back. The vines squeezed me again and I screamed in pain. Panting, I continued, ¡°I didn¡¯t want to be a part of anything, I only wanted to be left alone!¡±

    ¡°You foolish human,¡± Drfuil responded. ¡°There is no such thing as alone. Each of your choices affect the world around you and the people in it. You have so much potential for good, why do you deny it?¡±

    Even as Drfuil spoke, he faded from sight, his words also disappearing into darkness. The pain also receded from me and I saw that my body was once whole again. I looked around, but could not see anything, and I wondered if I was back inside the seal, inside the endless darkness. I felt the fear and panic fill me again.

    But soon I saw a dim light appear far away, small and yellow in the distance. It grew in intensity and I saw that it was a sunrise on a great land. Brilliant rays of light spewed forth from it, colors of yellow orange and red showering the sky in a stunning display of divine magnificence.

    I was high in the air, looking down upon the land. Large plains were shown to me, along with mountains and deserts and vales. A vast ocean shown on the left, its waters sparkling in the hot morning light and long rivers of golden hues ran from the mountains, spilling onto the lands before finding its way to the eternal waters.

    The beauty of the sight moved me, and forgotten already was the torment from before. A new kind of tears formed in my eyes as I beheld its majesty. I heard the voice of Drfuil ringing out across the lands, saying, ¡°My heart is with my land, I live and breathe with its life and I die with its destruction.¡±

    But then the light disappeared suddenly, erasing the sight before me and the deep voice of the god turned swiftly into a cry of despair and it said unto the darkness. ¡°My land, my land, how long must you wait before your hurts are healed and the light returns? How long until peace is found and you come to know your god again? There is one who could save you, but will he accept his calling?¡±

    The calls of the god rang in the silence and was joined with thousands of voices from below, each crying out in pain and anger, calling for safety and salvation. The voices reached me, calling for rescue, piercing me like many pointed arrows.

    I clasped my hands on my ears, wishing that the voices would go away, but the sounds only intensified. It grew too much for me and I shouted back at the relentless cries, ¡°I won¡¯t! There is no salvation, there is only death! I will not give me self to you, leave me alone!¡±

    The voices grew louder, hurting me and I could only scream back at them, ¡°STOP YELLING AT ME!¡±

    With that, the voices went silent. I slowly pulled my hands away from my ears, wondering what new torment was contrived up for me next. But all that came was the voice of Drfuil, speaking directly to me again, ¡°I have not given up on you yet, boy. My will will be done.¡±

    Drake awoke violently, gasping for breath and covered in sweat. Soft white sheets were on him but he shoved at them quickly, certain that on his chest the strange parasite would be on him again.

    His chest was clear, though, and he sat gazing down upon it trying to recall what had made him so panicky. Even as he strained his thoughts, his dream narrative slowly faded from recollection.

    Shrugging it off, Drake looked at his settings, trying to grasp where he was. For a moment, he thought he was back in his room at his Father¡¯s palace. Soft and giving pillows lay scattered about him. The room he was in was small yet comfortable, with pale golden bricks and large arched windows that let in a soft diffused light. The floor was tiled and intricate and lanterns mounted on the walls were slowly coming to life signaling the approaching end of the day.

    Drake cast off his blanket and stepped barefoot onto the cool tile floor, feeling strangely unsteady on his feet.  Other furniture in the room included closets and shelving filled with interesting trinkets and foreign objects.

    There was only one door, large and wooden and decorated with art and gold lining. The other four walls seem to lead out only into the sky, as each had large open windows and no apparent view of land. Confused, Drake stepped closer to the window and what he saw took his breath away.

    Apparently, he was in a tall tower, placed impressively high inside The Endless City. Below him, and as far as his eyes could see to his left and right, a city lay impossibly large and surreal. Buildings, towers, shops, markets, and palaces were spread out for miles, filled with the millings of the humans who lived and worked there. In front of him and now partially blocking Kami¡¯s lantern in the sky was the great wall, still miles away, but somehow smaller than what he saw it as before.

    Then Drake realized that the wall had not gotten small, his own placement was further in the city, a room placed within another set of walls, higher and stronger than even the outer walls of the city. Looking directly down, he saw the face of his building continue out of sight below him. He felt slightly dizzy at the sight and stepped back hastily from the edge.

    And then listening intently, all the noise of the city was distant and peaceful, as if he was removed from the action and set upon a high throne overlooking the men. Drake knew now that he was in The Endless City, the City of Gold, and that it had earned its name justifiably. From his perch, Drake could forget about his concerns and feel secure in the unmovable might of the city.

    The great lantern dipped slowly, and then finally disappeared from sight. The lanterns in his room brightened accordingly, casting shadows across the room from the furniture and bed. But looking out again, Drake saw a large light still glowing out there, but slightly behind him.

    He moved to his left window and looked out and back as far as possible, hoping to catch a glimpse of the strange alluring light from the city. He saw that the soft golden beams were emanating from another large palace, far away and secluded in the middle of the city. There were no towers or building near it, as if it had been left aside and designated solely as special. The palace had large towers and walls, as if it was a small fortress unto itself.

    Still straining to see clear, Drake heard Ashton¡¯s voice behind him, ¡°That is Kami¡¯s temple. It always glows like that, but it is especially noticeable at night. It is a symbol of his presence and power, I suppose.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t look back, but stared at the temple captivated. ¡°That is where Kami is?¡± he asked, still in awe at the sight.

    ¡°I have been told that at least,¡± Ashton answered, coming up next to me. ¡°And it¡¯s probably true. There isn¡¯t a greater building in the entire city.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ve seen the whole city?¡±

    Ashton chuckled slightly, ¡°Hardly, it really is an endless city, not just time wise.¡± He pointed out the window towards the city, thousands of small lanterns far below dotted the landscape. ¡°You can see far from here though. We are at or near the center of the city; god¡¯s temple wouldn¡¯t be anywhere else I suppose.¡±

    Drake continued to look out over the calm setting, feeling the gentle breeze blow through the room. Tall curtains of deep red rustled quietly in the breeze. Ashton spoke, chuckling again, ¡°I¡¯m surprised you aren¡¯t all excited, shouting and jumping around in confusion, threatening to break down doors and such. Why so calm Drake, aren¡¯t you wondering where we are?¡± This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.

    Drake turned around and leaned back upon the railing, ¡°The questions can wait for now, can¡¯t they? I just want to enjoy the moment. I doubt I¡¯ll get many chances in the future. I¡¯m sure Gatal will get here any moment and spoil it.¡±

    Ashton smiled back, ¡°It had been a while since it been this peaceful.¡± He relaxed and leaned forward against the railing. He said, ¡°It is hard to believe that this place really existed, you know. Even now, after a week inside of it I am still amazed. Only months ago we were below it in the tombs, or whatever they are called. I hardly believed any sort of atmosphere existed back then anyway. And then outside the city, all was forests and land except for the wall, right? Both places were hard and cruel and now here we are actually inside the city we¡¯ve been working so hard for. It¡¯s so peaceful here, such extremes don¡¯t seem to fit each other, you know?¡±

    Drake nodded. After a moment, he asked, ¡°We¡¯ve been here for a week?¡±

    ¡°A little bit longer actually, but what does it matter?¡± Ashton replied carelessly. ¡°Gatal brought you here, to his personal residence for you to, uh, rest up. I haven¡¯t had anything to do the whole time you know. Unlike the rest of them, I was transferred from the regular army into Gatal¡¯s personal guard.¡± Ashton snorted, ¡°Not that he needs guards of course. He was right when he said he wasn¡¯t going to let you out of his sight again, Drake. ¡±

    Drake sighed, ¡°Well, that was the price wasn¡¯t it? Whatever he plans for me, you and the other are safe inside the city now.¡± He flashed a sad smile at Ashton. ¡°Gatal was right all along, but even he underestimated the enemy.¡±

    Ashton frowned at Drake and asked, ¡°How much do you remember?¡±

    ¡°Well,¡± Drake responded scratching his chin. ¡°I remember dying.¡± He looked sideways at Ashton.

    Ashton frown had turned into a scowl and he asked sweetly, ¡°Please do not play games with me, Drake.¡±

    Drake sighed and turned away, fingering the ring on his neck.  Ashton waited patiently until Drake answered. ¡°Everything, actually. Don¡¯t ask me to explain it, but I remember fighting that vessel. I remember the feeling of the halberd in my hand, the feeling of power in my limbs. But it wasn¡¯t me.¡± He gripped his hands and looked at Ashton, ¡°I remember the rage inside of me as I fought him.¡±

    Ashton asked cautiously, ¡°Drfuil took control of you?¡±

    Drake shook his head, ¡°Yes, and no. It was my own will. I had wanted to destroy that vessel, but I was only human, you know. And I was killed by him.¡±

    Ashton gaped at him, and said softly, ¡°Drfuil can even resurrect the dead?¡±

    Drake considered the words and responded, ¡°Well, no. It looks like that, but nothing can bring the dead back to life.¡± Ashton paused and gave Drake a confused look. Drake continued, ¡°I know, I know. You could say that my human side as killed, but I wasn¡¯t entirely human? Whether I had accepted it or not, I was still a vessel of Drfuil. It would take more than that to kill a me.¡± Drake turned away and looked out the window again, not wanting to see Ashton¡¯s searching eyes. He swallowed and continued, ¡°Inside of me, I can now feel¡­ myself. I mean,¡± Drake added, fumbling with words. ¡°The vessel me, the potential inside of me. The me I would be if accepted Vesselhood. Am I making this clear at all? It is like the exoskeleton of an insect being casted off. The shadow of Drfuil lurks inside me and when my body died, it surfaced, showing me what it meant to be his vessel. And in my anger, I let him.¡± Drake sighed and added, ¡°I¡¯m afraid I accepted a part of the ring that I cannot return.¡±

    ¡°What does that mean?¡± Ashton asked behind him. Drake couldn¡¯t discern the man¡¯s feelings from it.

    Drake turned around sharply, facing Ashton squarely, but Drake couldn¡¯t read the man in the dim light. He said loudly, ¡°It means I¡¯ve taken an irreversible step towards becoming a vessel.¡± Drake clenched his fists together and finished, saying, ¡°I fear now that from here on I will only fade away, slowly but surely losing my mind to the ring until I eventually become Drfuil¡¯s mindless pawn!¡±

    Ashton didn¡¯t respond and Drake turned back to the city, but even its soothing lights could not calm his frightened heart. He spoke again, ¡°There¡¯s nothing worse than knowing you will slowly but surely lose your mind!¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know if that is true,¡± Ashton spoke up. ¡°Hasn¡¯t Drfuil always given you a choice? With all his powers, could he have not simply forced you to wear the ring? Even now, you are back with us because you refuse him. I see the only way he will have you is when you accept it. He will not take you until you actually choose him, so do not be afraid.¡±

    Drake didn¡¯t respond and Ashton let the time slip by peacefully. The Great Lantern had set completely and it was night again. Looking up, Drake was reminded how fundamentally foreign this place was. No clouds were above them, but neither were there any stars. Ashton retained a healthy skepticism towards Drake¡¯s claims of endless amounts of balls of light unimaginably far away and large, but Drake didn¡¯t forget.

    Drake said with his voice full of longing, ¡°I want to go back home Ashton. I am tired of this place. All my troubles i had the seem so insignificant compared to what i have experienced this last half year.¡±

    Unexpectedly, Ashton slapped him hard on the back cheerily, ¡°Well, that¡¯s good! Gatal professes the ability to return us home. Have some hope Drake, home is surely waiting for you. Come now, Gatal had asked me to come up to fetch you. Who knows how he knew you would awake today and at this hour, but I have learned to stop wondering at the man. I may officially be the priest¡¯s guard, but assistant would be more accurate.¡±

    ¡°What does he want?¡± Drake asked warily letting Ashton lead him away.

    ¡°Who knows? Ashton responded, a little too happily. ¡°That magician has plans inside of his plans, inside of his sleeves! You can never tell what he has going on up there. He claims that what happened in the frontline was a disaster on every count, but he got what he wanted out of it.¡± Drake looked at him questioningly and Ashton continued, ¡°He got his beloved Executive Commander to safety and he has you under his grip. You know, it turns out all he really wants is to get Soul away from this place.¡±

    ¡°Then what does he want me for?¡± Drake grumbled. He followed Ashton freely now, moving towards the large door and venturing down the narrow spiral stairs immediately afterwards. The lanterns were spread out unevenly along the staircase making it difficult to move quickly, but Ashton moved with comfortable ease.

    ¡°He wants you,¡± Ashton responded matter-of-factly. ¡°To open up a portal out of this land and to take him and Soul away.¡±

    ¡°Oh,¡± was all Drake could respond. But all he could think was, all of this for such a simple goal?

    ¡°This way,¡± Ashton said after exiting the staircase. A long hall opened up before them, rows of windows opened up to their left again and many open archways appeared on their right. Ashton led them with practiced ease and Drake wondered how he could have remembered such a layout in such a short time.

    ¡°What happened afterwards?¡± Drake asked as they passed through yet another set of hallways and doors. Small lanterns lit up the entirety of the building and there were no longer any windows. They were heading deeper inside the structure.

    ¡°After you fell unconscious? Just what you¡¯d expect I guess. You seemed to have wounded the enemy vessel, because he fled promptly after destroying the hill that housed Central¡¯s administration. The land was a perilous landscape after the battles, I never thought that ice and fire could coexist like that before, but I guess that is what it means to be a vessel. Thanks to Gatal, we were able to gather your body and we brought you back into the city with us. You are actually technically dead. That way, Gatal could take you away secretly.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m dead?¡± Drake asked incredulously. ¡°Who knows the truth?¡±

    Ashton paused at a large door and looked at Drake with pity, and turned away. ¡°I¡¯m sorry Drake, the others think you are dead. They saw the vessel kill you and to bring you back now wouldn¡¯t do. Gatal wouldn¡¯t allow it. Only four of us know the truth. Well five, including you.¡± He looked back at Drake, ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Drake.¡±

    ¡°No, no. It''s okay,¡± Drake said, feeling a crushing sensation inside. He tried to brush it off. ¡°It will be better this way, anyway. At least they are okay¡­¡±

    Ashton nodded and added, ¡°You are probably right. The four who know the truth though, are Gatal and I of course. There is also that lieutenant from the Frontline, remember? He stayed with us. Lastly,¡± he leaned into the door opening it. Inside was another room clearly meant for administrative purposes. Large glass windows meant that they had traveled to the other side of the building they were on. Inside were two figures, Gatal and another hidden in the corner, away from the lanterns. Gatal was talking and gesturing animatedly, while the other only listened calmly. Neither noticed their entrance, and Ashton finished saying ¡°General-Commander Soul, also knows now.¡±

    Soul broke into Gatal¡¯s rant. ¡°We will talk about this later, Gatal,¡± He said. ¡°I am still in recovery watch, you know.¡± Gatal practically snarled in frustration, but Soul interrupted him again. ¡°Later,¡± Soul said sternly and Gatal quieted down, but still smoldering behind his dark hood.  Soul turned and gazed out the window, his mind apparently on other matters. This window too, held a breathtaking view of the city with thousands of twinkling lights below. From here, the temple could be seen clearly, and it reminded Drake strongly of the light of the full moon at night. Its light golden rays played out over the Commander, displaying the hard look of a man with deep worries.

    Ashton waited patiently to be noticed, but when neither occupant moved, he knocked on the side wall lightly, saying ¡°Gatal? We have arrived.¡±

    Both Gatal and Soul turned and looked at Drake. He felt uncomfortable under their stares, like a piece of meat at a butcher¡¯s shop. Nobody spoke and Drake let the silence hang in the air. He had no desire to hear what these people had to say to him.

    Soul spoke first. ¡°So, you are the vessel that Gatal hid from us¡­¡± He got up and walked over to Drake by the doorway, ¡°Lord Vessel, I must thank you for your effort on the frontline as a soldier. Your work had saved us from the enemy and this city owes you its gratitude.¡±

    ¡°Fat lot of good, that was,¡± Drake said bluntly. ¡°Most of Central was either already killed or already evacuated. Besides, I did not do it for the city. I did it to save my men¡¯s lives.¡±

    Soul lifted and eyebrow and added, ¡°Do not degrade your actions; you saved Gatal¡¯s life at least. You have my personal thanks for that; he is very valuable to me.¡± Gatal snorted behind him indignantly, but Soul ignored it. ¡°And you also deflected whatever damage the enemy vessel would have caused if he had continued his rampage.¡±

    Drake shifted uncomfortably and didn¡¯t respond. Soul continued, ¡°I must ask you now, and please forgive my impertinence, but what are your objectives? What do you plan on doing, now that you are back inside the city?¡±

    Gatal broke in before Drake could answer, ¡°Drake has agreed to work with me, Soul, in exchange for saving his friends lives. I have already-.¡±

    Soul cut him off again, ¡°I know what your agreement was Gatal. But in the end, the Lord Vessel did most of the saving. I can¡¯t believe his level of obligation to you is as high as you estimate it at.¡± Soul turned back to Drake, his eyes open and expecting.

    Drake felt a root of anger rooting up inside him and he asked harshly, ¡°What are you getting at, commander? When have my opinions in the matter ever been bothered with? You understand I was conscripted into Kami¡¯s army, right? That I had been forced into training and then onto the frontlines to fight for my survival? I have no love for this city or its people. Gatal had used my feelings towards my comrades to get me to follow him, but his goals have never been clear to me. What do you want from me, Soul? Do you, too, want to use me for your own purposes? I¡¯ll tell you what I want, it¡¯s the same goal I had since I was chained into your holding wagon in the wilderness in another age.¡± He brought his hand down and jabbed his finger at Soul. ¡°I want to escape from this place.¡±

    ¡°I see,¡± Soul said, rubbing his chin thoughtfully, not responding to Drake¡¯s provocations. Gatal stood silently in the corner, his eyes glowing like a cat¡¯s in the dark. Ashton stood calmly at the side, listening to the conversation. Soul looked back at Drake. ¡°I understand what you are saying,¡± Soul said amicably. ¡°It would be unfair and unwise to think you would want anything else. The facts are just as you say: Gatal was perhaps a bit too ambitious with his plans. And as it turns out, what you want and what I want from you are entirely compatible!¡±

    Drake turned his head skeptically looking down at Soul. He asked suspiciously, ¡°What are you saying?¡±

    ¡°Lord Vessel,¡± Soul said folding his hands politely in front of him. ¡°We should have never brought you here in the first place. That an unknown vessel would make its way inside the city is unthinkable and even now I find it nearly impossible to believe that such a thing occurred. But here you are, standing right in front of me in my own residence! I must ask myself, ¡°For what purpose is the vessel here? Are not Vessel¡¯s the extensions of gods themselves?¡± You are not just a random person who come into the city, you are the arm of a god! Lord Vessel, I must ask you again, what is your god planning that he would send his Vessel into Kami-sama¡¯s territory and hide among his troops? What are you planning on doing now that you are back in the city? For, sure as Kami is truth, you are a direct threat to the security of this city!¡±

    Drake felt overwhelmed, unable to come up with an answer. Soul looked at him now with such intensity, Drake felt like a criminal on trial. He sputtered out, ¡°I didn¡¯t ask to be a vessel, I didn¡¯t ask to come to your city, and I sure as hell don¡¯t want to be here!¡±

    ¡°Then it seems clear to me,¡± Soul said calmly, watching Drake¡¯s flustered face. ¡°For both of our interests, we need you to leave this city and never return.¡±

 Chapter 35

    ¡°Great!¡± Drake replied hotly, flinging his hands in the air. Soul remained unmoved at Drake¡¯s display of anger. ¡°Let¡¯s go then, I¡¯ll leave right now! Show me to the gate! This city can burn in hell for all I care. Stay here, cooped up behind your walls, safe and secure under the protection of Kami!¡±

    ¡°You can¡¯t you idiot,¡± Gatal growled from the corner. He stepped forward into view. ¡°With the frontline cut off. Entering and exiting the city is impossible. Portal¡¯s cannot be created inside the city, Kami placed that restriction ages ago. The frontline was our only access point to the outside. With that gone, you are stuck here inside this city with us.¡±

    Drake felt punctured. His eyes opened up in shock and he snapped out, ¡°What?¡±

    ¡°I am afraid it is true,¡± Soul said, turning around and sitting in a chair to his side. He looked up at Drake calmly and said, ¡°We have lost much in the recent battle, thousands of soldiers, magicians and resources have been destroyed, but most importantly, Kami-sama¡¯s connection with the outside world. Lord Vessel, you say you no longer care about this city, but I can tell that that is not true. You are human enough to care for your fellow men. The time you spent in the army is designed to reinforce feelings of comradeship with each other, and whether you like it or not, you have strong feelings of duty towards your friends. Hasn¡¯t that already been proven true when you were in the frontline? And lastly, you may not be able to forgive Kami for what he has done to you, but at least now you can understand him. You now know the hardships and pressures he faces in the war. You have the power to help, and I am sure you will.¡±

    Drake could only stare back at the man, mouth slack and eyes wide. He suddenly didn¡¯t like this man. Soul continued, ¡°You tell me that you want to escape from this place, and I believe you. But with the Frontline lost, that has become impossible for you. The way forward is clear! I have been given orders from the divine council only this morning. Taking back the frontline is now the city¡¯s top priority and I have been given command of the operation. Realistic understanding of the situation tells me that we do not have the strength to commit ourselves to such a feat. We have lost much of the highland order of priests and all three of kami¡¯s vessels have been killed as well. Kmai will select several more candidates to become vessels, but their maturity will be take a while and, as such, it will be many years before I can mount a feasible attempt at retaking the frontline.¡±

    ¡°That is unacceptable,¡± Drake replied with a snarl. Soul¡¯s words were shaking him up, the truth that he himself had been feeling already. He wanted the man to shut up, if so he could remain ignorant. Drake felt sick and cold.

    Soul continued, unperturbed by Drake¡¯s outburst. ¡°I didn¡¯t think you¡¯d want to, and quite frankly, for us, the sooner you leave the better.¡± Soul leaned forward and looked at Drake earnestly. ¡°In this case, we can work together for mutual benefit. With your powers, Lord Vessel, I believe we can make a serious attempt at retaking the Frontline much sooner.¡±

    Drake eyed Soul warily and asked, ¡°In your own words, I must say that i am not a matured vessel, either. My recent experience gave me access to my god¡¯s divine energy. But can tell that I am far from being able to control it.¡±

    ¡°This is where Gatal¡¯s expertise will come into play,¡± Soul replied easily. ¡°I trust him when he says he can train you in using the vessel¡¯s power. He is confident you will be ready much sooner than Kami¡¯s new vessel¡¯s could be. Still, the training will take not an insignificant amount of time.¡± Soul sighed and leaned back, keeping his eyes on Drake. He continued slowly, ¡°I will not lie, Lord Vessel. The enemy is strong, stronger than ever before and the enemy¡¯s new vessel is unprecedented. And furthermore, the city is weaker than ever before. Even the force I had twenty years ago is all but a memory. It will take some time anyway to gather up the city¡¯s resources again. If you have people waiting for you, I am afraid they will have to wait long.¡±

    Soul looked back at Drake expectantly, and Drake gritted his teeth. ¡°So,¡± he thought, ¡°Him, like everybody else is trying to use me for their own gain?¡± He clenched his fists in rage.

    Ashton spoke out behind him, ¡°Drake, I understand your anger. Do not I have the same anger inside of me? But these are good people Drake, working to save their home. You cannot fault them for their zeal. What the commander says makes sense, it¡¯s the best chance we have at leaving here. I also wish to return home soon, how I wish I could see Carothers again! And the village and my people! But this is our home at the moment and I at least feel that I owe it my best effort. I want to help this city too, for my own sake. It is our only way to leave here as well, please, calm your spirit.¡±

    Drake, glanced back at Ashton, annoyed, but calmed nonetheless. He responded back to Soul, ¡°Do you know what Gatal wants from me, correct? He seems to have different feelings towards this city than you.¡±

    Soul smiled back and said, ¡°Gatal is extremely proficient at what he does, and his opinions are always valuable to me. But he lacks certain points of reason.¡±

    Gatal scoffed loudly and Drake challenged Soul saying, ¡°He believes that this city will not last much longer. So much so, that he has staked his life on his belief and has tried desperately to rope me into his plans. What do you have to say on his beliefs?¡±

    Soul frowned and looked back at Gatal. He said to Drake, ¡°Gatal and I have had extensive discussions on the matter and his beliefs do have some merit to them and have often helped me.¡± He turned back to Drake. ¡°But ultimately, he is wrong. He does not understand Kami-sama. To try to escape here alone is unthinkable and a betrayal to my god. And what sense would it make, to leave the city, leave the protection of Kami-sama?¡±

    Gatal stared back at Soul with such intensity that Drake wondered how Soul could remain so calm. Drake swallowed and then asked Soul, ¡°So, you do not believe that Kami will lose? That with the encirclement of the city complete, that this city¡¯s end is near?¡±

    Soul¡¯s face lifted up in amusement at Drake and he answered, ¡°Of course not, Lord Vessel. Have some faith, Kami-sama is the life of this city, the city cannot fall while is still here. Really now, have some faith.¡± Soul chuckled softly at Drake, but Drake could only stare back in disbelief. How could he have such confidence in Kami, even after the sudden loss on the frontline? Drake shifted uncomfortably, the man made him nervous.

    Silence stretched and nobody spoke. Soul crossed his legs and leaned back in his chair, never taking his eyes off of Drake. Drake swallowed, his throat feeling dry. He turned and looked around the room. ¡°Can I have something to drink, maybe?¡± he asked feeling suddenly insecure. The splendor of the room itself made him feel unwelcome.

    ¡°Yes,¡± Ashton started, moving away. ¡°You have missed Kami¡¯s meal already, but I can get you some water. I¡¯ll be back shortly.¡± He left the room, clearly used to the layout of the building and the exact location of water. Drake wondered how the Ashton felt about his new position. He fidgeted slightly and leaned on the wall.

    Soul spoke up again, ¡°It would be beneficial for me to have your cooperation, Lord Vessel, but not necessary. And if you choose to help, I will need to have you submit yourself to my authority, as part of my military.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡± Drake asked automatically.

    ¡°I can¡¯t have a vessel like you running loose, in my military there must be order and efficiency. My offensive to retake the Frontline will be highly coordinated and I would need to have you follow my orders and you will have to have my trust, before I use you on the battlefield. Do you understand? Wild units are not acceptable.¡±

    Drake pondered Soul¡¯s words for a minute and asked sarcastically, ¡°What will this control look like? Will you have me revived as a soldier in your light infantry again?¡±

    ¡°Hardly,¡± Soul responded coldly. ¡°Much like the magicians under me, I will set up a special team to assist you. People whom I trust.¡±

    ¡°People who can keep tabs on me and report back to you, you mean.¡± Drake countered.

    Soul nodded, ¡°But also people who will be able to assist you. Your unit will be like every other unit under me, each playing out the role assigned to them. As a light infantryman, your role was primarily scouting and skirmishing. In this new unit, your role will be a little bit different.¡±

    ¡°And if I refuse?¡± Drake demanded. ¡°What will happen to me?¡±

    Soul looked up at Drake and his eyes glared fiercely at him. After a moment, he said, ¡°If you are not with me on this, you will be considered a dangerous foreign entity that must be captured and if you resist, to be killed before you learn to control your power. There is no middle ground here, and no reason to refuse other than your pride! So, what will it be, Lord Vessel? Will you serve under me?¡±The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.

    Drake scowled back at the man. He said flatly, ¡°I may not have complete control, but could still kill you right here.¡±

    Gatal gasped audibly from the corner, but Soul looked back with ice in his eyes. ¡°Nothing will have changed for you, if you do.¡±

    Tension rose in the room like an oven and Gatal stepped forward, frightened and unsure while the two men stared each other down. ¡°Drake!¡± he gasped. ¡°Stop this madness!¡±

    Suddenly, Ashton returned carrying a pitcher of water and several glassed. His forehead was sweaty as if he had run on his errand. He stepped in and asked brightly, ¡°I¡¯ve secured the goods! Have a drink my friend. I don¡¯t believe you have drunken anything in a week!¡± He laughed cheerfully.

    Without another word, Ashton poured Drake a glass and forcibly handed it to him with a smile. The glass was small and richly decorated with swirls and intricate patterns on the side. Drake looked at it a second, and gulped it down in one stroke, enjoying the cool clear taste it had. Ashton asked if anybody else was thirsty. Soul declined casually, but Gatal accepted it in a strained voice. Silence fell over the room again.

    Drake spoke up, cutting through the tension. ¡°As the only way out for me is through you, I will accept your proposal, for now. If I find any deception from you going forward, not even hiding in Kami¡¯s temple will protect you.¡±

    Soul took the threat with a laugh, but did not comment on it. Soul stood up instead and smiled, lifting his arms wide and gesturing out the window. ¡°Lord Vessel, If you let it, this city could find a place for you, too. For who can resist the calling of Kami-sama, and the love and faithfulness that he provides? In the world of darkness and ruin, was there ever a city as magnificent as ours?¡±

    <hr>

    Fallow was in Central Library again. After his return from the frontline, the city was in an uproar. The citizens inside were not aware of the events that occurred on the frontline, nor did they care too much about it. They only cared at see the proud and high officers and men of the greyhoods run away from the fight with their heads bowed and shoulders sagged.

    ¡°Disgrace!¡± the peopled yelled. ¡°Where is your faith in Kami-sama? How could you retreat from the lines when Kami is at your back?¡±

    But they were not there. They didn¡¯t see the forces of evil. They did not see the armies and the men and the war machines arrayed against them, seeking to snuff out the lives of every man on the line. And most of all, they didn¡¯t see the terror and strength of the enemy Vessel, the nightmare in personification, single handedly wiping out central and the command hill that stood at the center of it. No mortal could stand up against such madness!

    The military brass was more understanding and the Council of the Divine more forgiving. Lieutenant Fallow did not take credit for orchestrating the retreat of central, nor did he let his name be known he was involved. The priest Vorash was given the honors and his noble sacrifice was commended throughout the ranks. Fallow wished to be left alone, and the month of leave given to all officers of the frontline Fallow accepted gratefully. He had had his fill of war for now.

    Now Fallow stayed at the library, taking up temporary residence there. His own home was empty and bare. All his comrades in his mounted legion were either killed or missing. Fallow doubted he would ever see them again, and staying there was much too painful for him. He often wondered what destiny his captain had faced, probably the point of a spear.

    The quiet ancient library that stood resolutely in the city was his only solace. Inside its secure walls and calm atmosphere, he could almost forget what he had witnessed at the frontline.

    Now he stood at the highest floor, facing directly the sculpture of the god who ruled the city. No longer did it seem to him to hold the answers to the universe nor the power to hold the enemy at bay. It was a simple statue, beautifully and skillfully crafted, but still a stone nonetheless. And in his restless wondering, Fallow wondered too, was the real Kami anything more than a symbol either?

    Fallow felt movements behind him and sure enough, he heard his old teacher speak to him. ¡°You have been spending much time up here lately, Fallow. Do you feel you will have your questions answered by him?¡±

    Fallow sighed and turned around, facing the old hooded man with bright golden eyes. ¡°I haven¡¯t spoken to him at all, actually, questions or otherwise.¡±

    Havign smiled back benignly, ¡°But you are looking for answers still.¡± He paused and the two looked at each other. Havign continued, his voice soft with concern, ¡°Talk to me, Fallow. You have not talked much since you came here a week ago, and you have not spoken at all about your recent experience on the frontline. This is not like you, where did the young inquisitive boy go that couldn¡¯t stop talking for a moment?¡±

    ¡°I am afraid that boy has grown up,¡± Fallow said bitterly. ¡°And now understands the world better.¡±

    ¡°Oooh,¡± Havign replied, feigning surprise. ¡°And what is this new truth you have uncovered?¡±

    Fallow scowled at Havign¡¯s response. But his face softened quickly and he said, ¡°I am sorry Havign. I am sorry. I do not know that I believe in Kami anymore, nor do I believe in his salvation. I can only have sadness now, sad at my realization and despair that I am no longer like everybody else.¡±

    Havign didn¡¯t respond immediately and looked at Fallow in pity. He turned and pulled up a chair and said, ¡°There are many things that can shake us from our faith, Fallow, words, experiences, and knowledge. These things can blind you; distract you from the truth in front of you. I see that you feel lost, let me be a guide for you in your troubled times! Kami has not abandoned you, and I will not either. Tell me, Fallow. What happened out there that troubles you so?¡±

    Fallow looked back, and pain was etched upon his face. After a moment he said softly, ¡°I believe that Kami has failed in his duties to protect this city and his people.¡± As if finally breaking a seal, after saying those words, Fallow felt bolder and angry and he straighten up. ¡°Kami is supposed to be the god of this city, the supporter of its people. He is supposed to deliver us from the evil one and bring peace to the city. Are we not the instruments of Kami, delivering his will throughout the land and slaying his foes?¡±

    Fallow stepped forward and clenched his fists. ¡°Then why, why were we beaten to badly? Why did we lose so many men? Even after all the effort we had put into the operation, all the men and energies and hope, we failed. The defensive mandate was a colossal failure! How many men had died for Kami¡¯s cause? I had already lost my faith that Kami cared about me personally, but now I doubt he has any strength left to care for his city. He did nothing while his men were butchered on the frontline!¡±

    Havign was pale and unsettled from Fallow¡¯s outburst. Still, when he spoke it was calm. ¡°We have lost battles before. Is it not recorded so in the histories? I do not have faith in Kami¡¯s will in the present; I have faith in in his will in the future. In this, Kami will stand victorious. This city will never fall and it stands as a testament to his great power. The salvation of Kami-sama is secure.¡±

    Fallow¡¯s eyes bored down into Havign and he spoke angrily, ¡°The salvation of Kami is fiction!¡±

    Havign¡¯s eyed widened in shock and he said quickly, ¡°Fallow!¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve seen it!¡± Fallow said, trying to keep his voice under control. ¡°I have seen the strength of Kami! His vessels had come out into the battlefield to fight, all three of them. They are the arms of Kami, right? Direct forces of his power? But when they confronted the power of the enemy, the enemy vessel, they were slain. All of them, by one man. If the vessels of Kami fail, what makes you so sure Kami will not fail as well?¡±

    Havign was visibly shaken, and he asked, his voice cracking, ¡°Vessels?¡± his hands shook as they gripped his chair.

    But Fallow continued relentlessly, ¡°Yes. Have you not heard? Just when we thought we had won the battle and that the enemy had retreated, a vessel had appeared. It was only a man it seemed, but it was filled with power. He alone had wiped out Central and all its fortifications and all its men. Where was Kami¡¯s protection then? It was late, and even when it did come, it failed. All three of kami¡¯s Vessels were slew by the enemy; I have seen their dead bodies.¡±

    Havign bent his head down and Fallow felt guilty, wondering if he had said too much. He turned around and faced the statue again, Kami looking down on them majestically. After a moment, Fallow continued, his voice low, ¡°I am only alive thanks to a certain man, a vessel, from another land, a servant of another god. He rose forth and fought with the foe on equal ground. It makes me wonder. What other lands lay out there? What other gods exist? Is Kami so different from others that he is invincible? I do not know, I do not know. So, I stand here, perplexed and full of doubt. And shaken.¡± He turned back and saw Havign still bent low, his hands to his head in some burden. Fallow cried out, ¡°It would have been better if I had remained ignorant! I should have never come here!¡±

    ¡°No, no.¡± came the soft smooth reply from Havign. Even from his hardened form, Havign still spoke clearly. ¡°As a holder of knowledge, I can never agree that ignorance is better and that knowledge should be shunned.¡± He suddenly straightened up and looked Fallow in the eyes. He cried out in turn, ¡°Knowledge and truth leads people to Kami-sama, not away. Fallow, Fallow, I am sorry for your loss, and what you have been through. I take all the blame on myself. You have grasped only small pictures, details here and there and it has confused you and hurt you. If you could only see the big picture, Fallow! Then you would understand what Kami has done for you. Do not forget, Fallow, who Kami is. He is god, the creator and sustainer of this land who cared more deeply for it and its inhabitants, more than you can imagine. You already owe everything to him; how could you leave him now?¡± Havign looked at Fallow in pity. ¡°You are welcome to stay here. Stay and learn! I hope that someday you will be shown the power and grace that lies in Kami. Even if you leave him, he will never leave you. Have faith, Fallow.¡±

    Fallow looked down, unable to meet Havign¡¯s eyes. ¡°Thank you,¡± he said softly. ¡°And I am sorry.¡±

    ¡°Do not say sorry to me,¡± Havign wisely countered. ¡°The only hurt here is in yourself.¡±

    ¡°I will stay here a little longer than,¡± Fallow said, smiling slightly. ¡°There is much reading I would like to get done before I go again. There is so much I need to know.¡±

    ¡°Oh?¡± Havign replied lightly getting up and moving to him. ¡°What kind of reading?¡± Fallow didn¡¯t respond, and Havign continued hastily, ¡°But of course, all the books are open to you.¡± He looked at Fallow sideways and asked, ¡°It doesn¡¯t have something to do with that object you brought with you, does it?¡±

    Fallow chuckled softly, ¡°Why, does that object bother you? It should, do you know what it is?¡±

    Havign shook his head and Fallow smiled devilishly, ¡°It¡¯s the divine weapon that one of Kami¡¯s Vessels carried. Gatal had asked me to look after it.¡±

    Havign froze and then asked, ¡°You brought a divine weapon here?¡±

    Fallow smiled and Havign shock and dismay, ¡°Why, nobody would look for the halberd here!¡±

 Chapter 36

    It was a hot morning the next day, even under the shadow if the mighty Wall. Kami¡¯s lantern rose in the north of the city and as such, the light did not shine down upon the land below the wall until midday. But that was just fine for Covall, in fact, it was preferred.

    Covall detested this place, the whole territory that Kami had created. Every hill, every valley, and forest was a detestable projection of the god¡¯s own values. Even the great light in the sky that rose and shown only on the city and the immediate land surrounding it was detestable. It was pure work of vanity.

    Covall would be glad when he could finally rid himself of this place and return to his home land or even other, more interesting places where he could use his strength. He had grown weary of this city.

    Now he stood at the base of wall, inspecting it. The wall wasn¡¯t just made of stone, it seemed, but looked to have been made out of the very bones of the earth. It was smooth and cool to his touch and not so much as a seam could be deciphered. And when he inspected the roots and dug down, all he could find was a continuation of the wall, as if it was equally below the earth as it was above it.

    He grunted, and stood again, facing the wall directly. For all his detestable feelings towards this land, this wall had once been invincible. And even now, at the twilight of the city¡¯s life, it was an impressive and formidable thing. Coval grunted to himself, ¡°So it will simply have to be brute strength huh? Not my most favorite thing to do.¡±

    He looked up and tried to see the top of the wall, but even his eyes could penetrate its heights. Irritated, he shouted up, although he knew nobody would hear him, ¡°Oi! Kami! I¡¯m here to break your wall! You have done well these last 500 years, but now that the encirclement is complete again, it¡¯s over!¡±

    He stared up expectantly, but no answering call was made to him. Annoyed, he unsheathed his sword and banged the hilt on the wall, shouting again, ¡°Oi! Can you hear me? I said I¡¯m going to tear down this wall!¡± He continued to bang his hilt on the wall a few more times, but all he got in response was the dull clanging as the wall boomed in resonance with his sword.

    ¡°OI!¡± he screamed bringing his sword around and slashing at it with a blast. The wall exploded in a shower of dust and smoke and Covall coughed as some of the impact was rebounded back at him. When he looked again, he saw that the wall was undamaged, only a small burn mark remained as testament to his attack.

    He glared up at the wall, swinging his sword idly. He then said venomously, ¡°I¡¯m going to destroy this and them come inside there and cut the lot of you up. And then I am going to find that runt of a vessel that fought me earlier.¡± He rubbed his stomach where he had been pierced ear. ¡°I will drag him out of the city by his entrails and lop off his head for a trophy.¡± He looked up at the wall again, unperturbed out his out bursts. Behind him, he heard a young officer run up to him. He turned around to see him.

    The man wore long grey robes with a black belt and a long curved sword at his side. His face was hidden from him by a thick veil and his head had some sort of cap on it. Covall knew that the men feared him and lately, they seemed to believe that if Covall saw their faces they would be cursed, so they all wore veils when they were around him. The curse was probably true, too. Covall despised the humans.

    ¡°The men are all set, Lord Covall.¡± The officer panted slightly, trying to keep his form. Covall looked back and saw them, the company of men set out to invade the city, the support troops, the war machines, the reserves. It was a whole army, really, right at the foot of the city. The foolish humans inside thought they were safe and didn¡¯t even bother to put out an appropriate lookout.

    Covall wondered if the men behind him knew that most, if not all of them, would perish today.

    Covall nodded turned back to the wall, saying, ¡°Your men are too close, Captain. When I bring this wall down, the pieces are going to crush a lot of them.¡±

    The captain blanched, and took a few stumbling steps backwards. ¡°I¡¯ll have them moved further away, immediately, sir.¡± He said shakily.

    ¡°Nope, I¡¯m not waiting,¡± Covall responded, flashing a grin at the captain. Without another word the officer turned and fled, tripping and falling and then struggling to get away. Coval laughed at how frantic he was.

    ¡°Here it goes¡­¡± Covall said, focusing on the wall. He brought his sword out in front of him and held it firmly with both hands. Although there was no light from the lantern in that area, the sword glittered of its own accord. Covall stood silently, not moving, gathering his strength to himself. Soon, the air around him was shimmering as though a great heat was radiating from him. The air sparked and cracked.

    Suddenly, with a yell, he thrust his sword forward, straight into the side of the wall. It sunk in deeply, moving in all the way to the black hilt and guard. Beside that though, nothing happened to the wall and the only response was a soft hissing of steam issuing from the sword and rising to dissipate above.

    Covall was undismayed though and stepped back brightly, a large grin on his face. From behind him, he heard the sounds of men, moving away from him as fast as possible, but he ignored them.

    Next, he threw his hands in the air above him, interlocking his fingers and he said with intensity, ¡°Piercing strike!¡± He brought his right hand down swiftly, unleashing his spell. A thunderous sound riveted throughout the area and at first nothing happened. Covall remained motionless, though and then, slowly, a crack appeared right at the sword. It grew and travelled up, increasing at an exponential rate. Then in one loud crack, the slit ran all the way up to the top. The sound it made was horrendous, as if the very walls were crying out in anguish. The soldiers in the army behind Covall flinched and cowered at the sound and Covall stayed still, staring up at his handiwork. He was panting.

    ¡°That¡¯s got to get somebody¡¯s attention!¡± Covall shouted with excitement. After a moment, he leapt up, hundreds of feet in the air and attaching himself to the wall by holding on the crack he had created. Once secured, he jammed his hands in the wall and uttered another spell, placing the enchantment within the small crack. Then he did it three more times,jumping up and reaching halfway up the wall before falling back to the land below. The officers cried out, seeing him fall from that height and land spectacularly like a meteor. The crash blew up the dirt and the dust, but when Covall emerged from it, they saw only a vessel singularly pleased with himself and almost unable to contain his excitement.

    ¡°Alright!¡± he shouted, bounding up to sword and retching it out, pulling loose some debris as well, ¡°one more!¡±

    The men cowered back, watching their vessel stab his sword into another section of the wall a hundred paces to the left of his original strike and perform the same ritual, laughing madly all the while. With the final touches were being completed, the captain turned to his close men and said bravely, ¡°to the fight we go!¡± he then ignited the enchantments he placed into the cracks of the wall all at once.

    A second later the entire section of the wall Covall had outlined exploded in a thunderous gale that swept the men off their feet and rocketing pieces of the wall miles in every direction. It was a blast that tore the wall apart, from top to bottom, ripping open the prize inside and devastating the city and land around it. Rubble and debris rained down upon them for several minutes, each rock a boulder of death, wiping out the very land and people that stood under it and creating continued crashes and booms that shook the land and the hearts of both sides.

    The captain of the advance unit had been crushed by the explosion.

    It took several minutes for the smoke and vapor to disappear and when it did, Covall stood atop his wreckage triumphantly, ready to strike forward as soon as it was clear.

    ¡°Kami¡¯s last vessel!¡± he shouted with all the force he had. ¡°I¡¯m coming for you!¡±

    <hr>

    Fallow awoke with a startle from his sleep. Great blasting sounds had shaken him and he was immediately thrown back onto the Frontline, witnessing the battle between the gods and shrinking in fear from their absolute power. But as he lay on his bed, his panic faded as he realized that he was in the city, inside Central Library, safe and secure in this stronghold. The smooth sheets he had over him were comfortable and cool on a day that was promising to be another scorcher. He had stayed awake late the last night, scouring the library until his sleepiness came over him again. He let it take him into its welcoming embrace.

    The next explosion shook the building itself and Ashton got up quickly with a cry, realizing that blasts were not from his dream. He hurried out his door, but when a third explosion threw him to his feet, he knew that the worst had come upon them.

    By the time the alarm had sounded throughout the city, Fallow was dressed in his armor and exiting his room and into the main library. Jacobin met him halfway through, flustered and afraid, his robes in shambles around him.

    ¡°What¡¯s happening?!¡± Fallow shouted, strapping his sword to his side.

    ¡°We¡¯re under attack! Inside the city!¡± Jacobin squawked.

    ¡°How did they get in?!¡± Fallow snarled, trying to hide the fear inside of him.

    ¡°Hold on!¡± Jacobin, said, running alongside him. His panic was evident. ¡°They are trying to take out the network; it¡¯s getting difficult to communicate.¡±

    ¡°Curse them! They did the same thing while we are on the frontline! How can they disrupt the network, inside the city?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve got it!¡± Jacobin responded. ¡°A section of the southern wall has been taken out, the enemy is advancing quickly. Fallow!¡± Jacobin shouted, his eyes wide in terror. ¡°That section of the city is all residential, there¡¯s no place to mount an effective resistance. They are already past The Stars Ladder and securing holdings there!¡±

    Fallow cursed darkly and shouted, ¡°HOW DID THEY BREAK THE WALL? ISN¡¯T IT SUPPOSED TO BE INVINCIBLE?¡± Jacobin on stared blankly back at him. Fallow swore again, entering the lobby of the library.

    Havign appeared, coming down the staircase opposite. He too, was frightened, but he held his composure better than Jacobin could.

    ¡°Fallow!¡± Havign called out. ¡°Where are you going?¡±

    Fallow turned around sharply and faced the priest, shouting ¡°Where do you think I am going? The city is under attack!¡±

    Havign said something, but Fallow couldn¡¯t hear it over the sound of the huge doors of the building crashing open as if a mighty ram and had burst through. The morning light came in, blinding Fallow and when he looked to see who came in, he saw one lone figure.

    ¡°Drake!¡± Fallow shouted, shocked. The other priests fell slightly back, unsure who this man was.

    Drake located him and strode forward. He was clad in his armor too, ready for battle. His eyes were alert and scared and he said to Fallow, ¡°The vessel has come! He¡¯s going to destroy the city!¡±

    The priests appeared too surprised and bewildered by the sudden appearance of Drake, frozen at their spots but Drake continued, ignoring them, ¡°Ashton told me you had my weapon.¡±

    Fallow wasn¡¯t doing much better than the priests were. ¡°Drake,¡± he sputtered, ¡°Wa-.¡± he looked at Drake, a being who now seemed to exude strength and power. ¡°Can you use it?¡±

    ¡°Yes!¡± Drake exclaimed, impatient. ¡°It''s a divine weapon, it doesn¡¯t matter if i can control my power well or not, i just need to infuse it and swing it around! Where is the Shottler!¡±The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.

    Fallow could only pause and cry back, ¡°The Shottler?¡± unable to fathom what Drake was saying.

    ¡°The Shottler!¡± Drake said, slightly panicked. ¡°That¡¯s its name! I didn¡¯t name it! Just bring it to me already; I¡¯ll need it to fight the vessel! He¡¯s going to come directly for me, you know??¡±

    ¡°its- its in the deeps, in the vaults below!¡± Fallow said back. Drake turned and looked at Jacobin.

    Jacobin froze, and then said quickly, ¡°I¡¯ll get it.¡± In a flash he was gone.

    After Jacobin disappeared, Havign spoke up, ¡°Who are you? And what do you need with the divine weapon? What is happening?¡±

    Drake strode forward and bore down on the priest maliciously, ¡°I¡¯ll tell you what is happening! Your perfect all-knowing god is failing! With his vessels and the Frontline gone now there was nothing left between the enemy and the city except for the walls which are clearly failing too! Now the vessel has entered the City, leading his army and destroying whatever they touch. Where is your god now, now that the enemy in in your city and death is upon your doorstep?¡±

    Havign stood quietly, absorbing Drake words withstanding his pressure. He replied back, somehow regaining his calm, ¡°So you are the foreign vessel that Fallow had mentioned.¡± Then he continued, his voice growing cold, ¡°Who are you to question the power and might of Kami-sama? Who are you to question his ways, to insult and bear down upon him? Kami has raised this city and this land from nothing, he will not abandon us, and he is ever faithful!¡±

    Drake stared back, his eyes blank and chilling. He responded, his voice a freezing monotone, ¡°You misunderstand. I am not saying that you god is leaving you to rot. I am saying he doesn¡¯t have the ability to save you, even if he wanted to. Old priest, your god is all but dead.¡±

    Havign burst in fury, in a way Fallow had never seen. Gone was the kind and gentle old man who had tutored him so patiently all these years. His body burst into flames and he summoned his sorcery around him, creating the image of fiery demon, ready to devour its prey. Without hesitation, he sent it forth upon Drake, shouting, ¡°You dare blaspheme Kami-sama in this sacred hall?¡±

    The attack ended, soon after it began, Havign visibly exhausted and shrunken again. Fallow had retreated quickly and now stared at the old man in disbelief. Where Drake was standing, only a smoldering cloud of ash and smoke could be seen.

    But when the smoke wafted away, Drake stood still, untouched and astonished. He patted himself down as if looking for injuries before grabbing Havign he pushing him against the wall, saying, ¡°What the Hell is your deal, old man? Did you just try to kill me?¡±

    After a moment, he let go of Havign and stood in the hallway, inspecting himself again, surprised he hadn¡¯t taken any damage. Havign was panting with exertion and looked disheveled and small. Now that silence had reached the room, the sounds of battle could be heard. Only the low booms and crashes made their way the library, but even to Fallow, the sounds dismayed and frightened him.

    Havign spoke again, ¡°What will you do, once you have your hands on Kami-sama¡¯s divine weapon?¡±

    Drake glared at Havign and replied, ¡°The enemy Vessel is currently doing as much destruction as he can, but I know he is actually looking for me. He won¡¯t let me go, not when he knows I am in the city. I¡¯ll need the weapon if i am going to stand a chance.¡±

    Fallow broke in with his own thoughts, ¡°So, you¡¯ve not become a full vessel yet?¡±

    Drake turned to look at him and responded, ¡°No, I refuse to let him control me again.¡±

    Havign snorted contemptuously. ¡°A vessel that does not even follow its own god? It¡¯s no wonder you remain so ignorant and lost.¡±

    Drake growled back. ¡°I¡¯m going to use it to destroy your enemy and save you! I would not be so derogatory if I were you.¡±

    Havign shot back, ¡°Salvation comes from Kami-sama, not from the hands of men.¡±

    Suddenly, Jacobin appeared again carrying the long slender object Fallow had brought. It was wrapped heavily and without waiting, Drake strode forward and seized it. He inspected it a moment, seemingly at a lost, before holding it away from him and shutting his eyes. Suddenly, the halberd blazed to life, dissolving the cloth wrappings around it and showing forth dark blue shimmers and flashes of light. The priests flinched terribly and Drake said with obvious relief, ¡°glad that worked!¡± He turned and ran out the door, carrying the weapon at his side.

    Fallow started and pursued him out the doors. ¡°Drake, Drake!¡± he called. Out on the steps outside, he caught up with him. Loud explosion, closer and louder than any prior exploded again and Fallow thought he could see the flashes of light and the explosion of debris from even where they were, in the middle of the city. Drake had paused unexpectedly, and started looking around, his eyes finally resting on something behind them and out of sight. ¡°What is it?¡± Fallow asked, his eyes following Drake¡¯s stare.

    ¡°Something is coming.¡± Drake said bewildered. His face creased in worry. Fallow only had a second to wonder what it could be.

    Suddenly a terrible sound arose from that direction, at first low and disorienting but soon reaching volumes of maddening power. It was a shriek, a cry of savagery of a being that had lost all control and let loose his rage in animalistic fury. The sound continued and grew more terrible until it was all Fallow could do but to fall on the ground trying vainly to cover his ears and pray for its ending.

    But the sound did not end, but rose higher and higher, piercing through the city and the souls of its people. Even Drake had fallen to his knees from power of the cry. The stones around them and the throughout the city shattered at the sound, and buildings crashed and toppled into ruin. The strong towers and strongholds in the city shook in terror and the great statue of Kami in Central Library fell and crashed down upon its walls, bursting through and breaking upon the hard floor. The sound itself wreaked devastation upon the city and also the hearts of all men.

    When the sound ended, Fallow stayed on his hands and knees panting and shaking in horror. He then screamed sitting up and crying out the sky, letting out a cry of pain and anguish. But even after that, he could not stall the shaking of his limbs nor calm the terror in his heart.

    Drake had recovered more quickly, but he too was shaken and frightened from the shriek. Listening to the city, everything had grown quiet; the noise of the battle had completely disappeared. It was as if the city held its breath waiting for what was going to happen next. It wasn¡¯t disappointed.

    Slowly, the Great Lantern in the sky dimmed and then faded away completely, leaving the city awash in darkness. Small cries were heard throughout the city, but they soon stopped as a new light had started to gather and shape.

    Far above the city a different light was taking shape, slowly materializing out of nothing and growing in shape and intensity. Unlike the great lantern of Kami that was yellow, this light was pure gold and didn¡¯t bring the heat of the lantern. The light grew until it was many times brighter than the Great Lantern. And once it reached its pinnacle, it spread out, added mass and substance to it. And slowly, Drake could make out the shape it was.

    Drake gaped in fear and wonder and he called out softly, ¡°Kami¡­¡±

    <hr>

    Covall had taken the hit from the maniacal shriek too and it took a few moments to recover from the shock and power of it. But when he looked up and saw the golden light forming above them he started laughing hysterically.

    ¡°You¡¯ve come out!¡± Covall shouted, gasping and wheezing. ¡°Come out, Come out and play, Kami! Did it anger you to see your city get destroyed and your people killed? But you are early; I haven¡¯t yet killed your last vessel yet. It is too early for you to come.¡± He continued laughing, getting up on his feet again. ¡°Come, Kami, this will be your end now! My Master has been waiting for you!¡±

    The light materialized into a god. It was Kami, a being clothed in light, power, and majesty as if all the authority in the universe was behind it. The god stretched from one end of the city to the other, tall and inconceivably powerful, encompassing the city as though it was its own body. The head stared forward, its unseeing eyes perceiving even the deepest and darkest mysteries of the cosmos. But then the sight shifted and looked down upon Covall alone. Kami¡¯s enlightened face twisted horribly into a face of rage; it bore down upon him with all the hate of god.

    Covall looked up at Kami, for a second forgetting his laughter. ¡°Oh!¡± he said in suddenly realization. Faster than a blink of an eye Covall was gone. The next second, the entire area disappeared in blinding flash of white light, as Kami blasted the spot Covall had just vacated.

    Covall was making a beeline for the exit as fast he could go and his laughter had returned to him on the way. Passing by his soldiers he yelled back at them, ¡°Run! Run! Run away, you little squirts, or you¡¯ll be killed! Kami has come and he doesn¡¯t like you!¡±

    Kami rose again in wrath, stepping forward and proceeded to wipe out the enemy that dared to step foot onto his domain.

    <hr>

    Fallow couldn¡¯t take his eyes off Kami. The majesty and power the figure exuded transfixed him to his spot. Kami seemed to be looking at him and he felt bare and naked before the god, and supremely unworthy to exist. He wanted to shut his eyes and hide his face from the sight, but he couldn¡¯t move away or turn. The Priests had all come out of the library and upon seeing their god, they had fallen prostrate before him and cried out in praise and fear. ¡°Kami-sama! Kami-sama has come to save us!¡±

    All across the city Fallow heard similar cries arise.

    Drake alone seemed to be able to remain on his feet, but he, too, stared agape, at god coming forth. After a moment he said, ¡°What¡¯s wrong with him? Why does he look so frail and worn?¡±

    Fallow looked again and saw Kami. He was indeed frail, withered even. Remembering the solemn statue in the library, Fallow saw that it was hardly the same god at all. The form in the library was tall and beautiful. The god above the city now, behind all the glory and majesty, was a shriveled corpse and living mummy, a mere shadow of his old prominence.

    ¡°What does it mean?¡± Fallow shouted, striving to be heard over the wind and the voices of the city.

    Drake didn¡¯t respond, but an answer was provided for him immediately. Far in the south, beyond the walls and the trees and the lands and even the territory, a countering light was coming forth as well. Its light was purple and his rays were fear and Fallow quivered at the sight of it. Suddenly, the light grew spectacularly, materialized into another god of opposing power. It strode forth, travelling over miles of forestry and mountains in a single step. It was dressed in robes of white and purple, intricately designed in a way that captured the eyes. From its head was long black hair that flowed down to his waist, bound around by golden hair locks and other ornaments. Upon his head was a crown of jewels, as if an ocean lay above him. His face was pale, still, and stern and moved not a muscle as it approached boldly to Kami as he stood above his city, wrapped in robes of brown and gold.

    Upon seeing the approaching figure, Kami screamed again, his voice reaching emotions beyond fury, beyond frustration, and beyond despair. It was only the cry of the dead, delivering its voice of hate and curses of damnation.

    When the enemy god, Desue, reached the city, the whole side of it exploded, whether from Kami¡¯s attack or the enemy¡¯s, Fallow could not tell. All he knew was that anything in the area had been annihilated from the land.

    Despair washed over Fallow and he fell to his knees, saying over and over again, ¡°its over, its over, its over¡­¡±

    A soft warm hand reached out on his shoulder. When he turned and looked, he saw the warm smiling face of Havign. Havign spoke softly, ¡°What is it you are afraid of, Fallow? Why do you despair so, saying to yourself that it is over? It has only begun! Kami-sama has stridden forth to victory! Even now he is fighting with the enemy. This is the time to rejoice, not to fall away! The evil in this world gets destroyed here!¡±

    Fallow stared numbly back at Havign, unable to comprehend his confidence. But looking around, he saw that Havign was not alone, all the priests were similar, some still bowing down in worship, others staring up at Kami with eyes overcome with tears of joy. There was no hint of fear or doubt in any of them.

    Drake also stared in disbelief at Havign. Suddenly, Gatal materialized before them and he spoke quickly, his voice shaking, ¡°This city is doomed! Any second now their clashes could wipe us out. But with the barrier around the city down now, Drake, you and I can create a portal and escape. We all can escape!¡±

    ¡°Great!¡± Drake replied with visible relief. He turned quickly to Fallow. ¡°let''s go, Fallow!¡±

    ¡°Do not listen to him,¡± Havign pleaded to Fallow. ¡°Please, have faith in your god!¡±

    Fallow looked up at the battle again. Kami and Desue were so high up; it seemed to be in another world. All sounds seemed to disappear, but destruction continued to break the city to pieces. Even as he looked, the section of the wall he had been posted on only months ago was blasted away and gone, along with the thousands of men who occupied it.

    Fallow responded slowly, ¡°Kami is not my god, remember? I was brought here against my will and enslaved to Kami¡¯s teachings. Don¡¯t I have a god of my own, in my own land to follow?¡±

    ¡°Your life has been taken in by Kami-sama when you were lost!¡± Havign spoke quickly, ¡°Kami-sama has raised you, will you turn your back on him, even at his moment of glory?¡±

    Fallow turned and looked Havign in the eye. He said sorrowfully, ¡°I am sorry, teacher.¡± Fallow turned to Drake and said, ¡°Drake. I want to see my homeland again, before I die.¡±

    ¡°Fallow, please!¡± Havign begged.

    Gatal strode between them and pointed towards the sky. ¡°Do you see that? Do you see what we are seeing? It is the last desperate attempts of Kami, nothing more! 500 years of blockade had withered him down and drained his power; he is no longer the god you knew him as! It¡¯s over! Come with me and escape destruction here! It¡¯s the only way!¡±

    Havign turned and spat at Gatal. Drake glared Havign in contempt and Havign then immediately vanished. Drake turned to the other Priests who had been watching the exchange warily and he shouted at them, ¡°Does anybody else want to come? The city will be destroyed!¡± Nobody moved and Drake swore loudly. ¡°Idiotic Priests!¡±

    Gatal turned to Drake and Fallow and said, ¡°I¡¯ll take you to my residence, Ashton should already be there. Do you have everything you need?¡±

    Fallow looked around hopelessly and answered slowly, ¡°Yes¡­¡±

    ¡°Good.¡± Gatal responded, but a second later, Havign appeared again.

    ¡°YOU!¡± Drake shouted, his eyes narrowing.

    Havign pointedly ignored him, but thrust a book into Fallow hands and he said to him, ¡°If you must go, then you must go. I will grieve your loss when you are gone and I pray you will find your way back to us in the end. Please take this book with you; it is all that I can give you now.¡±

    Before Fallow could reply, Havign disappeared again. Fallow tried to choke out a response, but Drake grabbed him tightly and Gatal took them both away.

 Chapter 37-The Final Chapter

    Ashton watched the city in a mixture of fascination and horror. From his location in Gatal¡¯s residence, he had an unreserved view at the events that occurred below and far away. Along with him was Soul and the room was quiet despite its occupants. Since the mighty shriek that had taken the city Soul had stopped his frenzied rush and strayed to the large window to Ashton¡¯s left.

    The part of the city that Gatal¡¯s place was in had been left relatively intact, but Ashton knew that that would not last for much longer. Every clash the two gods made was like watching a painting being created in reverse. With every brush stroke, the colors of the canvas receded to nothingness. For the most part, Ashton felt like he was simply waiting for his death.

    The greatest horror that Ashton faced was not the destruction that the gods were creating, but the city¡¯s reaction to it. The city was silent as his room was. There was no fear, no anger, and no pain among the citizens and soldiers of The Endless City and the lack of noise made the whole experience seem surreal. The whole city waited with supreme confidence even as the physical structures caved in around them, they died without compliant.

    Suddenly, Drake, and Gatal appeared inside the room and Drake carried the divine weapon he had gone looking for, glowing dimly. Along with him was the lieutenant that had safeguarded it. Upon his entrance, Fallow stumbled slightly, disoriented from the movement, but he quickly stabilized.

    Without saying anything, Gatal split off, heading directly toward Soul, who looked back calmly at Gatal¡¯s agitated approach. Now with Soul, the two talked quietly together, even as the enemy rose and confronted Kami at the city¡¯s end.

    Drake spoke immediately, his voice in a panic and his face pale with fright, ¡°We need to get out of here! The city¡¯s going to be destroyed!¡± he pushed Fallow forward to Ashton. ¡°I¡¯m going to go get the others, I¡¯ll be right back!¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡± Ashton cired. ¡°When did you learn to do spatial movements?¡±

    Drake answered back wildly, ¡°Gatal just showed me, I think I got the hang of it.¡± In another instant, he was gone.

    Ashton stepped forward and helped support Fallow who had stumbled and fallen from Drake¡¯s forcefulness. Ashton said to him, offering a helping hand, ¡°It¡¯s good to see you again, Lieutenant.¡±

    ¡°Nothing like meeting at the end of the world,¡± Fallow replied shakily. ¡°Who is it that Drake is getting?¡±

    ¡°Probably the men we had trained and served with.¡± Ashton replied with worry. ¡°I do not think they will come too willingly though.¡±

    Fallow didn¡¯t respond, but walked slowly to the window and looked out. A blinding flash of light made him throw his hands up and step back quickly, but a moment later he was back at the window, gazing out again. A deep fresh scar was the visible now. Fallow shook his head in disbelief.

    Ashton spoke next to him, ¡°It¡¯s like the land is erupting.¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡±

    Ashton shrugged, ¡°In my land, sometimes the earth itself heaves up fire from below. It is a terrible thing.¡±

    Another blast wrecked the city and the whole palace shook dangerously. Dust and rubble fell from the ceiling.

    Suddenly, the voice of Soul rose loudly, interrupting whatever Gatal was saying to him, ¡°I will not move from here Gatal! Stop trying to tempt me away!¡±

    ¡°Soul!¡± Gatal persisted, his voice frantic. ¡°The roof is coming down around us!¡±

    Soul sighed, and seated himself on a nearby chair. It was covered in soot and dust, but Soul sat upon it at if it was a throne. Fallow and Ashton turned to watch their exchange.

    ¡°Do you remember, when I first met you, what I had said to you?¡± Soul started, looking at Gatal with concern.

    ¡°Like it had only happened yesterday.¡± Gatal said breathlessly.

    ¡°You were lost and alone, traveling the wilderness without any guide or purpose. When I found you, you were ready to give up and die, swallowed up by your own despair.¡±

    Gatal nodded, his face full of pain, ¡°You took me in.¡±

    ¡°When I confronted you, you attacked my army. Even at that point your powers were formidable. It took the whole squad of priests with me to subdue you, the leader wanted to kill you outright as an enemy.¡± Soul reached up and poked Gatal. ¡°But I saw something else in you, I saw in the ability to love and serve. You are right, I took you in, in hopes that Kami could save you. And hasn¡¯t he? Hasn¡¯t Kami given you new life and new purpose? You have served him well and faithfully over these long years and have supported his cause and he in turn has supported you. Now why? Why now do you choose to leave him after everything he has done for you?¡± Soul chuckled softly. ¡°And why now, now that his time of victory is at hand?¡±

    Gatal looked back at Soul with tearful eyes. He responded with deep emotion, ¡°It wasn¡¯t Kami that had given me new purpose. It wasn¡¯t Kami who I had chosen to follow. When I met you, I saw something completely different, I saw a man, and man of dignity, intelligence, grace, and nobility beyond that of the human race. You misunderstood me, Commander. I had just come from a land whose god had been slain and killed by the very god that is attacking Kami now! What faith I had in the strength of gods of gone from me. It is not Kami who gave me new life, it was you! I had chosen to follow you because I believed that you had a great destiny to fulfill in the universe. That is why I can¡¯t have you die meaninglessly here!¡±

    Soul responded, his voice hard and cold, ¡°Then you have chosen poorly, Gatal. I am only mortal while Kami is eternal. What sense is there putting faith in the flesh?¡±

    Gatal turned away, overcome with emotion. Fallow and Ashton watched on, as if witnessing the harsh separation of lovers. Soul turned and looked out the window again towards his god. His face was alight with passion.

    Suddenly Drake appeared again, standing in the middle of the room, gripping his weapon tightly in one hand. His eyes were wild and he seemed unsteady.

    ¡°Drake!¡± Ashton started, ¡°What happened? Where are the others? Are they already¡­¡± he didn¡¯t finish his sentence.

    Drake turned and looked at him, his face contorted into pain and anguish, ¡°No, no! They¡¯ve decided to stay. They refused to come with me!¡±

    ¡°What do you mean?¡± Ashton cried. ¡°Just take them anyway forcibly if you have to!¡± Soul turned and looked at them, his eyes passively taking them in.

    But Drake was faltering, unable to think or talk straight. He said to them, ¡°They didn¡¯t believe me! They thought I was dead, the yelled and cursed at me, driving me away! I wanted to take them, but they stood up to me calling me unholy names. They thought I was a devil, tempting them away from their salvation and appearing in the likeness of their friend. They didn¡¯t believe me! I told them the city was collapsing; I told them that they would all die!¡± Drake fought back sobs. ¡°They wouldn¡¯t come!¡±If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.

    ¡°I understand their confusion.¡± Soul broke in calmly from his seat. Everybody turned to look at him. ¡°They all saw you die already and they only knew you as a human. But don¡¯t be so worried,¡± he added, with a small smile. ¡°They will not perish. For today god will destroy evil and peace will come to The Endless City once again. Your friends have fulfilled their purpose and will live to see Kami¡¯s glorious triumph!¡±

    Hard faced, Drake strode forward violently, standing before Soul who hadn¡¯t moved an inch from the abrupt confrontation. Standing before him, Drake glared down at Soul. Without a word, he looked up suddenly and stretched out his hand towards the wall. In an instant the wall and ceiling exploded and burst away from them in a loud crash, disintegrating into dust and tearing open the room and revealing the whole city stretched endlessly away from them and the colossal gods towering over the people. As if Drake had taken away the sound suppressors, the shrieks, roars, and tectonic crashes of the battle taking place filled what was left of the room. Fallow and Ashton fell back onto the ground, covering themselves and fastening themselves to the floor lest the get sucked out by the gale that now flowed through the building. Soul and Drake didn¡¯t move.

    Drake shouted over the noise of battle, pointing outwards at the now entirely visible ruins of The Golden City. ¡°LOOK! LOOK!¡± he shouted, ¡°Can¡¯t you see? The walls have come down! This place will be your tomb, it¡¯s over for the city!¡±

    ¡°Yes!¡± Soul shouted back, getting up and see the new view for himself, ¡°Yes, yes! The walls must come down and the secure places tossed into ruin! It will be rebuilt and Kami¡¯s people will be resurrected; the new city will be greater than ever before. No longer will we need to worry about fear and danger and war! It is the end of the old age; Kami will restore all that is good!¡±

    ¡°You!¡± Drake screamed in frustration. ¡°You and all your experience, your gifts of intelligence and insight, do you see Kami winning this fight? You know the histories, has there ever been a time when Kami was not pressed upon every side, his enemies circling him bent on destroying him! Kami was killed the moment his city was surrounded 500 years ago! Can¡¯t you see it?¡±

    Soul looked at Drake, and put his hand upon his shoulder. His eyes shown in pity and he said, ¡°Yes, I can see all that you see, Lord Vessel. Indeed, your eyes are probably keener than mine.¡± A great crash happened quiet near and below them and giant shard of crystal ice grew astoundingly from far below them, reaching up toward their room and bringing with it a rush of cold air. Soul ignored it and continued. ¡°But what differs is our understanding of the reality of the world. You see the world only through what your senses can perceive, relying upon your mortal and fallible reasoning. I defer to a much greater and higher understanding, one that surpasses the limits of even a vessel! You plead to my experience and competency in war, but I tell you the truth that I had only ever relied upon the strength of Kami in all my battles. What could I ever accomplish alone if not for the will of Kami-sama? Even now I put my faith in Kami-sama, for what else can mortal man do?¡±

    ¡°We can run, and we can fight for ourselves!¡± Drake cried desperately. ¡°Gods have ever brought misfortune and tyranny to humans. We are crushed beneath their shadows; we are pawns in their games! They do not care for you, or for anybody, but only to what matters to them!¡±

    ¡°You are wrong.¡± Soul replied shaking his head. ¡°You are so wrong! Kami has given his all to us! Just look at what he gives us even daily! Food and water! Light in the sky and protection from the enemy! Kami-sama cares deeply for his city; didn¡¯t you hear his cry earlier? It was his rage that his precious city was wounded. There is not a single fallen man that he does not know of!¡±

    Another terrible shriek filled the air, rendering asunder walls and buildings from its power. Drake was thrown to his feet at the sound again, unable to withstand the assault. When he looked up, the whole western side of the city had vanished, leaving only open air and unfathomable depths. Drake stared at it in horror.

    ¡°Gatal! Drake!¡± Ashton shouted, holding tight to a broken pillar base, ¡°We need to leave now!¡±

    ¡°Right,¡± Drake said, trying to bring himself to his senses.

    Gatal moved forward, reaching out his hand and grabbing Drake. Gatal shouted, ¡°I¡¯ll make the spell for the Portal, you will provide the power!¡± Drake nodded, taking his halberd and shrinking it down to only feet in length. He stowed it upon his back, and let Gatal grab his hands, bringing both sets of hands forward.

    Drake suddenly felt drained and a second later, a black spot in the space formed, growing slightly, and then expanding suddenly into size, being about Drake¡¯s height in diameter. Ashton recalled the portal that had brought him to The Endless City, how huge and utterly terrifying it was. This one too, bore the same characteristics as the prior one. Inside of it was pitch black and it seemed to suck in the light and sounds around it like and endless consuming maw. Strangely, Ashton did not feel apprehension towards it, only relief.

    ¡°Hold it steady!¡± Gatal commanded. Drake¡¯s eyes widened in fear as Gatal left him alone, holding the portal in place. Gatal bounded back to Souls side, speaking with him again.

    The sounds of the battle grew louder around them, become increasingly chaotic and destructive. Drake shouted toward Ashton and Fallow. ¡°We gotta go now! Quickly, you two!¡±

    ¡°Where does it go?¡± Ashton asked mildly.

    Drake shook his head, his eyes wide, ¡°I assume the wilderness, hell if I know. Ask Gatal! At the point, any place is better than here!¡±

    Fallow suddenly looked like he was having second thoughts and stepped back from the portal looking intensely frightened. Ashton grabbed him and pulled him forward to the portal saying, ¡°No turning back now!¡± Fallow offered little resistance.

    The floor had started shaking and continued to tremble as if it was an earthquake that was unrelenting. At the edge of the portal Ashton paused a second and shouted at Drake, ¡°You must come quickly too!¡± Drake nodded and without hesitation Ashton plowed through, taking Fallow with him who cried out slightly and then was gone. Only Soul, Drake, and Gatal were left.

    Drake yelled out one last time, ¡°Will you not come, Commander?¡±

    Soul replied back simply, a soft knowing smile on his face, ¡°Kami-sama will win and his salvation will arrive. Have some faith, Drake.¡±

    Drake gawked at the man for the last time. Even among this city that was literally crumbling around him, even as Kami fought fiercely above him, laying waste to the people he had sought to protect, Soul still professed his undying faith in his god. Such confidence Soul exuded, that a small part of him had to wonder if the man was right, that even after all that was happening there was to be a good and wholesome ending for the city. The last section of the wall that they could see was washed away from them, but a trace of longing fluttered inside of Drake. The next moment, he squashed it forcefully.

    Soul turned to Gatal and said, ¡°You should go, friend. If you are staying here only for my sake, I do not want it. Go with these young men, and maybe, together, you will find what you are looking for. Or stay with me, and witness the power of Kami-sama.¡±

    Gatal stood frozen, his eyes brimming with tears. Drake shouted, ¡°Come on old man! Leave him here to die, if he wants it so bad! There no reason anymore for you to stay!¡±

    But Gatal refused to budge, or even respond. Off in the distance, Drake saw Central Library get blown away, its occupants disappearing silently. ¡°Damn it!¡± Drake screamed, ¡°Get over here!¡± Drake reached out and grabbed the old priest, but the man mutely resisted against him with his magic, not even turning to look back at Drake.

    Furious, Drake shouted, ¡°Stay here and die then, all you fools!¡±

    ¡°Take care of yourself, foreign vessel,¡± Soul said seriously to Drake. ¡°This city was never meant to house you anyway. You should go find your own god. I''m sure you''ll come to find your purpose with him.¡±

    Drake shook his head in disbelief, and then looked up at Kami for the last time.

    The only lights in the city left were the gold and purple flashes that came from the two gods above. The lights blended and melded in horrible twisting patterns as the gods clashed each other in earth rending violence. Suddenly, Drake was reminded of a dream he had had so long ago. It was an image of two dragons battling, roaring and bellowing in their madness and fury, destroying the world around them.

    The city was all but gone now, this building standing alone and abandoned among the devastation. Drake last view was of Soul sitting down on his chair that had somehow remained, calm and relaxed with Gatal standing silently behind him. Soul¡¯s legs were crossed and he was leaned back comfortably with one hand on his chin as if in quiet anticipation. His face was upturned, gazing at his god, with joy and beauty.

    Repulsed and horrified, Drake turned away and entered the portal, never to step foot inside The Endless City ever again.